Setra 400 Class - 415 416 Euro 5 Manual

04.
2012 EvoBus GmbH
Not to be reprinted, reproduced or translated in any form without prior permission.
Address for orders:

EvoBus GmbH
Service Documentation
D-89077 Ulm, Germany
Printed in Germany
Order no.: A 632 584 50 83

Introduction Please consult the “Safety” section be- Environmental protection
fore starting up the bus for the first
The user information that is The declared policy of EvoBus GmbH
time, and familiarise yourself with the
enclosed with each bus is only is one of integrated environmental pro-
contents of these Operating Instructions
intended for use by those persons tection. This policy starts at the root
before setting off.
who are qualified to operate the causes and encompasses in its manage-
bus. The user information is split Items of optional equipment are also de- ment decisions all the consequences for
into the following parts: scribed, if their operation needs explana- the environment which could arise from
tion. The bus delivered to you has been production processes or the products
The Driver's Operating Instructions customised in accordance with your or-
are intended to answer all import- themselves.
der, therefore some descriptions and
ant questions concerning operation The objectives are for the natural re-
diagrams may differ from the equipment
of the bus in a concise and clearly sources which form the basis of our ex-
on your bus.
understandable manner. istence on this planet to be used spar-
The Driver's Operating Instructions, the ingly and in a manner which takes the
More detailed and complete inform- Operating Instructions and Maintenance
ation, as well as further information requirements of both nature and human-
Record are important documents and ity into account.
relevant to safety, can be found in must always be carried in the bus.
the Operating Instructions. You too can help to protect the en-
Our buses are the subject of ongoing vironment by operating the bus in an
The Maintenance Record serves as development. You are therefore asked
a guide to the technical care of the environmentally-friendly manner. Fuel
to appreciate that we reserve the right consumption and wear in the drive train
bus. It contains all the information to make modifications to the design,
on maintenance intervals and main- (engine, clutch, transmission, axles,
equipment and technical features. For brakes, tyres) are extremely dependent
tenance tasks as well as pages for these reasons, no claims can be made
confirming that the maintenance on your driving style.
based upon the contents of this user
work has been carried out. information. We hope you enjoy driving your bus.
EvoBus GmbH
Setra Omnibusse
Table of contents
Windscreen wiper system safety Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . 1 precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Loading a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Safety precautions for the air- Driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Ball hitch trailer coupling (fixed)
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Operation of auxiliary heating . . . . . 10 (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
The use of symbols and their mean-
Ball hitch trailer coupling and
ings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
open-jaw trailer coupling (detachable)
Notes on vehicle safety . . . . . . . . . . . 4 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Operating safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Preparation for the journey - daily Connecting the power supply . . . . . 32
EU Directive 2001/85 . . . . . . . . . . . 5 tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Trailer coupling maintenance . . . . . . 33
Stickers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Preparation for the journey - weekly Refuelling (diesel fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Navigation and global positioning tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
BlueTec exhaust gas cleaning
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Preparation for the journey - monthly system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Operation of the radio and mobile tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
AdBlue service product . . . . . . . . . . 37
communications equipment . . . . . . . . 7 Additional maintenance tasks
Filling with AdBlue . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Operation of mobile phones and dependent on bus use . . . . . . . . . . 16
Operating/malfunction displays: fuel
radio equipment without an exterior General bus care and mainten-
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 ance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Function of the accident data
Washing the outside of the bus in an Care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
recorder (ADR) (option) . . . . . . . . . . 44
automatic vehicle wash . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Adjusting the headlamps for driv-
Storage space for hand luggage . . . . . 9
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 ing on the left or right (Litronic
Driver's rest area safety precau- headlamps only (option)) . . . . . . . . . 45
tions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Running-in guideline . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Brake system safety precautions . . . 47
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Braking and stopping . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Brakes with anti-locking protec-
Stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
tion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Towing and tow-starting . . . . . . . . . 26
S 415/416 GT-HD right-hand drive (model revision)/04.2012 GB I

Table of contents
Applying the parking brake . . . . . . . 48 Care/cleaning of light-alloy Scope of tools and emergency
Releasing the parking brake . . . . . . 49 wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Emergency braking in the event of Care and cleaning of covers and Location of the fire extinguish-
failure of both brake circuits . . . . . . 49 upholstery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 ers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
EBS brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Care/cleaning of fabric covers . . . . 74 Location of the first-aid kits . . . . . . 99
Acceleration skid control (ASR) . . . . 51 Care/cleaning of micro-fibre Location of the tow bar . . . . . . . . . 100
Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Location of spare mirror (op-
Adaptive brake lamps . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Care/cleaning of leather covers . . . . 77 tion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Reversing aid display in the exterior
(system description) . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 mirror (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
At a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Driver's rest area . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
(function description) . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Driver's area overview . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Switches/controllers in the driver's
Deactivating the Electronic Stability Switches on the left section of the rest area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Windscreen washer reservoir . . . . . 106
Operating/malfunction displays: Switches on the right section of the Tour guide refrigerator control
brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Operating 230/400 V systems Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Seat belt reminder display . . . . . . . 109
(option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Tachograph (installation posi- Exterior flaps on S 415 GT-HD . . . . 110
Fitting the skibox (option) . . . . . . . . 63 tion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Exterior flaps on S 416 GT-HD . . . 112
Swivelling the skibox (option) . . . . . 65 DTCO tachograph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Opening/closing the service cover
Further skibox (option) operating Tachograph (display) . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 under the driver's window . . . . . . . 113
instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Destination display safety precau- Layout and function description:
Note on maintenance work . . . . . . . 66 tions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 fire extinguishing system . . . . . . . . 114
Cleaning the underbody . . . . . . . . . 67 Destination display control panel . . . 96 Fire extinguishing system operating
Care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Door pushbuttons in the driver's and malfunction displays . . . . . . . . 115
area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
II S 415/416 GT-HD right-hand drive (model revision)/04.2012 GB

Table of contents
DIAG button (on-board dia- Adjusting the volume of the in-

Driver's area controls . . . . . . . . . 117 gnostics) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 tercom in the driver's rest area/
Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 SET button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 on-board kitchenette . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Adjusting the steering column . . . . 121 Setting the language . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Telephone volume adjustment . . . . 171
Exterior lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Adjusting the volume of the turn Initiating an outgoing call using
Steering column switch for light signal buzzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 the driver's rest area/kitchenette
and wiper functions . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Setting the wipe interval/rain intercom (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Steering column switch for retarder sensor sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Initiating an outgoing call using the
and cruise control (overview) . . . . . 126 Setting the courtesy lighting driver's area intercom (option) . . . . 172
Overview of steering wheel buttons switch-on duration . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Answering an incoming call us-
and display screen . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Switching the daytime driving lights ing the driver's area intercom
Display screen (description) . . . . . . 133 on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Permanent displays . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Activating the transmission shift Mobile phone Bluetooth link . . . . . 175
Trailer turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 system failsafe mode (GO 240-8 Initiating an outgoing call using a
Overview of main menus and PowerShift) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 mobile phone (option) . . . . . . . . . . 177
submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Adjusting the display brightness Answering an incoming call using a
Menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 (daytime brightness) . . . . . . . . . . . 162 mobile phone (option) . . . . . . . . . . 179
Display screen menu control Adjusting the display brightness Operating/malfunction displays:
logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 (night brightness) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 telephone (intercom) . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Event notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Right-hand steering wheel but- Parking brake and emergency
tons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 release device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Instrument cluster buttons . . . . . . 150
Volume adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Air suspension safety precau-
Resetting the trip meter . . . . . . . . 151
Radio volume adjustment . . . . . . . 168 tions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
RESET button (to reset trip
Driver's area on-board PA system Raising/lowering the bus . . . . . . . 182
computer data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
volume adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Normal level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Menu button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Operating/malfunction displays:
level control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
S 415/416 GT-HD right-hand drive (model revision)/04.2012 GB III

Table of contents
Activating/deactivating axle load Panorama camera switch (op- Windscreen heating switch
transfer for trailing axle (3-axle tion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
buses only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Night lighting switch . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Horn changeover switch (op-
Activating/deactivating the bus Active Brake Assist OFF pushbutton tion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
stop brake (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Central locking switch for the
Important notes on the steering Reading lamps switch . . . . . . . . . . 197 left-side luggage compartment . . . . 203
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Passenger-compartment lighting Central locking switch for the right-
Turning the steering wheel when position I+II switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 side luggage compartment . . . . . . 204
the bus is stationary . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Roof hatch switch - air in/air Neutral gearshift pushbutton . . . . . 204
Operating the bus stop brake out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Driver's seat microphone switch
emergency release switch . . . . . . . 188 Attendant call system switch (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Switching on the panorama camera (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Lane assistant warning system
(option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Passenger stop request system pushbutton (option) . . . . . . . . . . . 205
enable switch (option) . . . . . . . . . . 198 Reverse warning buzzer switch
Switch for school bus operation (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Switch descriptions . . . . . . . . . . 191 (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Switch for deactivating pedal-
Switch for windscreen roller Headlamp cleaning system OFF activated continuous braking . . . . . 206
sunblind (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 switch (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Bus stop brake pushbutton
Switch for upper wiper (option) . . . 194 Driver's power window pushbut- (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) ton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Hazard warning lamps pushbut-
OFF pushbutton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Raise/lower pushbutton (op- ton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Pushbutton for reversing camera tion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Door 1 pushbutton . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
washer system (option) . . . . . . . . . 195 Normal-level pushbutton . . . . . . . . 200 Door 2 pushbutton . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Driver's area lighting switch . . . . . 195 Mirror adjuster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Bus stop brake emergency release
Switch for electrical circuits > 100 Switch for the driver's window switch (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
V (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 heating/mirror heating . . . . . . . . . 202 Emergency valve reset pushbutton
(option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
IV S 415/416 GT-HD right-hand drive (model revision)/04.2012 GB

Table of contents
Kitchenette enable switch (op- Fitting a seat squab (new seat GO 240-8 PowerShift transmis-
tion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 generation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 sion shift system (option) (system
Lavatory enable switch (option) . . . 209 Cinema-style seating with quick- description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Axle load transfer switch (3-axle release locks (option) . . . . . . . . . . 222 GO 240-8 PowerShift transmission
buses only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Operating the cinema-style seating shift system (option) gearshift unit
Auxiliary batteries pushbutton with quick-release lock (option) . . . 223 (selector lever) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
(option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Passenger seat service set . . . . . . 224 Operation of the GO 240-8
PowerShift transmission shift
system (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Driver’s seat/passenger Transmission shift systems . . . . 227 Operation of the GO 240-8
seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Transmission shift system safety PowerShift failsafe mode using the
Driver’s seat safety precau- precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 steering wheel keypad (option) . . . 262
tions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Operating the PSH (pneumatic shift
Grammer driver's seat controls . . . 214 aid) transmission shift system . . . . 228
ISRI 6860/875 driver's seat control ZF-AS TRONIC transmission shift Driving systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
elements (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 system (option) safety precau- Driving systems (overview) . . . . . . 267
Operation of the jump seat . . . . . . 218 tions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Automatic speed limiter . . . . . . . . 268
Adjusting a passenger seat (new ZF-AS TRONIC transmission shift Automatic speed limiter (function
seat generation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 system (option) overview . . . . . . . . 230 description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Using the driver's seat belt . . . . . . 220 ZF-AS TRONIC transmission Variable speed limiter (Tem-
Operating the jump-seat seat shift system (option) (system poset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Activating the variable speed limiter
Passenger-compartment-seating Operating the ZF-AS TRONIC trans- (Temposet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 mission shift system (option) . . . . . 232 Drive/brake cruise control . . . . . . 272
Removing a seat squab (new seat ZF-AS TRONIC transmission shift Activating drive/brake cruise
generation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 system operating/malfunction control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
S 415/416 GT-HD right-hand drive (model revision)/04.2012 GB V

Table of contents
Distance cruise control (ART) Special driving situations with dis- Switching on air-recirculation mode
(option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 tance cruise control/Active Brake in the driver's area and passenger
Distance sensor for distance cruise Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
control (ART) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Important information on the Activating the reheat function . . . . 320
Activating distance cruise control lane assistant warning system Activating the auxiliary heating
(ART) (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Setting the specified distance . . . . 280 Deactivating the lane assistant Programming auxiliary heating
Vehicle ahead detected . . . . . . . . . 282 warning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 switch-on times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
How to respond to a distance Operating/malfunction displays: Activating a programmed auxiliary
warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 lane assistant warning system . . . . 306 heating switch-on time . . . . . . . . . 325
Operating/malfunction displays: Deactivating an activated switch-on
distance cruise control (ART) . . . . . 284 time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Heating/ventilation/air-condi- Programming the auxiliary heating
Active Brake Assist (ABA) (system
tioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 switch-on duration . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Operating instructions for the air- Switches/controllers in the driver's
Activation/deactivation of Active
conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . 310 rest area (bus with roof-mounted
Brake Assist (automatic) . . . . . . . . 286
Heating/ventilation/air-conditioning air-conditioning system) . . . . . . . . 330
Activating Active Brake Assist (ABA)
(HVAC) control panel . . . . . . . . . . 312
(manually) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Manually regulating the blower
Deactivating Active Brake Assist
speed in the driver's area . . . . . . . 315 Opening/locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
(ABA) (manually) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Preselecting the passenger- Anti-entrapment protection (revers-
Sequence of events when emer-
compartment temperature . . . . . . . 316 ing) as the doors are closed . . . . . 335
gency braking initiated by Active
Brake Assist (ABA) . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Manually regulating the blower Protection against entrapment in
speed in the passenger compart- the door opening direction . . . . . . 335
Function description: warning levels
ment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Locking the exterior emergency
and emergency braking . . . . . . . . . 291
Activating the air-conditioning . . . . 319 valve at door 2 (option) . . . . . . . . . 336
Operating/malfunction displays:
Active Brake Assist (ABA) . . . . . . . 295
VI S 415/416 GT-HD right-hand drive (model revision)/04.2012 GB

Table of contents
Operating/malfunction displays for Central locking operating and Drawing water from the water
the doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 malfunction displays . . . . . . . . . . . 351 tap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
General information on the central Emergency operation (depres- Switching on the boiler . . . . . . . . . 372
locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 surising the doors using the Descaling the boiler . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Unlocking the door circuit at the emergency valves) . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 Switching on the sausage heat-
front left door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Emergency unlocking of the luggage er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Unlocking door 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 compartment flaps in the event of a Cleaning the sausage heater . . . . . 379
Unlocking door 2 (double-leaf) compressed-air supply failure . . . . 354 Descaling the sausage heater . . . . 379
(option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Emergency exit through emergency Switching on the 40-cup coffee
Unlocking the door circuit using the operation of the roof hatches . . . . 356 machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
radio remote control (option) . . . . . 341 Brewing coffee in winter . . . . . . . . 383
Unlocking the luggage compartment Cleaning the 40-cup coffee
flaps using the pushbuttons in the On-board kitchenette (op-
tion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
driver's area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 Switching on the 2-carafe filter
Unlocking the luggage compartment General information . . . . . . . . . . . 362
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
flaps using the remote control Instructions for operating a
microwave oven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 Brewing 1/2 a carafe of coffee (10
(option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 cups of coffee) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Forward door leaf of door II Use for the intended purpose . . . . 365
Brewing 1 carafe of coffee (20 cups
disabled by jump seat (option) . . . . 343 Approved personnel . . . . . . . . . . . 365
of coffee) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Locking door 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 First use of the galley . . . . . . . . . . 366
Brewing 2 carafes of coffee (40
Locking door 2 (double-leaf) Switching on the galley . . . . . . . . . 367 cups of coffee) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
(option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Filling the fresh water tank inside Manual operation of the 2-carafe
Locking door 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 the bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 filter system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Locking using the radio remote Filling the fresh water tank outside Descaling the coffee machine . . . . 388
control (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 the bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Winter operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Central locking system (option) . . . 348 Checking and cleaning the fresh
Draining the fresh water tank . . . . 390
water filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
S 415/416 GT-HD right-hand drive (model revision)/04.2012 GB VII

Table of contents
Draining the water lines . . . . . . . . 391 First use of the galley . . . . . . . . . . 407 Descaling the water heater
Draining the boiler . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 Switching on the galley . . . . . . . . . 408 boiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Draining the 40-cup coffee Filling the fresh water tank inside Winter operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 the bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410 Boiler (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Draining the 2-carafe filter sys- Filling the fresh water tank outside Draining the fresh water tank . . . . 425
tem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 the bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 Draining the water lines . . . . . . . . 426
Draining the siphon . . . . . . . . . . . 394 Checking and cleaning the fresh Draining the boiler . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Replacing fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 water filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 Draining the siphon . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 Drawing water from the water Replacing fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Restoring boiler operation following tap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 Malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
a malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 Switching on the sausage heat- Using the sausage heater again
Using the sausage heater again er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 after a malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
after a malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 Cleaning the sausage heater . . . . . 415 Using the coffee machine again
Using the 40-cup coffee machine Descaling the sausage heater . . . . 415 after a malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
again after a malfunction . . . . . . . 398 Switching on the coffee ma- Using the water heater (option)
Using the 2-carafe filter system chine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 again after a malfunction . . . . . . . 433
again after a malfunction . . . . . . . 399 Brewing 1/2 a carafe of coffee (10 Other malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Other malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 cups of coffee) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 Switching off the galley . . . . . . . . . 436
Switching off the galley . . . . . . . . . 401 Brewing 1 carafe of coffee (20 cups
of coffee) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Descaling the coffee machine . . . . 418 Lavatory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
On-board kitchenette (integrated Dispensing cups of hot water Enabling the lavatory . . . . . . . . . . 438
in the lavatory cabin) . . . . . . . . . 403 (alternative to coffee machine) . . . 419 Switchover between water (WC)
Safety precautions/general Water heater (option) . . . . . . . . . . 420 and chemical (CC) operation
information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 Setting the thermostat of the water (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Use for the intended purpose . . . . 407 heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 Flushing the WC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Approved personnel . . . . . . . . . . . 407
VIII S 415/416 GT-HD right-hand drive (model revision)/04.2012 GB

Table of contents
Drawing water at the hand Checking the engine oil level with Retreaded tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
washbasin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440 the dipstick (option) . . . . . . . . . . . 468 Tyre pressures table 295/80 R
Filling the soap dispenser . . . . . . . 441 Checking the engine oil level with 22.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Adding paper hand towels . . . . . . . 441 the dipstick (OM 501/502 LA) Safety measures to be taken in
Adding toilet paper . . . . . . . . . . . . 441 (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469 the event of a flat tyre or a wheel
Opening the basin undercabin- Safety instructions for working in change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
et . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 the engine compartment . . . . . . . . 470 Fitting anti-skid chains (snow
Changing waste bags . . . . . . . . . . 442 Removing the drive belts chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Filling the fresh water storage (OM 457 LA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470 Removing the spare wheel from the
tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 Fitting the drive belts (OM 457 LA) . 473
. spare wheel flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Emptying the fresh water storage Removing the drive belts (OM 502 Positioning the jack . . . . . . . . . . . 489
tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443 LA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 Removing the wheel trims . . . . . . . 490
Emptying the holding tank . . . . . . . 444 Fitting the drive belts (OM 502 LA) . 478
. Removing the wheels . . . . . . . . . . 491
Winter operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 Engine cooling system fan drive Fitting the spare wheel . . . . . . . . . 497
Checking the residual current emergency operation . . . . . . . . . . 480 Fitting the wheel trims . . . . . . . . . 499
device for the 230 V socket Checking the coolant level of the Pneumatic system test ports under
(option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 engine and heating system . . . . . . 481 the driver's area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Greasing the impeller of the CC Tyres - operating safety and Pneumatic test ports behind door
pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448 roadworthiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482 2......................... 504
Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483 Other pneumatic test ports . . . . . . 506
Tyre tread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483 Inflating tyres using the tyre inflator
Practical advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449 Tyre condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484 connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Overview of the operating, function Tyre age . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484 Charging the compressed-air
and malfunction display screen . . . 455 Invisible tyre damage . . . . . . . . . . 484 system of another bus . . . . . . . . . 509
Engine oil level display . . . . . . . . . 462 Tyre load capacity, top speed of Operating the bus stop brake
Oil level alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463 tyres and types of tyres . . . . . . . . 485 emergency release switch . . . . . . . 511
Oil level information . . . . . . . . . . . 465
S 415/416 GT-HD right-hand drive (model revision)/04.2012 GB IX
Table of contents
Operating/malfunction displays: Electrical system - overview (illus- Fuse assignment for roof-moun-
steering system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512 tration shows S 416 GT-HD as an ted heating, ventilation and air-
Checking the oil level in the power- example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526 conditioning system (Webasto) . . . 556
steering expansion tank . . . . . . . . 513 Driver's area interior switch Fuse assignment for roof-moun-
Draining the fuel prefilter . . . . . . . 514 panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528 ted heating, ventilation and air-
Replacing the filter element for the Main switch panel (under the conditioning system (Konvekta) . . . 558
fuel prefilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514 driver’s area) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530 Handling fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
Changing the main fuel filter Auxiliary switch panel . . . . . . . . . . 532 Disconnecting vehicle batteries . . . 560
(OM 457 LA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516 Power distribution board (PDB) . . . 534 Recharging vehicle batteries . . . . . 561
Changing the main fuel filter Electrical connection for the Switching to the auxiliary bat-
(OM 502 LA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518 roof-mounted system (heating, teries (jump starting batteries)
Changing the water heater fuel ventilation, air-conditioning) . . . . . . 536 (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521 S 415 GT-HD, S 416 GT-HD battery Notes on jump-starting . . . . . . . . . 563
Bleeding the fuel system . . . . . . . . 521 compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538 Jump-start procedure . . . . . . . . . . 564
Electrical system safety precau- Notes on fuse assignments . . . . . . 539 Activating the on-board dia-
tions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522 Fuse assignment for driver's area gnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
General safety precautions for interior switch panel . . . . . . . . . . . 540 Interpreting the on-board dia-
batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522 Fuse assignment for main switch gnostics screen display . . . . . . . . . 567
Safety precautions for handling panel (under the driver's area) . . . . 544 Clearing the fault memory of the
batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 Auxiliary switch panel fuse assign- selected system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
Measures required for the pre- ment (S 415/416 GT-HD right-hand Ending on-board diagnostics . . . . . 568
vention of damage to buses or drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546 Changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
components during electric welding Power distribution board (PDB) Emergency operation (depres-
work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 fuse assignment (S 415/416 GT- surising the doors using the
Changeover of Litronic headlamps HD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550 emergency valves) . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
(option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524 Fuse assignment for ceiling switch
panel, ComfortClass 400 . . . . . . . . 554
X S 415/416 GT-HD right-hand drive (model revision)/04.2012 GB

Table of contents
Emergency unlocking of the luggage

compartment flaps in the event of a
compressed-air supply failure . . . . 578
Removing the exterior mirror, fitting
the emergency mirror (option) . . . . 579
Emergency operation for heating in
driver's area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
Emergency operation of the passen-
ger compartment heating . . . . . . . 582
Maintenance tasks on the bus air-
conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . 583
Servicing scopes for the air-
conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . 585
Cleaning the heating system water
filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
Bleeding the coolant circuit for the
heating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595

Vehicle data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
Overview of bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598
S 415/416 GT-HD right-hand drive (model revision)/04.2012 GB XI

Table of contents
XII S 415/416 GT-HD right-hand drive (model revision)/04.2012 GB

Vehicle identification
No. Designation Value
6 Permissible axle
load for front axle
7 Permissible axle
load for driven
axle
8 Permissible axle
load for trailing
axle
M00_00-0229-01 M00_00-0155-01
Identification plate (1) is located in the S 415 GT-HD

No. Designation Value
front left entrance. 415 Vehicle length
1 Vehicle designa-
Note: tion 415 12.2 m
It is very important to identify the vehicle 2 Headlamp basic 416 13.02 m
exactly so that the correct “vehicle data” setting
can be assigned. GT Model designation
3 Vehicle identi-
fication number
GT Grand Tourismo
(VIN)
4 Permissible gross HD Vehicle height
vehicle weight
HD High decker
5 Permissible gross
towing weight
S 415/416 GT-HD right-hand drive (model revision)/04.2012 GB 1

Vehicle identification
M00_00-0241-01
Vehicle identification number (1) is also

marked on the skeleton at the front
of the bus. It can be accessed via the
spare wheel cover (open using the lever
in the front left doorway).
2 S 415/416 GT-HD right-hand drive (model revision)/04.2012 GB

Safety
Table of contents
The use of symbols and their meanings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Notes on vehicle safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Operating safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
EU Directive 2001/85 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Stickers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Navigation and global positioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Operation of the radio and mobile communications equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Operation of mobile phones and radio equipment without an exterior aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Washing the outside of the bus in an automatic vehicle wash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Storage space for hand luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Driver's rest area safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Windscreen wiper system safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Safety precautions for the air-conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Operation of auxiliary heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Safety
The use of symbols and their meanings
The use of symbols and their Notes on vehicle safety

meanings Note: We recommend that you:
Safety precautions and other important Notes about important additional informa-
tion
Use only genuine parts that are
instructions are highlighted by symbols.
OMNIplus quality tested and con-
In addition to the instructions listed in version parts and accessories that
the contents, the safety and accident have been expressly approved by
prevention regulations issued by German Caution:
EvoBus for the bus model concerned
Employers' Liability Insurance Associ- Warning notes about damage that may in order to rule out the possibility
ations must be observed. occur in the event of non-compliance
of jeopardising road safety and
Instructions and information printed on invalidating the warranty and general
the packaging for components, tools and operating permit. These parts have
Danger.
service products must also be observed. been specially tested for their safety,
Where information and instructions are Warning notes for risks to persons reliability and suitability.
to be observed, it is assumed that the You can obtain further information from
user information is intended for persons any EvoBus Service Partner.
who are suitably qualified to carry out Environmental protection
the tasks by nature of their education, Notes about environmental protection
training and experience. measures
These persons should, at the same time,
be able to identify risks that may arise in Reference to more detailed and addi-
the undertaking of their tasks and take tional user information
the necessary measures to avoid them.
Meaning of symbols:

Safety
Operating safety
Operating safety Materials and components in EU Directive 2001/85

Important information: seats and seat fixtures that are Registration as class 1: city public
also fitted in the bus during the service bus
Any work or modifications that have course of installation, conversion or
been carried out incorrectly on the modification must also satisfy the Vehicles constructed with areas for
bus may result in malfunctions. following directives: 76/115/EEC standing passengers, to allow fre-
Tampering with electronic compon- as amended by 96/38/EC, 74/ quent passenger movement.
ents and their software may cause 408/EEC as amended by 96/ Registration as class 2: long-distance
malfunctions. As electronic compon- 37/EC, 77/541/EEC as amended by public service bus
ents are networked, these malfunc- 96/36/EC
tions may also cause other, indir- Principally for the carriage of seated
When such materials and compon-
ectly related systems to malfunction. passengers. Designed to allow the
ents are purchased or installed, care
These malfunctions may jeopardise carriage of standing passengers in
shall be taken to ensure that they
the operating safety and reliability of the gangway and/or in an area which
are appropriately certified. Use of
the bus. does not exceed the space provided
materials and components that do
for two double seats.
Retrofitted electrical or electronic not possess the certificate referred
devices must possess type-approval to above can result in the operating Registration as class 3: tourist coach
complying with Directive 95/54/EC permit being invalidated. Exclusively for the carriage of seated
or ECE Directive 10/02. We recommend that you have any passengers.
Materials that are fitted in the bus work or modifications carried out by
during the course of installation, con- an EvoBus Service Partner. Important information for buses
version or modification work and classified in accordance with EU
that are subject to mandatory fire- Directive 2001/85 into class 2 and 3
testing requirements must also sat- (mixed approval):
isfy the conditions of EU Directive The operator of the bus is respons-
95/28/EC. ible for ensuring that the bus is re-
stored to the condition consistent

Safety
Stickers
with the permissible type of opera- Stickers Navigation and global positioning
tion of the class concerned. There are various warning stickers af- system
For instance, this means that, in the fixed to your bus. These are intended to If your bus is equipped with a navigation
case of a bus being used in accord- make you and others aware of various system, please observe the following
ance with class 2, it is necessary to dangers. Therefore, do not remove any instructions and information:
ensure that the bus is operated with warning stickers unless it is expressly
seating having no aisle-side sideways stated on the sticker that you may do Danger.
adjustment. so.
Please devote your attention primarily to
road and traffic conditions. Do not at-
Danger. tempt to operate the navigation and pos-
If you remove warning stickers, this could itioning system unless the bus is station-
result in you or other persons failing to ary. Please bear in mind that your bus
recognise dangers. You or others could will cover a distance of 14 metres every
be injured as a result. second at a speed of only 30 mph (50
km/h). The navigation system is unable
to provide information about the maxim-
um load-bearing capacity for bridges or
the maximum permissible height for driv-
ing through underpasses. The driver is
responsible for checking the load-bearing
capacity of bridges and headroom clear-
ances encountered en route.

Safety
Operation of the radio and mobile communications equipment
Operation of the radio and mobile Operation of mobile phones and

communications equipment Danger. radio equipment without an exterior
(e.g. telephone, radio, fax machine, etc.) Please observe local legal requirements aerial
governing the use of mobile phones or We advise against making or receiving
on-board telephones/intercoms in force in telephone calls in buses not equipped
Danger.
the country of vehicle operation. with an exterior aerial as the operation
Please devote your attention primarily of radio transmitters, which include but
to road and traffic conditions. Do not
are not limited to radio telephones (mo-
operate the display unit, radio or mobile
communications equipment unless the bile phones), may cause inadequately
traffic situation permits this to be done shielded equipment (cardiac pacemakers
safely. Please bear in mind that your bus included) to malfunction.
will cover a distance of 14 metres every
second at a speed of only 30 mph (50 Note:
km/h).
If a mobile phone, radio system or fax
machine is retrofitted in the bus in a
manner that does not comply with EvoBus
Note: installation specifications, the operating
In the Federal Republic of Germany, sec- permit for the bus may be invalidated (EU
tion 23, paragraph 1a of the German road Directive 95/54/EC).
traffic regulations (StVO) prohibit a vehicle
driver from using a mobile phone or an
on-board telephone/intercom if this use
involves lifting up or holding the mobile
phone or the telephone/intercom hand-
set.

Safety
Washing the outside of the bus in an automatic vehicle wash
Washing the outside of the bus in After the washing process, fold the integ-
Note: an automatic vehicle wash ral mirrors outwards again (manually or
Older peripherals (e.g. ticket-printing ma- electrically, depending on vehicle equip-
chines, ticket-cancelling machines, destin- ment).
ation displays, etc.) that are still used in Before the bus is washed, remove any
new buses must comply with the technic- attachment parts that may be fitted (e.g.
al requirements of EC Directive 72/245 satellite receiver on the roof).
EEC.
Danger.
Please observe local legal requirements
governing the use of mobile phones or
on-board telephones/intercoms in force in M88_00-0068-01
the country of vehicle operation.
Before the bus is washed, make sure
that the roof hatches, driver's window
and the doors are closed. Set the heat-
ing/ventilation/air-conditioning system
to air-recirculation mode (Smog button).
Before the bus is washed, fold both
integral mirrors inwards towards the
windscreen either manually by means
of hinge pin (1) on the mirror arm or,
with electric mirrors, using the mirror ad-
justment button on the instrument panel
(option).

Safety
Storage space for hand luggage
Storage space for hand luggage Driver's rest area safety precau- Windscreen wiper system safety
tions precautions
The driver's rest area must only be used
by the bus driver (second driver).
The on-board telephone may only be
used by the driver in accordance with
legal requirements. Observe the legal
requirements of the country concerned.
T68_00-0018-31
The storage spaces above the passenger M54_00-1058-71
seats are suitable for light hand luggage

items only.
Danger.
Danger. RISK OF INJURY. The battery isolating
Occupants may be injured if the bus is switch (01S01) must always be switched
braked sharply, changes direction sud- off before any work is carried out on the
denly or is involved in an accident due windscreen wiper system (wiper blade
to objects being thrown around the bus. cleaning, replacement of wiper blades or
Heavy or hard objects should therefore wiper motor etc.).
not be carried inside the bus without be-
ing secured.

Safety
Safety precautions for the air-conditioning system
Safety precautions for the air- The operator must maintain a logbook Operation of auxiliary heating
conditioning system auditing the consumption of refrigerant
Air-conditioning systems that are op- and refrigerator oils.
erated with refrigerant R 134 a are la- Danger.
belled with appropriate stickers and/or Danger.
plates on the compressor. Risk of fire and burns. There is a risk of
In automatically controlled air-conditioning fires and burns due to the high exhaust
Never mix R 134 a refrigerant and the systems, the ventilation blowers of con- temperatures and the hot exhaust pipe
corresponding Triton SE 55 refrigerator denser or evaporator units may start up for the auxiliary heating. For this reason,
oil with other products. at any time. Therefore, always switch do not stop or park the bus over ignitable
the ignition starter switch to OFF be- materials (e.g. grass) when the auxiliary
In accordance with current good engin- fore any cleaning work is carried out.
eering practices, it is prohibited to allow heating is in operation, has recently been
Do not reach into the fan blades or fan in operation or has been operated by the
refrigerant to escape into the environ- rollers. Avoid any contact with refriger- immediate heating button/preset clock.
ment when operating, servicing or de- ant as there is a risk of frostbite. Treat
commissioning air-conditioning systems. affected skin areas as for frostbite, and
Refrigerants and refrigerator oils must seek medical attention immediately. Carry
out maintenance and repair tasks with the Danger.
be disposed of or recycled separately by
engine switched off whenever possible. Risk of poisoning and suffocation. The
type and nature. Keep a safe distance from moving parts auxiliary heating must not be used in en-
Only persons having the relevant and (e.g. belt drive) when the engine is run- closed spaces such as garages or work-
necessary specialist knowledge, technic- ning. shops due to the risk of poisoning and
al equipment and official approval (by suffocation. It must also not be used in
health and safety inspectorate, local au- timer or preselection mode.
thority, TÜV or equivalent) are permitted
to carry out maintenance work on air-
conditioning systems and take back refri-
gerants and oils.

Safety
Operation of auxiliary heating
Danger.
Risk of explosion. The auxiliary heating
must be switched off at filling stations
and fuel dispensing systems due to the
risk of explosion.
Danger.
Risk of fire. The auxiliary heating must
remain switched off in places where ignit-
able vapours or dust can accumulate (e.g.
in the vicinity of filling stations, fuel, coal,
sawdust and grain stores or similar).

General
Table of contents
Preparation for the journey - daily tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Preparation for the journey - weekly tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Preparation for the journey - monthly tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Additional maintenance tasks dependent on bus use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
General bus care and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

General
Preparation for the journey - daily tasks
Preparation for the journey - daily Check that the emergency equip-
tasks Note: ment is accessible and complete, e.g.
Check the windscreen washer fluid Under certain weather and operating con- first-aid kit, fire extinguisher, warning
level and test the windscreen washer ditions, moisture may form on the inside triangle, emergency hammer for side
system and windscreen wipers. of the headlamps and other lights when windows, jack.
the bus is stationary. This does not in-
Check the position of the rear-view
dicate a fault or defect. The ventilation
Note: openings in the headlamps allow this
mirrors, clean the mirrors, test the
moisture to evaporate soon after the bus mirror heating.
Five times a day.
has pulled away. Check tyre pressures and tyre con-
Check the fuel level for the engine dition (including the spare wheel).
and water heater (option). Check that the luggage compartment
flaps and the service covers are se- Check that the wheel nuts are firmly
curely locked. seated.
Danger.
Check the emergency exits.
Switch off the engine and auxiliary heat-
ing before refuelling. Insert the tachograph recording disc
or the driver card.
Check the AdBlue additive level in
the BlueTec exhaust gas cleaning
system. Note:
If the indicator lamp in the tachograph is
Check the electrical system, paying lit, no disc or driver card has been inser-
particular attention to the headlamps, ted.
turn signals, tail lamps, brake lamps
and licence plate lamps.

General
Preparation for the journey - weekly tasks
Preparation for the journey - weekly Carry out a visual check to ensure
tasks there are no leaks in the engine,
Check the coolant level in the cool- transmission, driven axle, steering
ing system and top it up if necessary. or the cooling and heating systems.
Check the corrosion inhibitor/anti- Drain the fuel prefilter in the engine
freeze concentration each time the compartment.
coolant has been topped up and cor-
Check the acid level in the starter
rect if necessary.
batteries.
Note:
Danger.
M40_00-0115-71 Refer to the Specifications for Service
Products Observe the safety precautions.
Check wheel hubs (1) on all wheels
for leaks inside and out (visual Check the oil level in the hydraulic Check the seat belts (belt arrester).
check). steering system and top it up if ne- Check the belt straps for damage
cessary. (visual check).
Note:
If the wheel hubs are leaking, there may Caution:
be grease or oil residue on the tyres
If the oil level is low, have the steering
themselves or deposits on the parking
system checked at an authorised special-
area on which the bus is standing. Con-
ist workshop.
sult an EvoBus Service Partner in the
event of a leak. Check the belt tension of all belt
drives.

General
Preparation for the journey - monthly tasks
Preparation for the journey - Additional maintenance tasks General bus care and maintenance
monthly tasks dependent on bus use Carry out the work specified in the
Check the residual current device The bus operator must plan further Maintenance Record
for the 230 V socket (option) in the maintenance tasks (filter mainten-
lavatory. ance) for the heating/ventilation/ Caution:
air-conditioning system (driver’s area
Regular maintenance of the chassis and
and passenger compartment) in ad-
drive train is essential to maintaining
dition to those indicated in the Main- the operating safety and roadworthiness
tenance Record. of the bus. The time intervals and the
scope of work required are specified in
the Maintenance Record supplied with the
bus.
Caution:
It is strongly recommended that the spe-
cified maintenance intervals be observed.

General
Care and cleaning
Care and cleaning

Note: You will find instructions and notes on
Warranty claims based on our terms and caring for and cleaning your bus in the
conditions of sale and delivery may be “Operation” section.
rejected if the periodic maintenance tasks
have not been carried out at the specified
distances (odometer readings) or times.
Have confirmation of the completion of
the work specified in the Maintenance
Record recorded by an EvoBus Service
Partner.

Operation
Table of contents
Running-in guideline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Towing and tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Loading a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Ball hitch trailer coupling (fixed) (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Ball hitch trailer coupling and open-jaw trailer coupling (detachable) (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Connecting the power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Trailer coupling maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Refuelling (diesel fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
BlueTec exhaust gas cleaning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
AdBlue service product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Filling with AdBlue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Operation
Table of contents
Operating/malfunction displays: fuel system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Function of the accident data recorder (ADR) (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Adjusting the headlamps for driving on the left or right (Litronic headlamps only (option)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Brake system safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Braking and stopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Brakes with anti-locking protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Applying the parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Releasing the parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Emergency braking in the event of failure of both brake circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
EBS brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Acceleration skid control (ASR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Adaptive brake lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) (system description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) (function description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Deactivating the Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Operation
Table of contents
Operating/malfunction displays: brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Operating 230/400 V systems (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Fitting the skibox (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Swivelling the skibox (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Further skibox (option) operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Note on maintenance work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Cleaning the underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Care/cleaning of light-alloy wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Care and cleaning of covers and upholstery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Care/cleaning of fabric covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Care/cleaning of micro-fibre covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Care/cleaning of leather covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Operation
Running-in guideline
Running-in guideline to the economic rpm in each gear. Starting the engine
Running in the chassis and drive train During the running-in period, do not The parking brake must be applied.
drive the bus for long distances at the
Transmission in neutral.
same road speed = same rpm. Varying
Note: engine speeds and therefore varying loads
The way in which the chassis and drive demanded of the entire drive train are Note:
train of the new bus are treated during favourable to the running-in of the bus. Do not depress the clutch pedal while
the first 3,000 miles (5,000 km) is critical starting the engine.
to the future performance and service life
of the bus.
Note:
At outside temperatures of below –20 °C,
Note:
preheat the engine with the water heater
The load to which the bus is subjected (refer to “Heating/ventilation/air-condi-
during this period should be increased tioning control panel”).
only gradually. The maintenance and lub-
rication tasks specified in the Mainten-
ance Record should be carried out con-
Note:
scientiously.
The bus is equipped with an immobiliser
as standard. The engine cannot be star-
ted without one of the authorised keys.
Caution:
Do not place the engine under full load
during the running-in period. Up to
1,200 miles (2,000 km): run in with
care. Drive at no higher than 3/4 of
the maximum rpm in each gear. After
1,200 miles (2,000 km): slowly increase

Operation
Starting the engine
Note: Note:
After a maximum of 3 starting attempts, For emergencies, we recommend that you
wait (about 15 minutes) before trying always carry a spare key to which you
again. have access at all times.
Release the key when the engine

starts.
If this icon appears on the screen in Caution:

conjunction with a yellow warning It is prohibited to increase the engine
M54_00-0083-01
level malfunction and a warning tone speed while the “Oil pressure too low”
Turn the ignition starter switch to sounds, you have made 5 starting symbol is shown on the display screen.
position 2, the bus carries out an attempts using an invalid key. The If the “Oil pressure too low” symbol ap-
indicator lamp check (all indicator pears for longer than 10 seconds, stop
immobiliser has been activated.
lamps must light up briefly), then the engine immediately and determine the
turn the ignition starter switch to cause.
Note:
position 3 but do not depress the ac-
celerator pedal. If necessary, cancel Use a valid key or valid spare key.
the starting procedure after a max-
imum of 15 seconds and wait for
about 1 minute before repeating the Note:
starting procedure. Turn the key fully Each further starting attempt with an in- Observe the screen display: if fault
back before making a further attempt valid key increases the waiting period by
alerts appear, determine the cause
to start the engine. 1 further minute.
and rectify it.

Operation
Driving
Driving
Danger. Danger.
If there is insufficient pressure in the Environmental protection The freedom of movement of the ped-
compressed-air supply system (supply als must not be restricted. The operat-
Never warm up the engine while the bus
pressure operating displays remain on the ing safety and roadworthiness of the bus
is stationary. Instead, drive off and run
screen), a warning signal sounds until the would otherwise be at risk. Objects could
the engine at moderate speeds.
required pressure has been reached. Do fall and get caught between the pedals if
not release the parking brake until there you were to accelerate or brake suddenly,
is sufficient operating pressure. with the result that you would no longer
Note: be able to brake, depress the clutch ped-
The engine should not be placed under al or accelerate. You could cause an acci-
full load until it has reached normal op- dent and put yourself and other people in
erating temperature (75 °C–90 °C de- danger.
pending on operating conditions and the
outside temperature). Check the freedom of movement of
the pedals
Danger. Danger.
All doors must be unlocked before the Where floormats and carpets are fitted,
bus is driven off. ensure that they are safely secured
against slipping and that there is
sufficient space for the pedals.

Operation
Stopping the engine
Stopping the engine

Danger. Note:
Do not put any objects in the driver's Keep within the economical operating
footwell. range. Make sure that the engine speed
does not enter the danger zone (red
zone).
Danger.
Stow and secure all loose objects in Danger.
such a way that they cannot get into
the driver's footwell when the bus is in If a warning buzzer sounds when you are
motion. shifting gear, too low a gear has been
selected. Make sure that you keep the
Always pull away in 1st gear at clutch pedal depressed and select a suit- M54_00-0083-01
600–800 rpm. able gear for the current speed.
Stop the bus - Shift the transmis-
sion into neutral - Apply the park-
Danger. ing brake. Turn the ignition starter
Test the function of the service brake switch from position 2 (drive posi-
immediately after pulling away. tion) back to position 1.
Observe the rev counter while driv-

ing.

Operation
Towing and tow-starting

Danger. Caution:
There is a risk of fire and burns due to Danger. Special measures are required in order
the high exhaust temperatures and the to protect the transmission if the bus is
Only authorised specialists (recovery ser- to be towed: for safety reasons the pro-
hot exhaust pipe for the auxiliary heating.
vice) are permitted to tow away broken- peller shaft must always be removed. The
For this reason, make sure when stopping
down buses. The rules and regulations in propeller shaft securing screws at the
the bus that there is no ignitable material
the country concerned must be observed. axle flange must be removed and those
(e.g. dry grass, leaves, etc.) in the area
around the exhaust system, the engine at the transmission flange secured against
and the auxiliary heating exhaust system. displacement.
Danger.
The ignition starter switch of the vehicle For notes on safety and operation re-
Note: being towed must always remain in po- lating to the trailer coupling, refer to the
sition 1 during the towing procedure. “Operation” section.
Leave the engine to run at idling speed
for approximately 1–2 minutes before The steering lock must not be allowed
stopping it if the coolant temperature is to engage. Failure to comply with this
high or after driving at full engine output guideline could result in the steering lock-
(e.g. after driving in mountainous terrain) ing.
to allow the exhaust gas turbocharger to
cool down.
Danger.
In buses with the Electronic Stability Pro-
gram (ESP), this function must be deactiv-
ated without exception.

Operation
Note:
For notes on charging the compressed-air
system of a bus to be towed, refer to the
“Practical advice” section.
M00_00-0152-01 M00_00-0152-01
Removing the front panel Front/rear towing hitch:
Note: Note:
Open the spare wheel flap by pulling the To tow the bus, there are some towing
lever in the front left doorway. jaws in the vehicle tool kit that have to M00_00-0596-71
be screwed into locating bore (1) provided
Screw the towing coupling into locat-
behind the front panel or in the rear
member. ing bore (1).
Note:
Front panel (2) that conceals the towing
socket can be removed by undoing the 4
securing screws (1).

Operation
Removal of the rigid tow bar in re-

verse order Note:
The bus cannot be tow-started unless the
Note: batteries are fully charged (at least 21 V).
Pull lock (2) up slightly in order to disen-
gage linchpin (1) towards the front.
Caution:
Towing with a raised front axle The bus must not be tow-started unless
the batteries are connected. Turn the ig-
Danger. nition starter switch to the drive position.
Depress the clutch pedal fully. Select 2nd
M00_00-0340-71 The ignition starter switch must not be or 3rd gear. Tow-start the bus, release
switched to position 2 while the front axle the clutch pedal and depress the acceler-
Insert the rigid tow bar into towing
is raised. The wheels on the driven axle ator pedal until the engine is running.
coupling (3) and secure with the may lock. Failure to comply could result
linchpin. Turn linchpin (1) towards in brake intervention by the ABS/ASR
the rear until it engages in lock (2). system, which could cause the rear axle
to skid. Note:
Note: Vehicles with automated manual transmis-

Tow-starting (only for manual trans- sion (option) cannot be tow-started.
Linchpin (1) must always remain engaged mission)
in lock (2) when the bus is being towed.
Note:
For notes on the jump-start procedure,
refer to the “Practical advice” section.

Operation
Trailer towing
The following warning must be ob- Trailer towing

served in the event of towing. Note:
Observe the operating instructions issued
Caution: by the trailer manufacturer.
Danger.
During towing, there is a risk that the
Proceed with utmost care and caution
towing vehicle could damage the right ex-
when hitching up the trailer. Make sure Note:
terior mirror on tight right turns. During
that no persons are present between the
towing, there is a risk that the rigid tow If the trailer coupling is a detachable
trailer and vehicle as the vehicle is be-
bar could cause damage to the vehicle coupling, the operating instructions is-
ing reversed into engagement with the
being towed on tight left turns. Observe sued by the trailer coupling manufacturer
trailer. The overrun brake of a trailer can
the information/instructions on the stick- must be observed.
rebound uncontrollably when in overrun
er on the tow bar.
mode. To reduce the risk of serious injur-
ies, do not uncouple any trailer that has
an overrun brake if the trailer has over- Note:
run and the overrun brake is applied. A Trailers having a maximum gross weight
trailer that has been coupled to the tow- of higher than 3.5 t require that appro-
ing vehicle incorrectly could break away. priate body reinforcement measures be
A correctly coupled trailer must stand ho- implemented during vehicle manufacture.
rizontal behind the vehicle. Use a trailer In this case, ESP (Electronic Stability Pro-
with a height-adjustable drawbar if ne- gram) would no longer be available (even
cessary. The maximum permissible nose- with no trailer coupled).
weight and rear axle load of the bus must
not be exceeded.

Operation
Loading a trailer
Loading a trailer Driving with a trailer

Note: Observe the following values when The following changes in handling
It is prohibited to a couple a turntable loading the trailer: characteristics can be observed when
trailer or any trailer equipped with ESP. driving with a trailer attached:
the permissible gross weight of the
trailer acceleration and gradient-climbing
the permissible trailer load of the capability are reduced
vehicle and the trailer tow hitch braking distance is increased
the permissible noseweight sensitivity to crosswinds is increased
the permissible rear axle load of the directional stability is adversely af-
towing vehicle fected
the permissible gross weight of both fuel consumption is increased
the towing vehicle and the trailer
Avoid driving a vehicle/trailer combina-
The definitive maximum permissible val- tion faster than 80 km/h, even in coun-
ues are listed in the vehicle documents tries where higher speeds are permitted.
and on the identification plates of the Maintain a greater distance from the
trailer tow hitch, trailer and vehicle. If vehicle in front than you would when
there are discrepancies between any of driving without a trailer.
these sources, always consider the low- Avoid sudden braking where possible.
est value to be valid. Brake gently at first to allow the trail-
er to run on and quickly increase your
braking force.

Operation
Ball hitch trailer coupling (fixed) (option)
If the trailer begins to swing from side to brake pedal with one continuous press, Ball hitch trailer coupling (fixed)
side: but operate it at intervals. (option)
release the accelerator pedal
do not countersteer Danger. Note:
brake if necessary While the vehicle is in motion, never keep Observe the operating instructions issued
the brake pedal continuously depressed, by the trailer manufacturer.
do not attempt to draw the vehicle/ e.g. avoid allowing the brakes to slip as a
trailer combination out by accelerat- consequence of you resting your foot on Secure the trailer against rolling
ing the pedal. This causes the brake system away.
The gradient-climbing capabilities from a to overheat, increases the braking dis-
tance and may result in a complete loss Reverse the vehicle until the towing
standstill refer to sea level. When driv-
of braking effect. ball on the trailer drawbar is posi-
ing in mountainous areas, you should
tioned precisely above the ball end
bear in mind that the power output of
on the vehicle.
the engine and thus its gradient-climb-
ing capability decrease with increasing Hitch the trailer as described in the
altitude. operating instructions issued by the
On long and steep downhill gradients, trailer manufacturer.
select a lower gear/shift range in good
time. This makes use of the braking ef-
fect of the engine, reducing the amount
of braking effort required to maintain a
safe speed. The load on the brake sys-
tem is therefore reduced, which helps to
prevent the brakes from overheating and
wearing too rapidly. If additional brak-
ing effort is required, do not depress the

Operation
Ball hitch trailer coupling and open-jaw trailer coupling (detachable) (option)
Ball hitch trailer coupling and open- Connecting the power supply
jaw trailer coupling (detachable)
(option) Note:
Before connecting the cable, check that
Note: the voltage of the consumers on the trail-
Observe the operating instructions issued er is the same as the voltage of the con-
by the trailer manufacturer. sumers on the towing vehicle.
To gain access to the trailer socket,

Note: remove the cover from the bumper
and stow the cover inside the bus.
Observe the operating instructions issued M00_00-0512-71
by the trailer coupling manufacturer. Installation: slide catch (2) back- Insert the trailer connector into the
wards and hold in this position. Turn socket on the bus.
Secure the trailer against rolling
cover (3) through approximately 30°
away.
and remove. Fit the trailer coupling Note:
The trailer coupling is fitted to the in reverse order. Route the cable in such a way that it
mounting on the end cross member. yields to any movement without tension,
Note: kinking or friction, including movements
To gain access to the mounting, re-
associated with cornering.
move the cover from the bumper and Removal in reverse order. The trailer
stow the cover inside the bus. coupling must be removed whenever it Check that the lights on the trailer
is not in use. are clean and working correctly.

Operation
Trailer coupling maintenance
Trailer coupling maintenance Refuelling (diesel fuel) output may be degraded in line with the
Clean the trailer coupling and lubric- The vehicle has a 2-tank system fitted to amount of additive. The amount of ad-
ate it with multipurpose grease. the front of the front axle (2-axle) or to ditive should therefore be kept as low as
the rear of the trailing axle (3-axle). The possible under consideration of expec-
Check the screws securing the trail-
fuel tanks are interconnected through ted outside temperatures. Observe all
er coupling to the end cross member
their bases by a fuel line. The bus can relevant safety regulations.
for firm seating. Look for the inspec-
tion paint. be refuelled from either side. If the fuel Flow improvers are fuel additives that
tanks on your bus are interconnected, it improve the flow characteristics of
is necessary to remove the fuel cap from the fuel. Do not add flow improvers
Danger. to winter diesel fuel rated as effective
each of the fuel tanks.
If the threadlocking paint is damaged, Use only diesel fuels compliant with EN down to -22 °C. Flow improvers could
the trailer coupling must be checked and
590 (refer to the Specifications for Ser- have a negative impact on the cold flow
resecured by a Service Partner. It is pro- characteristics of this fuel. In the case
hibited to use trailer coupling until then. vice Products). Engines with BlueTec
exhaust gas aftertreatment system must of summer diesel fuels or less cold-
be run only on fuels having a fuel sul- resistant winter diesel fuels, add an
phur content of less than 50 ppm. In amount of flow improver appropriate
the cold season, use winter-grade dies- to the expected outside temperature.
el fuel (effective down to approximately Add the fuel additive to the diesel fuel
-20 °C). If outside temperatures fall even well before the flow characteristics of
further, the flow properties of the dies- the diesel fuel have been degraded as a
el fuel could deteriorate to an unusable result of paraffin separation. The only
level due to paraffin separation. As a way to eliminate malfunctions that arise
preventive measure for this situation, it as a direct result of paraffin separation
is permissible to add a specific amount is to raise the temperature across the
of an approved flow improver proportion- entire fuel system.
ate to the outside temperature. Engine Switch off the engine and auxiliary heat-
ing before refuelling. Turn the ignition

Operation
Refuelling (diesel fuel)
starter switch back to position 0. Park

the bus on a level surface. Danger. Environmental protection
Cleanliness is of utmost importance Fuel is toxic and harmful to health. For If handled improperly, fuels constitute a
when refuelling. Do not leave cotton this reason, make sure that the fuel does hazard to health and the environment.
rags or cloths in the vicinity of the open not come into contact with skin, eyes Fuels must not be allowed to enter the
filler neck. or clothing, that you do not inhale fuel sewerage system, surface water, ground-
vapours and that children are kept away water or soil.
from the fuel.
Danger.
Risk of injury and explosion. Fuel is Caution:
highly flammable. Fire, naked flames and Danger. Use only approved flow improvers. (MB
smoking are therefore prohibited when
If you or others have come into contact sheet 137.1)
fuel is being handled.
with fuel: In case of contact with the
eyes, rinse them immediately and copi-
ously with clean water and seek medical Caution:
Danger. attention. Clean affected areas of skin
Biodiesel (FAME) may be used as an al-
Before refuelling, switch off the auxiliary immediately with soap and water. Imme-
ternative to diesel fuel only in buses that
heating to prevent fuel vapours from ig- diately change out of clothing that has
have been approved for operation with
niting on the auxiliary heating exhaust come into contact with fuel. If fuel has
biodiesel (FAME) ex works (custom re-
system. been swallowed, seek medical attention
quirement/code) or as a result of a con-
immediately.
version measure.

Operation
BlueTec exhaust gas cleaning system
BlueTec exhaust gas cleaning The illustration shows filler neck (1) for
Caution: system the AdBlue supply tank (next to the dies-
The biodiesel (FAME) used must comply el tank).
with EN 14214. The use of pure veget-
able oils is not permitted. Note:
AdBlue is consumed at a rate of approx-
imately 5 % of the rate of diesel fuel con-
sumption. It is recommended that the
AdBlue supply tank also be refilled at
every regular refuelling stop.
To function correctly, the BlueTec ex-

haust gas cleaning system requires the
addition of a reducing agent (AdBlue).
M47_00-0055-71
The addition of AdBlue does not form
The BlueTec exhaust gas cleaning system part of the routine scope of bus main-
essentially comprises a supply tank, a tenance – it is the responsibility of the
catalytic converter and an AdBlue meter- vehicle operators to ensure that the
ing system. It is electronically monitored AdBlue supply tank is regularly replen-
and controlled. Pollutants in the exhaust ished. Filling and operating the bus with
gas are converted into environmentally AdBlue is mandatory for compliance with
friendly substances through a combin- emission regulations and is thus one of
ation of the addition of AdBlue and the the conditions for the road traffic ap-
effect of the catalytic converter in the proval of the bus. The road traffic ap-
exhaust silencer. proval of the bus will be invalidated if
the bus is operated without AdBlue. The
legal consequence would be that the bus

Operation
BlueTec exhaust gas cleaning system
would no longer be permitted to be oper- surised while the engine is warm. There
ated on public roads. In some countries, Note: is a risk of scalding from hot AdBlue®
operation of the bus without AdBlue may AdBlue freezes at a temperature of spraying out if the line system is suddenly
be considered to be a criminal offence approximately -11 °C. The bus is opened. There is also the risk of skin ir-
or a violation of administrative law pun- equipped with an AdBlue preheating ritation or damage to the eyes if AdBlue®
ishable by fine. Support in the purchase system as standard. Winter operation is comes into contact with the skin or eyes.
or operation of the bus, i.e. tax relief, thus ensured, even at temperatures below Wear protective gloves
road tax, may also be invalidated retro- -11 °C. Wear protective clothing
spectively. This may be the case both Wear safety goggles
in the country in which the vehicle is re- Work on the exhaust gas aftertreat-
gistered and in other countries in which Environmental protection ment system should not be com-
the vehicle is operated. AdBlue is biologically degradable. Unless menced until approximately 4 minutes
it is handled properly, however, AdBlue have passed as individual lines con-
constitutes an environmental hazard. Do tinue to be flushed with compressed
Danger.
not allow AdBlue to enter the sewage sys- air even after the engine has been
It is essential that work relevant to safety tem, surface water, ground water or soil switched off.
or work on safety-related systems be car- in significant volumes. Turn the ignition starter switch to the
ried out at a qualified specialist work- OFF position and remove the key be-
shop. fore work is carried out on the SCR
Danger. Risk of poisoning and
injury. system.
Allow the AdBlue® line system to
Danger. AdBlue® is not classified as a hazardous cool down
substance by German regulations govern-
Always have maintenance work carried ing hazardous substances. Nevertheless, Open line connections and system
out at a qualified specialist workshop certain points should be observed when component covers/caps slowly.
which has the necessary knowledge and handling AdBlue®. Capture any AdBlue® that escapes in
tools. a suitable container and dispose of
The AdBlue® line system and the system
components connected to it are pres-

Operation
AdBlue service product
it in an environmentally responsible AdBlue service product

manner. AdBlue is a non-flammable, colourless, Note:
Do not pour AdBlue® into drinks con- odourless water-soluble liquid. Ammonia vapours have an acrid odour.
tainers. For this reason, you should avoid inhaling
Wipe up any spilled AdBlue®, espe- any ammonia vapours that may escape
Caution: when you remove the AdBlue filler cap.
cially as there is a risk of slipping.
Use only AdBlue compliant with DIN 70 Ammonia vapours are neither toxic nor
AdBlue® collected in this way must
070. Special additives are not permitted. hazardous to health in this concentration.
not be poured back into the AdBlue®
supply tank.
AdBlue and low temperatures
Rinse affected areas of skin copiously
with clean water. Caution:
Quickly change out of clothing that If, during refilling, AdBlue is spilled on Note:
has come into contact with the sub- painted surfaces or aluminium surfaces, AdBlue freezes at a temperature of
stance. rinse down the surfaces concerned approximately -11 °C. The bus is
without delay. equipped with an AdBlue preheating
In case of contact with the eyes,
rinse them immediately and copiously system as standard. Winter operation is
with clean water and seek medical AdBlue and high temperatures thus ensured, even at temperatures below
attention if necessary. -11 °C.
If AdBlue® enters the mouth or is Note:
swallowed, rinse the mouth out with AdBlue additives
Ammonia vapours may be released as a
clean water and then drink plenty of product of the decomposition of AdBlue if
water. the content of the AdBlue tank is heated
Seek medical attention if symptoms to over 50 °C for a lengthy period (e.g.
persist. as a consequence of direct sunlight).

Operation
AdBlue service product
Disposal of AdBlue ded storage temperature is exceeded, this

Caution: period will become shorter. At temperat-
Do not add any additives to AdBlue. Do Note: ures below -11 °C AdBlue will freeze and
not dilute AdBlue with tap water. This solidify.
Observe country-specific legislation and
can destroy the exhaust gas cleaning sys- requirements governing the disposal of
tem. Damage to the exhaust gas cleaning AdBlue.
system caused by additives/tap water will
invalidate the warranty.
AdBlue purity
Storage
Note:
Caution: It is not permitted to return to the tank
any AdBlue that has been pumped out,
Use only containers made from high-alloy e.g. during a repair, because the purity of
CrNi steels or MoCrNi steels complying the liquid would no longer be guaranteed.
with EN10088-1/2/3 for the storage of
AdBlue. Containers made of aluminium,
Service life and shelf life
copper, alloys containing copper and non-
alloy or galvanised steels are not suitable
for the storage of AdBlue. If stored in Note:
such containers, AdBlue could dissolve In storage, AdBlue may decompose into
out constituents of these metals and des- ammonium hydroxide and carbon dioxide.
troy the exhaust gas cleaning system. In this event, it would no longer meet the
The vehicle warranty will be invalidated requirements of the DIN V 70070 stand-
if damage to the exhaust gas cleaning ard. If AdBlue is stored at the recommen-
system is found to have been caused ded storage temperature of 25 °C, it will
by constituents dissolved out of non-ap- continue to meet the requirements of this
proved storage containers. standard for at least 6 months from the
date of manufacture. If the recommen-

Operation
Filling with AdBlue
Filling with AdBlue

Caution:
Note: If, during refilling, AdBlue is spilled on
painted surfaces or aluminium surfaces,
An accidental filling of the AdBlue sup-
rinse down the surfaces concerned
ply tank with diesel fuel and vice versa is
without delay.
prevented by various technical precaution-
ary measures.
Note:
Note: AdBlue freezes at a temperature of
approximately -11 °C. The bus is
AdBlue is consumed at a rate of approx-
equipped with an AdBlue preheating M54_00-1372-71
imately 5 % of the rate of diesel fuel con-
system as standard. Winter operation is Read AdBlue fill level (2).
sumption. It is recommended that the
thus ensured, even at temperatures below
AdBlue supply tank also be refilled at
-11 °C.
every regular refuelling stop.
Caution:
Use only AdBlue compliant with DIN 70
070. Special additives are not permitted.

Operation
Filling with AdBlue
out until the vehicle has been refilled

with AdBlue. Note:
The driver must have actively acknow-
ledged the “AdBlue Vorrat zu gering”
(AdBlue level too low) yellow alert (see
above) at some time previously.
M47_00-0091-71
If the fill level in the AdBlue supply

tank falls to approximately 10 %, a M47_00-0097-71
yellow alert (1) appears on the dis-
If the AdBlue supply tank runs empty,
play screen. The yellow alert dis-
a yellow alert (1) appears on the dis-
plays “AdBlue” icon (1.1) and the
play screen. The yellow alert dis-
message “AdBlue Vorrat zu ger-
plays icon (1.1) and the message M47_00-0096-71
ing” (AdBlue level too low) (1.2).
“Motor Störung” (Engine malfunc- If the AdBlue supply tank runs empty,
The driver can acknowledge yel-
tion) (1.2). In this situation, a fault a 60 % engine power reduction is ini-
low alert (1) at any time using main
is also present in the exhaust gas tiated and yellow alert (1) appears on
menu buttons (1.3) on the steering
cleaning system, i.e. malfunction the display screen. Yellow alert (1)
wheel. AdBlue indicator (2) turns yel-
indicator lamp (2) flashes. In this displays icon (1.1) and the message
low and remains lit to remind the
event, it is necessary to fill up with “Motor Leistungsreduzierung” (Engine
driver that an AdBlue top-up is due.
AdBlue immediately. power reduction) (1.2). The driver
Yellow warning lamp (3) does not go
can acknowledge yellow alert (1)

Operation
Operating/malfunction displays: fuel system
at any time using main menu but- Operating/malfunction displays:

tons (1.3) on the steering wheel. Note: fuel system
An accidental filling of the AdBlue sup- Fuel reserve
ply tank with diesel fuel and vice versa is
prevented by various technical precaution-
ary measures.
M47_00-0055-71
Filling the tank with AdBlue. M47_00-0092-71
If the fuel level drops below approxim-

Note: ately 10 % of tank capacity, a yellow
On 2-axle buses, the AdBlue supply tank alert (1) appears on the display screen.
is located directly next to the diesel fuel The yellow alert displays icon (1.1) and
tank. On 3-axle buses, the AdBlue supply the message “Kraftstoffvorrat zu ger-
tank can be found behind the flap on the ing” (Fuel level too low) (1.2). The driver
right-hand side above the driven axle. can acknowledge yellow alert (1) at any
time using main menu buttons (1.3) on
the steering wheel. Fuel indicator (2)
turns yellow and remains lit to remind
the driver that the vehicle needs to be

Operation
refuelled. Yellow warning lamp (3) does and remains lit to remind the driver
not go out until the vehicle has been re- that an AdBlue top-up is due. Yellow Danger.
fuelled. warning lamp (3) does not go out until
Have the malfunction rectified by an
the vehicle has been refilled with AdBlue. EvoBus Service Partner immediately.
AdBlue level
Exhaust gas cleaning malfunction
Fault in the exhaust gas cleaning
system
M47_00-0091-71
If the fill level in the AdBlue supply tank M47_00-0093-71
falls to approximately 10 %, a yellow Malfunction indicator lamp (1) lights up

M47_00-0097-71
alert (1) appears on the display screen. in the event of a malfunction in the ex-
The yellow alert displays “AdBlue” haust gas cleaning system (SCR system). In the event of a fault in the exhaust
icon (1.1) and the message “AdBlue gas cleaning system (display indicat-
Vorrat zu gering” (AdBlue level too ing permissible NOx concentration ex-
low) (1.2). The driver can acknowledge ceeded slightly) or if the AdBlue sup-
yellow alert (1) at any time using main ply tank runs dry, malfunction indicat-
menu buttons (1.3) on the steering or lamp (2) flashes and yellow alert (1)
wheel. AdBlue indicator (2) turns yellow appears on the display screen. Yel-

Operation
low alert (1) displays icon (1.1) and the Engine power reduction acknowledged the “Motor Störung” (En-
message “Motor Störung” (Engine mal- gine malfunction) yellow alert beforehand
function) (1.2). The driver can acknow- (see above). In this situation, a fault is
ledge yellow alert (1) at any time using also present in the exhaust gas clean-
main menu buttons (1.3) on the steering ing system, i.e. malfunction indicator
wheel. If the malfunction message was lamp (2) flashes. If the fault was caused
triggered by AdBlue supply tank (3) run- by AdBlue supply tank (3) running empty,
ning empty, it is necessary to top up the the driver has manually acknowledged
AdBlue level immediately. If the AdBlue the “AdBlue Vorrat zu gering” (AdBlue
supply tank has run empty, the driver level too low) yellow alert (see above) at
must have actively acknowledged the some time previously. The AdBlue supply
“AdBlue Vorrat zu gering” (AdBlue level tank must be filled immediately.
too low) yellow alert (see above) at some M47_00-0096-71
time previously. Danger.
In the event of an NOx fault (display in-
dicating NOx concentration exceeded Have NOx faults rectified immediately by
Danger. significantly) or if the AdBlue supply tank an EvoBus Service Partner.
Have NOx faults rectified immediately by runs empty, engine power is automat-
an EvoBus Service Partner. ically reduced to approximately 60 %
and yellow alert (1) appears on the dis-
play screen. The yellow alert displays
Note: icon (1.1) and the message “Motor Leis-
If the AdBlue supply tank runs empty, tungsreduzierung” (Engine power re-
engine power is automatically reduced to duction) (1.2). The driver can acknow-
approximately 60 %. ledge yellow alert (1) at any time using
main menu buttons (1.3) on the steer-
ing wheel. The driver must have actively

Operation
Function of the accident data recorder (ADR) (option)
Function of the accident data

recorder (ADR) (option) Note:
The accident data recorder (ADR) is Indicator lamp (2) lighting up and a brief,
a system for detecting and record- one-off buzzing sound means that at least
ing accidents and driving events, e.g. one event is stored.
pulling away against a kerb or sud-
den braking.
Note:
The accident data recorder (ADR)
is activated automatically when the A sequence of four long buzzes indicates
ignition is switched on. that the accident data recorder (ADR) has
detected a parking collision. Check your
M54_00-1502-71 vehicle for damage.
Note: As soon as the ignition is switched
The accident data recorder (ADR) remains on, the accident data recorder (ADR)
active for 3 days after the ignition has carries out a self-test and provides Note:
been switched off and continues to re- audible notification of the current Eight short buzzes mean that the memory
gister all vehicle movements (e.g. parking operating status or the presence of a of the accident data recorder (ADR) is
collisions). hardware fault. almost full to capacity. Export the events
and have the memory cleared.
Note:
A brief, one-off audible signal (buzzer in
Note:
the control panel) (4) indicates that the
accident data recorder (ADR) is ready for Ten short buzzes mean that the accident
operation. data recorder (ADR) has malfunctioned.
Similarly, a malfunction is present if no
signal sounds.

Operation
Adjusting the headlamps for driving on the left or right (Litronic headlamps only (option))
Following any critical traffic or acci- Adjusting the headlamps for driv- Remove the cover (right 4x and left
dent situation, it is possible to record ing on the left or right (Litronic 3x quick-release locks).
an entry manually. headlamps only (option))
Note:
Note: Caution: Covers accessible from the vehicle in-
When pushbutton (1) is pressed follow- Litronic headlamps (option) can be adjus- terior. Fold back the rubber mat on the
ing an accident, the event (approximately ted for driving on the left or driving on right-hand side.
43 seconds before, during and after the the right. Please observe the rules and
accident) is stored and remains write-pro- regulations of the country in which the
tected for an extended period. vehicle is operated.
Switch off the lighting.
Danger.
Bulbs and bulb holders may be hot and
bulbs are pressurised.

Operation
Adjusting the headlamps for driving on the left or right (Litronic headlamps only (option))
Note:
Refit in reverse order.
M54_00-0406-01 M54_00-0840-01
Unclip plug (1) of the control module. The headlamp is adjusted with metal
bar (1).
Danger.
The connector must be disconnected Note:
without fail because the gas discharge Push metal bar (1) upwards: driving on
lamps for Litronic headlamps operate at the right.
high voltage.
Push two wire loops (2) upwards and Note:

remove plastic cover (3).
Push metal bar (1) downwards: driving on
the left.

Operation
Brake system safety precautions
Brake system safety precautions Braking and stopping Brakes with anti-locking protection
Whenever the bus is driven over long In the event of danger, the brake
downhill stretches, you should make pedal should be fully depressed. This
Caution: use of the braking effect of the en- guarantees that all wheels are regu-
gine by shifting into a lower gear. lated and the bus decelerates optim-
The braking characteristics of the bus
Use the continuous brakes (retarder, ally.
may change if a yellow warning level
malfunction in the brake system is dis- engine brake) to relieve the load on
On a slippery road surface, you
played on the screen in the instrument the service brake.
should also declutch so that the
cluster. Drive with extreme care. Have braking effect of the engine cannot
the fault rectified as soon as possible by Note: affect the ABS control intervention.
an EvoBus Service Partner.
Except for emergencies, the service brake
does not usually need to be applied Note:
sharply.
Danger. The retarder is automatically deactivated
for the duration of an ABS control inter-
vention.
have changed if a red warning level mal- Note:
function in the brake system is displayed.
Always apply the parking brake before
Pedal travel may increase under braking.
you disembark. On uphill and downhill Danger.
ABS is switched off. Stop the bus imme-
gradients, you must also chock the
diately and disable it (traffic conditions The anti-locking protection of ABS does
wheels and turn the steering towards the
permitting). Have an EvoBus Service Part- not relieve the driver of the responsibility
kerb.
ner rectify the fault immediately. for adopting a driving style which takes
traffic and road conditions into account.
The directional stability and steerability
of the bus are improved under braking.
However, the anti-locking protection is
not able to avert the consequences of,

Operation
Applying the parking brake
for example, driving at an unsafe distance Applying the parking brake

behind a vehicle in front or driving at too Danger.
high a speed through bends.
Check the hand lever for full engage-
ment. To do so, attempt to press the
hand lever in the “release” direction (a)
Danger. without pulling release ring (1.1) out of
If the bus is towing a trailer that does not the detent position. The lever must not
have ABS, this trailer could be overbraked move.
if the brakes were applied with maximum
force. In this event, the driver must keep
the trailer in view by checking the rear- Note:
view mirror. The bus equipped with ABS An audible warning sounds if the ignition
remains steerable, thereby enabling the is switched off without the parking brake
M42_00-0792-71
driver to keep the entire vehicle combina- engaged.
tion stable. Pull hand lever (1) out of released
position (a) and into engagement in
applied position (b).
Danger.
The parking brake indicator lamp
Do not apply the parking brake unless the lights up on the instrument panel
bus is stationary. Always apply the park- and this operating symbol appears on
ing brake before you leave the driver's the screen at the same time.
area. On uphill and downhill gradients,
you must also chock the wheels and turn
the steering towards the kerb.

Operation
Releasing the parking brake
Releasing the parking brake Emergency braking in the event of

failure of both brake circuits
Danger.
A failure in brake circuits 1 and 2 will
jeopardise the operating safety and road-
worthiness of the bus. Stop the vehicle
immediately (traffic conditions permitting).
Have the brake system checked by an
EvoBus Service Partner immediately.
M42_00-0678-71
M42_00-0792-71 Indicator lamp (2) and operating sym- Note:

Pull release ring (1.1) out of the de- bol (1) must go out.
In the event of a failure in brake circuits
tent position (b) and move hand lever 1 and 2, it is possible to initiate emer-
(1) as far as the stop towards the Note: gency braking using the parking brake
“Release” position (a). To guarantee a faultless release of the lever.
parking brake, the supply pressure must
be at least 6.3 bar. If parking brake in-
dicator lamp (2) goes out despite there
being sufficient supply pressure, there is
a fault in the spring actuator or the emer-
gency release circuit. Have the brake sys-
tem checked by an EvoBus Service Part-
ner immediately.

Operation
EBS brake system
EBS brake system

Note: The electronic brake system (EBS) con-
Parking brake lever (1) can be moved trols the vehicle's braking. The anti-lock
rearwards to any position to enable the braking system (ABS) and acceleration
driver to prevent the rear wheels from skid control (ASR) functions are integ-
locking and to moderate the braking ef- rated into the brake system (EBS).
fect.
EBS helps to achieve a more rapid brak-
ing effect at the wheels. ABS prevents
Danger. the wheels from locking above a speed
equivalent to walking pace, regardless of
Risk of accident. Applying the parking the road conditions.
M42_00-0792-71
brake deactivates the anti-lock braking
Pull release ring (1.1). Pull lever (1) system (ABS). You should exercise even EBS comprises two circuits: a purely
slowly towards applied position (b) more caution when driving on slippery pneumatic brake circuit and a superim-
and hold it in the desired position to roads because there would be a risk of posed electropneumatic brake circuit.
prevent it from automatically return- rear wheels locking. Each wheel is equipped with sensors
ing to released position (a). that continuously record the rate of
brake pad wear. An overly worn brake
Danger. pad is indicated on the display screen
by a service notification and by a yellow
When performing emergency braking us- alert with the “Brake pad” symbol.
ing the parking brake, make sure that the
parking brake lever does not engage in Under partial braking, the brake pres-
the parking position. Release ring (1.1) sures between the front and rear axle
must be held in the applied position. are adapted according to the brake pad
thickness so that an even rate of brake
The bus is braked at the rear wheels pad wear is maintained.
only.

Operation
Acceleration skid control (ASR)
Acceleration skid control (ASR) Brake Assist Adaptive brake lamps

Acceleration skid control prevents the Brake Assist detects a dangerous situ- If you brake heavily at a speed of over
drive wheels from spinning when pulling ation by the speed with which the brake 30 mph (50 km/h) and Brake Assist is
away or accelerating, regardless of road pedal is depressed and immediately ap- active, the brake lamps will flash rapidly.
surface conditions. plies full braking force. Brake Assist acts This provides a warning to road users
to minimise braking distances. behind the vehicle.
Danger.
Acceleration skid control does not relieve
the driver of the responsibility for adopt-
ing a driving style which takes traffic and
road conditions into account. The bus
may skid out of control if ASR has been
deactivated and the drive wheels start to
spin.

Operation
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) (system description)
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) been deactivated and the drive wheels
(system description) start to spin. Note:
Dynamic handling control (FDR) prevents, It is recommended that the Electronic
within the laws of physics, the bus from Stability Program (ESP) be deactivated us-
skidding or tilting, regardless of the load Note: ing ESP OFF pushbutton (1) in the event
status of the bus, road and traffic condi- In wintry conditions, optimum perform- of traction problems when driving with
ance of the Electronic Stability Program snow chains fitted or over loose surfaces
tions or in critical driving situations (e.g.
(ESP) cannot be achieved unless winter (e.g. sand or gravel).
sudden swerving manoeuvre or high cor-
nering speed). This is achieved by se- tyres (M+S) are fitted.
lective braking of individual wheels or,
where necessary, all wheels. Combined
with acceleration skid control (ASR), this
system is called the Electronic Stability
Program (ESP). ESP remains operational
even when the service brake is applied
or a continuous brake is active.
Danger.
RISK OF ACCIDENT. The Electronic Sta-
bility Program (ESP) does not relieve the
driver of the responsibility for adopting a M42_00-0799-71
driving style which takes traffic and road
conditions into account. ESP can restabil-
ise the bus only within the laws of phys-
ics. The bus may skid out of control if
the Electronic Stability Program (ESP) has

Operation
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) (function description)
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) System (EBS), which already features

(function description) the anti-lock braking system (ABS) and Note:
acceleration skid control (ASR). If ESP The Electronic Stability Program (ESP) is
Functions: detects a critical driving situation, auto- automatically deactivated in the event of
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) matic control interventions stabilise the an ESP malfunction or a technically re-
function description bus by: lated malfunction in the Electronic Brake
Initialisation phase – reducing engine power output System (EBS).
Handling in the event of understeer- – selectively braking individual wheels Initialisation phase
ing – applying the brakes at all wheels
Handling in the event of oversteering
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Note:
function description Indicator lamp (1) in the instrument pan-
el flashes while the Electronic Stability
Program (ESP) is intervening.
Note:
Dynamic handling control (FDR) is active
only at speeds of over 5 mph (10 km/h).
Dynamic handling control (FDR) is deactiv- M42_00-0677-71
ated when reverse gear is selected. Whenever the ignition switch is switched
on, the Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
undergoes an initialisation process that
M42_00-0677-71 lasts until the first few metres have been
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP) driven and the sensors are checked for
is an extension of the Electronic Brake correct function. Dynamic handling con-

Operation
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) (function description)
trol (FDR) is not yet functional during the rear wheel on the nearside (3) restabil- (5). Selective braking of the front wheel
initialisation phase, although acceleration ises the bus. on the offside (6) restabilises the bus.
skid control (ASR) is operational. If the
system determines that correct operation Note: Note:
is guaranteed, initialisation is completed
The illustration shows a 2-axle bus as an The illustration shows a 2-axle bus as an
and the system is ready for operation.
example. On 3-axle buses with an RAS example. On 3-axle buses with an RAS
Indicator lamp (1) lights up for the dura- axle, the 3rd axle is regulated separately axle, the 3rd axle is regulated separately
tion of the initialisation phase. when necessary. when necessary.
Handling in the event of
Handling in the event of
understeering
oversteering
M42_25_0003_01
M42_25_0002_01
The front axle of the bus deviates from
The bus breaks out at the rear axle. The
steered course (1) towards the offside
bus deviates from steered course (4) and
of the road (2). Selective braking of the
turns towards the near side of the road

Operation
Deactivating the Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
Deactivating the Electronic Stability Operating/malfunction displays:

Program (ESP) Note: brake system
Press the ESP OFF pushbutton. It is recommended that the Electronic Brake pad wear
Stability Program (ESP) be deactivated us-
ing the ESP OFF pushbutton in the event
of traction problems when driving with
snow chains fitted or over loose surfaces
(e.g. sand or gravel).
An overly worn brake pad is indicated by
Note: a yellow alert.
Pressing the ESP OFF pushbutton again or
switching the ignition off and on again re- Danger.
activates the Electronic Stability Program
(ESP). The braking characteristics of the bus
may change if a yellow warning level mal-
function in the brake system appears on
the instrument cluster display screen. Ad-
Danger. opt a particularly cautious driving style.
RISK OF ACCIDENT. The bus may skid Have the malfunction rectified as soon as
out of control if the Electronic Stability possible by an EvoBus Service Partner.
Program (ESP) has been deactivated and M42_00-0677-71
the drive wheels start to spin. Brake system malfunction
Dynamic handling control (FDR) and
acceleration skid control (ASR) are
disabled. Indicator lamp (1) lights up
permanently.
If a speed sensor fault was detected dur-

ing the last drive cycle, a yellow warning

Operation
Operating/malfunction displays: brake system
level malfunction is displayed on the dis- ABS/ASR malfunction

play screen together with this icon. This Danger.
continues to be shown until the static
and dynamic system tests have been have changed if a red warning level
completed. malfunction is displayed. Pedal travel may
increase under braking. ABS has been
In the event of an ABS/ASR failure or disabled. Stop the bus immediately and
Note: malfunction, a red or yellow warning disable it (traffic conditions permitting).
Not all components can be tested for level malfunction, depending on fault Have the malfunction rectified by an
faults while the bus is stationary. For this severity, is displayed on the display EvoBus Service Partner immediately.
reason, you should switch on the ignition screen.
and depress the brake pedal fully for 2
Acceleration skid control (ASR)
seconds with the parking brake released.
If the display does not then go out, pull Danger. active
away and stop after a short distance. If
The wheels could lock, especially on a
the fault continues to be displayed, have
slippery surface - risk of skidding.
the malfunction rectified by an EvoBus
Service Partner.
Danger.
Danger. The braking characteristics of the bus
opt a particularly cautious driving style.
Have the malfunction rectified as soon as
opt a particularly cautious driving style.
possible by an EvoBus Service Partner. M42_00-0677-71
Have the malfunction rectified as soon as
ASR is activated automatically if the
possible by an EvoBus Service Partner.
drive wheels on one or both sides start

Operation
to spin. Indicator lamp (1) flashes while Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
an ASR intervention is in progress. If the active Note:
drive wheels on one side start to spin, The indicator lamp flashes in the event
they will be braked automatically. - If of an intervention by dynamic handling
the drive wheels on both sides start to control (FDR) and by acceleration skid
spin, engine output will automatically be control (ASR).
reduced.
Note: Note:
In 3-axle buses, the ASR intervention is During the dynamic handling control ini-
accompanied by activation of the pull- tialisation phase, indicator lamp (1) lights
away aid (axle load transfer). The pull- up permanently. Dynamic handling control
away will be deactivated automatically is not yet functional while acceleration
approximately 4 seconds after the ASR skid control (ASR) is active.
M42_00-0677-71
intervention has completed.
If the Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
is active, the control intervention and Danger.
therefore the critical driving condition
Danger. RISK OF ACCIDENT. The Electronic Sta-
are indicated by a flashing indicator lamp
RISK OF ACCIDENT. Acceleration skid bility Program (ESP) does not relieve the
(1).
control does not relieve the driver of the driver of the responsibility for adopting a
responsibility for adopting a driving style driving style which takes traffic and road
which takes traffic and road conditions conditions into account. ESP can restabil-
into account. ise the bus only within the laws of phys-
ics.

Operation
Deactivating ESP ESP malfunction

Note:
Press the pushbutton again or switch the
ignition starter switch to OFF and back to
ON to reactivate the Electronic Stability
Program (FDR and ASR).
Danger.
RISK OF ACCIDENT. The bus may skid
out of control if the Electronic Stability
Program (ESP) has been deactivated and
M42_00-0677-71
the drive wheels start to spin. M42_00-0677-71
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP) If dynamic handling control (FDR) has
can be deactivated using the ESP OFF malfunctioned, the driver is notified by a
pushbutton on the instrument panel. The yellow alert and indicator lamp (1) lights
dynamic handling control (FDR) and ac- up permanently.
celeration skid control (ASR) functions
are also disabled. Indicator lamp (1) Note:
lights up permanently.
Other brake system functions may con-
tinue to work correctly. If any of these
fail, a separate fault message will be dis-
played.

Operation
is 1 Störung” (Brake circuit 1 malfunc- Circuit 2 supply pressure

Danger. tion) (1.2). At the same time, red park-
ing brake indicator lamp (2) lights up
may change if a yellow warning level mal- in the instrument cluster. In addition,
function in the brake system appears on a signal sounds and STOP lamp (4) and
the instrument cluster display screen. Ad- red warning lamp (3) light up. The mal-
opt a particularly cautious driving style. function warning is not cleared until the
Have the malfunction rectified as soon as pressure has risen back above 7.2 bar.
Circuit 1 supply pressure Danger.

have changed if a red warning level
malfunction is displayed. Pedal travel may M42_00-0680-71
increase under braking. ABS has been If the supply pressure in circuit 2 falls
disabled. Stop the bus immediately and below 6.8 bar, a red alert (1) is displayed
disable it (traffic conditions permitting). on the screen. Red alert (1) displays
Have the malfunction rectified by an
icon (1.1) and the message “Bremskre-
EvoBus Service Partner immediately.
is 2 Störung” (Brake circuit 2 malfunc-
tion) (1.2). At the same time, red park-
ing brake indicator lamp (2) lights up
Note:
in the instrument cluster. In addition,
Once the vehicle has been brought to a a signal sounds and STOP lamp (4) and
M42_00-0679-71 halt and the parking brake has been ap-
red warning lamp (3) light up. The mal-
If the supply pressure in circuit 1 falls plied, the driver is able to view the pres-
sure value in main menu 4, submenu 1. function warning is not cleared until the
below 6.8 bar, a red alert (1) is displayed
pressure has risen back above 7.2 bar.
on the screen. Red alert (1) displays
icon (1.1) and the message “Bremskre-

Operation
Brake circuit 1 or 2 supply

Danger. pressure sensor malfunction Danger.
The braking characteristics of the bus The braking characteristics of the bus
have changed if a red warning level have changed if a red warning level
malfunction is displayed. Pedal travel may malfunction is displayed. Pedal travel may
increase under braking. ABS has been increase under braking. ABS has been
disabled. Stop the bus immediately and disabled. Stop the bus immediately and
disable it (traffic conditions permitting). disable it (traffic conditions permitting).
Have the malfunction rectified by an Have the malfunction rectified by an
EvoBus Service Partner immediately. EvoBus Service Partner immediately.
Note: Note:
Once the vehicle has been brought to a Once the vehicle has been brought to a
M42_00-0681-71
halt and the parking brake has been ap- halt and the parking brake has been ap-
plied, the driver is able to view the pres- The supply pressures in circuits 1 and 2 plied, the driver is able to view the pres-
sure value in main menu 4, submenu 1. are monitored by sensors. A red alert (1) sure value in main menu 4, submenu 1.
is displayed if a sensor in at least one
circuit fails. Red alert (1) displays
icon (1.1) and the message “Bremse Note:
Störung” (Brake malfunction) (1.2). If a data transmission error has occurred,
At the same time, red parking brake the display of the supply pressure con-
indicator lamp (2) lights up in the cerned alternates between the minimum
instrument cluster. In addition, a signal value (0 bar) and maximum value (12 bar)
sounds and STOP lamp (4) and red once every second.
warning lamp (3) light up.

Operation
Circuit 3 supply pressure Parking brake applied continuous brake OFF switch on the in-
strument panel. This is indicated in the
“Driving operating display” menu on the
display screen by this icon.
Bus stop brake active
If the supply pressure in circuit 3 falls This symbol appears on the instrument
below 6.3 bar, a yellow warning level cluster display screen while the parking
malfunction is shown on the display brake is engaged.
screen. This malfunction warning is not
cleared until the pressure has risen back Deactivating continuous braking
This symbol is shown on the instrument
above 6.6 bar.
cluster display screen whenever the bus
stop brake is active. It is also shown
Danger. whenever the drive-off lock is active (one
The braking characteristics of the bus or more doors are open).
A retarder installed in the bus is con-
function in the brake system appears on trolled in addition to the service brake
whenever the driver depresses the brake Note:
opt a particularly cautious driving style. pedal (brakes management). The pro- The bus stop brake or the drive-off lock
Have the malfunction rectified as soon as portion of braking output contributed by cannot be deactivated unless the doors
possible by an EvoBus Service Partner. the retarder during this combined brak- are closed. The “Ready to depart” symbol
is shown on the display screen.
ing action is reduced if the speed of the
bus falls below 12 mph (20 km/h). The
braking effect of the retarder is restored
when the bus is subsequently braked at
speeds of over 15 mph (25 km/h). This
function can be switched off using the

Operation
Operating 230/400 V systems (option)
Bus stop brake OFF Operating 230/400 V systems

Danger. (option)
Always apply the parking brake correctly Special safety precautions must be taken
before you leave the driver's area. Risk of when operating 230/400 V systems;
accident. To park the bus, always apply these will be described below:
the parking brake. If necessary (e.g. on
steep uphill or downhill gradients), chock
This symbol appears on the instrument
the wheels as an additional measure to cluster display screen if the sealed emer- Danger.
prevent the bus from rolling away. gency release switch (red, sealed secur- Maintenance and repair work may only be
ity cap) is operated or if control of the carried out by personnel who have under-
Ready to depart bus stop brake/drive-off lock is interrup- gone the appropriate special training.
ted.
The system manufacturer's safety and
Danger. operating information must be observed
without fail.
Have the brake system checked by an
This symbol is displayed as soon as all EvoBus Service Partner immediately.
the doors are closed. The symbol goes
out and the bus stop brake/drive-off Danger.
lock is deactivated as soon as the accel-
Residual current devices fitted in the bus
erator pedal is depressed. must be checked for correct operation at
regular intervals (see “Checking the resid-
ual current device for the 230 V socket
(option)” in the “Toilet” section).
The following safety precautions are an

absolute requirement if the 230/400 V

Operation
Fitting the skibox (option)
system is to be supplied by an outside Fitting the skibox (option)

feed:
Danger.
Note:
The skibox may only be transported,
Check any extension lead used for dam- stored and assembled by using the sub-
age before plugging it in. assemblies and fastening elements that
are designed for that purpose.
Note:
The networks to which the 230/400 V Danger.
system is connected must have protection The installation of a skibox changes the M88_00-0019-01
in the form of a residual current device. bus length and any installed reversing
Otherwise, plug in an external RCD as an The skibox is fitted to the bus by
monitor (park pilot) no longer functions. pinning the four swivel bearings on
adapter.
the left and right-hand side of the
outer frame to the bearing pedestals
Note: on the bus using pins secured with
split pins (1).
Check the correct operation of this RCD
by pressing the test button. Only then
should you connect the 230/400 V sys- Note:
tem of the bus to the mains supply.
A fork lift truck should be used to raise
the box to the correct height to ease as-
sembly onto the bus.

Operation
Fitting the skibox (option)
Danger.
Before the bus is driven, it is necessary
to check that all pins (1) are firmly seated
and correctly secured by split pin (2).
Danger.
All lighting equipment must be checked
for correct operation before the bus is
driven. In addition, it is necessary to
M88_00-0021-01 M88_00-0019-01
check that the rear foglamp only works
Only ever stake the lower locating The skibox can only be fitted to on the skibox and no longer on the bus.
eyes with one pin at a time - never buses upon which the correct brack-
two at once. ets are installed.
Danger.
Danger. Note: The skibox cover must be closed and
Risk of injury. Make sure that the rear The electrical connection must be estab- locked when the bus is being driven.
gas strut (1) prestresses the bar. lished between the bus and skibox once
the skibox has been mounted.

Operation
Swivelling the skibox (option)
Swivelling the skibox (option)
Caution:
Before the box is swivelled it must firstly
be unloaded (follow instructions on the
sticker on the skibox frame).
M88_00-0019-01 M88_00-0021-01
Pull both locating pins (1) on the left- This catch (2) (orange-yellow push
hand side when viewed in the direc- handle on the gas strut (1)) must
tion of travel (after removing secur- firstly be raised to allow the box to
ing split pin (2)) and swivel the box swivel back.
to the right side until the gas strut
Reinsert the locating pins and secure
has reached its end position and the
with securing split pins.
catch for preventing the box from
swivelling back unintentionally has
snapped in place.

Operation
Further skibox (option) operating instructions
Further skibox (option) operating Adjust the height of the support arms Note on maintenance work
instructions by removing the securing compon-
ents.
Danger. Note:
Danger.
The permissible total weight of 600 kg All the maintenance work is described in
must not be exceeded. (Follow instruc- After the height has been adjusted the special instructions. The tasks listed here
tions on the sticker inside the skibox) securing component is to be attached to are not subject to any maintenance in-
the support arm and clipped into the wall terval in particular, rather they should be
bracket. carried out as frequently as appropriate
Danger. given the conditions of vehicle use.
Pull the folding step for loading and
Belts over the support arms are to be unloading out of the retaining tubes,
firmly lashed over the retaining frames hook it in using the hooks and fold it
after loading in order to secure the load. out.
If there are defective bulbs in the
Caution: lamp holders, they must be replaced
by pulling out the connector sockets
Corrosive soaps must not be used to
and unscrewing the bayonets fitting.
clean and maintain the box (follow the
manufacturer's instructions). Whenever
there is an excessive amount of dirt the
box may be cleaned with water and car
shampoo. A high-pressure cleaner can
also be used as long as this is operated
carefully.

Operation
Cleaning the underbody
Cleaning the underbody Cleaning the underbody with a

hot-water high-pressure cleaner Environmental protection
Note: Observe waste water guidelines. Only
The underbody refers to the entire under- Note: clean the bus in an area appropriately
body of the bus, including the bus floor, equipped for cleaning.
Remove the protective cladding on the
the wheel housings and the underbody underbody and clean it separately.
carcass. Inspect the underbody and pay at-
tention to damage and an unusually
heavily impregnated and discoloured
Note:
Note: dirt layer.
The underbody is protected by protect-
The underbody should be inspected at ive coatings against corrosion and stones
regular intervals and cleaned according to being thrown up. Clean as carefully as Note:
the level of dirt, but at least once a year possible to avoid washing off or damaging It will be possible to detect faults on the
in conjunction with the annual mainten- the good protective layers. Match the wa- dirty underbody which will no longer be
ance service. This enables underbody pro- ter temperature and pressure to the spray visible after cleaning. For example, leak-
tection coating which is flawed or dam- nozzle and spraying distance appropri- ing unions on oil, fuel and coolant pipes
aged to be identified and remedied in ately. and reservoirs, leaking points on assem-
good time. blies, hidden corrosion in the stained lay-
ers of dirt may be detected. Remedy any
Note: faults and damage remaining after clean-
ing.
The underbody should be washed primar-
ily using clean water. Only use a cleaning
Use a hot-water high-pressure clean-
product on dirt which is very difficult to
remove. er in accordance with the manufac-
turer's instructions.

Operation
Organisational resource Repair agent Setting values

Hot-water high-pressure cleaner P3-grato 80 Designation Value
Alfred Kärcher GmbH & Co. Henkel KGaA, www.henkel.de,
Wap-Reinigungssysteme GmbH & Co Repair agent Spray angle of the 25°
flat jet nozzle at
HAKAPUR 50-268 least
Danger. CHEMISCHE WERKE KLUTHE GmbH,
Risk of injury due to improper use of the www.kluthe.com, tel.: +49 (0)6221/
high-pressure cleaner and damaged ac- 5301-0 Caution:
cessories. Observe the manufacturer's
operating instructions, comply with safety Round-spray jets and power-concentrated
notes and wear protective clothing. Danger. jets must not be used. The effect of the
water jet on these tools is too aggress-
Risk of injury from corrosive components ive for cleaning the bus and could cause
Mix cleaning products with the wash- in the cleaning products. Follow the man- serious damage to the bus.
ing water if necessary according to ufacturer's safety instructions.
the manufacturer's instructions or in
the concentration given on the con-
Note:
tainer intended for use on the unit. Caution:
The nozzle spraying angle determines
Repair agent Only use recommended cleaning products. the level of cleaning. The greater the
RM 55 XXL Unsuitable cleaning products could dam- nozzle spraying angle, the more protec-
age the bus. Highly concentrated cleaning tion offered when cleaning.
Alfred Kärcher Vertriebs GmbH, products must be diluted according to the
www.kaercher.de, tel.: +49(0) 71 95-90 manufacturer's instructions.
Set the water pressure, water tem-
30
perature and the concentration of the
Fit the spray lance with a flat-spray
cleaning product on the high-pres-
jet or use a variable adjustable
sure cleaner.
nozzle to set the spray angle.

Operation
Setting values
Caution: Danger.
Designation Value
The addition and concentration of the Risk of injury from hot water. The spray
cleaning products should be adjusted ac- lance could rebound if the jet hits the
Maximum permiss- 60 bar cording to the type and level of dirt on surface to be cleaned directly from a
ible water pressure the area to be cleaned. Excess cleaning short distance.
product can cause damage.
Setting values
Turn on the water jet pointing it to- Danger.
Designation Value wards the ground or open-air and
then move it onto the surface to be Risk of injury from high pressure and hot
Maximum permiss- 60 °C water. Do not direct the spray lance at
cleaned. Maintain the maximum per-
animals or people.
ible water temper- mitted jet distance.
ature Setting values Spray the layer of dirt on the under-
Designation Value body thoroughly with the water jet.
Caution:
Spray distance from 30 cm Note:
The protective coating on the underbody
or components may be damaged if the the object at least Let the sprayed water take effect. You
water pressure and/or water temperature may need to spray several times, depend-
are too high or a wrong spray nozzle is ing on the level of dirt.
fitted.

Operation
Note: Note: Note:

Pay particular attention to dirt deposits in Only direct the high-pressure jet at Do not wash out drainage openings using
corners, cavities, wheel housings and on seams, gaps or cavities for brief periods. a pressure cleaner. The openings guaran-
lines, as well as between the ramp and Water penetrating deep into the bus, tee that any water or condensation which
underbody. enhanced by the cleaning product, could has penetrated during cleaning can drain
lead to hidden corrosion and weaken out or dry.
Rinse the layer of dirt on the under- supporting components of the carcass.
body with a high-pressure water jet. Let the underbody dry.
Stop using the cleaning product and
rinse the entire underbody area with Caution:
Danger.
water.
Do not direct high-pressure jets directly Do not blow away any remaining moisture
on to tyres, suspension air bags or brake using compressed air.
hoses, special hose connections made of Note:
rubber, gaiters and mountings of moving Cleaning products should not be allowed Finally, carry out a visual inspection
parts, electrical lines, components and to dry on. Cleaning agent residues may of the underbody.
their connections. Move the high-pressure permanently damage surfaces and espe-
jet continually and change the direction at cially movable parts.
Note:
which it hits the surface to be cleaned.
Clean openings and drainage holes During the visual inspection, look in par-
for condensate in pipes, sections and ticular for complete and undamaged pro-
cavities by hand, e.g. with a pen. tective coating (wax and stone impact
protection) and corrosion damage. Also
check for damage to tyres, suspension
air bags, brake hoses, sealing gaiters and
bearings for moving parts, as well as elec-
trical lines and their connections.

Operation
Care and cleaning
Care and cleaning

Note: Danger.
Repair established faults or damage prop- Risk of poisoning. Always keep care and
erly and lubricate mountings and joints. cleaning products sealed and out of the
Note:
Replace damaged tyres, suspension air reach of children.
bags and pressure hoses. Observe the laws and regulations in all
countries concerned.
Carry out a test run with a braking Danger.
test and observe the operation of the
level control. Danger. Risk of poisoning. Diesel, regular and
premium-grade fuels are harmful to
Risk of injury. Observe the safety regula- health. They should not be used as a
Note: tions when working on the bus (e.g. op- cleaning product.
erational instructions, environmental laws
Have any faults remedied professionally.
and regulations, work safety and accident
prevention regulations, etc.).
Danger.
Risk of fire. Diesel, regular and premium-
Danger. grade fuels are highly flammable. They
should not be used as a cleaning product.
Risk of poisoning. Observe the instruc-
tions for use of the care and cleaning
products.
Danger.
Do not use round-spray jets to clean tyres
or suspension air bags. The pulsating jet
of water could cause concealed damage
to the tyre substructure or suspension
air bags. This damage would not become

Operation
Care and cleaning
apparent until much later and could cause

the tyre or suspension air bag to burst. Note: Environmental protection
This could result in you losing control of If you are using a steam cleaner to per- Dispose of empty containers, cleaning
your bus and causing an accident, thereby form cleaning work in the engine com- cloths and polishing wads in an environ-
injuring yourself and other people. partment, do not aim the jet directly at mentally responsible manner.
belt tensioners or idler pulleys.
Caution:
We recommend that only tested and ap- Caution:
proved care products should be used. In- Stone chips and areas of soiling, es-
formation about acceptable care products pecially insect remains, bird droppings,
can be obtained from your EvoBus Service tree resins, oils and greases, fuels or tar
Partner. stains should be removed immediately us-
ing approved care products.
Caution:
For cleaning work in the engine compart- Caution:
ment, the use of cleaning agents contain- The bus must be cleaned more frequently
ing acetone or chloroethylene is prohib- in winter to remove salt residues from
ited. road gritting.

Operation
Care/cleaning of light-alloy wheels
Care/cleaning of light-alloy wheels

Danger. Caution:
Danger. Do not use round-spray jets for cleaning We recommend that only tested and ap-
tyres. The pulsating jet of water could proved care products should be used. In-
Observe the general information/safety formation about acceptable care products
cause concealed damage to the tyre sub-
precautions in this section. can be obtained from your EvoBus Service
structure. Damage to the tyre substruc-
ture would not become apparent until Partner.
much later and could cause the tyre to
Note: burst. This could result in you losing con-
It is advisable to clean the light-alloy trol of your bus and causing an accident, Caution:
wheels regularly to maintain their value. thereby injuring yourself and other people.
Do not use acidic or alkaline cleaners.
Carry out basic cleaning more regularly They can cause corrosion to the wheel
if necessary, depending on use and the For heavy soiling, use a cleaner for bolts (wheel nuts) or the retaining springs
level of dirt. light-alloy wheels. of the balance weights.
Clean the light-alloy wheels regu- Note:

larly with warm water (preferably with
a high-pressure cleaner) and a soft Alcoa Dura-Bright® wheels need only
soap and water to retain their sheen.
sponge.
These wheels should not be polished us-
ing a standard polish such as ALpolish.

Operation
Care and cleaning of covers and upholstery
Care and cleaning of covers and Care/cleaning of fabric covers Brush the fabric with a soft brush
upholstery following the nap of the fabric.
Special notes on care and cleaning Danger. Basic cleaning - every six months
of covers and upholstery Observe the general information/safety First carry out the weekly basic
notes in this section. cleaning.
Note: Make a foam from a mild, lukewarm
Observe the instructions on your uphol- soap (e.g. from a mild-action deter-
stery fittings and covers in the detailed Note:
gent).
description of the bus. Regular care and basic cleaning help to
maintain the value and high-quality ap-
Apply the foam evenly over all the
pearance of fabric covers. For this reas- covers using a soft, slightly damp
on, carry out basic cleaning regularly. sponge.
Caution:
Carry out basic cleaning more regularly, Wait until the freshly cleaned covers
Do not use cleaning products containing depending on use and the level of dirt. are completely dry.
solvents (e.g. cleaning benzine, acetone,
alcohol, etc.). This would damage covers
and equipment parts made of plastic or
Basic cleaning - weekly
Caution:
foam beyond repair. Vacuum the covers thoroughly follow- The covers must be completely dry before
ing the nap of the fabric. they are used again. Permanent pressure
marks could otherwise form.
Caution:
Caution:
Only use pH neutral care and cleaning Brush following the nap of the fabric
Do not use vacuuming nozzles made of
agents to avoid bleaching out the colours. using a soft brush, without applying
rubber or rubber components. These
could pull threads out of the upholstery
pressure.
covers.

Operation
Care/cleaning of micro-fibre covers
Removing stains Care/cleaning of micro-fibre covers

Caution:
Caution: The covers must be completely dry before Danger.
they are used again. Permanent pressure
Remove dirt as quickly as possible to marks could otherwise form. Observe the general information/safety
avoid permanent stains and prevent dam- notes in this section.
age to the covers.
Finally, brush the cover and the
cleaned areas using a soft brush
Remove as much dirt as possible Note:
following the nap of the fabric.
using a lint-free cloth.
Regular care and basic cleaning help to
Work mild, lukewarm soap into the maintain the value and high-quality ap-
Caution:
dirt using a soft sponge in circular pearance of micro-fibre and wool covers.
movements from the outside in. Ap- If in any doubt, use a professional textile For this reason, carry out basic cleaning
ply light pressure when doing this. cleaning company. regularly. Carry out basic cleaning more
regularly, depending on use and the level
of dirt.
Note:
Always work on the dirt from the outside Basic cleaning - weekly
in so that the dirt is not spread over the
fabric. Vacuum the covers following the nap
of the fabric, without applying pres-
Remove the soap used using a clean, sure.
soft sponge.
Wait until the freshly cleaned areas
are completely dry.

Operation
Care/cleaning of micro-fibre covers
Work mild, lukewarm soap into the

Caution: Caution: dirt using a soft sponge in circular
Do not use vacuuming nozzles made of The covers must be completely dry before movements from the outside in. Ap-
rubber or rubber components. These they are used again. Permanent pressure ply light pressure when doing this.
could pull threads out of the upholstery marks could otherwise form.
covers. Note:
Brush following the nap of the fabric
Always work on the dirt from the outside
Brush covers following the nap of using a soft brush, without applying in so that the dirt is not spread over the
the fabric using a soft brush, without pressure. fabric.
applying pressure.
Removing stains
Basic cleaning - every six months
Caution:
First carry out the weekly basic Caution:
Do not use cleaning products containing
cleaning. Remove dirt as quickly as possible to solvents (e.g. cleaning benzine, acetone,
Make a foam from a mild, lukewarm avoid permanent stains and prevent dam- alcohol, etc.). This would damage the
soap (e.g. from a mild-action deter- age to the covers. micro-fibre covers and equipment parts
gent). made of plastic or foam beyond repair.
Apply the foam evenly over all the
covers using a soft, slightly damp Caution: Remove the used soap using a clean,
sponge. Do not use cleaning products containing soft sponge.
Wait until the freshly cleaned covers solvents (e.g. cleaning benzine, acetone, Wait until the freshly cleaned areas
alcohol, etc.). This would damage the are completely dry.
are completely dry. micro-fibre covers and equipment parts
made of plastic or foam beyond repair.
Remove as much dirt as possible

using a lint-free cloth.

Operation
Care/cleaning of leather covers

Caution: Note:
The covers must be completely dry before Danger. Regular care and basic cleaning help to
they are used again. Permanent pressure maintain the value and high-quality ap-
marks could otherwise form. Observe the general information/safety pearance of leather covers, as well as the
precautions in this section. long-term durability and suppleness of the
Finally, brush the cover and the leather. For this reason, carry out basic
cleaned areas using a soft brush cleaning at least four times a year. Carry
following the nap of the fabric. Caution: out basic cleaning more regularly if neces-
To avoid leaving chalky outlines or water sary, depending on use and the level of
marks, use only distilled water for clean- dirt.
Caution:
ing.
If in any doubt, use a professional textile Basic cleaning - every quarter
cleaning company.
Remove coarse dirt with a very soft
Caution: brush or a vacuum cleaner.
Minimise exposure to direct sunlight to
avoid colour fading.
Caution:
Do not use a sharp-edged vacuuming
nozzle or too hard a brush, otherwise you
could damage the leather beyond repair.
Moisten a soft, lint-free cloth with

distilled water.
Wipe leather upholstery down with a
damp cloth.

Operation
Remove the soap solution used using

Caution: clean, distilled water. Caution:
Do not use a cloth or sponge with a If in any doubt, use a professional leather
rough surface as this could scratch the Note: cleaning company.
leather upholstery or damage it beyond
All dirt and soap residues must be com-
repair.
pletely removed. If in doubt, rinse again.
Leather care products
Note:
Caution:
Note: Information about suitable leather
To prevent the formation of permanent care products can be obtained from
To avoid the formation of outlines, not
pressure marks, leather upholstery has to your EvoBus Service Partner or from a
only should the mark be treated but also
be dried off fully before subsequent use. professional leather cleaning company.
the wider area around it.
Removing stains
Then dry the cleaned areas using a
hairdryer set to medium heat, keep-
Caution: ing it moving in a circular motion at a
Remove dirt as soon as possible to pre- distance of 30 cm to 40 cm.
vent permanent stains or damage to the
covers. Caution:
Remove as much dirt as possible The leather covers must be completely

dry before they are sat on again. Perman-
using a soft, lint-free cloth.
ent pressure marks could otherwise form.
Gently work a mild, lukewarm soap
solution into the dirty area.
Then wipe the dirt up using a clean
cloth.

At a glance
Table of contents
Driver's area overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Switches on the left section of the instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Switches on the right section of the instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Tachograph (installation position) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
DTCO tachograph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Tachograph (display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Destination display safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Destination display control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Door pushbuttons in the driver's area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Scope of tools and emergency equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Location of the fire extinguishers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Location of the first-aid kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Location of the tow bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Location of spare mirror (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Reversing aid display in the exterior mirror (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

At a glance
Table of contents
Driver's rest area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Switches/controllers in the driver's rest area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Windscreen washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Tour guide refrigerator control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Seat belt reminder display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Exterior flaps on S 415 GT-HD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Exterior flaps on S 416 GT-HD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Opening/closing the service cover under the driver's window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Layout and function description: fire extinguishing system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Fire extinguishing system operating and malfunction displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

At a glance

At a glance
Driver's area overview
Driver's area overview

At a glance
Switches on the left section of the instrument panel
No. Description Page No. Description Page Switches on the left section of the
instrument panel
1 Switches on the 83 8 Right-hand steer-
left section of the ing wheel buttons Note:
instrument panel
9 Tachograph The overview shows the maximum utilisa-
2 Control panel for tion of the instrument panel with switches
10 Left-hand steering in their designated position. To accom-
audio/video sys-
wheel buttons modate the customisation requirements
tem in driver’s
11 Steering column of the customer, the switches may have
area and passen- 125
switch for light been assigned to different positions on
ger compartment the instrument panel.
and wiper func-
3 Instrument cluster tions
4 Switches on the 86 12 Ignition switch
right section of 121
the instrument 13 Adjustable steer-
panel ing column
5 Navigation system 14 Heating/ventila-
312
display screen tion/air-condition-
ing (HVAC) control
6 Parking brake and
181 panel
emergency release
device
7 Steering column
126
switch for retarder
and cruise control
(overview)

At a glance

At a glance
No. Description Page No. Description Page
1 Driver's area light- 6.2 Passenger stop

ing switch request system
enable switch (op-
2 Pushbutton for tion)
driver's roller sun-
7 Kitchenette enable
blind (option)
switch (option)
3 Pushbutton for
co-driver's roller 8 Lavatory enable
sunblind (option) switch (option)
4 Control panel for
audio/video sys-
tem in driver’s
area and passen-
ger compartment
5 Heating/ventila-
tion/air-condition-
ing (HVAC) control
panel
6.1 Attendant call sys-
tem switch (op-
tion)

At a glance
Switches on the right section of the instrument panel
Switches on the right section of the

instrument panel

At a glance
No. Description Page No. Description Page No. Description Page
9 Electrical circuit > 16 Electronic Stability 23 Door II pushbutton

100 V (option) Program (ESP)
OFF pushbutton
10 Reading lamps 24 Tachograph
17 Lane assistant
switch 25
warning system Navigation system
pushbutton (op- display
11 Centre aisle light-
ing switch tion) 26 Bus stop brake
18 Active Brake As- emergency release
12 Passenger-com- sist OFF pushbut- switch (option)
partment light- ton (option) 27 Bus stop brake
ing position I+II
19 Hazard warning pushbutton (op-
switch
lamps switch tion)
13 Neutral gearshift
204 28 Pushbutton for
pushbutton 20 Roof hatch switch raising/lowering
- air in/air out the bus
14 Axle load trans-
fer switch (3-axle 21 Roof hatch switch 29 Normal-level push-
buses only) 200
- air in/air out button
15 Switch for deac-
206 22 Door I pushbutton 30 Headlamp clean-
tivating pedal-ac-
ing system OFF
tivated continuous
switch (option)
braking

At a glance
No. Description Page No. Description Page
31 Pushbutton for 38 Central locking

reversing camera switch for the
washer system left-side luggage
(option) compartment
32 Switch for the 39 Central locking
driver's window switch for the
heating/mirror right-side luggage
heating compartment
33 Windscreen heat- 40 Reverse warning
ing switch (option) buzzer switch
34 Driver's power 41 Emergency valve

window pushbut- reset pushbutton
ton (option)
35 Mirror adjuster 42 Rotary light switch
36 PA system switch
37 Horn changeover
switch (option)

At a glance

At a glance
Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster

At a glance
Tachograph (installation position)
No. Description Page No. Description Page Tachograph (installation position)

Tachograph (1) is located in the right-
1 Indicator lamp for 9 Exhaust gas clean- hand section of the instrument panel.
the left-hand turn ing system mal-
signals function display
(SCR system)
2 Main-beam indic-
ator lamp 10 Selector but-
ton for trip
3 Dipped-beam in-
meter/time
dicator lamp
11 Reset button
4 STOP lamp
12 Menu button
5 ESP lamp
13 DIAG button
6 Parking brake and
14 SET button
brake system mal- M68_00-0348-71
function indicator 15 Dimmer button
lamp 16 Display screen
7 Indicator lamp for
the right-hand turn
signals
8 Tachograph warn-
ing lamp

At a glance
DTCO tachograph
DTCO tachograph

At a glance
DTCO tachograph
1 Display screen: Screen dis- 4 Download/calibration inter- 7 Printer drawer release but-
plays vary according to the face: There is an interface ton: This button is used to
operating state of the bus. under the cover. This in- release the printer drawer, for
refer to “Display variants” terface cannot be enabled example, for inserting a new
in the manufacturer's operat- without an inserted company roll of paper.
ing instructions. card, control card or work- 8 Tear-off edge
2 Key panel, driver 1 shop card. 9 Menu buttons: Buttons for
For details, refer to “Access entering, displaying or printing
Note: rights for tachograph cards” data.
in the manufacturer's operat- Refer to “Calling up menu
Activity button, driver 1/card
slot ejector button, driver 1
ing instructions. functions” in the manufac-
5 Key panel, driver 2 turer's operating instructions.
3 Card slot, driver 1: Driver 1,
the current driver of the bus,
inserts his driver card into Note:
card slot 1. Activity button, driver 2/card
slot ejector button, driver 2
Note: 6 Card slot, driver 2: Driver 2,
Insert the card with the chip who is not currently driving
facing upwards in the direc- the bus, inserts his driver
tion of the printed arrow. card into card slot 2.
Note:
Insert the card with the chip
facing upwards in the direc-
tion of the printed arrow.

At a glance
Tachograph (display)
Tachograph (display) 9 Display field for total distance Destination display safety precau-
recorder/trip meter tions
For notes on safety and operation,

10 To reset the trip meter
also refer to the manufacturer's operat-
Press and hold to reset the trip meter to ing instructions.
0.
M68_00-0276-71
7 Speed display
8 Warning lamp
When lit, this means that there is a mes-
sage on the tachograph display screen.
Driver symbol + fault code = operator er-
ror (recording sheet missing or inserted
incorrectly or card missing or inserted
incorrectly). Fault code = system fault
(contact a service centre).

At a glance

At a glance
Destination display control panel

At a glance
Route and/or destination numbers (3 Button 1 Button 9

or 4-digit numbers) are entered by the
Route/destination protocol selection To decrease the tens digit
driver using the control panel for the
destination display. Pressing button 1 Button 2 Button 10
toggles between the route number and Confirmation of the selected message To decrease the ones digit
destination number protocols. The act-
ive protocol is displayed on the control Button 3 Load slot (11)
panel's display screen. Each digit can be To increase the thousands digit Using the PCMCIA card (short: PC card),
increased or decreased. Pressing button which is inserted into the load slot, it is
2 sends the set number in the protocol Button 4 possible to load customer-specific data
selected to the displays (front, side and To increase the hundreds digit or software and store it to the control
rear). This number represents the route unit. The following message appears on
and/or destination number of the bus. Button 5 the control panel's display screen follow-
To increase the tens digit ing a successful transfer: DOWNLOAD
Note: OK. The following message appears if
Button 6
Switch on the ignition switch before oper- the data could not be transferred: NO
ation. To increase the ones digit VALID DATA.
Button 7
Note: To decrease the thousands digit
The data last displayed are stored so that Button 8
the most recent settings are retained fol-
To decrease the hundreds digit
lowing a power supply interruption.

At a glance
Door pushbuttons in the driver's area
Door pushbuttons in the driver's

area Danger.
Door pushbuttons for front left door (1) If the display flashes, correct operation
and centre right door (2) with integrated of the doors is no longer guaranteed. Do
warning lamp (locator lighting also ON not move the bus if a warning lamp in
when Lights ON). the door pushbutton lights up or a yel-
low or red alert is shown on the display
screen. If you attempt to do so, a red
Note: alert will appear on the display screen
The warning lamp lights up when: - a and the warning buzzer will sound.
door is open - a door is not fully closed
(door not latched). M68_00-0349-71
Note:
A door cannot be operated unless the
Note: ignition starter switch is ON, the bus is
The warning lamp flashes in the following stationary and the doors have been un-
situations: - emergency valve operated locked.
- operating pressure too low (depressur-
ised bus door) - a door is open and the
bus is moving faster than 3 km/h - door
malfunction.

At a glance
Scope of tools and emergency equipment
Scope of tools and emergency Location of the fire extinguishers Location of the first-aid kits
equipment
Tools and emergency equipment:
Warning triangle
Hydraulic jack 10 t maximum load
with base board (observe the manu-
facturer's operating instructions).
Hydraulic jack 5 t maximum load
(3-axle buses only) (observe the man-
ufacturer's operating instructions).
Ramp
M86_00-0425-71 M86_00-0424-71
Wheel chock
The portable fire extinguisher (1) is loc- First-aid kits (1) are located on the right-
WAF 27/32 socket spanner
ated under the first row of seats on the hand side behind the driver’s seat.
Towing pins right.
Spatula to open the service covers
on the roof
Crank for emergency operation of the
driver's window
Tool box (containing spare bulbs,
valve connector, tyre inflation hose,
torch and warning lamp, etc.)

At a glance
Location of the tow bar
Location of the tow bar Location of spare mirror (option) Reversing aid display in the exterior
The tow bar is bolted into the left-side mirror (option)
luggage compartment to the rear of the
front axle.
M88_00-0009-01
There is a replacement mirror (1) in the M82_00-0006-01
left-side luggage compartment immedi- The reversing aid informs the driver of
ately to the rear of the front axle. It is the distance to an obstacle. The revers-
designed to act as an emergency mir- ing aid is activated automatically when
ror only. Undo 4 bolts (2) to remove the reverse gear is engaged. There are three
mirror differently coloured LEDs in the left and
For “Removing the exterior mirror/fit- right-hand sides at the bottom of the
ting the emergency mirror”, refer to the rear-view mirror behind the mirror glass
“Practical advice” section of the Operat- which act as indicators. The mirror is
ing Instructions. transparent at this point.

At a glance
Reversing aid display in the exterior mirror (option)
Function of the reversing aid

Danger. Danger.
The reversing aid is only a tool designed The reversing aid assists the driver when
to help you and it may not detect all parking but does not release him from
obstacles. It does not relieve you of the the legal obligation to drive carefully (en-
necessity to pay attention. You are re- suring safety when reversing, observe the
sponsible for safety at all times and must legal requirements in all countries con-
continue to pay attention to the immedi- cerned). The reversing aid function is not
ate surroundings when parking and man- possible when operating the bus with a
oeuvring. You will otherwise endanger trailer or ski holder.
yourself and others.
Caution:
Danger. M82_00-0006-01
Make sure when parking that you pay
When reverse gear is engaged, green attention to objects above and below the
Make sure that there are no persons
or animals in the area in which you are
LED (1) lights up when there is a dis- sensors, e.g. flower pots or trailer tow
manoeuvring. You could otherwise injure tance of 1.5 metres to the obstacle, bars. The reversing aid does not detect
them. yellow LED (2) at 80 cm and red LED such objects at close range. You could
(3) at 40 cm. When reverse gear is en- otherwise damage the bus or the objects.
gaged and the system is fully functional,
the red LED must light up for approxim-
ately 0.5 seconds. If the red LED flashes Note:
twice every 6 seconds, there is a mal- Sources of ultrasonic radiation, e.g the
function in the system. compressed-air brake system or a pneu-
matic hammer, could adversely affect the
reversing aid.

At a glance
Driver's rest area
Driver's rest area

At a glance
Driver's rest area
1 Ventilation flaps
2 Intercom (connection to the
driver)
3 Switchable interior lights
4 Not assigned
5 Not assigned
6 Air-conditioning switch (op-
tion)
7 Switch for ventilation blower
speed I and II
8 Heating controller

At a glance
Switches/controllers in the driver's rest area
Switches/controllers in the driver's

rest area

At a glance
Switches/controllers in the driver's rest area
Air-conditioning switch (6) (option) Switch for ventilation blower speed

I and II (7) Note:
Warm: turn the controller clockwise.
This switch enables air conditioning in Note:

the driver's rest area. When the switch is pressed, the blower Cold: turn the controller anti-clockwise.
for ventilating the driver's rest area oper-
Note: ates at half speed or full speed, depend-
ing on the switch position. Note:
The function is possible only if the air
conditioning in the passenger compart- The engine or the water heater must be
ment has been activated. Note: running.
The air from vents (1) may be hot or

cold. This depends on the position of
Note: controller (8) and switch position (6).
Maximum air-conditioning output is
achieved when controller (8) is turned Heating controller (8)
fully anti-clockwise. Manual, infinitely variable adjustment of
the outlet temperature.

At a glance
Windscreen washer reservoir

At a glance
1 Windscreen washer reservoir

filler opening
Note:
The windscreen washer fluid
reservoir is accessible through
the service cover below the
driver's window.
Note:
Antifreeze part number
A 001 986 45 71 11

At a glance
Tour guide refrigerator control panel
Tour guide refrigerator control

panel

At a glance
Seat belt reminder display
1 Malfunction lamp Seat belt reminder display

2 Thermostat controller Seat belt reminder display
3 Catch
M00_00-0153-01
With the ignition switch switched on and

the doors closed, “seat belt reminder”
symbol (2) is displayed in the passenger
compartment for five minutes as soon as
the bus has pulled away.

At a glance
Exterior flaps on S 415 GT-HD

At a glance
1 Spare wheel
2 Main switch panel
3 Fuel tank/AdBlue tank
4 Multi-purpose room (option)
5 Luggage compartment
6 Luggage compartment or lav-
atory
7 Luggage compartment /
multi-purpose room, driver-
's rest area (option)
8 Auxiliary switch panel
9 Stowage compartment
10 Exhaust system / preheater
11 Fuel tank
12 Battery, electrics, battery isol-
ating switch
14 Air cleaner
15 Stowage compartment
16 Radiator
17 Engine compartment

At a glance

At a glance
Opening/closing the service cover under the driver's window
1 Spare wheel 19 Engine compartment Opening/closing the service cover

2 Main switch panel under the driver's window
3 Multi-purpose room
4 Multi-purpose room (option)
6 Luggage compartment/lavat-
ory (option)
7 Luggage compartment /
multi-purpose room, driver-
's rest area (option)
8 AdBlue tank/multi-purpose
room (option)
9 Auxiliary switch panel M00_00-0591-71
10 Fuel tank To release: To release the service
11 Exhaust system/auxiliary cover, pull handle (1).
heating unit
Danger.
13 Battery, electrics, battery isol-
ating switch Do not pull the release lever while the
vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the ser-
vice cover could open.
15 Air intake
17 Fuel tank
18 Radiator

At a glance
Layout and function description: fire extinguishing system
To close: Close service cover (1) Layout and function description:

Note: with a gentle push. fire extinguishing system
Handle (1) is located on the floor of the The fire extinguishing system comprises
bus to the right-hand side of the driver's Danger. the following five main components: Ex-
seat. tinguisher tank, detection agent tank,
When you close the service cover, there
is a risk of injury from entrapment. detection line, extinguisher lines and ex-
The service cover is released.
tinguisher nozzles.
You should hear the service cover A trigger valve is fitted to the extinguish-
engage. Check whether the service er tank. The trigger valve is connected
cover has engaged correctly. to the detection agent tank by the de-
tection line. The pressure (approxim-
ately 24 bar) of the detection agent tank
therefore acts on the trigger valve. Ex-
tinguisher lines are connected to the
extinguisher tank. The extinguisher lines
in the engine compartment are equipped
with extinguisher nozzles. The detection
agent tank is filled with nitrogen gas and
M00_00-0592-71
Glysantin.
To open: Open service cover (1) to-
In the event of a fire in the engine com-
wards you and hold it in position.
partment or in the installation area of
the auxiliary heating unit, the detec-
tion line melts and the nitrogen gas and
Glysantin escapes. The drop in pres-
sure in the detection line depressur-
ises the trigger valve on the extinguisher

At a glance
Fire extinguishing system operating and malfunction displays
tank and thus triggers the extinguishing Fire extinguishing system operating
process. The highly pressurised extin- Danger. and malfunction displays
guishing fluid (approximately 100 bar) is
Under unfavourable circumstances, the Fire extinguishing system
forced out of the extinguisher tank into fire extinguishing system may not be able
the extinguisher lines. The extinguish- malfunction
to extinguish the fire completely and per-
ing fluid is sprayed from the extinguisher manently. Further measures will then be
nozzles as a fine mist. The fire extin- required as necessary.
guishing system is monitored by two
pressure switches. A warning message
alerts the driver to the fact that the fire Note: If the fire extinguishing system fails or if
extinguishing system has been triggered. In the GT-HD, the extinguisher tank and there is a malfunction, or even a blaze
the detection agent tank are located on that goes unnoticed, this icon appears in
Caution: the right-hand side to the rear of the rear conjunction with a yellow warning level
bench seat. In the GT, they are located malfunction in the instrument cluster.
Due to the way in which the system inside the right-side air duct in the rear
works, there is a time delay between end.
the start of the fire and the melting of Caution:
the detection line. The possibility of fire In the event of a yellow warning level
damage cannot therefore be completely malfunction occurring with no breakout
ruled out even if the fire extinguishing of vehicle fire, it is permissible to drive on
system is functioning correctly. carefully but the bus should be checked
by an EvoBus Service Partner at the earli-
est opportunity.

At a glance
Fire extinguishing system operating and malfunction displays
Fire extinguishing system triggered
A triggering of the fire extinguishing sys-

tem (e.g. due to a fire in the engine
compartment) is indicated by this icon
in conjunction with a red warning level
malfunction in the instrument cluster. A
warning signal sounds.
Danger.
Risk of accident. If this message is dis-
played, bring the vehicle to an immediate
halt, road and traffic conditions permit-
ting, open all the doors and allow the
passengers to disembark. Then operate
the master safety switch and apply the
parking brake. Leave the vehicle and im-
plement or arrange further measures if
necessary.

Driver's area controls
Table of contents
Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Adjusting the steering column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Exterior lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Steering column switch for light and wiper functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Steering column switch for retarder and cruise control (overview) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Overview of steering wheel buttons and display screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Display screen (description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Permanent displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Trailer turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Overview of main menus and submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Display screen menu control logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Event notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Instrument cluster buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Resetting the trip meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
RESET button (to reset trip computer data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Table of contents
Menu button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

DIAG button (on-board diagnostics) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
SET button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Setting the language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Adjusting the volume of the turn signal buzzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Setting the wipe interval/rain sensor sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Setting the courtesy lighting switch-on duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Switching the daytime driving lights on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Activating the transmission shift system failsafe mode (GO 240-8 PowerShift) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Adjusting the display brightness (daytime brightness) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Adjusting the display brightness (night brightness) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Right-hand steering wheel buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Volume adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Radio volume adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Driver's area on-board PA system volume adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Adjusting the volume of the intercom in the driver's rest area/on-board kitchenette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Table of contents
Telephone volume adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Initiating an outgoing call using the driver's rest area/kitchenette intercom (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Initiating an outgoing call using the driver's area intercom (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Answering an incoming call using the driver's area intercom (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Mobile phone Bluetooth link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Initiating an outgoing call using a mobile phone (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Answering an incoming call using a mobile phone (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Operating/malfunction displays: telephone (intercom) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Parking brake and emergency release device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Air suspension safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Raising/lowering the bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Normal level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Operating/malfunction displays: level control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Activating/deactivating axle load transfer for trailing axle (3-axle buses only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Activating/deactivating the bus stop brake (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Important notes on the steering system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Table of contents
Turning the steering wheel when the bus is stationary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Operating the bus stop brake emergency release switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Switching on the panorama camera (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Ignition switch
Ignition switch 1 Steering unlocked: All con- Adjusting the steering column
sumer units can be switched
on.
Danger.
2 Drive position
Never lock the steering while the bus is 3 Starting position
in motion. Whenever you disembark, even
for a short time, always remove the key
so that the bus cannot be started by chil-
dren or other unauthorised persons.
M46_00-0030-01
To adjust the steering column, press

the lower section of pushbutton (1).
Danger.
Only make adjustments when the bus is
stationary. Lock the steering column in
M54_00-0083-01
place after you have adjusted the steering
wheel to match the driver's requirements.
0 Rest position: Insert or re- To do this, press the upper section of
move the key in this posi- pushbutton (1).
tion; the side lamps can be
switched on.

Exterior lighting
Exterior lighting the right. Please observe the rules and

Note: regulations of the country in which the
Rotary light switch
If pushbutton (1) is not pressed again the vehicle is operated. - refer to the “Prac-
steering column will automatically lock tical advice” section of the Operating In-
after approx. 12 seconds. structions (Adjusting the headlamps for
driving on the left or right).
A Automatic headlamp fea-

Danger.
ture/daytime driving lights
After the adjustable steering column has switched on (country-specific)
been adjusted, the driver must check that 0 Lights switched off/daytime
all instruments and indicator lamps are driving lights switched on
still visible.
(country-specific)
1 Side lamps
M54_00-1569-71 2 Headlamps
In the interests of safety, it is advisable 3 Front foglamps (pull switch to
to drive with the lights switched on even 1st detent)
in the daytime. 4 Rear foglamp (pull switch to
2nd detent)
Note:
Automatic headlamp feature
In a country where traffic drives on the
other side of the road to that in the coun- The side lamps, dipped-beam headlamps
try where the vehicle was registered, and licence plate lamps switch on and
there is a risk of oncoming traffic being off in response to changes in the bright-
dazzled by the asymmetrical dipped-beam ness of ambient light. When the key is
headlamps. The Litronic headlamps can in position 1 in the ignition lock, the side
be adjusted for driving on the left or on lamps switch on and off automatically.

Exterior lighting
When the engine is running, the dipped- Daytime driving lights (country- Headlamps
beam headlamps, side lamps and licence specific) (option) Dipped-beam or main-beam headlamps
plate lamps switch on and off automatic-
As soon as the engine is switched on, (depending on the steering column
ally.
the side lamps, the dipped-beam head- switch position), side lamps and licence
lamps and the licence plate lamps switch plate lamps switched on.
Danger. on automatically.
If bright light strikes the sensor when the Note:
rotary light switch is in position (A), the Note: Make sure that the key is in position 2
headlamps may switch off temporarily
Turning the rotary light switch to any pos- in the ignition lock or that the engine is
or, in fog, the lights may not switch on
ition other than (A) or (0) switches on the running.
automatically at all. As this would pose
a risk of accident, it is prudent to turn lights assigned to this switch position.
Front foglamps
the rotary light switch to position (2) in
dark or foggy conditions. The automatic For notes on switching the daytime In addition to the side lamps, dipped-
headlamp feature is simply a driving aid. driving lights on and off, refer to the beam headlamps or main-beam head-
The driver is responsible at all times for “Driver's area controls” section of the lamps, the front foglamps switch on
ensuring that the vehicle lighting is con- Operating Instructions. provided the ignition starter switch has
trolled correctly.
been switched to ON. Indicator lamp
(3.1) lights up.
Danger.
Danger.
If it becomes dark or foggy, turn the
rotary light switch from (A) to (2) without In foggy conditions, pull the rotary light
delay. Otherwise, there would be a risk of switch out to the first detent (3).
accident if the headlights were to switch
off temporarily.

Exterior lighting
Cornering lamps
Danger. Danger.
Special front foglamps that illuminate
If it becomes foggy, turn the rotary light In foggy conditions, pull the rotary light the side of the bend towards which the
switch from (A) to (2) without delay. Oth- switch out to the second detent (4). vehicle is being steered. The cornering
erwise, there would be a risk of accident lamps are activated only when it is dark,
if the headlights were to switch off tem- at a road speed of below 25 mph (40
porarily. Danger. km/h) and if the front foglamps have
If it becomes foggy, turn the rotary light not been switched on. The cornering
switch from (A) to (2) without delay. Oth- lamps are switched on either by the turn
Note:
erwise, there would be a risk of accident signals or by the steering angle sensor.
When the rotary light switch is in position if the headlights were to switch off tem-
(A), neither the front foglamps nor the porarily.
rear foglamp can be switched on. Note:
Make sure that the engine is running
Rear foglamp and that the dipped-beam headlamps are
Note:
switched on (rotary light switch in posi-
The rear foglamp is switched on in ad- When the rotary light switch is in position tion (A) or (2)).
dition to the front foglamps. Indicator (A), neither the front foglamps nor the
lamp (4.1) lights up. When a trailer or rear foglamp can be switched on.
skibox is connected, the rear foglamp on
Note:
the towing vehicle is disabled and only
the rear foglamp connected via the trail- Switch on the turn signals. The corner-
Note:
ing lamp on the same side as the active
er socket is enabled. In respect of rear foglamp operation, the turn signals switches on and it remains
legal requirements of the country con- switched on even if the steering wheel is
cerned must be observed. turned in the opposite direction.

Steering column switch for light and wiper functions
Steering column switch for light

Note: Note: and wiper functions
Turn the steering wheel in the desired The courtesy lighting has a selectable
direction. In forward gear: the cornering switch-on duration of 15, 30, 45, or 60
lamp on the inside of the bend comes on. seconds. At the end of the switch-on dur-
In reverse gear: the cornering lamp on ation, the courtesy lighting switches off
the outside of the bend comes on. automatically.
For notes on selecting a courtesy

Note: lighting switch-on duration, refer to the
To switch off the cornering lamp, switch “Driver's area controls” section of the
off the turn signals or turn the steering Operating Instructions.
wheel back towards the straight-ahead
position until the turn signals switch off
M54_00-0081-01
automatically.
1 Horn: Press button
Courtesy lighting 2 Indicate left and right with
In dark conditions, the courtesy lighting automatic reset: Push the
(front foglamps) switches on whenever switch stalk beyond the point
the vehicle is completely unlocked or of resistance until it clicks
locked. The courtesy lighting illuminates into position.
the area around the bus so that people 3 One-touch indicators for a
can find their way more easily. lane change: Press the switch
stalk only briefly (not beyond
the pressure point). The turn
signals flash five times.

Steering column switch for retarder and cruise control (overview)
4 Headlamp flasher: Pull the Steering column switch for retarder

stalk upwards and cruise control (overview) Note:
5 Main-beam and dipped-beam The speed is maintained constant only for
headlamps: Stalk in basic Combined drive/brake cruise
control as long as the braking performance of the
position = dipped-beam head- retarder remains sufficient for this to be
lamps, stalk down = main- possible. Whenever necessary, shift down
beam headlamps and reduce speed manually.
6 Windscreen wipers: Turn the
sleeve on the switch stalk:
speed 0 = off, speed INT = in- Note:
termittent, speed I = normal, In buses with distance cruise control
speed II = rapid (ART) (option), this function is activated
7 Wipe and wash: Push sleeve automatically whenever combined
on the switch stalk towards drive/brake cruise control is activated.
the steering column. With
windscreen wipers switched 1.1 Tap briefly
off = windscreen wipe and M54_00-1003-01 (< 0.5 seconds) = cur-
wash rent speed is set and shown
Note: on the display screen.
Precondition: bus travelling faster than 10
mph (15 km/h). The clutch and service Note:
brake pedals must be fully released and Tap briefly again
the continuous brakes must not be active. (< 0.5 seconds) = set speed
increased in increments of
0.5 km/h

1.3 Cruise control is deac-

Note: Note: tivated and the last stored
Press and hold (> Tap briefly again speed is retained by the con-
0.5 seconds) = bus speed (< 0.5 seconds) = set speed trol unit (until the ignition
increased until switch is reduced by 1/3 mph starter switch is switched to
released. When the steering (0.5 km/h). OFF).
column switch is released, the
current speed is set as the Note:
Note:
new value.
Press and hold Combined drive/brake cruise
(> 0.5 seconds) = bus speed control is deactivated auto-
Note: reduced until switch released. matically as soon as the ser-
With distance cruise control When the steering column vice brake is applied in cruise
active (option), pressing and switch is released, the current control mode.
holding the switch increases speed is set as the new
the cruising speed in incre- value. Note:
ments of 3 mph (5 km/h).
When the combination switch If the clutch pedal is de-
Note: pressed, cruise control will
is released, the selected value
is set as the new cruising With distance cruise control remain active when the clutch
speed. active (option), pressing and pedal is subsequently re-
holding the switch reduces leased. However, cruise con-
1.2 Tap briefly trol will be deactivated if the
the cruising speed in incre-
(< 0.5 seconds) = cur- clutch is depressed for more
rent speed is set and shown When the combination switch than 5 seconds. A short sig-
on the display screen, or is released, the selected value nal sounds to indicate that
resumption of last stored is set as the new cruising cruise control is in standby
speed. speed. mode.

For detailed operating informa- Variable speed limiter (Temposet) 1.4 Tap briefly = function
tion, refer to “Activating combined changeover to speed
drive/brake cruise control” in the “Driv- limiter (LIM). The function
ing systems” section of the Operating changeover is indicated by
Instructions. the “LIM” symbol on the
display screen. If the steering
column switch (A) is now
moved to position (1.1) or
(1.2), the current speed will
be set as the limit speed. The
set value is shown on the
display screen. The driver
M54_00-1003-01
has to continue to use the
accelerator pedal.
Note:
Press and hold (1.1): the set
limit speed will continue to
be increased in increments
of 3 mph (5 km/h) until the
control is released.

tems” section of the Operating Instruc-

Note: Note: tions.
Press and hold (1.2): the set The speed limiter can be Distance cruise control (option)
limit speed will continue to activated at speeds above
be decreased in increments 6 mph (10 km/h); between
of 3 mph (5 km/h) until the 6 mph (10 km/h) and
control is released. 10 mph (15 km/h) it is
always limited to 10 mph
(15 km/h). It is possible
Note:
to exceed the set speed
To deactivate: combination temporarily by depressing the
switch to position 1.3 or accelerator pedal beyond the
activate cruise control (by stop (kickdown). As soon
pressing button (1.4)). as the accelerator pedal is
released, the stored limit
speed will become effective
once more. M54_00-0994-01
1.5 Distance cruise control

Note: off/on
The retarder is activated auto-
matically if the set limit speed
is exceeded by more than 4
km/h in overrun mode.
For detailed operating information,

refer to “Activating the variable speed
limiter (Temposet)” in the “Driving sys-

Continuous brakes
Note: Note:
In buses with distance cruise Operate the sliding sleeve
control (ART) (option), this (C) briefly = the specified
function is activated auto- distance will be displayed
matically whenever combined
drive/brake cruise control
Note:
is activated. It can be de-
activated and reactivated Operate the sliding sleeve
manually. To do this, slide (C) for longer = the specified
sleeve (C) towards the steer- distance will be increased
ing column.
1.6 Reducing the specified For detailed operating information,
distance refer to “Activating distance cruise con- M54_00-0082-01
trol” in the “Driving systems” section of To activate the continuous brakes:
Note: the Operating Instructions.
Operate the sliding sleeve Danger.
(C) briefly = the specified Do not activate the continuous brake (re-
distance will be displayed tarder) on a slippery road surface. The
wheels could lock - risk of skidding.
Note:
Operate the sliding sleeve
(C) for longer = the specified
distance will be reduced
1.7 Increasing the specified
distance

Engine speed increase

Danger. Danger.
If the accelerator pedal is operated while As long as ABS is fully functional, an ac-
the continuous brakes are active, the con- tivated continuous brake is deactivated
tinuous brakes are deactivated and brak- automatically if one or both of the wheels
ing output is reduced to zero. on the driven axle threatens to lock. If
an ABS malfunction message is present,
there is no guarantee that this function
Caution: will be carried out - risk of skidding.
Only ever move the combination switch

2.1–2.2 Retarder stage 1–2
through one stage at a time when at-
active
tempting to achieve the necessary braking
torque (do not jerk it directly to the re- 2.3–2.5 Engine brake, con-
M54_00-0082-01
quired position). Except in an emergency, stantly open throttle, retarder
it is prohibited to force the combination stages 3 and 4 active Precondition: bus stationary, engine run-
switch directly to the required position ning.
in one action. However, it is acceptable Note: 1.1 The engine speed can be
to skip several stages at once if you are increased up to a maximum
The combined effect of the
reducing the braking torque. For the op- of 750 rpm.
engine brake and constantly
timum braking torque to be achieved, the 1.3 Engine speed increase off,
open throttle is dependent
engine should be turning within its upper
on the amount of continuous normal idling speed
speed range so that the coolant does not
braking torque available at
overheat.
the time.

Overview of steering wheel buttons and display screen
Overview of steering wheel buttons

and display screen

Display screen (description)
1 Display screen - To go to the next submenu Display screen (description)

2 Plus key down The display screen is active at all times
- To open the “volume adjust- - To move down a line in a list while the ignition is switched on. The
ment” pop-up window 8 Next main menu button display screen is also activated when
- To change settings in a pop- - To go to the next main menu the following functions are used: side
up window up lamps/hazard warning lamps/interior
3 Minus key - To close a pop-up window lighting/door opened from outside. The
- To open the “volume adjust- 9 Back main menu button display screen is a status indicator for
ment” pop-up window - To go to the next main menu showing operating and malfunction in-
- To change settings in a pop- down formation. Additionally, it can be used to
up window - To close a pop-up window display on-board diagnostics information.
4 To pick up the telephone
- To open the “telephone” Note:
pop-up window If a malfunction occurs, it will be dis-
- To receive incoming calls played only if the ignition switch is in
5 To hang up the telephone position 2.
- To open the “telephone”
pop-up window
- To end or reject a call
6 Next arrow button
- To go to the next submenu
up
- To move up a line in a list
7 Back arrow button

Permanent displays
Permanent displays Permanent display, right-hand side same symbol position, only the most im-
portant braking function is displayed at
Permanent display, left-hand side
any one time. A white symbol indicates
active braking, grey is used for an inact-
ive or preselected brake (example: re-
tarder preselected). Field (3) represents
conditions that may affect the driving
characteristics of the bus. As different
functions compete for the same symbol
position, only the most important func-
tion is displayed at any one time.
Permanent display, lower
M54_00-1394-71
M54_00-1372-71 The permanent display field on the right-

The permanent display field on the left- hand side contains gear indicator (1),
hand side contains the fuel gauge. The brake indicator (2) and driving charac-
fuel gauge comprises two vertical bar teristics (3): Gear indicator (1) shows
graphs. Left bar graph (2) shows the the currently selected gear and, in auto-
fill level in the AdBlue tank, right bar matic mode, the automatic drive mode
graph (1) shows the fill level in the diesel indicator “A”. If a transmission malfunc-
tank. tion has occurred, the gear indicator and
automatic drive mode indicator turn red
or yellow, depending on the severity of
the malfunction. Brake indicator (2) rep- M54_00-1395-71
resents the braking functions of the bus.
The left-hand area of the lower perman-
As different functions compete for the
ent display is reserved for important op-

Trailer turn signals
erating displays (1) for the attention of Trailer turn signals

the driver. As there are more operating
displays than there are available symbol
positions, the notifications are prioritised
and assigned to symbol positions in or-
der of preference. If the preferred sym-
bol position for a particular notification
is already occupied by an alert of higher
priority, the alert is shifted to the next
available symbol position. If no symbol
position is available, the notification is
suppressed. The right-hand area of the
lower permanent display is used to dis- M54_00-1396-71
play various status indicators (red alert,
Trailer turn signals (1) on the display
yellow alert, service notification and bulb
screen flash at the same frequency as
defect) (2). The “Bulb defect” status in-
the turn signals.
dicator is displayed whenever an exterior
light has failed. The time (3) and outside
temperature (4) in °C are also shown in
this field. - -°C is displayed if an error
occurs in the transmission of data to the
temperature display.

Overview of main menus and submenus
Overview of main menus and

submenus

Menu structure
1 “Vehicle” main menu Menu structure

1.1 Doors and flaps Note:
Main menus and submenus
1.2 Reversing camera This overview takes all pos-
2 “Assistance” main menu sible items of optional equip-
ment into account. Bus-spe-
2.1 Driver assistance system/ cific menu structures may
navigation splitscreen differ from bus to bus.
2.2 Driver assistance systems
2.3 Navigation
3 “Trip computer” main menu
3.1 After start
3.2 After reset
4 “Monitoring” main menu
4.1 Supply pressures M54_00-1392-71
4.2 Engine The menu system comprises five main

4.3 Voltage menus arranged in a loop. The driver is
able to browse from menu to menu us-
4.4 Operating notifications
ing the main menu buttons on the steer-
5 “Events” main menu ing wheel. For orientation purposes, the
5.1 Overview number (1) of the current main menu
5.2 Event 1 is displayed at the top left of the dis-
5.3 Event 2 play window. Each main menu contains
a series of submenus, which are also ar-
5.4 Event n
ranged in a loop. The number (2) identi-
fying the submenu concerned is shown
in the top right of the display. The only

Menu structure
exception to this principle is the “Events” changes to a different main menu, i.e.
main menu. The submenus in this menu Note: the submenu last viewed in a particu-
are not numbered due to the ever-chan- When the “Next” arrow button is pressed lar main menu will be displayed imme-
ging quantity of event notifications. briefly, the display advances to the next diately the next time the driver changes
higher submenu. If the screen is show- back to this main menu. In this way, the
ing the submenu with the highest number driver could select one submenu with-
Note: in each main menu to be a favourite so
when the button is pressed, the display
When the “Next” main menu button is will return to the submenu with the low- that, whenever the main menu buttons
pressed briefly, the display advances est number (looped submenu structure). are pressed, the display would change
to the next higher main menu. If the from one favourite to another.
screen is showing the main menu with
the highest number when the button 1. “Vehicle” main menu
is pressed, the display will return to Note:
The “Vehicle” main menu displays
the main menu with the lowest number When the “Back” main menu button is
(looped main menu structure).
the status of all doors, flaps and roof
pressed briefly, the display goes back to
the previous submenu. If the screen is hatches. It also enables the driver to
showing the submenu with the lowest view the images transmitted by any
Note: number when the button is pressed, the cameras fitted in bus.
display will return to the submenu with
When the “Back” main menu button is the highest number.
pressed briefly, the display goes back to
the previous main menu. If the screen is
showing the main menu with the lowest
number when the button is pressed, the Note:
display will return to the main menu with After an ignition power cycle, the first
the highest number. submenu in the sequence will be dis-
played the first time a main menu is
called up. As soon as the driver selects
a different submenu, this submenu will be
remembered by the system if the driver

Menu structure
“Door and flaps” submenu

Note: Note:
For operating/malfunction displays, refer If a reversing camera is installed, the im-
to the “Opening/locking” section. age from the reversing camera appears
on the display screen automatically when
“Camera” submenu the driver engages reverse gear. The per-
manent display fields on the left- and
right-hand sides of the screen are hid-
den by the camera image. Only the lower
permanent display field remains visible.
Note:
M54_00-1570-71
The image from the door 2 camera ap-
Closed doors, flaps and ramps are pears on the display screen only when
blacked out, while opened ones appear the driver opens door 2.
in white. In addition, operating displays
appear in the lower permanent display 2. “Assistance” main menu
field. The statuses of the engine M54_00-1521-71
In the “Assistance” main menu, the
compartment flap and roof hatches are The bus may be fitted with cameras that driver can view information from all avail-
also displayed. If the parking brake is enable the driver to monitor door 2 and able driving systems and the navigation
applied, the wheel on the driven axle the area behind the bus. The images system (option).
appears in white. from each of these cameras are dis-
played in their own submenu.

Menu structure
“Driver assistance systems and “Driver assistance system” “Navigation” submenu (option)
navigation splitscreen” submenu submenu
M54_00-1400-71
M54_00-1398-71 M54_00-1399-71 A dedicated submenu is available for
In vehicles equipped with a navigation In a separate submenu, only the driver viewing complete navigation information.
system, the splitscreen shows naviga- assistance systems are shown. Not only are manoeuvre symbol (1) and
tion information and the selected driver the distance (2) to the next manoeuvre
assistance system. point displayed but also the current (3)
and next (4) road. In addition, the head-
Note: er contains the distance (5) from the
destination and the calculated time re-
In this mode, the navigation information is
maining (6) before arrival.
reduced to the manoeuvre symbol and a
numerical value indicating the distance to
the next manoeuvre.

Menu structure
3. “Trip computer” main menu “Supply pressure” submenu

Note:
The trip computer calculates the driving
time, distance covered, average speed Refer to the “Driver's area controls” sec-
and average fuel consumption. tion of the Operating Instructions: “Re-
set button (12) - resetting trip computer
“Ab Start” (After start) submenu data”.
The “Ab Start” (After start) trip computer 4. “Monitoring” main menu
data are reset automatically whenev-
er the ignition remains switched off for In the “Monitoring” main menu, the
longer than four hours. driver can view information about pres-
sures, fill levels, temperatures, etc., sup-
plied by various systems of the vehicle.
Note:
Selected, important operating notifica- M54_00-1401-71
A manual reset is also possible, refer to tions are also displayed in this menu.
the “Driver's area controls” section of the The supply pressure (0 to 12 bar) for
Operating Instructions: “Reset button (12) circuits 1 (front axle or trailing axle), 2
- resetting trip computer data”. (driven axle) and 3 (auxiliary consumers)
is displayed. The white areas of the
“Ab Reset” (After reset) submenu scales highlight the acceptable pressure
The “Ab Reset” (After reset) trip com- range during normal vehicle operation.
puter data continue to be incremen- By contrast, the grey areas of the scales
ted until they are reset manually by the indicate critical pressure values. A mal-
driver. function alert is issued whenever a pres-
sure reaches a critical value. The pres-
sure value can be viewed in the monitor-
ing menu after the malfunction alert has
been acknowledged. The symbol and the

Menu structure
bar graph for the compressed-air circuit “Engine” submenu

concerned are coloured yellow or red, Danger.
depending on how critical the malfunc-
In the event of a red warning level mal-
tion alert is. function, the bus must be stopped imme-
diately (traffic conditions permitting) and
Danger. an EvoBus Service Partner must be noti-
fied.
function, the bus must be stopped imme-
an EvoBus Service Partner must be noti- Caution:
fied. In the event of a yellow warning level
malfunction, it is permissible to drive on
M54_00-1402-71
carefully but the bus should be checked
Caution: by an EvoBus Service Partner at the earli-
The “Engine” submenu displays coolant est opportunity.
In the event of a yellow warning level temperature (1), engine oil pressure (2)
malfunction, it is permissible to drive on (0 to 6 bar) and engine oil level (3). The
carefully but the bus should be checked white areas of the scales indicate the
by an EvoBus Service Partner at the earli- Note:
values to be expected during normal op-
est opportunity. The coolant temperature should be ap-
eration. If a critical value is reached, the
proximately 85 °C when the engine has
associated symbol and bar graph turn warmed up to normal operating temper-
yellow or red. ature. The engine oil pressure should be
higher than 0.5 bar at idling speed and
higher than 2 bar when the bus is being
driven. A negative value (-) for the engine
oil level indicates that the oil level needs
to be topped up (refer to the “Practical

Menu structure
advice” section of the Operating Instruc- “Betriebsmeldungen” (Operating

tions - Engine oil level display) notifications) submenu Note:
The majority of the operating notifications
“Voltage” submenu in this submenu relate to the heating,
ventilation and air-conditioning system.
5. “Events” main menu

In the “Events” main menu, the driver is
able to view the event notifications that
are currently present. As each event
notification constitutes a separate sub-
menu and the quantity of event notific-
ations is ever changing, the submenus
M54_00-1404-71 in this main menu are not individually
Selected, important operating notifica- numbered.
M54_00-1403-71
tions are displayed in their own submenu
The on-board voltage is displayed in this rather than in the lower permanent dis-
separate submenu. play field. These notifications do not
necessarily need to be brought to the
Note: driver's attention. If, however, the driver
The battery voltage display should show would like to view information about the
25 - 28 V when the engine is running. If condition of a specific vehicle system, it
this is not the case you should contact is possible for the driver to call up these
an EvoBus Service Partner at the earliest operating notifications by selecting this
opportunity. menu.

Display screen menu control logic
“Overview” submenu “Ereignismeldungen” (Event Display screen menu control logic

notifications) submenu Display screen sequence at
start-up
M54_00-1405-71
The overview presents a collection of M54_00-1406-71
symbols, one for each event notification. Each event notification has its own sub- M54_00-1407-71
The symbol colour indicates the urgency menu in which the notification is ex- Whenever the ignition starter switch is
of the notifications, i.e. red alerts (1) are plained in more detail. In these sub- switched on, the first display to appear
represented by red symbols and yellow menus, symbol (1) is supplemented by on the display screen is the standby
alerts (2) by yellow symbols. Other event two lines of text (2). The display layout screen with the marque logo. If a fault
notifications (3) are represented by white is the same regardless of the notification occurs at this point, a corresponding
symbols. Each notification category is category. fault alert will be displayed. If no fault
designated one line containing a total of occurs, the system checks whether there
four symbol positions. are any event notifications present. If
there are, the associated pop-up window
opens and the driver has to acknowledge
the event notifications in order of their

Display screen menu control logic
urgency. The system then verifies wheth- Screen display with bus stationary
er the supply pressures for the various Note:
compressed-air circuits are at accept- The operating pressure can be viewed in
able levels. If so, the bus graphic in the main menu 4, submenu 1.
“Vehicle” main menu is then displayed.
However, if a supply pressure is too low, Menu selection
which may be the case if the vehicle The driver can select menus manually
has been parked up for a long period, using the buttons on the steering wheel.
a pop-up window displaying the supply In addition, provided specific condi-
pressures for the various compressed-air tions are fulfilled, the menus alternate
circuits opens (see illustration). The pop- between the “Doors and flaps” submenu
up window closes automatically as soon and the “Driver assistance systems and
as the necessary operating pressure is navigation splitscreen” or “Driver assist- M54_00-1570-71
reached. If the driver acknowledges the ance system” submenu automatically so The driver is shown the “Doors and
pop-up window using the main menu that the driver is always provided with flaps” submenu if any of the doors or
buttons on the steering wheel before all the necessary information while the flaps are open. The submenu is also dis-
the correct pressure has been reached, bus is stationary or in motion without played immediately after the ignition is
another pop-up window opens and dis- the driver having to select these menus switched on. If the driver changes menu
plays a red alert informing the driver manually. manually, the “Driver assistance systems
once more that the operating pressure
and navigation splitscreen” submenu will
is still too low. If the necessary oper-
no longer appear automatically while the
ating pressure is now reached, or if the
vehicle is in motion.
driver acknowledges the red alert, the
bus graphic in the “Vehicle” main menu
will be displayed.

Event notifications
the “Driver assistance systems and Event notifications

Note: navigation splitscreen” submenu. The
Red alert
The “Doors and flaps” submenu continues view reverts to the “Doors and flaps”
to be displayed during slow-speed man- submenu as soon as one of the doors is
oeuvres if luggage compartment flaps are opened.
still open.
Note:
Screen display while the bus is in
motion If the driver had selected a different
menu before this menu change, the view
changes from the “Doors and flaps”
submenu to the menu that the driver had
selected.
M54_00-1408-71
In the event of a red alert, a pop-up win-

dow (1) appears. The pop-up window
displays a symbol (2) for the vehicle
system concerned and two lines of ex-
planatory text (3) below it. A signal also
M54_00-1398-71 sounds. In addition, STOP lamp (4) in
As soon as a minimum speed is the instrument cluster and red status in-
exceeded and all doors and flaps have dicator (5) on the display screen light
been closed, the view automatically up. The driver is able to acknowledge
changes to the “Driver assistance red alerts using the main menu but-
system” submenu or, if the vehicle is tons on the steering wheel but not until
equipped with a navigation system, the vehicle has been brought to a halt

Event notifications
and the parking brake has been applied. Yellow alert continues to be displayed in the “Events”
Pop-up window (1) closes when the alert menu.
is acknowledged. For as long as the
alert remains active, it continues to be Caution:
displayed in the “Events” menu.
In the event of a yellow warning level
Danger. carefully but the bus should be checked
est opportunity.
an EvoBus Service Partner must be noti- Service notification
fied.
M54_00-1409-71
In the event of a yellow alert, a pop-up

window (1) appears. The pop-up win-
dow displays a symbol (2) for the vehicle
system concerned and two lines of ex-
planatory text (3) below it. In addition,
yellow status indicator (4) lights up on
the display screen. Each yellow alert has
to be acknowledged by the driver manu-
ally using main menu buttons (5) on
M54_00-1486-71
the steering wheel. Pop-up window (1)
closes when the alert is acknowledged. Service notifications generally inform the
For as long as the alert remains active, it driver that service products need to be
replenished or wear parts need to be re-
placed. In the event of a service notific-

Event notifications
ation, status indicator (1) on the display

screen lights up. To view all service no-
tifications, the driver has to go to main
menu 5 (2). An overview of any events
that are present is displayed first. Each
event notification has its own submenu,
which the driver can open using arrow
buttons (3) on the steering wheel. A ser-
vice notification displays symbol (4) for
the vehicle system concerned and two
lines of explanatory text (5) below it.
The event notification is not cleared until
the fault has been rectified.


Instrument cluster buttons
Instrument cluster buttons

Resetting the trip meter
10 Trip meter reset button Resetting the trip meter RESET button (to reset trip com-
11 Reset button puter data)
12 Menu button
13 DIAG button Note:
14 SET button The “After start” trip computer data are
15 Dimmer button automatically reset when the ignition is
switched off for longer than four hours.
However, a manual reset is also possible.
Note:
The “After reset” trip computer data con-
M68_00-0279-71 tinue to be incremented until they are
Press and hold selector button (10) reset manually by the driver.
to reset the trip meter to 0.

RESET button (to reset trip computer data)
Note:
The trip computer calculates the distance
covered, driving time, average speed and
average fuel consumption since the start
or last reset.
Note:
The driver can close the pop-up window
at any time using main menu buttons (2)
M54_00-1383-71 on the steering wheel. M54_00-1384-71
Press RESET button (11) on the in- To reset the trip computer data,
strument cluster. either press plus or minus button (4)
Note: on the steering wheel or press RE-
Caution: The pop-up window closes automatically if SET button (11) on the instrument
no button is pressed within 10 seconds. cluster.
If the “Trip computer” main menu is
already open, the trip computer data Using arrow buttons (3) on the steer-
are reset if the driver presses RESET Note:
ing wheel, it is possible to toggle
button (11) on the instrument cluster. Only the trip computer data currently dis-
between “Ab Start” (After start) and
“Ab Reset” (After reset). played are reset.
“Ab Start” (After start) pop-up win-
dow (1) opens.

Menu button
To close the pop-up window, press Menu button DIAG button (on-board diagnostics)
one of main menu buttons (2) on the If the steering wheel keypad fails, The DIAG button is used to call up
steering wheel. the menu levels last selected can be the on-board diagnostics system.
called up using the menu button.
Note: Note:
The pop-up window closes automatically if Note: For notes on safety and operation, refer
no button is pressed within 10 seconds. to the “Practical advice” section of the
If the ignition is OFF, it is only the first
submenu of a main menu that can be Operating Instructions.
called up.
Note:
There is no defined period for automatic
closing of the “On-board diagnostics” pop-
This symbol appears in conjunction up window. The main menu buttons on
with a yellow alert in the event of the steering wheel are the only means by
which it can be closed.
a steering wheel keypad failure or
malfunction.
Caution:
In the event of a yellow warning level
est opportunity.

SET button
SET button Setting the language

Settings cannot be changed unless Note:
the bus is stationary and the parking The pop-up window closes automatically if
brake is applied. no button is pressed within 10 seconds.
Switch on the ignition switch.
Note:
The section below describes how the
driver can change settings using the SET
button and the “SET” pop-up window.
M54_00-1474-71
Press SET button (14) on the instru-

ment cluster.
“SET” pop-up window (1) opens. M54_00-1375-71
Using arrow buttons (3) on the steer-

Note: ing wheel, select “Sprache” (Lan-
guage) (4) and press plus button (5)
at any time using main menu buttons (2) to confirm.
on the steering wheel.

Setting the language
Note:
The pop-up window closes automatically if
no button is pressed within 10 seconds.
Note:
The pop-up window closes automatically
as soon as the parking brake is released.
M54_00-1376-71 M54_00-1377-71
The language currently set (6) is dis- Using arrow buttons (7) on the steer-
played. This is identifiable by white ing wheel, select the desired lan-
text (6.1) and (6.2) guage (8). Language (8.1) is greyed-
out. Activate the newly selected lan-
guage (8) using plus or minus but-
ton (9) on the steering wheel.
Language (8.1) is active when the
text turns white.
To close the pop-up window, press
one of main menu buttons (10) on
the steering wheel.

Adjusting the volume of the turn signal buzzer
Adjusting the volume of the turn To close the pop-up window, press
signal buzzer Note: one of main menu buttons (4) on the
The pop-up window closes automatically if steering wheel.
Note:
ing wheel, select “Blinkersummer” The pop-up window closes automatically if
(Turn signal buzzer) (4) and press
plus button (5) to confirm.
Note:
M54_00-1474-71

ment cluster.
“SET” pop-up window (1) opens.
Note:
The driver can close the pop-up window M54_00-1381-71
at any time using main menu buttons (2) “Blinkersummer” (Turn signal buzzer)
on the steering wheel. pop-up window (1) opens. It is pos-
sible to adjust the volume using
minus button (2) or plus button (3)

Setting the wipe interval/rain sensor sensitivity
Setting the wipe interval/rain

sensor sensitivity Note:
M54_00-1459-71
Using minus button (2) or plus but-

M54_00-1474-71 ton (3), set a value (4) for how sens-
Press SET button (14) on the instru- itively the rain sensor should respond
ment cluster. to any one of the five levels avail-
M54_00-1458-71 able.
“SET” pop-up window (1) opens. Using arrow buttons (3) on the steer-
ing wheel, select “Regensensor” (Rain
Note: sensor) (4) and press plus button (5)
to confirm.
at any time using main menu buttons (2) “Regensensor” (Rain sensor) pop-up
on the steering wheel. window (1) opens.

Setting the courtesy lighting switch-on duration
Setting the courtesy lighting

Note: switch-on duration
M54_00-1460-71
Using minus button (2), switch to a

timed wiper interval (4). M54_00-1474-71
To close the pop-up window, press Press SET button (14) on the instru-
one of main menu buttons (5) on the ment cluster.
steering wheel. “SET” pop-up window (1) opens.
Note: Note:
The pop-up window closes automatically if The driver can close the pop-up window
no button is pressed within 10 seconds. at any time using main menu buttons (2)

Setting the courtesy lighting switch-on duration
Note: Note:
The pop-up window closes automatically if The courtesy lighting is deactivated if a
no button is pressed within 10 seconds. switch-on duration of 0 seconds is selec-
ted.
To close the pop-up window, press

one of main menu buttons (4) on the
steering wheel.
Note:
M54_00-1374-71
“Nachleuchtdauer” (Night lighting no button is pressed within 10 seconds.
period) pop-up window (1) opens. It
is possible to change the switch-on
duration using minus button (2) or Note:
M54_00-1373-71 plus button (3) on the steering wheel. The pop-up window closes automatically
Using arrow buttons (3) on the steer- as soon as the parking brake is released.
ing wheel, select “Nachleuchtdauer” Note:
(Night lighting period) (4) and press
plus button (5) to confirm. The courtesy lighting has a selectable
switch-on duration of 15, 30, 45, or 60
seconds.

Switching the daytime driving lights on/off
Switching the daytime driving lights

on/off Note:
M54_00-1476-71
“Tagfahrlicht” (Daytime driving lights)

M54_00-1474-71 pop-up window (6) opens.
Press SET button (14) on the instru- Switch the daytime driving lights
ment cluster. M54_00-1475-71
OFF using minus button (7). Switch
“SET” pop-up window (1) opens. the daytime driving lights ON using
minus button (8).
ing wheel, select “Tagfahrlicht” (Day-
Note: time driving lights) (4) and press plus To close “Tagfahrlicht” (Daytime driv-
button (5) to confirm. ing lights) pop-up window (6), press
at any time using main menu buttons (2) one of main menu buttons (9) on the
on the steering wheel. steering wheel. To close the “SET”
pop-up window, press one of main
menu buttons on the steering wheel
once more.

Activating the transmission shift system failsafe mode (GO 240-8 PowerShift)
Activating the transmission shift

Note: system failsafe mode (GO 240-8 Note:
The pop-up window closes automatically if PowerShift) The pop-up window closes automatically if
no button is pressed within 10 seconds. no button is pressed within 10 seconds.
Press the arrow buttons on the

Note: steering wheel repeatedly until
“Transmission failsafe mode"
appears. Press the plus button on
the steering wheel.
A “transmission malfunction” yellow
alert appears.
Press the main menu button.
M54_00-1379-71

ment cluster.
Note:

Adjusting the display brightness (daytime brightness)
Adjusting the display brightness

(daytime brightness)
Turn the rotary light switch to posi-
tion “0”.
Note:
The basic value for the display brightness
is adjusted with the headlamps switched
off (daytime brightness).
M54_00-1509-71_tif M54_00-1390-71
Failsafe mode is now active. The Press dimmer button (15) on the in-
“Transmission failsafe mode" pop-up strument cluster.
window opens.
A pop-up window entitled “Dimmung
bei Licht aus” (Dim value with lights
Note: off) (1) opens. The brightness can
For notes on safety and operation, refer now be adjusted using minus but-
to the “Transmission shift systems” sec- ton (2) or plus button (3) on the
tion. steering wheel.

Adjusting the display brightness (night brightness)
Adjusting the display brightness

Note: (night brightness)
The driver can close the pop-up window Set the rotary light switch to head-
at any time using main menu buttons (4) lamp mode.
Note:
Note: The basic value for the display brightness
is adjusted with the headlamps switched
The pop-up window closes automatically if on (night brightness).
M54_00-1477-71
Press dimmer button (15) on the in-

strument cluster.
A pop-up window entitled “Dimmung
bei Licht an” (Dim value with lights
on) (1) opens. The brightness can
now be adjusted using the minus
button (2) or plus button (3) on the
steering wheel.

Adjusting the display brightness (night brightness)
Note:
Note:


Right-hand steering wheel buttons
Right-hand steering wheel buttons

Volume adjustment
1 Plus key Volume adjustment

- To open the “volume adjust- The “Lautstärke” (Volume) pop-up Note:
ment” pop-up window window enables the driver to adjust If the plus or minus button is pressed and
2 Minus key the volume for the currently active held, the volume increases or decreases
- To open the “volume adjust- audio source. until the button is released.
ment” pop-up window There must be no pop-up window
3 To pick up the telephone currently on the screen (exception:
Note:
- To open the “Intercom” pop- pop-up window for a call in pro-
up window gress). As the change of volume comes into ef-
- To receive incoming calls fect immediately, the driver is given an
Press the plus or minus button on audible acknowledgement at the new
4 To hang up the telephone the steering wheel. volume.
- To open the “Intercom” pop- The pop-up window for the currently
up window active audio source opens.
- To end or reject a call
Note:
If the active audio source is changed
while the pop-up window is open, the
content of the pop-up window changes
accordingly.
To adjust the volume, press the plus

or minus button on the steering
wheel.

Radio volume adjustment
Radio volume adjustment

The radio is the active audio source. Note: Note:
Press the plus or minus button on The driver can close the pop-up window As the change of volume comes into ef-
the steering wheel. at any time using main menu buttons (2) fect immediately, the driver is given an
on the steering wheel. audible acknowledgement at the new
volume.
Note:
To adjust the volume, press minus

button (3) or plus button (4) on the
steering wheel.
Note:
M54_00-1411-71
If the plus or minus button is pressed and
“Lautstärke Fahrer” (Driver's volume) held, the volume increases or decreases
pop-up window (1) of the radio sys- until the button is released.
tem opens.

Driver's area on-board PA system volume adjustment
Driver's area on-board PA system

volume adjustment Note:
Switch on the on-board PA system The driver can close the pop-up window
using the “PA system” switch on the at any time using main menu buttons (2)
instrument panel. on the steering wheel.
Note:
Press the plus or minus button on
M54_00-1478-71 the steering wheel. To adjust the volume, press minus
Using arrow buttons (5) on the steer- button (3) or plus button (4) on the
ing wheel, it is possible to toggle steering wheel.
between driver and passenger com-
partment. Note:
If the plus or minus button is pressed and
Note: held, the volume increases or decreases
Only the volume of the currently selec- until the button is released.
ted audio zone is adjusted when minus
button (3) or plus button (4) is pressed.
M54_00-1412-71
The “Lautstärke Fahrer” (Driver's

volume) pop-up window of the PA
system opens.
Adjusting the volume of the intercom in the driver's rest area/on-board kitchenette
Adjusting the volume of the in-

Note: tercom in the driver's rest area/
As the change of volume comes into ef- on-board kitchenette
fect immediately, the driver is given an
audible acknowledgement at the new
volume.
M54_00-1479-71

ing wheel, it is possible to toggle
between driver and passenger com- M82_00-0107-71
partment. While a call is in progress, press both
the left and right button (1) until a
Note: signal sounds.
Only the volume of the currently selec- To reduce the volume, press left but-
ted audio zone is adjusted when minus
ton (-) repeatedly until the desired
button (3) or plus button (4) is pressed.
volume is set.
To increase the volume, press right
button (+) repeatedly until the de-
sired volume is set.

Telephone volume adjustment
Telephone volume adjustment

Note: While a call is in progress, press the Note:
The change of volume comes into effect plus or minus button on the steering The pop-up window closes automatically if
immediately. wheel. no button is pressed within 3 seconds.
To adjust the volume, press minus

Note: button (3) or plus button (4) on the
steering wheel repeatedly until the
The volume in effect at the time the igni-
desired volume is set.
tion is switched off is retained when the
ignition is switched back on.
Note:
As the change of volume comes into ef-
fect immediately, the driver is given an
audible acknowledgement at the new
volume.
M54_00-1413-71 To end the call, press “hang up the

“Lautstärke Fahrer” (Driver's volume) telephone” button (5) on the steering
pop-up window (1) opens. wheel.
Note:

Initiating an outgoing call using the driver's rest area/kitchenette intercom (option)
Initiating an outgoing call using Initiating an outgoing call using the

the driver's rest area/kitchenette Note: driver's area intercom (option)
intercom (option) K = Kitchenette
Note:
R = Driver's rest area
Note:
D = Upper deck (double-decker buses
only)
An attempt is made to establish a M54_00-1416-71

M82_00-0107-71 call connection with the desired in- Press the “pick up the telephone”
Pick up the handset and press the tercom handset. button on the steering wheel.
desired button.
“Bordtelefon” (Intercom) or “Mobil-
telefon” (Mobile phone) pop-up win-
Note: dow (1) opens.
F = Driver

Initiating an outgoing call using the driver's area intercom (option)
Note: Note:
The driver can close the pop-up window It is possible to cancel the connection at-
at any time using main menu buttons (2) tempt using the “hang up the telephone”
on the steering wheel. button on the steering wheel.
To select the intercom, press

minus button (3) or plus button (4) Note:
repeatedly until bus symbol (5)
If the call is not answered after five rings,
is highlighted and “Bordtelefon”
the connection attempt is cancelled and
(Intercom) appears in title bar (6). the last viewed screen display reappears.
M54_00-1414-71
Note: While the call is being established,

Ignore this step if the bus is equipped the message “Rufaufbau” (Connecting
with an intercom only. call) (2) and selected handset (3) are
displayed in “Bordtelefon” (Intercom)
Using arrow buttons (7) on the steer- pop-up window (1).
ing wheel, select the desired inter-
com handset in the bus.
Note:
An attempt is made to establish a Using main menu buttons (4) on the
call connection with the selected steering wheel, the driver is able to
handset when “pick up the tele- close the pop-up window without the
phone” button (8) on the steering connection attempt being interrupted.
wheel is pressed.

Answering an incoming call using the driver's area intercom (option)
Answering an incoming call using

Note: the driver's area intercom (option)
Using main menu buttons (5) on the
steering wheel, the driver is able to close
the pop-up window without ending the
call. This frees up the display screen and
other menus can now be displayed. For
as long as the call remains active, the
driver can restore the pop-up window
by pressing the “pick up the telephone”
button on the steering wheel.
M54_00-1417-71
While a call is in progress, the mes-

sage “Verbindung aktiv” (Call act- M54_00-1421-71
ive) (2) and location (3) of the con- Whenever a connection attempt is
nected handset are displayed in received by the intercom, “Bordtele-
“Bordtelefon” (Intercom) pop-up win- fon” (Intercom) pop-up window (1)
dow (1). The driver can end the call opens and the driver is informed
by pressing “hang up the telephone” which handset (2) in the bus initiated
button (4) on the steering wheel. the call.
steering wheel, the driver is able to
close the pop-up window and thereby
reject the call.

Mobile phone Bluetooth link
The driver can answer the call by Mobile phone Bluetooth link
pressing “pick up the telephone” but- Note:
ton (4) on the steering wheel. Using main menu buttons (5) on the Note:
To be able to use the hands-free function,
a Bluetooth link must have been estab-
lished between the mobile phone and the
telephone control unit.
button on the steering wheel. Note:
Troublefree operation of the Bluetooth
hands-free system cannot always be guar-
anteed with mobile phone software ver-
sions that are older or more recent than
M54_00-1417-71 the approved version because software
version modifications implemented by mo-
While a call is in progress, the mes-
bile phone manufacturers also affect the
sage “Verbindung aktiv” (Call act- functions supported by the mobile phone.
ive) (2) and location (3) of the con-
nected handset are displayed in
“Bordtelefon” (Intercom) pop-up win- Note:
dow (1). The driver can end the call
by pressing “hang up the telephone” A list of compatible mobile phones is
available at your EvoBus Service Partner.
button (4) on the steering wheel.

Mobile phone Bluetooth link
Establish a Bluetooth link between

the mobile phone and the telephone Note: Note:
control unit in the bus. The data transfer may take up to five To reduce the amount of electromagnetic
minutes (depending on the manufacturer). radiation emitted by the mobile phone,
Note: No screen display appears during the re- the phone should always be inserted into
gistration process. a compatible cradle.
The ignition switch must be switched on.
If this is the first time that an at-

tempt has been made to pair a mo- Note:
bile phone, proceed as follows: The Bluetooth pairing attempt will fail if
either the ignition or the mobile phone
Find the Bluetooth pairing option on are switched off or if the mobile phone is
the mobile phone. out of range. If the ignition and the mo-
bile phone are switched on again or if the
Note: mobile phone is brought back into range,
the telephone control unit in the bus will
The procedure for establishing a Bluetooth search for the most recent Bluetooth link.
link varies by the mobile phone model
used. Please refer to the user guide for
the mobile phone concerned.
Note:
Select the “OMNIBUS FSE” link and If a different mobile phone is used, it is
establish the link. necessary to establish a new Bluetooth
link. The telephone control unit in the
Enter code “4729” and confirm.
bus always searches for the most recent
Bluetooth link. It is not possible to have
two mobile phones paired at once.

Initiating an outgoing call using a mobile phone (option)
Initiating an outgoing call using a Using arrow buttons (8) on the steer-
mobile phone (option) Note: ing wheel, it is possible to select
The driver can close the pop-up window the phone book entry you wish to
at any time using main menu buttons (2) call (9).
on the steering wheel. An attempt is made to establish a
Using minus button (3) or plus call connection with this phone book
button (4), it is possible to scroll entry when “pick up the telephone”
through the index of the phone book button (10) on the steering wheel is
to the desired letter (5). pressed.
Note:
Letters are displayed even if there is no
M54_00-1418-71 corresponding entry in the phone book.
Press the “pick up the telephone”
Note:
“Bordtelefon” (Intercom) or “Mobil-
If the bus is equipped only with a mobile
phone (no intercom), no bus symbol will
dow (1) opens. displayed, only the index of the phone
book.
The title bar displays “Mobiltelefon”

(Mobile phone) (6) and, with certain
models, the strength of the mobile
phone signal (7) (depending on the
manufacturer).

Initiating an outgoing call using a mobile phone (option)
Note:
M54_00-1419-71 M54_00-1420-71
The name of selected phone book While a call is in progress, the

Note:
entry (3) is displayed while the call is messages “Verbindung aktiv” (Call
being established (1). active) (2) and “unbekannter Teil- At present, some mobile phone models
do not support the transfer of mobile
nehmer” (unknown call party) (3) are
phone numbers. As a result, the name
Note: displayed in “Mobiltelefon” (Mobile assigned to the destination phone num-
phone) pop-up window (1). The driver ber cannot be displayed. “unbekannter
It may be some time before a mobile
can end the call by pressing “hang Teilnehmer” (unknown call party) (3) is
phone connection can be established.
up the telephone” button (4) on the therefore displayed instead.
steering wheel.

Answering an incoming call using a mobile phone (option)
Answering an incoming call using a

mobile phone (option) Note:
At present, some mobile phone models
do not support the transfer of mobile
phone numbers. As a result, the name
assigned to the destination phone num-
ber cannot be displayed. “unbekannter
Teilnehmer” (unknown call party) (3) is
therefore displayed instead.

steering wheel, the driver is able to
M54_00-1420-71
close the pop-up window and thereby
reject the call. While a call is in progress, the
M54_00-1422-71 messages “Verbindung aktiv” (Call
The driver can answer the call by active) (2) and “unbekannter Teil-
Whenever a connection attempt is re- pressing “pick up the telephone” but-
ceived by the mobile phone, “Mobil- nehmer” (unknown call party) (3) are
ton (4) on the steering wheel. displayed in “Mobiltelefon” (Mobile
dow (1) opens and the messages phone) pop-up window (1). The driver
“Anruf” (Call) (2) and “unbekannter can end the call by pressing “hang
Teilnehmer” (unknown call party) (3) up the telephone” button (4) on the
are displayed. steering wheel.

Operating/malfunction displays: telephone (intercom)
Operating/malfunction displays: Telephone malfunction

Note: telephone (intercom)
Using main menu buttons (5) on the Telephone not available
Note: M54_00-1424-71
At present, some mobile phone models In the event of a malfunction in the tele-
do not support the transfer of mobile M54_00-1423-71 phone system, this symbol (1) and the
phone numbers. As a result, the name If the bus is not equipped with an message “Telefon Störung” (Telephone
assigned to the destination phone num- malfunction) (2) appear in conjunction
intercom or mobile phone, “Telefon”
ber cannot be displayed. “unbekannter with a yellow alert.
Teilnehmer” (unknown call party) (3) is (Telephone) pop-up window (1) appears
therefore displayed instead. whenever the “pick up the telephone”
button on the steering wheel is pressed. Note:
Message: “nicht vorhanden” (not The driver can close the pop-up win-
available) (2). The driver can close dow using main menu buttons (3) on the
the pop-up window using main menu steering wheel.
buttons (3) on the steering wheel.

Parking brake and emergency release device
Parking brake and emergency

release device Caution:
Parking brake valve combined with the Do not apply the parking brake unless the
emergency release device for spring ac- bus is stationary.
tuators
Danger.
Caution:
The parking brake spring actuators re- Always apply the parking brake before
quire a release pressure of 5.8 to 6.4 bar. you leave the driver's area.
At low supply pressures, there is a risk
that the brake may not be fully released, M42_00-0792-71
that the friction pads may make slight Danger.
contact while the bus is in motion and For notes on safety and operation,
Check the hand lever for full engagement. refer to the “Operation” section of the
that the brake may be subjected to un-
necessarily high thermal loads. When the Operating Instructions.
parking brake is released, the correspond-
ing icon on the screen must go out. If Danger.
the compressed-air system for the park- The braking effect of ABS is cancelled
ing brake is damaged, it is possible to if you apply the parking brake while the
release the parking brake using the emer- vehicle is in motion.
gency release device: the emergency re-
lease device is combined with the parking
brake valve and is operated in exactly the
same way as the normal parking brake.
The valve automatically switches over to
the air reserve for the emergency release
device and the spring actuators are re-
leased.

Air suspension safety precautions
Air suspension safety precautions Raising/lowering the bus

The forward section of the chassis and Danger. Preconditions: ignition switch ON,
the guidance of the driven axle have Although the vehicle remains manoeuv- bus stationary, doors closed, operat-
been structurally designed in such a way rable when the suspension is depressur- ing pressure > 6.5 bar, level control
as to ensure that the bus remains man- ised, it must only be driven at walking operational.
oeuvrable when the suspension air bags pace to the nearest lay-by or EvoBus Ser-
Raise or lower the bus using the
have been depressurised. vice Partner. The body must always be
secured at the correct points using jacks
pushbutton.
In this condition, the whole weight of the and axle stands whenever work is carried
bus rests on the stop buffers installed in out on the air suspension system as the
the forward section of the chassis and vehicle body can drop relatively quickly in
in the rear axle. These stop buffers are the event of air loss.
not used when the suspension is operat-
ing normally and only prevent the body
of the bus from striking the axle when Danger.
suspension compression is extreme. The bus must not be lowered if there are
The stop buffers are not designed for persons present in the immediate vicinity
permanent loading and cannot be con- of the bus.
sidered a replacement for the normal
suspension under any circumstances.
Additionally, the bodywork can be dam- Danger.
aged (cracks, etc.). Do not exceed the maximum permissible
vehicle height when driving with the bus
raised above normal level. In Germany,
the maximum permissible vehicle height
is limited to 4 metres. Observe local na-
tional regulations if the bus is operated in
other countries.

Normal level
Normal level
Danger. Note: Preconditions: ignition switch ON,
The bus is not permitted to be driven As raising the bus increases the approach bus stationary, doors closed, operat-
faster than walking pace whenever it angle, it is advisable to raise the bus ing pressure > 6.5 bar, level control
has been raised or lowered out of nor- above normal level on parts of journeys operational.
mal level. involving numerous hairpin bends, for ex-
ample. Press the pushbutton to return the
bus to normal level.
Note:
Note:
The suspension air bags are deflated or
inflated and the superstructure is lowered The corresponding symbol appears on the
or raised by 70 mm respectively. instrument cluster display screen whenev-
er the bus has been raised or lowered.
The bus is lowered or raised for as Note:

Note: Bus normal level (driving position).
long as the pushbutton is pressed.
It is possible to raise or lower the bus
only at speeds of up to 12 mph (20
km/h).
Note:
The bus returns to normal level as soon
as its speed exceeds 18 mph (30 km/h).

Operating/malfunction displays: level control
Operating/malfunction displays: Bus above normal level Level control air pressure too low
level control
Bus raised
This symbol appears in the lower per- This symbol appears in the lower per-
manent display field if the bus has been manent display field if there is insuffi-
This symbol appears in the lower per- raised above normal level. cient air pressure available to lower or
manent display field if the bus has been raise the bus.
Bus below normal level
raised by approximately 70 mm.
Bus lowered
This symbol appears in the lower per-

manent display field if the bus has been
This symbol appears in the lower per- lowered below normal level.
manent display field if the bus has been
lowered by approximately 70 mm.

Activating/deactivating axle load transfer for trailing axle (3-axle buses only)
Activating/deactivating axle load

transfer for trailing axle (3-axle Note: Note:
buses only) When the function is activated, the supply The pull-away aid will be cancelled if the
of compressed air to the suspension air air pressure in the suspension air bags
bags on the trailing axle is interrupted. of the driven axle exceeds 7 bar while
The suspension air bags are then vented the bus is in motion and the axle load
of air by an overflow valve. relief function is active. The load on the
suspension air bags is restored to normal
balance.
Note:
The pull-away aid cannot be activated
unless the ignition starter switch is ON Note:
and the bus is travelling at a speed of Similarly, the pull-away aid is deactivated
below 18 mph (30 km/h). as soon as the bus exceeds 18 mph (30
km/h).
M32_00-0268-71
Pressing switch (1) activates the axle

load transfer for the trailing axle.
When the pull-away aid is active, the
Note: LED lights up in the pushbutton and
The axle load transfer (pull-away aid) is the “Pull-away aid active” symbol
primarily used in the winter for pulling appears on the screen.
away or for reversing in wintry road con-
ditions. Tyre contact pressure at the driv- To deactivate the pull-away aid, press
en axle is increased because the load on rocker switch (1) again.
the trailing axle is reduced.

Activating/deactivating the bus stop brake (option)
Activating/deactivating the bus

stop brake (option) Note:
Ignition starter switch ON If the vehicle is equipped with a “drive-
The wheels on all axles are braked off lock” and the drive-off lock is active
because a door is open, the “Ready to
Danger. with reduced pressure.
depart” icon does not appear on the dis-
Do not activate the bus stop brake unless play screen until the door has been fully
the bus is stationary. The bus stop brake Note: closed. Depending on the vehicle specific-
must not be used as a means to brake The icon above appears on the instrument ation, the drive-off lock may be have been
a coasting bus to a halt. The bus must cluster display screen. activated by other functions (e.g. mobility
never be parked with only the bus stop lift or operated emergency valve).
brake applied. Apply the parking brake
at bus stops on steep uphill or downhill Depress the accelerator pedal.
gradients that exceed 15 %. The “bus stop brake” function is de-
activated again and the icons on the
display screen go out.
Danger.
Always apply the parking brake correctly Note:
Note:
before you leave the driver's area. The “Ready to depart” icon appears on
The bus stop brake is also deactivated if
the display screen at the same time.
you apply the parking brake or switch the
Press the bus stop brake pushbutton.
ignition starter switch to OFF.

Important notes on the steering system
Important notes on the steering Since there is an extremely low probab- Turning the steering wheel when
system ility of this situation occurring - but if it the bus is stationary
The dimensions of the steering system does occur, it often does so completely Adhere to the instructions.
and the mechanical steering transmis- unexpectedly - the driver could wrongly
sion ratio were designed such that, assume that the steering system has
been blocked. In fact, the driver merely Note:
in the event of a malfunction in the
has to use the level of effort required to To prevent damage to the steering
hydraulic power steering system, the
continue steering. column, the following points must be
effort required to turn the steering observed when turning the steering wheel
wheel would not exceed a specific This important information is intended to with the bus stationary, without hydraulic
value deemed by legislators to be the clarify the scenario described and pre- support (engine switched off) and without
maximum reasonable force. vent the driver from possibly misjudging a turntable under the front wheels (tyres
For vehicles above 12t this force is the situation. in direct contact with the ground):
450N (400N for vehicles between 3.5t Release the steering wheel adjuster
and 12t) applied to the steering wheel Danger.
and push the steering wheel fully
circumference when turning the vehicle In the event of a power steering failure, down. Lock the steering wheel ad-
from straight-ahead driving into a circle the bus becomes very difficult to steer. juster in place. Turn the steering
with a 20m radius at a road speed of Have the malfunction rectified immedi- wheel using both hands at an angle
approximately 10 km/h. No more than ately at an EvoBus Service Partner.
of 90° to 180° to one another.
6 seconds must pass from the start of
turning to reaching the 20m radius.
Caution:
The driver must be aware that, in the
event of a sudden failure in the power Never have more than one person turn
the steering wheel. Do not pull the steer-
steering (e.g. due to a pump drive mal-
ing wheel on one side only.
function), the bus will remain steerable
but considerably more effort will be re-
quired.

Operating the bus stop brake emergency release switch
Operating the bus stop brake

Note: emergency release switch
We ask the workshop in particular to note
this. Danger.
This switch has a tamper-evident seal and
is intended to be operated only in the
event of a malfunction in the bus stop
brake or drive-off lock.
Danger.
M42_00-0800-71
Make absolutely sure that the parking Raise red cover (1) on the emergency
brake is applied before you operate the release switch.
bus stop brake emergency release switch.
The bus could otherwise roll away.
Remove the tamper-evident seal from

the emergency release switch.

Switching on the panorama camera (option)
Switching on the panorama camera

Danger. (option)
Have the malfunction rectified as soon as Switch on the panorama camera us-
possible by an EvoBus Service Partner. ing this switch. An image of the area
to the front of the bus is displayed
on the monitors inside the bus.
M42_00-0801-71
Pull out switch (1).
The bus stop brake/drive-off lock

function is no longer active.
Note:
cluster display screen.

Switching on the panorama camera (option)
M82_00-0122-71
There must be no objects positioned

between the windscreen and camera
(1).

Switch descriptions
Table of contents
Switch for windscreen roller sunblind (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Switch for upper wiper (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) OFF pushbutton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Pushbutton for reversing camera washer system (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Driver's area lighting switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Switch for electrical circuits > 100 V (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Panorama camera switch (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Night lighting switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Active Brake Assist OFF pushbutton (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Reading lamps switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Passenger-compartment lighting position I+II switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Roof hatch switch - air in/air out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Attendant call system switch (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Passenger stop request system enable switch (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Switch for school bus operation (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Headlamp cleaning system OFF switch (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Switch descriptions
Table of contents
Driver's power window pushbutton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Raise/lower pushbutton (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Normal-level pushbutton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Mirror adjuster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Switch for the driver's window heating/mirror heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Windscreen heating switch (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Horn changeover switch (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Central locking switch for the left-side luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Central locking switch for the right-side luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Neutral gearshift pushbutton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Driver's seat microphone switch (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Lane assistant warning system pushbutton (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Reverse warning buzzer switch (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Switch for deactivating pedal-activated continuous braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Bus stop brake pushbutton (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Hazard warning lamps pushbutton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Switch descriptions
Table of contents
Door 1 pushbutton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Door 2 pushbutton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Bus stop brake emergency release switch (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Emergency valve reset pushbutton (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Kitchenette enable switch (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Lavatory enable switch (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Axle load transfer switch (3-axle buses only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Auxiliary batteries pushbutton (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Switch descriptions
Switch for windscreen roller sunblind (option)
Switch for windscreen roller Switch for upper wiper (option) Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
sunblind (option) On - Off OFF pushbutton
The pushbutton is used to raise or lower This pushbutton deactivates the ESP
the roller sunblind. The roller sunblind is function. The dynamic handling control
active only for as long as the pushbutton (FDR) and acceleration skid control (ASR)
is pressed. functions are also disabled. This is indic-
ated on the screen by a crossed-through
ESP symbol. Pressing the pushbutton
again or switching the ignition starter
switch to OFF and back to ON reactiv-
ates the function.

refer to the “Operation” section of the
Operating Instructions.

Switch descriptions
Pushbutton for reversing camera washer system (option)
Pushbutton for reversing camera Driver's area lighting switch Switch for electrical circuits > 100
washer system (option) On - Off V (option)
On - Off Using this switch, it is possible to isol-
ate electrical circuits with an effective
voltage of over 100 V from the main
power supply circuit.
Observe the safety and operating in-

formation in the manufacturer's operat-
ing instructions.

Switch descriptions
Panorama camera switch (option)
Panorama camera switch (option) Night lighting switch Active Brake Assist OFF pushbutton
With the switch pressed, an image of the Using this switch, it is possible to switch (option)
area to the front of the bus is displayed on the LED night lighting provided the This pushbutton is used to deactivate
on the monitors in the passenger com- side lamps are switched on. Active Brake Assist (ABA). The red LED
partment. in the pushbutton lights up while ABA is
deactivated.
Note:
There must be no objects positioned
between the windscreen and the panor-
ama camera.
refer to the “Driving systems” section.

Switch descriptions
Reading lamps switch
Reading lamps switch Passenger-compartment lighting Roof hatch switch - air in/air out
With the switch in position 1 (down), the position I+II switch It is possible to move the front and
driver can switch on the reading lamps With the switch in position 1 (down), all rear roof hatches individually to either
as additional lighting for the vehicle of the interior lighting can be switched the air-in or air-out position using the
interior provided the ignition starter on provided the ignition starter switch double rocker switch provided the roof
switch has been switched to ON and has been switched to ON and economy hatches have not been forced closed by
economy mode is not active. All the mode is not active. If the ignition starter air-conditioning or smog mode and the
reading lamps are then switched on. switch is OFF, however, it is the night windscreen wipers are not operating at
With the switch in position 2 (up), the lighting that will be switched on, even speed 1 or 2. When the roof hatches are
driver can enable the reading lamps for if economy mode is active. With the open, the indicator lamp in the switch
passengers provided the conditions de- switch in position 2 (up), the night light- lights up and a corresponding operating
scribed above have been fulfilled and, ing in the passenger compartment can symbol (icon) is shown on the display
in addition, the side lamps have been be switched on provided the ignition screen. If the upper section of the push-
switched on. starter switch has been switched to button is pressed only briefly, the roof
ON, even if economy mode is active. hatch moves to the air-in position. If it
With the switch in position 1 (down), the is pressed for longer than 1 second, the
lights in the luggage rack struts are also roof hatch is fully opened. If the lower
switched on. section of the pushbutton is pressed
only briefly, the roof hatch moves to
the air-out position. If it is pressed for
longer than 1 second, the roof hatch is
closed.

Switch descriptions
Attendant call system switch (option)
Attendant call system switch Passenger stop request system Switch for school bus operation
(option) enable switch (option) (option)
The power supply for the attendant call This switch is used to disable the pas- Pressing this pushbutton switches on
is switched on. A lamp in the switch senger stop request system. all the turn signals on the left and right.
lights up when the switch is pressed. An The school bus warning lights can be
operating symbol (icon) appears on the deactivated using the school bus warn-
display screen whenever the attendant ing lights pushbutton or the turn signal
call button at one of the passenger seats switch on the steering column (indicate
is pressed. left or right).

Switch descriptions
Headlamp cleaning system OFF switch (option)
Headlamp cleaning system OFF Driver's power window pushbutton Raise/lower pushbutton (option)
switch (option) The driver's window can be opened or The bus is raised whenever the upper
This switch is used to switch off the closed. The power window is active only section of the pushbutton is pressed
headlamp cleaning system. This means for as long as the pushbutton is pressed. with the ignition starter switch ON.
that only the windscreen washer will be
activated whenever the wash function is Danger. Note:
operated.
The window's range of movement should Release the pushbutton as soon as the
be kept clear of all obstructions (e.g. any bus has reached the desired height.
part of your body) while the pushbutton is
being pressed (particularly during closing).
Note:
The corresponding symbol appears on the
instrument cluster display screen while
the bus is at raised level.
Note:
At raised level, the bus must not be driv-
en faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).

Switch descriptions
Normal-level pushbutton
Normal-level pushbutton Mirror adjuster

Note: The bus returns to normal level when the This control is used to adjust the posi-
Since an increase in ride height increases pushbutton is pressed. tion of either the mirrors or the exterior
the approach angle, it is advisable to mirror housings (option), depending on
raise the bus above normal level before the position of the adjustment button.
driving up zigzag roads, for example.
Note: For notes on safety and operation,

refer to the “Driver's area controls” sec-
The bus is lowered whenever the lower
section of the pushbutton is pressed.
tion.
The bus automatically returns to normal
level if it is driven faster than 15 mph (25
km/h).
Note:
M68_00-0255-71
The pushbutton can be disabled by means
of a key switch (option). 0 Rest position
1.1 To adjust the position of the
left-side exterior mirror
Danger.
Check the position of the
mirrors before the start of a
journey and correct if neces-
sary.

Switch descriptions
Mirror adjuster
1.2 To adjust the position of the 2.1 To retract the left- and right- 2.4 To retract the right-side ex-
right-side exterior mirror side exterior mirror housings: terior mirror housing: For as
For as long as the adjust- long as the adjustment button
Danger. ment button is pressed in the is pressed in the direction of
direction of the arrow, both the arrow, the right-side ex-
Check the position of the
mirrors before the start of a exterior mirror housings re- terior mirror housing retracts
journey and correct if neces- tract towards the windscreen towards the windscreen.
sary. simultaneously.
2 To extend/retract the exterior 2.2 To extend the left- and right-
mirror housings electrically side exterior mirror housings:
(option) For as long as the adjustment
button is pressed in the dir-
ection of the arrow, both ex-
Danger.
terior mirror housings extend
Risk of accident. Fully extend towards the driving position
both exterior mirror housings simultaneously.
to the driving position before 2.3 To retract the left-side ex-
the start of a journey.
terior mirror housing: For as
long as the adjustment but-
Caution: ton is pressed in the direction
It is prohibited to change the of the arrow, the left-side ex-
position of the exterior mirror terior mirror housing retracts
housings by hand because towards the windscreen.
this could cause damage to
the housing drive.

Switch descriptions
Switch for the driver's window heating/mirror heating
Switch for the driver's window Windscreen heating switch (option)

heating/mirror heating The windscreen heating can be switched
The heating for the driver's window on using this pushbutton provided the
and mirrors can be switched on using ignition starter switch has been switched
this pushbutton provided the ignition to ON and economy mode is not active.
starter switch has been switched to The indicator lamp in the switch lights
ON and economy mode is not active. up at the same time. The windscreen
The indicator lamp in the switch lights heating cannot be restarted until the
up at the same time. The heating for switch-off delay (30 minutes) has
the driver's window and mirrors cannot elapsed. Operating the master safety
be restarted until the switch-off delay switch or switching the ignition starter
(30 minutes) has elapsed. Switching the switch to OFF cancels the switch-off
ignition starter switch to OFF cancels the delay, and the windscreen heating
switch-off delay, and the heating for the switches off immediately. If the economy
driver's window and mirrors switches off function is activated during the switch-off
immediately. If the economy function delay, the windscreen heating will be
is activated during the switch-off delay, switched off only for the duration of
the heating for the driver's window and the economy period. If the switch-off
mirrors will be switched off only for delay has not elapsed by the time the
the duration of the economy period. If economy function is deactivated, the
the switch-off delay has not elapsed windscreen heating switches back on for
by the time the economy function is the period of time remaining.
deactivated, the heating for the driver's
window and mirrors switches back on for
the period of time remaining.

Switch descriptions
Horn changeover switch (option)
Horn changeover switch (option) Central locking switch for the

Changeover between horn 1 (top/elec- left-side luggage compartment
tric)/horn 2 (bottom/air) The luggage compartment flaps can be
locked or unlocked electropneumatically
using the rocker switch provided the ig-
nition starter switch has been switched
to ON. The luggage compartment lighting
switches on automatically provided the
luggage compartment flap circuit on one
side of the bus is unlocked and one of
the luggage compartment flaps is open.
The LED in the rocker switch provides
the driver with a confirmation of the
state. LED lit -> luggage compartment
flaps unlocked and luggage compartment
lighting lit.
Note:
If the bus is equipped with a central
locking system (option) and the ignition
starter switch is switched to OFF, the
central locking electronics will initiate
forced locking after 43 minutes and cause
the lighting to switch off in order to re-
duce power consumption. Forced lock-
ing does not occur if the ignition starter
switch remains ON.

Switch descriptions
Central locking switch for the right-side luggage compartment
Central locking switch for the Neutral gearshift pushbutton

right-side luggage compartment If this pushbutton is pressed, it is pos-
The luggage compartment flaps can be sible to select neutral at any time while
locked or unlocked electropneumatically the transmission is in failsafe mode even
using the rocker switch provided the ig- if other information is currently displayed
nition starter switch has been switched on the display screen. This means that
to ON. The luggage compartment lighting it is not necessary to call up the “Trans-
switches on automatically provided the mission failsafe mode” menu in order to
luggage compartment flap circuit on one select neutral.
side of the bus is unlocked and one of
the luggage compartment flaps is open.
The LED in the rocker switch provides
the driver with a confirmation of the
state. LED lit -> luggage compartment
flaps unlocked and luggage compartment
lighting lit.
Note:
If the bus is equipped with a central
locking system (option) and the ignition
starter switch is switched to OFF, the
central locking electronics will initiate
forced locking after 43 minutes and cause
the lighting to switch off in order to re-
duce power consumption. Forced lock-
ing does not occur if the ignition starter
switch remains ON.

Switch descriptions
Driver's seat microphone switch (option)
Driver's seat microphone switch Lane assistant warning system Reverse warning buzzer switch
(option) pushbutton (option) (option)
This switch activates the microphone This pushbutton is used to disable the Switches off the audible reversing signal.
at the driver's seat to enable the driver lane assistant warning system func-
to speak to passengers through the PA tion, which is otherwise activated once a
system. speed of 50 mph (70 km/h) is reached.
Note:
If the microphone is not being used,
switch off the PA system.

Switch descriptions
Switch for deactivating pedal-activated continuous braking
Switch for deactivating pedal- Bus stop brake pushbutton (option)

activated continuous braking When the pushbutton is pressed, all
The bus is equipped with a retarder, wheel brakes are applied with reduced
which provides additional braking force pressure. It is prohibited to activate the
to supplement the service brake and is bus stop brake unless the bus is station-
activated whenever the brake pedal is ary.
depressed (brakes management). The
proportion of braking output contributed Danger.
by the retarder during this combined
braking action is reduced if the speed of If the bus stop brake is not used as in-
tended, the vehicle could roll away. This
the bus falls below 12 mph (20 km/h).
could result in an accident with seri-
The braking effect of the retarder is re- ous or fatal injuries. Therefore: - Al-
stored when the bus is subsequently ways apply the parking brake before you
braked at speeds of over 15 mph (25 start/stop the engine or leave the driver's
km/h). This function can be disabled area (refer to the “Operation” section of
using the switch for deactivating pedal- the Operating Instructions).
activated continuous braking.
Note:
This switch is for use mainly in wintry
road conditions so that the driver can
moderate the braking effect more effect-
ively.

Switch descriptions
Hazard warning lamps pushbutton
Hazard warning lamps pushbutton Door 1 pushbutton

Danger. All the turn signals on the left and right The door pushbutton opens or closes the
Do not under any circumstances use the are switched on regardless of the pos- front right door. The bus must be sta-
bus stop brake to park the bus or to se- ition of the ignition starter switch. The tionary for the door to open. The driver
cure it against rolling away. - Apply the turn signal indicator flashes in the haz- is informed that the door is open by an
parking brake when stopping on steep up- ard warning lamps switch and in the indicator in the driver's pushbutton.
hill or downhill gradients exceeding 15 % green indicator lamps on the instrument
or at bus stops on steep uphill or down-
cluster.
hill gradients exceeding 15 %. - Do not
activate the bus stop brake unless the
vehicle is stationary.
refer to the “At a glance” section of the

Switch descriptions
Door 2 pushbutton
Door 2 pushbutton Bus stop brake emergency release Emergency valve reset pushbutton
The driver's pushbutton opens or closes switch (option) (option)
the centre right door. The bus must be This switch has a tamper-evident seal If the emergency valve reset pushbut-
stationary for the door to open. The and is intended to be operated only in ton is pressed while the ignition starter
driver is informed that the door is open the event of a malfunction in the bus switch is ON, the emergency valve that
by an indicator in the driver's pushbut- stop brake or drive-off lock. has been operated will be reset to its
ton. initial position.
Danger.
Make absolutely sure that the parking
brake is applied before you operate the
For notes on safety and operation, The bus could otherwise roll away.
refer to the “At a glance” section of the

Switch descriptions
Kitchenette enable switch (option)
Kitchenette enable switch (option) Lavatory enable switch (option) Axle load transfer switch (3-axle
When the kitchenette is enabled, the All functions in the lavatory cabin are buses only)
water supply, lighting and basic func- available when the lavatory cabin has Pressing the pushbutton on the instru-
tions (computer, attendant call, etc.) can been enabled. ment panel activates the axle load trans-
be used. However, the coffee machine, fer of the 3rd axle provided the bus is
boiler, sausage heater, microwave and travelling at a speed of below 18 mph
drinks centre cannot be switched on un- (30 km/h). If the axle load transfer is
til the engine is running. already active, pressing the pushbutton
deactivates the function. If active, the
axle load transfer will be deactivated
automatically as soon as the bus is trav-
elling faster than 18 mph (30 km/h). A
symbol on the screen and an LED in the
pushbutton indicate whether the axle
load transfer is active.

refer to the “Driver's area controls” sec-
tion of the Operating Instructions.

Switch descriptions
Auxiliary batteries pushbutton (option)
Auxiliary batteries pushbutton

(option)
To ensure reliable starting of the en-
gine after the bus has been parked for
long periods with electrical consumers
switched on, the supply of power can
be switched to the auxiliary batteries for
a limited time. Power is supplied from
the auxiliary batteries for as long as the
pushbutton is kept pressed.

Driver’s seat/passenger seats
Table of contents
Driver’s seat safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Grammer driver's seat controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
ISRI 6860/875 driver's seat control elements (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Operation of the jump seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Adjusting a passenger seat (new seat generation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Using the driver's seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Operating the jump-seat seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Passenger-compartment-seating seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Removing a seat squab (new seat generation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Fitting a seat squab (new seat generation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Cinema-style seating with quick-release locks (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Operating the cinema-style seating with quick-release lock (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Passenger seat service set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Driver’s seat safety precautions
Driver’s seat safety precautions

It is essential that the following instruc-
tions be observed:
Danger.
In the interests of road safety, the driver-
's seat must not be adjusted when the
bus is in motion.
Note:
The following descriptions provide a brief
overview of the control elements. The
manufacturer's operating instructions
provided must be observed in all cases.


Grammer driver's seat controls

1 Backrest adjustment 9 Seat heating switch (option)

Note: 10 Seat squab angle adjustment
Note: (+) chamber fills up/(-) cham-
Lean forwards away from ber empties Note:
backrest - pull lever upwards 5 Height adjustment Lean forwards away from
- lean back and move back- the backrest. Pull button
rest into desired position - upwards. The seat angle can
Note:
release lever. now be adjusted.
Pull lever up = upwards ad-
2 Lateral support adjustment 11 Seat squab depth adjustment
justment, press lever down =
downwards adjustment
Note: 6 Damper setting Note:
Individually adjustable lateral Pull button upwards. The seat
support by two compressed- squab can now be adjusted.
Note:
air chambers. (+) chamber
fills up/(-) chamber empties The damper setting is infin- 12 Driver's seat fore-and-aft ad-
itely variable between soft justment
3 Lumbar support (upper cham-
and hard
ber)
7 Swivel release mechanism Note:
Note: Pull lever upwards. The seat

Note: can now be slid in the longit-
(+) chamber fills up/(-) cham- udinal direction.
ber empties Press button downwards:
4 Lumbar support (lower cham- the seat can now be turned.
(Turning range: 50° to the
ber)
left, 90° to the right)
8 Seat belt buckle

ISRI 6860/875 driver's seat control elements (option)
ISRI 6860/875 driver's seat control

elements (option)

ISRI 6860/875 driver's seat control elements (option)
1 Driver's seat fore-and-aft ad- 8 Lumbar support

justment Note:
Thermostatically controlled Note:
Note: seat cushion and backrest Press the button to charge
Pull lever upwards. The seat heating. and discharge each air cham-
can now be slid in the longit- 5 Lowering ber
udinal direction.
9 Swivel release mechanism
2 Tilt adjustment Note: 10 Backrest adjustment
Lower the seat by press-
Note: ing the rocker switch down. Note:
Pull the handle up. Adjust Move the seat to the adjusted
height by pressing the rocker Pull the handle up and move
the tilt angle by applying the backrest to the desired
load on or relieving load from switch up.
position.
the front section of the seat 6 Damper adjustment
cushion. 11 Shoulder adjustment
3 Seat cushion depth adjust- Note:
ment Note:
Handle up = minimum damp-
ing. Handle down = maximum Pull the handle up and move
Note: damping. the upper half of the backrest
to the desired position.
Raise the lever and push the 7 Height adjustment
seat cushion forwards/back- 12 Armrest
wards. Engage the seat cush-
ion again. Note:
4 Heating Pull or press the handle and
adjust the seat to the desired
height.

Operation of the jump seat
Operation of the jump seat

Note: Danger.
The armrest can be adjus- Note: If you stand up, the seat cushion will
ted to any angle using the automatically return to its original posi-
Only accompanying staff should sit on the
knurled knob. tion. Fold the jump seat down again as
jump seat.
described above if you wish to sit down
again on this seat.
M91_00-0009-01
Folding out the jump seat: move

stop lever (1) in the direction of the
arrow and fold down the seat cush-
ion using grab handle (2).
The jump seat cannot be stopped
in the horizontal position. You must
hold down the seat cushion until you
are seated.

Adjusting a passenger seat (new seat generation)
Adjusting a passenger seat (new Sideways adjustment of aisle-side

seat generation) Note: seats
There are several backrest positions
between the vertical normal position and Note:
the tilted limit position. You can choose
Press forward section of rocker (2) and,
any of these positions.
at the same time, move the seat towards
Adjusting the backrest (window side): or away from the centre aisle.
Folding the armrest up or down

Note:
Pull back small black lever (3) between Note:
the seat cushion and vehicle wall. At the
Aisle side: Grasp the front of the raised
same time, push back on the backrest
armrest and lift it slightly. Then carefully
with your upper body. Release lever (3)
M91.00-0046-71 fold the armrest down. To fold the arm-
when the backrest is at the desired posi-
Adjusting the backrest (aisle side): rest up, simply pull it upwards. The arm-
tion.
rest engages in its limit position automat-
ically.
Note:
Press the rear section of rocker (1) and, Note:
at the same time, push back on the back- There are several backrest positions Note:
rest with your upper body. Release the between the vertical normal position and
Window side: The armrest for the win-
rocker when the backrest is at the de- the tilted limit position. You can choose
dow seat (option) is located between the
sired position. The backrest locks in any of these positions.
seats. It simply folds up and down.
place immediately.

Using the driver's seat belt
Using the driver's seat belt Operating the jump-seat seat belt
Danger. Fastening the seat belt: make sure
Note: The seat belt must not pass over your the seat belt is not twisted, position
The driver's seat that was fitted during neck, be snagged or rub against sharp it tightly over your pelvis and lock it
production has an integrated belt system. edges. It should fit as close to the body so that you can hear it engage in the
Consequently, the user information and as possible. You should therefore avoid belt lock.
instructions apply only to the factory-fit- wearing bulky clothing. Do not route the
ted belts. seat belt over solid or fragile objects
in pockets in your clothing. Frequently Danger.
retighten the seat belt over your shoulder. This seat should only be occupied by the
Note: official person accompanying the bus.
Releasing the seat belt: press the
In Germany, Section 21a of the German red button in the buckle and assist Releasing the seat belt: press the
road traffic regulations (StVO) stipulates the inertia reel by guiding the seat red button in the buckle and assist
that the seat belt must be fastened at belt back. the inertia reel by guiding the seat
all times while the vehicle is in motion.
belt back.
The rules and regulations of the country
in which the vehicle is operated must be
observed.
Fastening the seat belt: pass the

seat belt untwisted and tightly across
your pelvis and shoulder and insert it
into the belt buckle until you hear it
engage.

Passenger-compartment-seating seat belt
Passenger-compartment-seating Removing a seat squab (new seat Fitting a seat squab (new seat
seat belt generation) generation)
Fastening the seat belt: make sure Lift the seat squab at the front
the seat belt is not twisted, position slightly and slide the rear into the
it tightly over your pelvis and lock it guide as far as the stop. Press the
so that you can hear it engage in the front of the seat squab down until
belt buckle. you hear it engage.
Note:
In Germany, Section 21a of the German
road traffic regulations (StVO) stipulates
that the seat belt must be fastened at all
times while the vehicle is in motion.
M91.00-0047-71
To remove the seat squab, grasp the

Note: front of the seat squab with both
A seat belt may only be used to restrain
hands and pull upwards. Then pull
one person at any one time. the squab in the direction of travel
and out of the guide and remove it
upwards.
Note:
In Germany, Section 21a of the German
road traffic regulations (StVO) permits
passengers to release their belt if they
intend to leave their seat for only a short
time.

Cinema-style seating with quick-release locks (option)
Cinema-style seating with quick-

release locks (option) Danger. Danger.
The quick-release feet of the seats must Ensure that the seat is not occupied The levers on the feet of the seats must
only be operated by the driver (or an when it is shifted. always point downwards.
authorised bus escort/tour guide).
Danger. Note: Danger.

The levers on the feet of the seats must To close the lever, hold it down until the
Operation of the levers by passengers is
always point upwards. locking pin engages automatically. Only
strictly prohibited.
then are the seats secured safely to the
To open the levers, it is necessary to pull bus.
out the locking pin first.
Danger.
The levers must only be operated when Danger.
Note:
the bus is stationary. The levers must
never be operated while the bus is in mo- Only then is it possible to open the lever The seats are not secured safely to the
tion. upwards. It is not possible to open the bus if the locking pin is not engaged.
levers unless the locking pins have been Passengers are not permitted to occupy
pulled out first. these seats in this situation.
It is only possible to shift the cinema-
style seats with the levers open.
The cinema-style seats must not be oc-
cupied unless the levers are closed.

Operating the cinema-style seating with quick-release lock (option)
Operating the cinema-style seating

with quick-release lock (option)
M91_00-0025-71
Press lever (2) back down (a) to se-

M91_00-0024-71 cure the seats after shifting.
To release the seat frame, pull lock-
ing pin (1) out (a) and pivot lever (2) Danger.
upwards (b). Locking pin (1) must engage automatically
(b).
Danger.
The safety notes in the preceding descrip-
tion must be observed.
It is now possible to shift the seats.

Passenger seat service set

1 Reading lamp
2 Air outlet controller
3 Air outlet grille
4 Loudspeaker
5 Reading lamp switch
6 Service call switch (option)
7 Loudspeaker volume control
(option)

Transmission shift systems
Table of contents
Transmission shift system safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Operating the PSH (pneumatic shift aid) transmission shift system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
ZF-AS TRONIC transmission shift system (option) safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
ZF-AS TRONIC transmission shift system (option) overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
ZF-AS TRONIC transmission shift system (option) (system description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Operating the ZF-AS TRONIC transmission shift system (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
ZF-AS TRONIC transmission shift system operating/malfunction displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
GO 240-8 PowerShift transmission shift system (option) (system description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
GO 240-8 PowerShift transmission shift system (option) gearshift unit (selector lever) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Operation of the GO 240-8 PowerShift transmission shift system (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Operation of the GO 240-8 PowerShift failsafe mode using the steering wheel keypad (option) . . . . . . . . . 262

Transmission shift system safety precautions
Transmission shift system safety Operating the PSH (pneumatic shift much more slowly, i.e. only half as fast
precautions aid) transmission shift system as before. Disengagement of a gear is
just as fast as normal. The best gear-
shifts are achieved by moving the gear
selector lever with gentle force and “wait-
Danger. ing” for the PSH gearshift. Nevertheless,
faster gear changes are possible in diffi-
If it is necessary to disembark with the
cult situations.
engine still running - albeit only briefly -
you must make sure that the transmission Changing gear in the event of PSH
is in position “N” (neutral), the parking
failure
brake has been applied and the vehicle
has been secured by chocks. It is per-
missible to disembark with the engine Note:
still running only if no passengers remain PSH, the pneumatic shift aid, is designed
in the passenger compartment and the M26_00-0004-01
to improve shift comfort. Its pressure is
vehicle has been secured against unau- Changing gear limited to 2.4 bar. If PSH fails, it is still
thorised entry. possible to select any of the gears while
the bus is in motion, but increased effort
Note:
will be required. The gearshift duration
This transmission shift system works (shift lever pressed to gear engaged) will
purely mechanically. At approximately be longer because synchronisation will not
90 mm, the shift throws are only half as be as fast.
long as those of conventional shift sys-
tems. However, the time that is needed
for a gear change in the transmission
while synchronisation takes place is al-
most the same in physical terms. This
means that, to engage the next gear, the
driver has to move the shift lever handle

ZF-AS TRONIC transmission shift system (option) safety precautions
ZF-AS TRONIC transmission shift “N” (neutral) automatically (forced neut-

system (option) safety precautions ral). “N” flashes on the display screen
until the driver shifts to neutral. To con-
tinue the journey: depress the brake ped-
al, shift the selector lever to “N” (neutral)
Danger. and then to “D” or “R”.
If it is necessary to disembark with the
engine still running - albeit only briefly -
you must make sure that the transmission Note:
is in position “N” (neutral), the parking While the bus is stationary, a gear can
brake has been applied and the vehicle be selected only if the service brake is
has been secured by chocks. It is per- applied.
missible to disembark with the engine
still running only if no passengers remain
in the passenger compartment and the
vehicle has been secured against unau-
thorised entry.
Caution:
If the bus is stationary and the engine is
running but “N” (neutral) has not been
selected, a yellow alert will be issued
after four minutes and a warning tone
will sound. In addition, the gear indic-
ator and the drive mode begin to flash.
An icon is also displayed. After a further
minute, the transmission system shifts to

ZF-AS TRONIC transmission shift system (option) overview
ZF-AS TRONIC transmission shift

system (option) overview

ZF-AS TRONIC transmission shift system (option) (system description)
1 Transmission actuator with ZF-AS TRONIC transmission shift carried out automatically by the trans-
integrated electronic transmis- system (option) (system descrip- mission system.
sion control tion) The screen in the instrument panel
2 Clutch actuator shows the driver all the essential system
3 ZF-AS TRONIC transmission information (e.g. gear, malfunction, etc.).
The transmission actuator (shift module)
and the clutch control unit (clutch actu-
ator) are the most important compon-
ents for a fully automated transmission.
The transmission actuator comprises the
transmission electronics, shift valves,
shift cylinders and sensors. The trans-
mission electronics process all incom-
ing signals and initiate the gearshift by
M26_00-0053-71 means of the solenoid valves and shift
The ZF-AS TRONIC automated manual cylinders. The clutch actuator is regu-
transmission is adapted to the engine by lated electropneumatically and is entirely
a dry clutch as standard. As the clutch responsible for clutch operation.
is controlled automatically by the trans- It is not necessary to alter the position
mission system, there is no need for a of accelerator pedal (5) at any time dur-
clutch pedal. ing the gearshift. Clutch operation is
The ZF-AS TRONIC consists of a basic regulated by the electronic transmission
transmission with integral splitter and control in relation to accelerator ped-
planetary units. The basic transmission al operation. During the gearshift, the
is claw-shifted; the splitter and planetary engine control is regulated by the elec-
units are synchronised. Gearshifts are tronic transmission control.

Operating the ZF-AS TRONIC transmission shift system (option)
In automatic drive mode, the transmis- cessarily high engine speeds. The engine Operating the ZF-AS TRONIC
sion system selects the optimum starting may stall if the accelerator pedal is de- transmission shift system (option)
gear automatically. As soon as the ac- pressed in a gear that is too high.
celerator pedal is depressed, the clutch
Danger.
closes automatically and the bus starts
to move. The transmission system shifts Never leave the driver's area with the
up and down automatically while the bus engine running and a gear engaged. The
is in motion. In automatic mode, the bus could roll away inadvertently. Risk of
accident.
transmission system avoids gearshifts
that would result in the engine overrev-
ving or stalling. The driver can use the
selector lever to intervene manually at
any time – in difficult road situations, for
example – without easing off the accel-
erator pedal. In the process, automatic
mode is inhibited for a maximum of 10
seconds.
Using the selector lever, the driver is
also able to select an alternative starting
gear to the gear proposed by the sys-
tem. As soon as the accelerator pedal
is depressed, the clutch closes automat-
ically and the bus starts to move. The
driver selects the desired gears using the
selector lever. The driver should avoid
uneconomical driving styles character-
ised by long distances driven at unne-

M26_00-0117-71 M26_00-0110-71 M26_00-0111-71
Before the engine is started, the The shift system now carries out a The self-check is completed, the
parking brake must be engaged and self-check and the message “CH” (1) screen display changes from “CH”
selector lever (1) must be in posi- appears on the display screen. to “N” (2) and the transmission is in
tion “N”. the neutral position.
Start the engine
Note: Note:
Press the selector lever to the right as far It is not possible to change gear with the
as the stop. engine switched off.
Switch on the ignition (ignition starter

switch)

M26_00-0117-71 M26_00-0112-71 M26_00-0113-71
Depress the brake pedal and press This icon (2) appears on the dis- The automatic drive mode is now en-
selector lever (1) to the left into play screen if you do not operate abled and the display screen shows
centre position (“D”). the brake pedal at the same time as engaged starting gear (1) (the start-
you attempt to engage a gear. ing gear is selected by the system it-
self, the clutch remains disengaged).
Note:
The driver must depress the brake ped- Note:
al in order for the system to be able to Automatic mode is indicated by the “A” in
engage a preselected gear (“D” or “R”). the screen display.

Note:
After an engine start, 3rd gear is selec-
ted as the starting gear by default. How-
ever, the system automatically preselects
a lower gear if the bus is on an uphill
gradient and the selected starting gear is
too high.
The starting gear proposed by the

system can also be corrected by the
driver in the range from the minimum
M26_00-0114-71 M26_00-0053-71
starting gear (1st gear) to the max-
Current starting gear (1) is displayed Depress accelerator pedal (5) and
imum starting gear (4th gear). The
on the display screen. simultaneously release parking brake
correction is made by moving select-
(4).
or lever (1) forwards (up one or two
gears) or to the rear (down one or
two gears). Danger.
The bus may roll away if you do not de-
press accelerator pedal (5).

Danger. Danger. Caution:

There will be no engine braking effect if Risk of accident. Depending on the po- The overload could result in damage to
the bus starts to move without a gear sition of the accelerator pedal and the the clutch if the driver fails to react ac-
engaged (selector lever at “N”). Do not speed of the bus, the system may quit cordingly to this screen display.
allow the bus to roll against the direction manoeuvring mode and return to pulling-
of travel of the gear that is currently en- away mode. The bus may accelerate un-
gaged. expectedly. Danger.
The bus starts to move (clutch closes If the driver does not react accordingly
automatically). to this screen display, the system quits
Note: manoeuvring mode and returns to pulling-
Manoeuvring the bus There is no time limit for manoeuvring away mode. The bus may accelerate.
mode. Risk of accident.
Note:
1st, 2nd and reverse gear are manoeuv-
Note:
ring gears intended to support extremely
slow driving. Manoeuvring mode is not If this icon is displayed, the transmission
supported in other gears. Select a suit- The icon above appears on the dis- will, in automatic drive mode, shift into a
able gear by briefly pressing the selector play screen in the event of clutch lower starting gear (e.g. from 3rd to 2nd
lever towards “-”. The system interprets overload. gear) the next time the driver pulls away.
the driver's manoeuvring intention from
the position of the accelerator pedal and
the low driving speed. In manoeuvring
mode, the bus (accelerator pedal) is more
sensitive and clutch control characterist-
ics differ from those of normal mode.

Note:
To change between manual and automatic
mode and vice versa, press selector lever
(1) to the left.
Note:
In automatic drive mode, the driver is
able to intervene manually at any time
by moving selector lever (1) forwards or
M26_00-0053-71 M26_00-0117-71 backwards.
Hill starts To change mode of operation: manu-
al/automatic Gearshifts in automatic drive mode
Danger.
Note: Note:
For a hill start, the parking brake must
It is possible to change between automat- All upshifts and downshifts are carried
be engaged and a gear selected (select-
ic drive mode and manual mode at any out automatically. These take place in re-
or lever in “D” or “R”). Parking brake (4)
time. sponse to the driving situation, engine
must not be released until accelerator
load, accelerator pedal position, road
pedal (5) has been depressed, otherwise
speed and engine speed.
the bus will roll backwards. RISK OF AC-
CIDENT.

M26_00-0113-71 M26_00-0117-71 M26_00-0115-71
Screen display in automatic drive Gearshifts in manual mode Screen display in manual mode (gear
mode (gear indicator 112 with “A”). indicator 112 without “A”).
Note: Skipping gears in manual mode
Move selector lever forwards (up one or
two gears) or to the rear (down one or Note:
two gears).
To skip one gear: press selector lever
(1) through two detents in the desired
direction (forwards or to the rear).

Note: Note: Danger.

To skip two gears: in quick succession, It is not necessary to alter the position of The engine braking effect is interrupted
press selector lever (1) up to the first the accelerator pedal during a gearshift for the duration of the gearshift. The bus
spring point once and then press it in the because the transmission control regu- may accelerate if you are driving downhill
desired direction once as far as the stop. lates the engine control automatically. at this time.
Note: Note:
It is possible to shift from any gear to A shift command is not executed if the
neutral at any time using selector lever gearshift would result in the maximum
(1). This gearshift has priority. engine speed (cut-off speed) being ex-
ceeded.
Engine braking effect during a gear-

Danger.
shift
Neutral can be selected even while the
bus is in motion. If neutral is selected,
the drive train will be disconnected. Note:
There would no longer be any engine The braking effect of the engine is tem-
braking effect. porarily interrupted for the duration of a
gearshift (drive train disconnected by the
transmission system). Once the shift has
been completed, the engine braking effect
is automatically restored.

Danger.
The transmission does not shift into re-
verse gear if the bus is already in motion.
Stop the bus immediately.
Changing the direction of travel
Note:
Depress the brake pedal. Move selector
lever (1) from centre position “D” (for-
M26_00-0117-71 M26_00-0116-71
ward travel) through “N” (neutral) to “R”
Selecting reverse gear “R” (2) is displayed on the display (reverse travel).
screen (the clutch remains disen-
Note: gaged).
Danger.
The bus must be stationary
Note: To change the direction of travel (selector
Depress the accelerator pedal and sim- lever from “R” to centre position “D” or
Note: ultaneously release the parking brake vice versa), the bus must be stationary,
(clutch closes automatically). The bus otherwise the transmission will shift into
Depress the brake pedal and move select- neutral. Only the screen display provides
reverses.
or lever (1) to “R”. a reliable indication of which direction of
travel is selected inside the transmission.

Stopping the bus

Danger.
Note: When the bus is stationary with the en-
With the accelerator pedal released, bring gine running and a gear selected, the
the bus to a halt by applying the service slightest depression of the accelerator
brake. pedal is enough to set the bus in motion.
To prevent the engine from stalling,

the clutch disengages automatically Danger.
before the bus comes to a halt.
Before you leave the driver's area, always
shift the transmission into neutral and
M26_00-0117-71
Note: apply the parking brake.
Parking the bus and switching off the
To hold the bus stationary, always apply
the service brake or parking brake. engine
Danger.
Operation of the parking brake while the Note:
Note: bus is in motion over a slippery surface Bring the bus to a halt, engage the park-
For lengthy stationary periods, shift the may cause the engine to stall. The bus ing brake and move selector lever (1) to
transmission into neutral. could skid and the power steering would “N” (neutral). Switch off the engine using
no longer be available. the ignition starter switch.

Engine overspeed protection in manu-

Note: al and automatic drive modes Danger.
If you did not shift the transmission in- In automatic drive mode, the bus may
to neutral before you switched off the Note: accelerate when driving downhill. The
engine, neutral will be selected automat- transmission system shifts up to prevent
For the protection of the engine and
ically when you switch the ignition starter damage to the engine in the overspeed
transmission, the electronics system pre-
switch to OFF. range (red range).
vents gearshifts from taking place if they
would cause the engine to rev at a speed
outside the specified engine speed range.
Danger.
If the engine is switched off with a gear
engaged and then switched on again, it Note:
will be necessary to move selector lever In manual drive mode, care must be
(1) to “N” first and then back to centre taken to ensure that the speed of the
position “D” again. engine does not exceed the permissible
speed range. There would be no
automatic upshift if the bus were to
Danger. accelerate when driving downhill.
It is not possible to switch off (park) the
bus with a gear engaged. The parking
brake must be applied before the driver's Caution:
area is vacated. The bus could roll away The engine could be damaged if the bus
if no brake has been applied. Chock the were to accelerate on a downhill stretch
wheels as an additional safeguard. and the speed of the engine were allowed
to enter the overspeed range.

Note: Caution:
It is not possible to shift to reverse gear At outside temperatures of between -
when the roller is turning. The clutch will 20 °C and -35 °C, the transmission re-
close if a gear is engaged. quires a warm-up phase after the engine
has started. To warm up the transmis-
sion oil, the engine must be allowed to
Danger. run for at least 10 minutes with the bus
stationary (at an elevated idling speed of
The bus may drive off the roller even if approximately 1,500 rpm).
the accelerator pedal is not depressed.
M26_00-0117-71 Starting the bus at low temperatures

Caution:
Notes on roller dynamometers
At outside temperatures of below -35 °C,
Note:
it is necessary to warm the transmission
Note: The transmission has been filled in ac- up to a temperature of over -30 °C using
When the bus has been driven into po- cordance with EvoBus Specifications for hot air before the engine is started. The
sition on the roller dynamometer (brake Service Products. This means that it can transmission must not be subjected to
test stand), move selector lever (1) to be used at outside temperatures down to a heat of over +130 °C. Do not direct
“N”. -20 °C without any effect on functionality. the heat at the transmission actuator or
clutch actuator.
As soon as the roller begins to turn,
the system interprets that the bus
is being driven. If only the driven
axle is on the roller, the system in-
terprets that an ABS/ASR fault has
occurred because the front wheels
do not turn.

ZF-AS TRONIC transmission shift system operating/malfunction displays
Bus operation at permanent outside ZF-AS TRONIC transmission shift Transmission malfunction yellow
temperatures of between 0 °C and system operating/malfunction alert
–40 °C displays
ZF-AS TRONIC (option) screen
Note: displays
Special guidelines apply if the bus is to Different icons or alerts are displayed on
be operated at permanently low temperat-
the instrument cluster display screen as
ures. These guidelines must be requested
from an EvoBus Service Partner.
appropriate to the transmission operating
state.
Parking the bus at low temperatures
Note:
The bus may be parked for long periods M26_00-0118-71
at outside temperatures down to –40 °C. The gear indicator and the drive mode
turn yellow if a malfunction occurs in the
transmission system.

Transmission malfunction red alert mission compressed-air system no longer Clutch overloaded, foot off the
has sufficient pressure (compressed-air accelerator pedal
supply lower than 6.2 bar).
Note:
Do not pull away until the bus has
charged the compressed-air system to a This icon appears on the display screen
sufficient level. The engine would stall in conjunction with a yellow warning
if the bus were brought to a halt and
level malfunction message if the clutch
the clutch failed to open because there
was an insufficient supply of compressed is overloaded.
air (transmission shifts only when the
compressed-air supply is higher than Note:
M26_00-0119-71
6.2 bar).
The gear indicator and the drive mode This icon appears on the display screen if
there is a risk of clutch overload due to
turn red if a serious malfunction occurs
several pulling-away movements in quick
in the transmission system. Danger. succession or driving at crawling speed in
Transmission compressed-air If a gearshift is attempted without there a starting gear that is too high.
supply too low being a sufficient supply of compressed
air, the transmission may remain in neut-
ral, which would mean that there would Note:
be no drive force or engine braking effect. An operating state must be selected that
does not cause the clutch to overload, i.e.
you should accelerate the bus (to close
This icon appears on the display screen the clutch), stop or pull away quickly in a
in conjunction with a yellow warning lower gear.
level malfunction message if the trans-

Note: Note: Note:

During relatively long periods without If this icon is displayed, the transmission In the event of specific system faults,
movement (longer than approximately 1 will, in automatic drive mode, shift into a automatic drive mode may be deactivated
to 2 minutes, e.g. in traffic jams, at rail lower starting gear (e.g. from 3rd to 2nd and the transmission system may remain
crossings, etc.), the transmission must be gear) the next time the driver pulls away. in manual drive mode.
shifted to neutral in order to spare the
mechanical components of the clutch re- Transmission emergency program
lease mechanism. This causes the clutch Caution:
to close and relieve the clutch release
mechanism of load. In the event of a yellow warning level
Note: This icon appears on the display screen
est opportunity.
Even though the clutch is automated, the
in conjunction with a yellow warning
driver still has a considerable influence level malfunction message if a malfunc- Transmission malfunction
on the clutch's service life. To minimise tion occurs in the transmission system.
clutch wear, it is advisable to select as
low a gear as possible when pulling away. Note:
It is possible to continue driving but only
with certain function limitations. Have the
Danger. This icon appears on the display screen
transmission system checked as soon as
in conjunction with a red warning level
If the driver does not react accordingly
malfunction message if a malfunction
to this screen display, the system quits
manoeuvring mode and returns to pulling- occurs in the transmission system.
away mode. The bus may accelerate.
Risk of accident.

display screen until the driver shifts to

Danger. neutral. To continue the journey: depress Note:
the brake pedal, shift the selector lever to While the bus is stationary, a gear can
“N” (neutral) and then to “D” or “R”. be selected only if the service brake is
diately (traffic conditions permitting) and applied.
Depress the brake pedal
an EvoBus Service Partner must be noti-
fied.
Forced neutral
This icon appears if it is necessary to

select “N” (neutral) using the selector
lever.
M26_00-0112-71
Caution:
This icon (2) appears if you do not oper-
If the bus is stationary and the engine is ate the brake pedal at the same time as
running but “N” (neutral) has not been you attempt to engage a gear.
selected, a yellow alert will be issued
after four minutes and a warning tone
will sound. In addition, the gear indicator
flashes. The icon above is also displayed.
After a further minute, the transmission
system shifts to “N” (neutral) automatic-
ally (forced neutral). “N” flashes on the

GO 240-8 PowerShift transmission shift system (option) (system description)
GO 240-8 PowerShift transmis- driving over mountainous terrain. Auto- and when to control the clutch to the
sion shift system (option) (system matic mode should be used for all nor- nominal position.
description) mal driving conditions. The mechatronic transmission and en-
The GO 240-8 PowerShift transmission is As the basis for selecting the appropri- gine control units then implement the
adapted to the engine by a standard dry ate gear, the intelligent gear selection control commands of the drive control
clutch. The clutch is also controlled by function in automatic mode takes into for the engine and transmission.
the transmission system so that there is consideration the driver's commands (op- The screen in the instrument panel
no need for a clutch pedal. eration of the accelerator pedal and ser- shows all necessary system information
Gears are shifted and the clutch is oper- vice brake), the current engine operating (e.g. gear, malfunction, etc.) to the
ated electropneumatically. An electron- state, uphill or downhill gradients and driver.
ics system connected to the transmis- the load on the bus. An optimum com- The system has a failsafe mode that can
sion controls the valves of the pneumatic promise between comfort, fuel economy be activated in the event of a fault in the
actuating cylinders at the gear, gate and and wear is therefore achieved. transmission shift system. In this mode,
clutch. There are three electronics systems it is possible to drive the bus away from
The driver selects the direction of travel involved in the automation of the drive areas of danger or to the nearest work-
using the gearshift unit and is then able train: shop. Even if no faults are present, how-
to control the forwards and reversing Engine control (MR) ever, it is possible to activate failsafe
motion of the bus using the accelerator mode in order to train drivers how to
Drive control (FR)
and brake pedal. Advantage: the driver proceed if similar situations were to oc-
Transmission control (GS) cur in future.
is relieved of having to change gear and
use a clutch. The drive control coordinates the func- Refer to “Operation of the GO 240-8
Using the gearshift unit, the driver can tions of the drive train by specifying the PowerShift failsafe mode (option)” in this
choose between automatic and manu- engine torque to be generated by the section.
al gear selection. Manual gear selection engine control and by instructing the
should, however, only be used in spe- transmission control which gear to select
cial cases, e.g. to brake the bus or when


GO 240-8 PowerShift transmission shift system (option) gearshift unit (selector lever)
GO 240-8 PowerShift transmission

shift system (option) gearshift unit
(selector lever)

Operation of the GO 240-8 PowerShift transmission shift system (option)
1 Neutral button Operation of the GO 240-8 evant to safety or work on safety-related

2 To shift down/to select re- PowerShift transmission shift systems be carried out at a qualified spe-
verse gear system (option) cialist workshop.
3 Function button
M/A To switch to manual mode/ Danger.
Danger.
automatic mode
Never leave the driver's area with the
4 To shift up engine running and a gear engaged.
The PowerShift transmission shift system
automatically disengages the clutch if the
engine speed drops below 600 rpm in
1st gear. The power flow is interrupted
Danger. and the bus could roll back, e.g. on uphill
It may no longer be possible to engage gradients, and you could thereby cause
the clutch or shift gear correctly in the an accident. For this reason, never allow
event of a loss of pressure in the auxili- the engine speed to drop below 600 rpm
ary consumers circuit. This may prevent in 1st gear.
you from leaving areas of danger in good
time. If the “Auxiliary consumers sup- +++ Selecting the operating mode
ply pressure” malfunction appears on the +++
display screen and the malfunction dis-
play lights up yellow, do not pull away, or,
Note:
if the bus is already in motion, stop the
bus as soon as possible (traffic conditions With the PowerShift transmission shift
permitting). Have the compressed-air sys- system, it is possible to drive in one of
tem checked and repaired at a qualified two operating modes: manual mode or
specialist workshop which has the neces- automatic mode. In manual mode, you
sary specialist knowledge and tools to are able to determine the shift point
carry out the work required. EvoBus re- and shift direction yourself. In automat-
commends an EvoBus Service Partner for ic mode, you simply need to shift into the
this work. It is essential that work rel- starting gear. The PowerShift transmis-

sion shift system then changes gear auto-

matically, depending on the engine speed, Note:
accelerator pedal position, load on the en- For journeys on arduous terrain, it is ad-
gine, operating status of the continuous visable to select manual mode in order to
brake, load on the bus and gradient of avoid undesired upshifting, for example,
the road. and therefore interruptions in tractive
power.
+++ Selecting transmission neutral

position +++
M26_00-0114-71 Danger.
In automatic mode, “A” appears next If you were to select the transmission
to gear indicator (1). neutral position while the bus were in mo-
tion, you would lose tractive power or the
braking effect of the engine. It may not
Note:
then be possible to bring the bus to a
In neutral, there is no indication wheth- halt in good time and you could thereby
M26_00-0122-71 er manual or automatic mode has been cause an accident. For this reason, you
Pressing the selector lever to the preselected. should never select the transmission neut-
left switches from manual mode to ral position while the bus is in motion.
automatic mode.

+++ Selecting reverse gear +++

Note: Stop the bus.
It is possible to select transmission neut-
ral position “N” from any gear provided Apply the service brake or parking
the selector lever is in the basic position. brake.
M26_00-0111-71
“N” appears in gear indicator (2) as

soon as the transmission neutral pos-
ition is selected.
M26_00-0123-71
Note:
Press neutral button (1). If the bus is coasting in transmission
neutral position “N”, move the gear lever
forwards or back. The PowerShift trans-
mission shift system engages the optim-
um gear.

M26_00-0124-71 M26_00-0116-71 M26_00-0053-71
Press and hold function button (3) “R” appears in gear indicator (2) as Depress the accelerator pedal slowly
and pull the selector lever back (2) soon as reverse gear is selected. and simultaneously release the park-
until resistance can be felt. ing brake.
Note: Danger.
It is possible to shift into reverse gear The bus may roll away if you do not de-
either from transmission neutral position press accelerator pedal (5).
or even directly from 1st gear.

Danger.
There is no engine braking effect if the
bus starts to move without a gear having
been selected. Do not allow the bus to
roll against the direction of travel of the
gear that is currently engaged.
The bus starts to move (clutch closes

automatically)
Changing the direction of travel
M26_00-0125-71 M26_00-0126-71
Danger.
+++ Pulling away +++ Keep function button (3) pressed and
move the gear lever forwards (4).
The direction of travel cannot be changed
Note:
unless the bus is stationary, otherwise the
transmission will automatically shift into Press function button (3). Note:
neutral. Only the screen display provides It is possible to shift into the starting
a reliable indication of which direction of gear either from transmission neutral pos-
travel is selected inside the transmission. ition or even directly from reverse gear.
The PowerShift transmission shift

system selects 2nd gear (starting
gear).

+++ Changing the starting gear +++

Note: Danger.
If the transmission detects an uphill gradi- The bus may roll away if you do not de- Note:
ent, 1st gear is selected as the starting press accelerator pedal (5). 2nd gear is the highest gear that can be
gear automatically. selected as the starting gear.
Danger.
There is no engine braking effect if the
bus starts to move without a gear having
been selected. Do not allow the bus to
roll against the direction of travel of the
gear that is currently engaged.
The bus starts to move (clutch closes

automatically)
Note:
M26_00-0053-71
M26_00-0127-71
Depress the accelerator pedal slowly Change the starting gear if 1st gear selec-
ted by the PowerShift transmission shift To shift up a gear from the gear se-
and simultaneously release the park- lected, move the selector lever for-
system appears to be an unsuitable gear
ing brake. in which to pull away. wards (4) until resistance can be felt.
To shift down a gear, pull the select-
or lever backwards until resistance
can be felt.

+++ Accelerating +++ Depress the accelerator pedal bey-

ond the pressure point as far as the
Note: stop.
Whenever the maximum engine speed for
the current driving situation is reached in Note:
the gear selected, the PowerShift trans- The PowerShift transmission shift system
mission shift system shifts up to the next will shift down into a lower gear if neces-
optimum gear (in automatic drive mode). sary.
Ease off the accelerator pedal once

Note: the desired speed has been reached.
M26_00-0053-71
In automatic mode, you can use the ac-
+++ Hill starts +++. celerator pedal position to actively influ- Note:
ence the shift point. Little throttle = early The PowerShift transmission shift system
Danger. upshift/more throttle = late upshift. shifts back up.
A gear must be engaged before you at- +++ Kickdown (automatic drive +++ Decelerating +++
tempt to pull away on an uphill gradient. mode) +++
Then depress accelerator pedal (5). Do Release the accelerator pedal.
not release parking brake (4) until you
can feel the torque in the drive train. Note:
There would otherwise be a risk of the Kickdown is used to achieve maximum
bus rolling backwards. bus acceleration.

Slowly depress the brake pedal shift up a gear manually or briefly depress +++ Gearshifts in manual mode +++
and/or activate the continuous the accelerator pedal at least once. There
brake. is a risk of consequential engine damage Note:
if the driver fails to react in time.
In either operating mode (manual/auto-
Note: matic), it is possible to intervene manu-
The PowerShift transmission shift system ally to override the gear selected by the
will shift down into a lower gear if neces- PowerShift transmission shift system.
sary (in automatic drive mode).
+++Gearshifts in automatic drive

mode+++
Note:
All upshifts and downshifts are carried
out automatically. These take place in re-
sponse to the driving situation, engine M26_00-0113-71
load, accelerator pedal position, road
Screen display in automatic drive
speed and engine speed.
mode (gear indicator 1-8 with “A”).
M26_00-0127-71
Caution: To shift up, move the selector lever

On steep downhill gradients, the
forwards (4) until resistance can be
PowerShift transmission shift system does felt.
not shift up if the accelerator pedal is The PowerShift transmission shift
not depressed. A warning tone sounds system shifts up a gear.
as soon as the engine limit speed is
reached. The driver must either brake,

M26_00-0126-71 M26_00-0128-71 M26_00-0124-71
Press and hold function button (3). To shift down, pull the selector lever Press and hold function button (3).
Move the selector lever forwards (4). back (2) until resistance can be felt. Pull the selector lever back (2).
The PowerShift transmission shift The PowerShift transmission shift The PowerShift transmission shift
system shifts up 2 gears. system shifts down a gear. system shifts down 2 gears.
Caution:
If the target gear is too low, the
PowerShift transmission shift system
shifts down only to a permissible gear
that would not cause the engine to
overrev

Engine braking effect during a gear- +++ Stopping +++

shift Note:
Danger. The PowerShift transmission shift system
Note: engages 1st gear (starting gear) when the
The PowerShift transmission shift system
bus comes to a halt.
The braking effect of the engine is tem- automatically disengages the clutch if the
porarily interrupted for the duration of a engine speed drops below 600 rpm in
gearshift (drive train disconnected by the 1st gear. Tractive power would be lost
transmission system). Once the shift has and the bus could roll away if the engine Caution:
been completed, the engine braking effect is still running and a gear is still selec- Do not leave the driver's area with a gear
is automatically restored. ted (e.g. on uphill gradients). You could engaged and the parking brake applied.
thereby cause an accident. Whenever This state is not permitted and over time
you stop the bus, always secure the bus results in damage to the transmission.
Note: against rolling away using the service Always select the transmission neutral
brake or the parking brake. position first.
In automatic drive mode, operation of the
engine brake causes the system to shift Apply the brakes. +++ Parking the bus +++
down so that maximum engine braking
effect is achieved. Shift down if necessary.
Danger.
The PowerShift transmission shift
system disengages the clutch shortly It is not possible to park the bus with a
Danger. before engine idling speed has been gear engaged. The PowerShift transmis-
The engine braking effect is interrupted reached. sion shift system always selects transmis-
for the duration of the gearshift. The bus sion neutral position “N” when the engine
may accelerate if you are driving downhill is switched off. If you do not secure the
at this time. stationary bus using the parking brake,
the bus could roll away and you could
cause an accident. For this reason, al-
ways secure the bus using the parking
brake.

Note:
If the vehicle is parked with the engine
running, neutral is selected automatic-
ally after a delay of 5 minutes. After 4.5
minutes, a warning tone begins to sound
and N flashes on the display screen.
After a further 30 seconds, the trans-
mission shifts into neutral if neither the
selector lever nor accelerator pedal has
been operated in the meantime.
M26_00-0123-71 M26_00-0111-71
Stop the bus.
Press neutral button (1). “N” appears in gear indicator (2) as
Apply the parking brake.
soon as the transmission neutral pos-
ition is selected.
Switch off the engine.

Operation of the GO 240-8 PowerShift failsafe mode using the steering wheel keypad (option)
Operation of the GO 240-8 Refer to the “Driver's area controls

PowerShift failsafe mode using the Note: - Activating transmission shift system
steering wheel keypad (option) There is a possibility that the engine may failsafe mode” section.
stall, especially when coming to a halt
Danger. under heavy braking.
Never leave the driver's area with the

engine running and a gear engaged.
Note:
A malfunction in the system is indicated
on the instrument cluster display screen
Note:
in conjunction with a red or yellow warn-
On the instrument panel to the right of ing level malfunction display. The bus
the steering wheel, there is a pushbut- can be driven in failsafe mode as far as
ton labelled “N”. If this pushbutton is the nearest EvoBus Service Partner in the
pressed, it is possible to select neutral event of failure of the gearshift unit, the M54_00-1508-71_tif
at any time while failsafe mode is active clutch path sensor or the CAN connection
even if other information is currently dis- between the transmission control module A malfunction in the system is indic-
played on the display screen. This means and the drive control. ated by an icon (1) appearing in the
that it is not necessary to call up the centre of the display screen in con-
“Transmission failsafe mode” menu in or- junction with a red or yellow warning
der to select neutral. level malfunction display.
Note:
In the “Settings” menu, it is possible to
activate failsafe mode for training pur-
poses even if there is no transmission
fault present.

Note:
If “Ersatzfahren” (Drive in failsafe mode)
(2) is also displayed, it is possible to
activate failsafe mode. If “Ersatzfahren”
(Drive in failsafe mode) (2) is not
displayed, the malfunction is critical to
safety and it is not permissible to drive
on, even in failsafe mode.
Danger. M54_00-1509-71_tif M54_00-1510-71_tif
The bus must be stopped immediately The “Getriebe Ersatzbetrieb” (Trans- Pressing the arrow buttons on the
(traffic conditions permitting) if a red mission failsafe mode) pop-up win- steering wheel moves the cursor up
warning level malfunction is displayed. dow opens. or down the list and the correspond-
ing gearshift takes place with no fur-
Bring the bus to a halt and apply the
Note: ther input required.
parking brake.
In this window, it is possible to change
Press plus button (+) on the steering Note:
gear using the arrow buttons. In the list,
wheel. the current gear (N) appears in white and Gearshifts in failsafe mode are carried out
the selectable gears (2 or R) in grey. only while the engine is running.

Note:
If an upshift or downshift is not possible,
the corresponding arrow button symbol
will appear greyed out.
Note:
A gearshift cannot take place while the
bus is in motion. This means that the
driver has to decide on a forward gear (2
or 4) or reverse gear before pulling away. M54_00-1511-71_tif
If the driver presses a main menu

The “Getriebe Ersatzbetrieb” (Trans- button regardless, a message
mission failsafe mode) pop-up win- presenting a list of preconditions
dow can be closed using the main will be displayed. It will be possible
menu buttons provided the bus is to exit failsafe mode once these
stationary and the parking brake is preconditions have been fulfilled.
applied.
Note:
In this event, the “ESC” option in the
bottom left of the window will appear in
white. If the parking brake is not applied,
it is not possible to exit failsafe mode and
the “ESC” option will be greyed out.

Driving systems
Table of contents
Driving systems (overview) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

Automatic speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Automatic speed limiter (function description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Variable speed limiter (Temposet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Activating the variable speed limiter (Temposet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Drive/brake cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Activating drive/brake cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Distance cruise control (ART) (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Distance sensor for distance cruise control (ART) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Activating distance cruise control (ART) (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Setting the specified distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Vehicle ahead detected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
How to respond to a distance warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Operating/malfunction displays: distance cruise control (ART) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Active Brake Assist (ABA) (system description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Activation/deactivation of Active Brake Assist (automatic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

Driving systems
Table of contents
Activating Active Brake Assist (ABA) (manually) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Deactivating Active Brake Assist (ABA) (manually) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Sequence of events when emergency braking initiated by Active Brake Assist (ABA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Function description: warning levels and emergency braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Operating/malfunction displays: Active Brake Assist (ABA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Special driving situations with distance cruise control/Active Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Important information on the lane assistant warning system (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Deactivating the lane assistant warning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Operating/malfunction displays: lane assistant warning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

Driving systems
Driving systems (overview)
Driving systems (overview) tion. The symbol for the selected driving
The bus may be equipped with the Caution: system is shown on the display screen.
following driving systems: In the case of buses with manual
transmission, the driver has to change Note:
Automatic speed limiter gear manually in order to regulate engine
Press button (B) to switch between com-
Variable speed limiter (Temposet) speed when the bus is being accelerated
bined drive/brake cruise control or dis-
Combined cruise control (drive/brake or decelerated by drive/brake cruise
tance cruise control (ART) and the vari-
control or distance cruise control (ART).
cruise control) able speed limiter (Temposet). Switch
Distance cruise control (ART) (option) from combined drive/brake cruise control
to active distance cruise control (ART) by
Active Brake Assist (ABA) (option) sliding sleeve (C) on the steering column
switch towards (A).
Danger.
For further notes on operation, refer
The driving systems listed are only an to “Steering column switch for retarder
aid to assist the driver, e.g. to drive at and cruise control” in the “Driver's area
a preselected road speed. The driver
controls” section.
is responsible at all times for the actu-
al speed of the bus and for maintaining
an adequate distance from the vehicle in
front.
M54_00-0993-01
It is possible to switch between the

variable speed limiter (Temposet) and
drive/brake cruise control or distance
cruise control (ART) (option) driving sys-
tems at any time while the bus is in mo-

Driving systems
Automatic speed limiter
Automatic speed limiter Automatic speed limiter (function and symbol (1) appears on the display
Since 01.01.2005, all our buses in the description) screen.
EU have been limited to a legally spe- Functions: Speed limiter warning message
cified maximum speed of 100 km/h.
Speed limiter active
On steep downhill gradients, this speed
Speed limiter warning message
may be exceeded for various reasons if
the driver does not actively brake the Speed limiter active
bus.
In these cases, the speed limiter would
stabilise the speed of the bus automat-
ically using the continuous brake (re-
tarder).
Note:
M54_00-1442-71
The maximum limit speed corresponds to
the value set in the speed limiter and not This yellow alert is displayed in con-
to the speed controls in force in other junction with the message “Höchst-
countries (i.e. a fixed value that cannot geschwindigkeit überschritten” (Max-
be changed, e.g. during long-distance M54_00-1441-71 imum speed exceeded) if a speed of 65
travel from one country to another). The automatic speed limiter constantly mph (107 km/h) is reached despite use
monitors the maximum permissible of the retarder or if retarder braking per-
speed of the bus. If 60 mph (100 km/h) formance is reduced (due to high coolant
is reached in overrun mode, the engine temperatures).
torque is reduced first. If a speed of
62 mph (104 km/h) is reached despite
this measure, the retarder is activated

Driving systems
Variable speed limiter (Temposet)
Variable speed limiter (Temposet) Activating the variable speed limiter

Danger. The speed limiter can be used to set any (Temposet)
To avoid the risk of endangering passen- speed above 15 km/h as a limit speed.
gers and other road users, it will be ne- It is possible to accelerate the bus up Note:
cessary to brake the bus using the ser- to the speed set using the accelerator It is possible to exceed the stored limit
vice brake. pedal. speed, e.g. when overtaking. To do this,
depress the accelerator pedal briefly bey-
Danger. ond the full-throttle position as far as the
Note: stop. As soon as the overtaking man-
This warning cannot be acknowledged The speed limiter limits the set speed oeuvre is over, release the accelerator
by the driver and it continues to be dis- automatically. The speed limiter cannot pedal briefly and depress it again. This
played until the bus has slowed down to detect the road and traffic conditions. will bring the set limit speed back into
the legal maximum speed. effect.
Note:
The retarder is automatically activated if Note:
the set limit speed is exceeded by more If at this time the bus is travelling faster
than 4 km/h in overrun mode. than the stored limit speed, the bus will
be decelerated automatically by the re-
tarder.
Danger.
The speed limiter is only an aid designed
to assist driving. You are always respons-
ible for the speed driven and the distance
to be maintained. Only use the speed
limiter when traffic conditions permit a
constant speed to be maintained.

Driving systems
Activating the variable speed limiter (Temposet)
Move steering column switch (A) to maximum speed (2). In addition,

position (1.1). symbol (3) for the driving system
is displayed in the form of an oper-
Note: ating display in the lower permanent
display field.
The variable speed limiter (Temposet) is
now activated.
Note:
Use the accelerator pedal to acceler-
Briefly pressing the steering column
ate the bus up to the desired speed. switch to position (1.1) or position (1.2)
Briefly move steering column switch now increases or reduces the stored
(A) to position (1.1). maximum speed by 3 mph (5 km/h)
M54_00-0993-01 respectively.
Press function toggle button (B) re-
peatedly until “LIM” pop-up win-
dow (1) is displayed.
Note:
The variable speed limiter (Temposet) is
now selected.
M54_00-1440-71
While the variable speed limiter (Tem-

poset) is active, the pop-up window
displays “LIM” icon (1) and stored

Driving systems
Activating the variable speed limiter (Temposet)
Hold steering column switch (A) in

position (1.2) for some time.
Note:
The maximum speed is reduced in incre-
Release the steering column switch.
Note:
M54_00-0993-01
The selected limit speed is stored. M54_00-1443-71
Hold steering column switch (A) in In buses with distance cruise control
position (1.1) for some time. (option), main menu 2 (1) also dis-
plays the current distance (2) to the
Note: vehicle in front (provided the vehicle
is in range of the sensor).
The maximum speed is increased in incre-
Note:
The actual distance to a vehicle in front
is displayed even if the variable speed
limiter (Temposet) is not active.

Driving systems
Drive/brake cruise control
Drive/brake cruise control trol). Combined drive/brake cruise con-

Combined drive/brake cruise control trol is unable to interpret road and traffic
conditions itself. For this reason, do not
is able to control both the engine and
activate combined drive/brake cruise con-
the retarder. The system maintains a trol on slippery road surfaces, in fog or in
stored cruising speed provided there is difficult road and traffic conditions. You
sufficient engine power output or re- could fail to recognise dangers in good
tarder braking torque available (with a time, and endanger yourself and others.
tolerance of +4 km/h on downhill gradi- When driving on a slippery road surface,
ents). On level surfaces and on uphill the wheels could lock and the bus could
gradients, the speed is regulated by the skid.
engine (drive cruise control). On down-
M54_00-0993-01
hill gradients, the speed is regulated by
Move the steering column switch to the retarder (brake cruise control). The Danger.
position (1.3). speed is maintained constant only for The cruise control function is only an aid
The variable speed limiter (Temposet) as long as the braking performance of designed to assist driving. The driver is
is deactivated. The driving system's the retarder remains sufficient for this to responsible at all times for the speed
operating display symbol in the lower be possible. Whenever necessary, shift of the bus and for maintaining an ad-
permanent display field of the display down and reduce speed manually. equate distance to the vehicle in front.
Do not use cruise control unless traffic
screen goes out.
conditions permit a constant speed to be
Danger. maintained. On steep uphill or downhill
To maintain the stored speed, combined gradients, it may not be possible for a
drive/brake cruise control automatically constant speed to be maintained. Take
operates either the engine control in or- your foot off the accelerator pedal when
der to accelerate the bus (drive cruise cruise control is active.
control) or the engine brake and retarder
to decelerate the bus (brake cruise con-

Driving systems
Activating drive/brake cruise control
Activating drive/brake cruise

Note: control Note:
The retarder may be activated for ad- In buses with distance cruise control
ditional braking force. The cruise con- Note: (ART) (option), this function is auto-
trol system will remain active. The ser- matically activated whenever combined
vice brake may also be applied while the Precondition: bus speed must be great- drive/brake cruise control is activated.
bus is being braked by the retarder. The er than 10 mph (15 km/h). The clutch
cruise control system will remain active. and service brake pedals must be fully re-
If cruise control is braking the bus us- leased and the continuous brakes must
ing the retarder, the retarder will not be not be active.
deactivated if the service brake is then
applied. As soon as the retarder is de-
activated, the bus will accelerate to the Note:
previously stored speed. The speed is maintained constant only
for as long as the braking performance of
the retarder remains sufficient for this to
be possible. If necessary, shift down and
reduce speed.
Note:
It is possible to exceed the stored speed,
e.g. when overtaking. To do this, depress
the accelerator pedal. When the overtak-
ing manoeuvre is over, release the accel-
erator pedal again. Cruise control will re-
adjust the speed of the bus to the stored
speed.

Driving systems
Note:
Repeated and brief movement to position
(1.2) (< 0.5 seconds) = reduction in set
speed in 0.5 km/h increments.
Note:
Holding the steering column switch (>
0.5 seconds) in position (1.1) accelerates
the bus. When the combination switch is
M54_00-1003-01 M54_00-1444-71 released, the current speed is set as the
Briefly move the steering column The pop-up window displays “Cruise new value.
switch to position (1.1) or (1.2) (< control” icon (1) and set cruising
0.5 seconds). speed (2). In addition, symbol (3)
for the driving system is displayed in Note:
Note: the form of an operating display in Holding the steering column switch (>
the lower permanent display field. 0.5 seconds) in position (1.2) decelerates
Moving the steering column switch to po-
the bus. When the combination switch is
sition (1.2) enables you to call up a previ-
released, the current speed is set as the
ously stored speed. Note:
new value.
Repeated and brief movement to position
(1.1) (< 0.5 seconds) = increase in set
speed in 0.5 km/h increments.

Driving systems
Note:
- if the bus is braked using the service
brake and cruise control is currently in
operation. The speed set remains stored.
Note:
- if the speed drops below 10 mph (15
km/h), a short warning signal will sound.
The speed set remains stored.
M54_00-1446-71 M54_00-1003-01
In buses with distance cruise control Move the steering column switch to
(option), main menu 2 (1) also dis- position (1.3). Note:
plays the current distance (2) to the - if the clutch pedal is depressed for
The combined drive/brake cruise
vehicle in front (provided the vehicle longer than 5 seconds, e.g. during gear
control is deactivated. The driving
is in range of the sensor). selection. A short warning signal will
system's operating display symbol in
sound.
the lower permanent display field of
Note: the display screen goes out. Cruise
The actual distance to a vehicle in front is control is deactivated automatically:
Note:
displayed even if the cruise control driving
system is not active. - if the transmission is shifted to the
neutral position for longer than 5
seconds. A short warning signal will
sound.

Driving systems
Distance cruise control (ART) (option)
Distance cruise control (ART)

(option) Danger. Danger.
Distance cruise control (ART) is a con- Distance cruise control (ART) is merely Distance cruise control (ART) works
venience system that supplements the an aid to assist the driver. The driver is only in response to vehicles travelling in
controlling function of the cruise con- responsible at all times for the speed of front. It does not respond to stationary
trol system (drive/brake cruise control) the bus and for maintaining an adequate obstacles on the road, e.g. broken
with a distance cruise control function. distance to the vehicle in front. down vehicles or traffic congestion. If a
stationary obstacle is encountered, the
When there is no vehicle in front, dis-
bus will not be braked automatically. Only
tance cruise control (ART) operates in a distance warning may be displayed.
the same way as conventional cruise Danger.
control. If a slower vehicle in front is Distance cruise control (ART) uses the re-
detected by the distance sensor, the tarder and, if necessary, the service brake
Danger.
speed of the bus is automatically re- to brake the bus. It cannot automatically
duced and the bus maintains the spe- adapt the distance to the vehicle in front Distance cruise control (ART) is designed
cified distance from the vehicle in front. based on changing road and visibility con- for use on motorways or expressways. It
ditions. For this reason, do not activate is not intended for use on country roads
The desired speed stored remains un-
distance cruise control (ART) on slippery or in built-up areas.
changed. As soon as the traffic situ- road surfaces, in fog or in difficult road
ation permits, e.g. if the vehicle ahead and traffic conditions. You could fail to
changes lanes, the bus will accelerate up recognise dangers in good time, and en- Note:
to the desired speed stored in the cruise danger yourself and others. When driving
control memory. on a slippery road surface, the wheels It is advisable to deactivate distance
could lock and the bus could skid. cruise control (ART) before leaving the
motorway or expressway. With no vehicle
in front, the bus would accelerate up to
the stored desired speed.

Driving systems
Distance sensor for distance cruise control (ART)
Distance sensor for distance cruise

Danger. control (ART) Danger.
Distance cruise control (ART) must be de- Distance cruise control (ART) may not If the front end of the bus is deformed
activated if the bus is not travelling at function correctly in unfavourable weath- (e.g. due to a frontal collision), operation
normal ride height (e.g. in the event of er conditions (e.g. snow, slush) or if the of distance cruise control (ART) is prohib-
a fault in the air suspension) because re- sensor cover has been heavily soiled. ited because the system would no longer
liable system operation would no longer be able to function reliably as a result of
be guaranteed. Distance cruise control misalignment of the radar sensor in the
(ART) should also be deactivated on con- Note: front end. This also applies in the event
struction sites or other ground of similarly Clean the cover in the front bumper occa- of damage to chassis/steering geometry
poor quality. sionally. components.
Note:
Check the cover for damage. Replace
damaged covers with new ones.
Note:
Painting or repair work around the dis-
tance sensor is not permissible.

Driving systems
Activating distance cruise control (ART) (option)
Activating distance cruise control

(ART) (option)
Note:
The system can be activated at speeds of
between 10 mph (15 km/h) and 60 mph
(100 km/h).
Note:
The distance to the vehicle in front can M54_00-1488-71 M54_00-1489-71
be reduced, e.g. to overtake. To do this,
The indicator shown appears on the Distance cruise control on standby
depress the accelerator pedal. When the
overtaking manoeuvre is over, release the display screen if the request to activ-
accelerator pedal again. Distance cruise ate distance cruise control or com- Note:
control will then regulate the speed of bined drive/brake cruise control is
If a cruising speed has already been
the bus to maintain the specified distance invalid.
stored but distance cruise control is not
stored.
currently active, actual distance (1) (if
Note: measured) and stored cruising speed (3)
are displayed in grey.
Distance cruise control cannot be activ-
ated if: - the speed of the bus is less
than 10 mph (15 km/h), - the clutch ped-
al is depressed, - the service brake is de-
pressed, - ABS/ASR or ESP is intervening.

Driving systems
Activating distance cruise control (ART) (option)
is displayed in the form of an oper-

Note: ating display in the lower permanent
In buses with distance cruise control display field.
(ART) (option), this function is auto-
matically activated whenever combined Note:
drive/brake cruise control is activated.
In addition, an average specified distance
It can be deactivated and reactivated
to the vehicle in front is set. The spe-
manually by the driver sliding sleeve (C)
cified distance can be changed to any of
towards steering column (1.5).
7 distances - refer to “Setting the spe-
cified distance”.
M54_00-0993-01
To activate distance cruise control, Note:

briefly move the steering column Repeated and brief movement to position
switch to position (1.1) or (1.2) (< (1.1) (< 0.5 seconds) = increase in set
0.5 seconds). speed in 0.5 km/h increments.
Note:
Note:
Moving the steering column switch to po-
sition (1.2) enables you to call up a previ- Repeated and brief movement to position
ously stored speed. M54_00-1447-71 (1.2) (< 0.5 seconds) = reduction in set
“Abstandsregeltempomat” (Distance speed in 0.5 km/h increments.
cruise control) pop-up window (1)
opens. The current road speed (2)
is set and now shown as the stored
cruising speed together with sym-
bol (3) for the driving system, which

Driving systems
Setting the specified distance

Note:
Holding the steering column switch (> 0.5 Note:
seconds) in position (1.1) accelerates the
The specified distance to a vehicle in
bus and increases the cruising speed in
front can be set to any of 7 distances.
increments of 3 mph (5 km/h) (only in
With the basic setting (ignition On), the
ART mode). When the combination switch
distance is set to approximately 60 % of
is released, the selected value is set as
the speedometer value. At a speed of 60
the new cruising speed.
mph (100 km/h), this corresponds to a
value of approximately 60 metres and a
value of approximately 30 metres at 30
Note: mph (50 km/h). M54_00-0994-01
Holding the steering column switch (> 0.5 Twist the sleeve (C) on the steer-
seconds) in position (1.2) decelerates the ing column switch briefly up (1.6) or
bus and decreases the cruising speed in Note: down (1.7).
increments of 3 mph (5 km/h) (only in
Distance cruise control must be activated
ART mode). When the combination switch
(refer to “Activating distance cruise con-
is released, the selected value is set as
trol”).
the new cruising speed.

Driving systems
Note: Note:
The pop-up window closes automatically The specified distance currently set is
if the sleeve is not operated again with- displayed numerically (1) and in the form
in 10 seconds or if the steering column of a radar cone (2).
switch stalk is operated in a different
way. Twist the sleeve (C) on the steering
column switch down (1.7) for longer.
Twist the sleeve (C) on the steering
column switch up (1.6) for longer.
M54_00-1450-71
Pop-up window (1) opens. The spe-

cified distance currently set is dis-
played numerically (2) and in the
form of a radar cone (3).
Note:
The radar cone is subdivided into seven
M54_00-1452-71
segments. The number of bolder seg-
ments is a representation of the specified The specified distance is increased.
M54_00-1451-71
distance set.
The specified distance is reduced.

Driving systems
Vehicle ahead detected
Vehicle ahead detected

Note: Note:
The specified distance currently set is Whenever distance cruise control (ART) is
displayed numerically (1) and in the form active, the operating display (3) in the
of a radar cone (2). lower permanent display field is high-
lighted. In this way, the driver can see
that ART is governing the distance to the
vehicle in front regardless of which menu
is currently on the screen.
M54_00-1449-71
When the distance cruise control

radar detects a vehicle in front, the
actual distance to this vehicle ap-
pears above the system symbol dis-
played in main menu 2 (1).
Note:
The actual distance is displayed regard-
less of which driving system is currently
selected and whether this driving system
is active or not.

Driving systems
How to respond to a distance warning
How to respond to a distance

warning Danger.
Pay even more attention to the traffic
Danger. situation if a distance warning is issued
while the bus is in motion. Brake the bus
Distance cruise control works only in using the service brake if necessary.
response to vehicles travelling in front. It
does not respond to stationary obstacles
on the road, e.g. broken down vehicles
or traffic congestion. If a stationary Danger.
obstacle is encountered, the bus will not No automatic control of distance (auto-
be braked automatically. Only a distance matic braking) takes place, i.e. it is ne-
warning may be displayed. M54_00-1453-71
cessary to decelerate the bus manually
It is absolutely essential that the using the service brake. The system can-
driver brake the bus manually us- not always interpret complex driving situ-
Danger. ing the service brake whenever an ations unequivocally. This may result in
automatic distance warning is issued. false warnings or no warnings at all.
Distance cruise control decelerates the
bus automatically to maintain the set dis-
tance to the vehicle travelling in front. Note:
Distance cruise control will be activated Note:
A pop-up window (1) appears and a
if a vehicle in front changes lanes, for The pop-up window is displayed for a min-
double warning tone also sounds. In
example. However, the control interven- imum of 10 seconds and until the hazard-
addition, operating display (2) in the lower
tion is limited by the maximum decel- ous situation is over.
permanent display field turns red.
eration it is able to provide. If a higher
rate of deceleration is required, an auto-
matic distance warning appears on the
display screen and a double warning tone
sounds.

Driving systems
Operating/malfunction displays: distance cruise control (ART)
Operating/malfunction displays: Distance cruise control (ART) brake

distance cruise control (ART) request Danger.
Distance cruise control (ART) Pay even more attention to the traffic
sensor malfunction situation if a distance warning is issued
using the service brake if necessary.
Danger.
This icon and the message “Abstands
No automatic control of distance (auto-
Regel Tempomat Störung” (Distance matic braking) takes place, i.e. it is ne-
cruise control malfunction) are displayed cessary to decelerate the bus manually
on the display screen in conjunction with using the service brake. The system can-
a yellow alert if the sensor for the dis- M54_00-1453-71 not always interpret complex driving situ-
tance cruise control system has malfunc- ations unequivocally. This may result in
Pop-up window (1) appears on the dis- false warnings or no warnings at all.
tioned. The cause may be a dirty sensor
play screen and a double warning tone
or even a fault in the control unit for the
sounds if distance cruise control detects Initialising distance cruise control
drive control system.
that the maximum rate of deceleration (ART)
provided by the system would not be
Note: sufficient to avoid a collision at the cur-
Clean the sensor. If the icon does not go rent road speed. In addition, operating
out even if you switch the ignition off and display (2) in the lower permanent dis-
on again, have the malfunction rectified play field turns red.
by an EvoBus Service Partner. If distance cruise control had a fault the
last time the ignition was switched off,
this icon will be displayed on the instru-
ment cluster display screen after the

Driving systems
Active Brake Assist (ABA) (system description)
ignition is switched on again. The icon Active Brake Assist (ABA) (system
goes out if distance cruise control is op- description) Note:
erating free of malfunctions. Active Brake Assist (ABA) is an assist- If distance cruise control is active, the
ance system for critical driving situ- warnings of distance cruise control are
Note: ations. Active Brake Assist can help to issued before those of Active Brake As-
minimise the risk of colliding with the sist. The warnings of Active Brake Assist
If the icon does not go out, have the mal-
are still issued if distance cruise control is
function rectified at an EvoBus Service vehicle in front or at least reduce the
not active.
Partner. severity of accident.
Active Brake Assist is merely an aid to
assist the driver. Danger. Risk of accident.
Whenever Active Brake Assist detects a Active Brake Assist does not relieve you
hazardous situation, the driver is alerted of the responsibility for adopting a driving
by an audible and a visual warning. style which takes traffic and road condi-
If there is a risk of a collision, the warn- tions into account. Deceleration by Active
ing level is escalated and automatic par- Brake Assist may not be sufficient to pre-
tial braking of the vehicle is initiated. vent a collision with the vehicle in front.
If the driver does not react to the warn- The driver is always responsible for the
speed driven, for initiating braking or
ings, Active Brake Assist automatically
evasive manoeuvres in good time and
initiates emergency braking (full brake for maintaining a safe distance from the
application). vehicle in front. If Active Brake Assist
cannot interpret a traffic situation unequi-
vocally, it always transfers responsibility
for braking the vehicle to the driver. For
this reason, you should never rely on Act-
ive Brake Assist to brake the vehicle in
every situation. Do not wait until Active

Driving systems
Activation/deactivation of Active Brake Assist (automatic)
Brake Assist initiates full braking. In the either failed to detect the danger, is de- Activation/deactivation of Active
following situations, you should brake the activated or has malfunctioned. Brake the Brake Assist (automatic)
bus manually using the service brake: bus using the service brake. Active Brake
Active Brake Assist is activated
If the distance warning icon appears Assist cannot always interpret complex
driving situations unequivocally. If, in a
automatically.
on the display screen.
non-critical situation, a visual and/or aud- Turn the vehicle key to the drive po-
If a continuous and intermittent warn-
ible warning is issued or partial braking is sition in the ignition lock. The indic-
ing tone sounds.
initiated, you can deactivate the system ator lamp in the Active Brake Assist
If a continuous and intermittent warn- by operating
ing tone sounds and automatic partial pushbutton goes out.
the turn signal switch,
braking has been initiated. Active Brake Assist is deactivated
the brake pedal,
automatically
the accelerator pedal or
Danger. Risk of accident. the Active Brake Assist pushbutton. at a vehicle speed of less than 10
km/h,
Active Brake Assist issues warnings
and brakes the bus only in response to if the chassis frame is not at normal
vehicles travelling in front. It does not level (raised, lowered),
respond to oncoming traffic or stationary in the event of a malfunction in the
obstacles on the road, e.g. broken down Active Brake Assist electronics sys-
vehicles or stationary vehicles at the end tem,
of a traffic jam.
in the event of a malfunction in the
If Active Brake Assist has already initi-
vehicle's brake system.
ated emergency braking, it is possible
to cancel this braking by kickdown (de-
pressing the accelerator pedal beyond the
pressure point) or by pressing the Active
Brake Assist pushbutton. If you do not
receive a visual or audible warning in a
critical situation, Active Brake Assist has

Driving systems
Activating Active Brake Assist (ABA) (manually)
Activating Active Brake Assist (ABA) at a qualified specialist workshop which Deactivating Active Brake Assist
(manually) has the necessary specialist knowledge (ABA) (manually)
and tools to carry out the work required.
EvoBus recommends an EvoBus service
partner for this work. In particular, if
the work is relevant to safety or involves
safety-related systems, it is essential that
the service be carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop.
Note:
Active Brake Assist is activated automat-
ically when the ignition starter switch is
M42_32-0003-71 pressed. M42_32-0001-71
Press and hold Active Brake Assist push- Press Active Brake Assist pushbutton (1).
button (1) for at least 1 second. Active Active Brake Assist is deactivated. Indic-
Brake Assist is activated. Indicator lamp ator lamp (2) in the pushbutton lights up.
(2) in the pushbutton goes out.
Danger.
If Active Brake Assist cannot be activ-
ated, no distance warnings will be issued.
There will be no automatic braking of the
bus in a critical situation. Pay even closer
attention to the traffic situation. Have
Active Brake Assist checked and repaired

Driving systems
Deactivating Active Brake Assist (ABA) (manually)
Note:
Active Brake Assist is reactivated auto-
matically the next time the engine is star-
ted.
M54_70-0024-71
Icon (1) appears on the display screen.

Active Brake Assist is not available.
There will be no automatic braking of
the bus in a critical situation.
Danger.
Responsibility for the safe control and
operation of a vehicle always lies with the
driver. The risks of an accident cannot
be effectively reduced unless Active Brake
Assist (ABA) is active.

Driving systems

Driving systems
Sequence of events when emergency braking initiated by Active Brake Assist (ABA)
Sequence of events when emer-

gency braking initiated by Active
Brake Assist (ABA)

Driving systems
Function description: warning levels and emergency braking
1 ART (distance cruise control) Function description: warning levels

warning level (preliminary and emergency braking Note:
warning level) The visual distance warning is issued even
2 ABA warning level: “Critical Functions:
if Active Brake Assist has been deactiv-
situation” Distance warnings ated.
3 ABA warning level: “Very crit- ART (distance cruise control) warning
ical situation” (partial brake level (preliminary warning level)
application) ABA warning level: “Critical situation” Note:
ABA warning level: “Very critical situ- To prevent unnecessary distance warnings
Note: and partial brake applications being is-
ation” (partial brake application)
Brake lamps lit. sued and initiated by Active Brake Assist,
Emergency braking (full brake applic- the driver is able to intervene actively to
4 Emergency braking (full brake ation) suppress them.
application) Cancelling emergency braking
End of emergency braking
Note: Note:
Flashing brake lamps. Distance warnings
The telephone and radio are muted for
5 End of emergency braking If a distance warning is issued while the the duration of the audible warning.
bus is in motion:
Note: Pay even closer attention to the
Hazard warning lamps activ- traffic situation.
ated. Brake the vehicle using the service
brake.

Driving systems
ART (distance cruise control) ABA warning level: “Critical ABA warning level: “Very critical
warning level (preliminary warning situation” situation” (partial brake
level) application)
M54_70-0021-71
M54_70-0021-71 Red alert (1) appears on the display M54_70-0021-71
Red alert (1) appears on the display screen in conjunction with icon (1.1) and Red alert (1) appears on the display
screen in conjunction with icon (1.1) and red alert (3). screen in conjunction with icon (1.1) and
red alert (3). red alert (3).
Note:
Note: At the same time, an intermittent warning
A double warning tone also sounds. tone sounds continuously.

Driving systems
warnings of Active Brake Assist are sup- Emergency braking (full brake
Note: pressed. application)
At the same time, an intermittent warn- If the driver does not react to the dis-
ing tone sounds continuously. In addition, Note: tance warnings and partial brake applic-
Active Brake Assist brakes the vehicle ation, Active Brake Assist automatically
The visual distance warnings continue to
with an automatic partial brake applica-
be displayed. Partial braking is cancelled. initiates emergency braking (full brake
tion. The vehicle is braked at a rate of
approximately 30 % of the maximum brak- application). Active Brake Assist brakes
ing output available. the vehicle with the maximum braking
output available.
Note:
The brake lamps come on automatically
as soon as partial braking is initiated.
The driver is able to intervene actively

by, for example, operating the
Brake pedal
Turn signals M54_70-0021-71
Active Brake Assist OFF pushbutton Red alert (1) continues to be displayed
Accelerator pedal on the display screen together with icon M54_70-0021-71
Kickdown (depressing the accelerator (1.1) and red alert (3) until the hazard- During emergency braking, red alert (1)
pedal beyond the pressure point). ous situation is over. is displayed on the display screen to-
gether icon (1.1) and red alert (3).
If the driver actively intervenes during
an automatic distance warning or partial
brake application, the audible distance

Driving systems
End of emergency braking

Note: Danger.
At the same time, a continuous warning If the vehicle has been emergency braked
tone sounds. to halt, it will continue to be held station-
ary for a further 3 seconds by the service
brake unless the driver intervenes.
Note:
If emergency braking is initiated at a
speed of over 50 km/h, the brake lamps Note:
are controlled by a pulse signal. This The hazard warning lamps are switched
means that the brake lamps are seen to on automatically if the vehicle is automat-
flash. ically braked to a halt from a speed of
over 50 km/h.
M54_70-0022-71
Cancelling emergency braking
Red alert (1) appears on the display The following points must be observed
It is possible to cancel emergency
screen in conjunction with icon (1.1) following an emergency braking event:
braking:
and the message “Notbremsung been-
Manoeuvre the vehicle out of the
by pressing the Active Brake Assist det!” (End of emergency braking!) (1.2).
danger zone as soon as possible,
pushbutton At the same time, red alert (3) is dis-
traffic conditions permitting.
or by depressing the accelerator ped- played on the display screen and a warn-
ing tone sounds. Switch off the hazard warning lamps.
al beyond the pressure point (kick-
down). Switch off the engine and apply the
parking brake to secure the vehicle
against rolling away.
The driver must inspect the vehicle
for roadworthy condition and check

Driving systems
Operating/malfunction displays: Active Brake Assist (ABA)
the health and condition of passen- Operating/malfunction displays: Active Brake Assist malfunction
gers. Active Brake Assist (ABA) display icon
Active Brake Assist deactivated
M54_70-0018-71
M54_70-0024-71 In the event of an Active Brake Assist

Icon (1) on the display screen indicates malfunction, yellow alert (1) appears
that Active Brake Assist has been manu- on the display screen in conjunction
ally deactivated by the driver pressing with icon (1.1) and the message “Act-
the pushbutton on the instrument panel. ive Brake Assist nicht verfügbar” (Active
Brake Assist not available) (1.2). At the
same time, a brief warning tone sounds
and yellow alert (3) is displayed.

Driving systems
Icon indicating Active Brake Assist

Note: Note: cannot be activated
Active Brake Assist is not available, which The driver can close the pop-up win-
means that the vehicle would not be dow using main menu buttons (2) on the
braked automatically in a critical situation. steering wheel.
Danger. Note:
If Active Brake Assist cannot be activ- The content of display screen (1)
ated, no distance warnings will be issued. changes. However, the yellow alert
There will be no automatic braking of the remains present in the background.
Active Brake Assist checked and repaired
M54_70-0019-71
at a qualified specialist workshop which
has the necessary specialist knowledge If Active Brake Assist cannot be activ-
and tools to carry out the work required. ated, yellow alert (1) appears on the dis-
EvoBus recommends an EvoBus service play screen in conjunction with icon (1.1)
partner for this work. In particular, if and the message “Active Brake Assist
the work is relevant to safety or involves nicht verfügbar” (Active Brake Assist not
safety-related systems, it is essential that available) (1.2). Yellow alert (3) is also
the service be carried out at a qualified displayed.
specialist workshop.

Driving systems
Distance warning/emergency
Note: Note: braking icon
This message appears if an attempt has The driver can close the pop-up win-
been made to activate Active Brake Assist dow using main menu buttons (2) on the
using the ABA pushbutton on the instru- steering wheel.
ment panel but the system is not avail-
able due to a malfunction.
Note:
The content of display screen (1)
Danger. changes. However, the yellow alert
If Active Brake Assist cannot be activ- remains present in the background.
ated, no distance warnings will be issued.
There will be no automatic braking of the
M54_70-0021-71
Active Brake Assist checked and repaired Red alert (1) appears on the display
at a qualified specialist workshop which screen in conjunction with icon (1.1) and
has the necessary specialist knowledge red warning lamp (3) if distance cruise
and tools to carry out the work required. control or Active Brake Assist detects
EvoBus recommends an EvoBus service that the maximum rate of deceleration
partner for this work. In particular, if provided by the system would not be
the work is relevant to safety or involves sufficient to avoid a collision at the cur-
safety-related systems, it is essential that
rent road speed. Similarly, red alert (1)
the service be carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop. appears on the display screen in con-
junction with icon (1.1) and red warn-
ing lamp (3) if Active Brake Assist has

Driving systems
initiated emergency braking (full brake Icon indicating end of emergency

application). braking Danger.
If the vehicle has been emergency braked
Danger. to halt, it will continue to be held station-
ary for a further 3 seconds by the service
Pay even more attention to the traffic
brake unless the driver intervenes.
situation if a distance warning is issued
using the service brake if necessary.
Note:
The hazard warning lamps are switched
Note: on automatically if the vehicle is automat-
ically braked to a halt from a speed of
The visual distance warning on the dis-
over 50 km/h.
play screen is issued even if Active Brake
Assist has been deactivated. M54_70-0022-71
Red alert (1) appears when the emer-

gency braking application has ended.
Red alert (1) displays icon (1.1) and
the message “Notbremsung beendet!”
(End of emergency braking) (1.2). At the
same time, red warning lamp (3) on the
display screen lights up.

Driving systems
Special driving situations with distance cruise control/Active Brake Assist
Special driving situations with dis- late. Therefore, pay even more attention only partly in your lane. Therefore, pay
tance cruise control/Active Brake to traffic conditions when cornering. even more attention to traffic conditions
Assist at exit sliproads or where other vehicles
are driving on a different line or are driv-
ing or parked on the hard shoulder.
M54_00-1005-01
M54_00-1004-01
Exit sliproads, driving on a different line,
Cornering, entering and exiting bends hard shoulders
M54_00-1006-01
Danger. Entry sliproads, driving on a different

Danger.
line, lane change
When cornering, going into and coming
Distance cruise control and Active Brake
out of a bend, distance cruise control and
Assist may not always detect vehicles in
Active Brake Assist may not always detect
front unequivocally at exit sliproads or
vehicles in front unequivocally. For ex-
where other vehicles pull out, are driv-
ample, your own vehicle may issue warn-
ing on a different line or are driving or
ings in response to vehicles detected in
parked on the hard shoulder. As a result,
a different lane and could thereby initiate
your vehicle could be braked automatic-
braking unnecessarily, or it may brake too
ally even though the vehicle in front is

Driving systems
Danger.
Distance cruise control and Active Brake
Assist may not always detect vehicles
in front unequivocally at entry sliproads
or where other vehicles are driving on
a different line or cut in. The distance
sensor may not detect vehicles that are
driving on a different line or cutting in un-
til it is too late. You must be prepared
where necessary to brake the bus using
the service brake in order to increase the M54_00-1007-01 M54_00-1008-01
distance to the vehicle ahead or cutting
in. Therefore, pay even more attention Vehicles cutting in Vehicles turning off
to traffic conditions at entry sliproads or
where other vehicles are driving on a dif- Danger. Danger.
ferent line or are driving or parked on the
hard shoulder. Vehicles that cut into your lane without At intersections, entry sliproads and exit
maintaining a safe distance will not be sliproads, distance cruise control and Act-
detected by distance cruise control until ive Brake Assist may not always detect
they have encroached into the detection vehicles in front unequivocally. For ex-
range of the sensor. The distance to the ample, your own vehicle may issue warn-
vehicle cutting in is too short. You must ings in response to vehicles turning off
brake the bus using the service brake and could thereby initiate braking unne-
to increase the distance to the vehicle cessarily, or it may brake too late. There-
cutting in. fore, pay even more attention to traffic
conditions at intersections, entry sliproads
and exit sliproads.

Driving systems
M54_00-1009-01 M54_70-0006-71 M54_70-0005-71
Overtaking Snaking bends Standing objects

Examples of standing objects:
Danger. Danger. Post
A distance warning could be issued if On snaking bends, distance cruise control Crash barriers on the outside of a
you begin to overtake but approach the and Active Brake Assist may not always bend
vehicle in front whilst still in the same detect vehicles in front unequivocally. The
lane. Your vehicle could be braked auto- distance sensor may not detect that the Traffic signs projecting into the car-
matically in order to increase the distance vehicle in front is in the same lane as riageway
to the vehicle in front. For this reason, you. You must be prepared where neces- Bridges
be sure to change lane fully before in- sary to brake the bus using the service
creasing speed to overtake the vehicle in brake in order to increase the distance
front. to the vehicle ahead. Therefore, pay even
more attention to traffic conditions on
snaking bends.

Driving systems
Danger. Danger.
Therefore, pay even more attention to Distance cruise control and Active Brake
traffic conditions through bends and when Assist may not always detect vehicles
approaching standing objects because no in front at intersections, entry sliproads
automatic braking is initiated. or exit sliproads unequivocally. Where
vehicles join your lane, warnings may not
be issued at all, and braking may not be
initiated, because the target could not be
acquired in time even though it may have
already encroached into your lane. Where
vehicles leave your lane, the visual loss of M54_70-0031-01
the target could result in brief warnings
and braking being initiated even if the Warning in response to vehicles pulling
vehicle has already arrived in the next out of your lane
lane.
Danger.
In instances where the vehicle in front
M54_70-0032-01 pulls out of your lane, it is common for
Vehicles on entry and exit sliproads or the speed of this vehicle to decrease be-
fore it has fully arrived in the adjacent
intersections
lane. On the one hand, the distance to
this vehicle decreases; on the other hand,
the speed differential increases. This may
result in an ART warning. Since ART re-
sponds very rapidly and promptly by de-
celerating your own vehicle, the situation
is alleviated in time for intervention by

Driving systems
Important information on the lane assistant warning system (option)
ABA to be avoided. Vehicles turning off Important information on the lane

or pulling out of your lane when corner- Danger. assistant warning system (option)
ing may amplify this effect further still.
In isolated cases, ABA distance warnings The lane assistant warning system is a
Through bends, including approach and
exit, the vehicle that pulled out of your
may be issued while the vehicle in front convenience system that continuously
is coming to a halt, e.g. if the vehicle monitors the position of the bus in rela-
lane may continue to be recorded by the
in front brakes erratically or both sud- tion to the roadside markings by means
sensor (albeit possibly for only a brief
denly and powerfully with the effect that of a camera behind the windscreen.
period) even though it has already arrived
the distance to this vehicle (B) decreases
in the adjacent lane. When the lane assistant warning sys-
temporarily. This often goes unnoticed by
the driver (e.g. stopping at traffic lights
tem is active, the driver is warned if the
or at the back end of a traffic jam). bus drives on or over road lane markings
by a display message and a vibration in
the driver's seat cushion.
Danger.
The lane assistant warning system is
merely an aid to assist the driver. The
driver is responsible at all times for main-
taining the vehicle's direction of travel
and making sure that it remains in the
correct lane.
M54_70-0030-01
Warning in response to vehicles stopping

Driving systems
Important information on the lane assistant warning system (option)
ings. Make sure that the windscreen is

Danger. always kept clean in the area of the cam- Note:
era. You should therefore switch on the An icon appears on the display screen
The lane assistant warning system can
windscreen wiper, for example, to keep if no warning is possible when the lane
only give a warning when the bus drives
the windscreen in the area of the camera assistant warning system is activated.
on or over road lane markings if these
free from dirt.
markings are easily detectable.
Note:
Danger.
Danger. A vibration test takes place in the driver's
Even when activated, the lane assistant seat as soon as the ignition is switched
Unfavourable weather conditions, such as
warning system does not issue warn- on. The seat cushion vibrates on the left-
snow, slush, heavy rain or heavy soiling of
ings at speeds below 50 mph (70 km/h), and right-hand side. If you do not feel a
the windscreen may impair the function of
when the turn signals are switched on or vibration, the system has malfunctioned.
the lane assistant warning system.
if the bus is being decelerated. In these Have the system checked at an EvoBus
situations, there will be no warning from Service Partner at the earliest opportunity.
the lane assistant warning system if the
Danger. bus is driven on or over the road lane
Note that the function of the lane assist- markings. When driving, you are therefore
ant warning system is limited: if the lane responsible for keeping the bus in the
markings are difficult to detect (e.g. if correct lane and in the correct direction
the road is covered by snow, sand or at all times.
stones), if there are shadows or if the
markings on the road are complex or dif-
ficult to distinguish (e.g. on construction
sites) or on tight bends. In these condi-
tions, the lane assistant warning system
cannot give a warning as intended if the
bus drives on or over the road lane mark-

Driving systems
Deactivating the lane assistant warning system
Deactivating the lane assistant

warning system
Note:
The lane assistant warning system is
automatically set to standby when the
bus is started. The LED in the lane as-
sistant warning system pushbutton lights
up. The system is activated from a speed
of 45 mph (70 km/h).
M54_00-1050-71 M54_00-1454-71
To deactivate the lane assistant The lane assistant warning system

warning system, press pushbutton function is deactivated and the LED
(1) with the ignition switch switched on the lane assistant warning system
on. pushbutton (1) goes out. In addition,
this operating display symbol appears
in the lower permanent display field.
Note:
It is advisable to deactivate the lane as-
sistant warning system when driving for
long periods on construction sites.

Driving systems
Operating/malfunction displays: lane assistant warning system
Operating/malfunction displays: travelling slower than 45 mph (70 km/h) the driver is being actively prompted to
lane assistant warning system or the driver has switched on the turn steer back into the current lane.
signals.
Lane assistant warning system Lane warning
switched on Lane assistant warning system
active
M54_00-1457-71
M54_00-1455-71 In the event of a lane warning, the sens-
Operating display (1) appears in the M54_00-1456-71 ory warning of the vibrating driver's seat
lower permanent display field when Whenever the lane assistant warning sys- is accompanied by a visual warning. Op-
the lane assistant warning system is tem is active, i.e. a warning is issued erating display (1) and line (2), which
switched on. Two continuous lines (2) when the bus is driven over lane mark- represents the line driven over, both turn
are displayed to the left and right of the ings, operating display (1) in the lower yellow. In addition, the lines in the menu
bus symbol. If the lines are greyed out, permanent display field is highlighted are shifted so that the yellow line is now
a warning will not be issued if the bus is and lines (2) to the left and right of the immediately adjacent to the bus symbol.
driven over lane markings because either bus symbol turn white. The lane mark-
the lane assistant warning system can- ings on the road have been detected and
not detect any lane markings, the bus is

Driving systems
Operating/malfunction displays: lane assistant warning system
Lane assistant warning system

malfunction
This icon appears on the display screen

in conjunction with a yellow alert if there
is a malfunction in the lane assistant
warning system.
Note:
Have the system checked at an EvoBus
Service Partner at the earliest opportunity.

Heating/ventilation/air-conditioning
Table of contents
Operating instructions for the air-conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

Heating/ventilation/air-conditioning (HVAC) control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Manually regulating the blower speed in the driver's area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Preselecting the passenger-compartment temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Manually regulating the blower speed in the passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Activating the air-conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Switching on air-recirculation mode in the driver's area and passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Activating the reheat function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Activating the auxiliary heating unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Programming auxiliary heating switch-on times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Activating a programmed auxiliary heating switch-on time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Deactivating an activated switch-on time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Programming the auxiliary heating switch-on duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Switches/controllers in the driver's rest area (bus with roof-mounted air-conditioning system) . . . . . . . . 330

Operating instructions for the air-conditioning system
Operating instructions for the air-

conditioning system
Note:
The driver's window should remain closed
while the vehicle is in motion and the
air-conditioning is operating to ensure
faultless operation of the air-conditioning
system.
Note:
The openings below the spare wheel in
the compartment must not be sealed or
covered by objects as troublefree oper-
ation of the heating, ventilation and air-
conditioning system would no longer be
guaranteed.


Heating/ventilation/air-conditioning (HVAC) control panel
(HVAC) control panel

4 Rocker switch for blower

Note: Note: speed control in the driver-
Switch on the ignition starter switch be- Air always flows out of the 's area
fore operation. swivelling air vents in the 5 Button for temperature con-
instrument panel (driver's trol in the passenger compart-
1 Button for air-recirculation/ station) and in the forward ment
fresh-air mode in the driver's structure (co-driver's seat)
area regardless of the position of Note:
the rotary knob. The airflow
can be regulated manually as Pressing the button for longer
Note: desired using the adjustment than 2 seconds automatically
(Integrated LED lit in air-recir- slide on the air vent itself. selects the optimum temper-
culation mode - LED unlit in ature. (LED in pushbutton (5)
2.1 Air distribution to the footwell unlit)
fresh-air mode)
2 Rotary knob for air distribu- 6 A/C standby “ON/OFF” but-
2.2 Air distribution to the footwell
tion in the driver's area: Infin- ton
and windscreen
itely variable 2.3 Air distribution to the wind-
Note:
screen
2.4 Fresh-air vent in the instru- (LED lit in A/C standby)
ment panel
2.5 Defrosting the windscreen
(blower automatically at
highest level)
3 Rotary knob for temperature
control in the driver's area

7 Smog button for the driver- 8 Reheat button (use to dehu-

’s area and passenger com- midify the vehicle interior): Note:
partment (use, for instance, The air-conditioning system refer to “Programming the
when driving through a tun- is switched to heating con- preset timer”
nel): Passenger-compartment trol. The recirculated air (i.e.
and driver’s area ventilation the reduced amount of fresh
Danger.
switches to air-recirculation air) is cooled as it comes in-
mode. The roof hatches are to contact with the refrigerant Observe the safety precau-
closed automatically. heat exchanger and reheated tions for operation of the
by the heat exchanger for auxiliary heating unit in the
Note: the heating system. This pro-
cess condenses water out of 11 Auxiliary heater “ON/OFF”
The LED integrated in the
button lights up. the air passed through the button: The integrated LED
system. The air directed to indicates when the auxiliary
passengers or the driver is heating unit is ready for oper-
thereby dehumidified. ation (in standby). The auxil-
iary heating unit switches to
Note: a state of readiness only if
the outside temperature is at
The LED integrated in the
button lights up
least 6 °C below the setpoint
value selected (passenger
9 Manual blower speed adjust- compartment).
ment button
10 Preset clock button:

Manually regulating the blower speed in the driver's area

Danger. speed in the driver's area
Observe the safety precau-
tions for operation of the
auxiliary heating unit in the
12 Rocker switch for adjusting
values and functions of push-
buttons 5/9/10:
M54.00-1579-71
The blower speed currently set is

M83_00-0783-71 represented by bar graphs (1) on the
Press button (4) on the control panel display screen.
Button (4) can now be used to re-
Note: duce (-) or increase (+) the blower
speed.
The LED in the pushbutton starts to flash
Note:
If button (4) is not pressed again with-
in 10 seconds or if a different button
is pressed, the indicator on the display
screen is cleared and the LED in but-
ton (4) stops flashing.

Preselecting the passenger-compartment temperature
Preselecting the passenger-

compartment temperature Note:
Press the upper or lower section of but-
ton (12) repeatedly until “Komfort” (3)
(Comfort = optimum value) on the display
screen turns white.
Note:
The setpoint value can be changed up or
down as required with button (12). The
M54_00-1431-71 setpoint value should only be changed in
The desired value currently set is small increments.
M83_00-0117-01 represented by bar graphs (1) on the
Press button (5) on the control panel. display screen.
Note:
Note: If button (12) is not pressed again with-
Note: in 10 seconds or if a different button
The LED in rocker switch (12) begins to In addition, interior temperature (2) is
is pressed, the indicator on the display
flash. displayed on the display screen.
screen is cleared and the LED in the
rocker switch stops flashing. The newly
The setpoint value for the passenger
entered setpoint value is stored.
compartment can now be changed
using rocker switch (12) (+ or -).

Preselecting the passenger-compartment temperature
M54_00-1431-71 M54_00-1430-71 M54_00-1432-71
Pressing button (5) for longer than When the optimum value has been If no bar graph is displayed and
2 seconds automatically selects the selected, “Komfort” (Comfort) (3) if OFF (4) appears on the display
optimum value. turns white but the LED in pushbut- screen, automatic regulation in the
ton (5) remains unlit. passenger compartment has been
deactivated.

Manually regulating the blower speed in the passenger compartment

speed in the passenger compart- Note:
ment If button (9) is pressed for longer than 2
seconds, the optimum blower speed is set
automatically. At optimum blower speed,
the LED in pushbutton (9) remains unlit.
Note:
If button (12) is not pressed again with-
in 10 seconds or if a different button
M54.00-1582-71 is pressed, the indicator on the display
The blower speed currently set is screen is cleared and the LED in rocker
represented by bar graphs (1) on the switch (12) stops flashing.
M83_00-0117-01 instrument cluster display screen.
Press button (9) on the control panel It is now possible to adjust the roof
blower speed to any value between
Note: 20 % and 100 % by pressing rocker
switch (12) (+ or -).
The LED in rocker switch (12) begins to
flash.

Activating the air-conditioning
Activating the air-conditioning

Note: Note:
The air-conditioning system is switched The status in effect at the time the ig-
on automatically after a 60 second delay nition starter switch is switched to OFF
depending on the desired temperature is retained when the ignition is switched
and the outside and interior temperat- back on.
ures. The “Temperature lockout” symbol
appears on the display screen if temper-
ature conditions are preventing the air-
conditioning system from switching on. If
button (6) is pressed in buses that do not
have an air-conditioning system, the “Air- This symbol is displayed if temperat-
conditioning system not available” symbol ure conditions do not permit the air-
M83_00-0117-01 is shown on the display screen. conditioning system to switch on.
Press button (6) on the control panel
Note:
If cooling output is inadequate in air-con-
ditioning mode and no malfunction is in- If this symbol appears when you
Once the LED integrated in button dicated on the display screen, the ventil- press button (6), this indicates that
(6) lights up, this indicates that the ation program is activated in response to the bus does not have an air-condi-
A/C standby switching off. tioning system.
air-conditioning system is enabled. If
this symbol appears on the display
screen, the air-conditioning system is
active (operating). The roof hatches
close automatically whenever the air-
conditioning system is activated.

Switching on air-recirculation mode in the driver's area and passenger compartment
Switching on air-recirculation mode Activating the reheat function

in the driver's area and passenger Note:
compartment Use this function when driving through
a tunnel, for example. Smog mode is
limited to a period of approximately 10
minutes. It is possible to switch the
driver’s area back to fresh-air mode
separately using switch (1); smog mode
remains in effect in the passenger
compartment. Switch it off by pressing
button (7) (LED off) again.
M83_00-0117-01
Press button (8) on the control panel.

M83_00-0117-01
Press button (7) on the control panel. Note:

The recirculated air (i.e. the reduced
amount of fresh air) is cooled as it comes
into contact with the refrigerant heat ex-
changer and reheated by the heat ex-
This symbol appears on the instru- changer for the heating system. This
ment cluster display screen. The LED process condenses water out of the air
integrated in button (7) lights up. In passed through the system. The air direc-
addition, the roof hatches close auto- ted to passengers or the driver is thereby
matically. dehumidified.

Activating the auxiliary heating unit
The LED integrated in the pushbutton Activating the auxiliary heating unit
lights up and the roof hatches close
automatically.
If this symbol appears when you
Note: press button (8), this indicates that
Reheat mode is available only if the out- the bus does not have an air-condi-
side temperature is above approximately tioning system.
5 °C. Its operating period is limited to ap-
proximately 30 minutes. To switch it off,
press the reheat button again (LED off).
M83_00-0117-01
Press button (11) on the control pan-

This “Temperature lockout” symbol el.
is shown on the display screen if
temperature conditions do not permit Danger.
the air-conditioning system to switch
on. If button (6) is pressed in buses Risk of fire and burns. There is a risk of
that do not have an air-conditioning fires and burns due to the high exhaust
temperatures and the hot exhaust pipe
system, the “Air-conditioning system
for the auxiliary heating. For this reason,
not available” symbol is shown on do not stop or park the bus over ignitable
the display screen. materials (e.g. grass) when the auxiliary
heating is in operation, has recently been
in operation or has been operated by the
instant heating button/preset timer.

Activating the auxiliary heating unit
Danger. Note:
Risk of poisoning and asphyxiation. The With the ignition starter switch OFF, it is
auxiliary heating must not be used in en- possible to switch the auxiliary heating If this symbol appears on the display
closed spaces such as garages or work- unit on directly by pressing button (11)
screen when button (11) is pressed,
shops due to the risk of poisoning and on the control panel. The LED integrated
in button (11) lights up and the auxiliary this indicates that the bus does not
asphyxiation. Timer and preselection
mode are similarly prohibited. heating is activated. The auxiliary heating have an auxiliary heating unit.
unit switches off automatically after 30
minutes or if the button is pressed again;
the LED in button (11) goes out.
Danger.
Risk of fire. The auxiliary heating must The “Temperature lockout” symbol
remain switched off in places where ignit- appears on the display screen if tem-
able vapours or dust can accumulate (e.g.
perature conditions are preventing
in the vicinity of filling stations, fuel de-
pots, or coal, sawdust or grain stores or Whenever the auxiliary heating unit the heating system from switching
similar). is active (ignition starter switch po- on.
sition ON), this symbol appears on
the display screen after a time delay
Note: of approximately 20 seconds. The
The integrated LED indicates when the status in effect at the time the ig-
auxiliary heating unit is ready for oper- nition starter switch is switched to
ation (in standby). The auxiliary heating OFF is retained when the ignition is
unit cannot be switched to standby mode switched back on.
unless automatic control has been en-
abled.

Programming auxiliary heating switch-on times
Programming auxiliary heating

switch-on times Note:
The driver can close the pop-up win-
dow at any time using main menu but-
tons (5) on the steering wheel. In addi-
tion, it is necessary to press any button
on the HVAC control panel before the
“Auswahlmodus” (Selection mode) or “Ein-
stellmodus” (Setting mode) pop-up win-
dows can be reopened.
M54_00-1434-71
Display screen in the preset time

M83_00-0117-01 menu (selection mode).
Keep button (10) pressed down until
the preset time menu is shown on Note:
the display screen. In selection mode, it is possible to se-
lect switch-on time 1 (1), 2 (2) or 3 (3)
or switch-on duration (4) using rocker
switch (12).

Programming auxiliary heating switch-on times
M54_00-1435-71 M54_00-1436-71 M83_00-0117-01
Briefly press button (10) to change to The minutes can be adjusted using The relevant weekday is selected
setting mode. The hours (1) can now rocker switch (12). (If it is not ne- using button (10) and set or unset
be set using rocker switch (12). (If it cessary to correct the minutes, it is using rocker switch (12).
is not necessary to correct the hours, possible to move on to change the
it is possible to move on to change weekday by pressing button (10).)
the minutes by pressing button (10).)

Activating a programmed auxiliary heating switch-on time
Activating a programmed auxiliary

heating switch-on time
M54_00-1437-71 M54_00-1480-71
Screen display when activating the Screen display when saving.

weekdays. M83_00-0117-01
Note: Press button (10) briefly and select
Note: The changes are stored when you press the relevant switch-on program (1, 2
Weekdays shown with a radio button con- button (10) (SAVE) on reaching the last or 3) using rocker switch (12). Con-
taining a dot (1) have been enabled. An weekday (Sunday). The display reverts firm the selection by pressing button
empty radio button (2) indicates a week- to selection mode automatically and it is (10).
day that has yet to be enabled. now possible to select the next switch-on
time (1, 2 or 3) or the switch-on duration.

Activating a programmed auxiliary heating switch-on time
Note: Danger. Note:

The LED integrated in button (10) indic- Risk of fire. The auxiliary heating must The driver can close the pop-up win-
ates whether a switch-on time has been remain switched off in places where ignit- dow at any time using main menu but-
activated. Steady light for “ignition switch able vapours or dust can accumulate (e.g. tons (2) on the steering wheel. In addi-
ON”. Flashing for “ignition switch OFF”. in the vicinity of filling stations, fuel de- tion, it is necessary to press any button
pots, or coal, sawdust or grain stores or on the HVAC control panel before the
similar). “Auswahlmodus” (Selection mode) or “Ein-
Danger. stellmodus” (Setting mode) pop-up win-
Risk of fire and burns. There is a risk of
fires and burns due to the high exhaust
do not stop or park the bus over ignitable
materials (e.g. grass) when the auxiliary
heating is in operation, has recently been
in operation or has been operated by the
instant heating button/preset clock.
Danger. M54_00-1438-71
Risk of poisoning and asphyxiation. The Screen display when activating the
auxiliary heating must not be used in en- switch-on times.
closed spaces such as garages or work-
shops due to the risk of poisoning and
asphyxiation. Timer and preselection
mode are similarly prohibited.

Deactivating an activated switch-on time
Deactivating an activated switch-on Programming the auxiliary heating

time switch-on duration
M54_00-1483-71
Screen display when deactivating the

M83_00-0117-01 switch-on times. M83_00-0117-01
Press button (10) briefly and select Keep button (10) pressed until the
“Aktivierung aus” (Activation off) Note: preset time menu (selection menu) is
menu item (1) using rocker switch The driver can close the pop-up win- shown on the display screen.
(12). Confirm the selection by press- dow at any time using main menu but-
ing button (10). tons (2) on the steering wheel. In addi-
tion, it is necessary to press any button
Note: “Auswahlmodus” (Selection mode) or “Ein-
The LED integrated in button (10) goes stellmodus” (Setting mode) pop-up win-
out. No deactivation is possible unless dows can be reopened.
the ignition switch is switched on.

Programming the auxiliary heating switch-on duration
Note:
If rocker switch (12) is pressed and held,
the switch-on duration is adjusted in in-
crements of 10.
Note:
The auxiliary heater switch-on duration is
programmed once and then applies to all
three switch-on times.
M54_00-1481-71 M54_00-1482-71
Press rocker switch (12) (+ or -) re- Screen display when setting the
peatedly until switch-on duration (1) Note: switch-on duration for the auxiliary
on the display screen is selected. Recommended switch-on duration: 30 - heater
Briefly press button (10) to change 40 minutes. A longer switch-on duration
to setting mode. Rocker switch could discharge the vehicle batteries. Note:
(12) can now be used to adjust the
The driver can close the pop-up win-
switch-on duration in the 10-120
dow at any time using main menu but-
minutes range. Confirm the change tons (2) on the steering wheel. In addi-
by pressing button (10). tion, it is necessary to press any button
“Auswahlmodus” (Selection mode) or “Ein-
stellmodus” (Setting mode) pop-up win-


Switches/controllers in the driver's rest area (bus with roof-mounted air-conditioning system)
Switches/controllers in the driver's

rest area (bus with roof-mounted
air-conditioning system)

Switches/controllers in the driver's rest area (bus with roof-mounted air-conditioning system)
Air-conditioning switch (6) (option) Switch for ventilation blower speed

I and II (7) Note:
Warm: turn the controller clockwise.
This switch enables air conditioning in Note:

the driver's rest area. When the switch is pressed, the blower Cold: turn the controller anti-clockwise.
for ventilating the driver's rest area oper-
Note: ates at half speed or full speed, depend-
ing on the switch position. Note:
The function is possible only if the air
conditioning in the passenger compart- The engine or the water heater must be
ment has been activated. Note: running.
The air from vents (1) may be hot or

cold. This depends on the position of
Note: controller (8) and switch position (6).
Maximum air-conditioning output is
achieved when controller (8) is turned Heating controller (8)
fully anti-clockwise. Manual, infinitely variable adjustment of
the outlet temperature.

Opening/locking
Table of contents
Anti-entrapment protection (reversing) as the doors are closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

Protection against entrapment in the door opening direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Locking the exterior emergency valve at door 2 (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Operating/malfunction displays for the doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
General information on the central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Unlocking the door circuit at the front left door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Unlocking door 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Unlocking door 2 (double-leaf) (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Unlocking the door circuit using the radio remote control (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Unlocking the luggage compartment flaps using the pushbuttons in the driver's area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Unlocking the luggage compartment flaps using the remote control (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Forward door leaf of door II disabled by jump seat (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Locking door 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Locking door 2 (double-leaf) (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Locking door 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Locking using the radio remote control (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

Opening/locking
Table of contents
Central locking system (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

Central locking operating and malfunction displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Emergency operation (depressurising the doors using the emergency valves) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Emergency unlocking of the luggage compartment flaps in the event of a compressed-air supply fail-
ure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Emergency exit through emergency operation of the roof hatches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

Opening/locking
Anti-entrapment protection (reversing) as the doors are closed
Anti-entrapment protection (revers- Protection against entrapment in

ing) as the doors are closed Danger. the door opening direction
It is possible to override the reversing Opening pressure is limited to 4.2 bar
movement by pressing and holding the when the doors are being opened. This
button for door 1. This deactivates the ensures that the door is opened with a
anti-entrapment protection. When the force of no more than the legal maxim-
door pushbutton is released, the anti-en- um permissible force.
trapment protection is reenabled.
Danger.
If an object or a person becomes trapped
during the opening procedure, the door
valve can be changed back to the clos-
ing direction if the door pushbutton is
M72_00-0159-01
pressed again. The door system can also
Reversing switch (7) be depressurised and thus switched to
reduced-power pushback by the use of
The anti-entrapment protection is ac-
the emergency switch.
tivated if a person or object blocks the
door leaf while the door is closing.
In this event, the door leaf is raised and
the cam (7.1) operates the reversing
switch (7).
The door valve changes to Open.

Opening/locking
Locking the exterior emergency valve at door 2 (option)
Locking the exterior emergency Operating/malfunction displays for

valve at door 2 (option) the doors
Doors and flaps
Note:
If a bus without central locking is to be
parked and left, it is possible to lock
the emergency valve for door 2 from the
outside (option). In this event, only the
emergency valve is locked.
M72_00-0284-71
Note:
Lock the emergency valve.
If the bus is to be left for a relatively long
period, it is necessary to lock the door It is no longer possible to operate
from the inside. The door will then re- the emergency valve, and unauthor- M72_00-0467-71
main closed, even in the event of a loss ised access to the bus is prevented.
of pressure. Closed doors, flaps and ramps are
Unlock the emergency valve again blacked out, while opened ones appear
before commencing a journey. in white. An open access point is
additionally indicated by an operating
Note: display in the lower permanent display
field. (If the parking brake is applied,
The drive-off lock remains active if the ex-
the wheel on the driven axle appears in
terior emergency valve has not been un-
locked before commencing a journey. It white.)
is not possible to set the bus in motion.

Opening/locking
Operating/malfunction displays for the doors
Yellow/red door alert Emergency valve operated

Note:
Display shown when an interior or exter-
ior emergency valve is operated at the
front right or centre right door.
Door malfunction warning - door 1

or door 2
M72_00-0468-71 M72_00-0469-71 A malfunction is present in the door sys-

In the event of a door malfunction, a If an emergency valve has been operated tem if this icon appears on the display
yellow or red alert is displayed, depend- (door depressurised), an “Emergency screen while the bus is in motion or sta-
ing on the severity of the malfunction. valve operated” red alert is issued. The tionary. At the same time, a RED warn-
As soon as the alert has been acknow- driver can acknowledge the red alert using level malfunction message is dis-
ledged, the bus view appears and the ing the steering wheel buttons only while played, the warning lamp in the door
door concerned is highlighted yellow or the bus is stationary. A yellow alert then pushbutton flashes and the warning
red. appears for the malfunctioning door. As buzzer sounds.
soon as the yellow alert has been ac-
knowledged, the bus view appears and
the door concerned is highlighted red. In
addition, a red emergency valve symbol
is displayed above the door.

Opening/locking
Operating/malfunction displays for the doors
go out, have the door system checked at

Danger. Danger. an EvoBus Service Partner.
Stop the bus immediately (traffic condi- This icon also appears in the display if
tions permitting). It is prohibited to move the bus is moving faster than 3 km/h Note:
the bus at any time while this malfunction and door 1 or door 2 is open. Symbol is an example for door I (front left
is present. Have an EvoBus Service Part- door).
ner check the door system immediately.
Note: Ready to depart
Symbol is an example for door I (front left
Danger. door).
This display also appears if the
compressed-air supply in the door system Door malfunction warning
is too low. Start the bus and charge the
compressed-air supply. If the display still
This icon appears in connection with the
does not go out, have the door system bus stop brake or drive-off lock.
checked by an EvoBus Service Partner.
Note:
This malfunction display appears if the
If the bus is equipped with a bus stop
Danger. compressed-air supply in the door sys-
brake (option), this icon appears when the
tem is too low. Start the bus and charge bus stop brake pushbutton is pressed.
This icon also appears when the emer-
the compressed-air supply. It is also dis-
gency valve on the inside/outside of the
front left or centre right door is operated
played when a door has been depowered
(door depressurised). (protection against entrapment in the
opening direction). Press the door push-
button in the driver's area again to re-
store operation of the door. If these
measures do not cause the display to

Opening/locking
General information on the central locking system
General information on the central Unlocking the door circuit at the

Note: locking system front left door
If the bus is equipped with a drive-off The turn signal lamps flash as described
lock (option), this icon appears when all with the locking and unlocking of the Danger.
doors are closed. doors or luggage compartment flaps only
All doors must be unlocked before the
if the engine has been switched off and bus is driven off.
if neither the hazard warning lamps nor
Note: the turn signals themselves are already
The bus stop brake and the drive-off switched on.
lock are applied on all axles with re-
duced braking pressure and are released
as soon as the accelerator pedal is de-
pressed.
Danger.
The bus may roll away if the parking
brake has not been applied.
M72_00-0156-01
To unlock the front left door, insert

the key into lock (1), turn it clock-
wise and turn handle (2) to the right
at the same time (arrow position 3).
Turn the key and handle (2) back to
their initial position and remove the
key. Press exterior pushbutton (5).

Opening/locking
Unlocking door 2
Unlocking door 2 Unlocking door 2 (double-leaf)

Note: (option)
The fuel filler flaps are unlocked when
door 1 is unlocked.
Danger.
Door 2 is not unlocked at the same time.
Door 1 opens automatically.
M72_00-0188-01
Turn interior twist handle (2) for M72_00-0274-71
door 2 to the left. Turn left interior twist handle (1) of

door 2 to the right. Turn right interi-
Danger. or twist handle (2) of door 2 to the
left.
Door 2 must be unlocked manually before
the bus is driven off.
Danger.
Door 2 must be unlocked manually before
the bus is driven off.

Opening/locking
Unlocking the door circuit using the radio remote control (option)
Unlocking the door circuit using the Unlocking the luggage compartment
radio remote control (option) Note: flaps using the pushbuttons in the
If a door or luggage compartment flap is driver's area
Danger. not opened within 20 seconds, the circuit
will relock automatically. This prevents
All doors must be unlocked before the the bus from remaining unlocked if it
bus is driven off. was unlocked by accident. If the luggage
compartment flaps are still unlocked 43
minutes after the ignition starter switch
was switched to OFF, forced locking will
be initiated to conserve battery charge.
If the bus is equipped with the optional
anti-theft alarm system (ATA), the ignition
starter switch must be switched to ON
within 30 seconds of the door being un-
locked and opened, otherwise the alarm M82_00-0128-71
will be triggered.
Unlock the left-side luggage compart-
ment flaps using pushbutton (5) and
the right-side flaps using pushbutton
M72_00-0438-71 (6).
Unlock door circuit (door I, door II,
fuel filler flaps) using the remote con-
trol (button 1).
Unlocking of the door circuit is indic-
ated by one long flash (maximum of
3 seconds) of the side-mounted turn
signals.

Opening/locking
Unlocking the luggage compartment flaps using the remote control (option)
Unlocking the luggage compartment

Note: Note: flaps using the remote control
If the bus is equipped with central lock- If the bus is equipped with the “Delayed (option)
ing/an anti-theft alarm system (ATA) (op- locking of the luggage compartment flaps”
tion), the side-mounted turn signals flash option, the luggage compartment flaps
briefly once (for approximately 1 second) do not lock until 45 minutes after the
whenever the luggage compartment flaps ignition starter switch has been switched
are locked or unlocked. to OFF.
The left- or right-side luggage com-

partment flaps can be opened. The Note:
LEDs in pushbuttons (5) and (6) light
The luggage compartment lighting
up when the luggage compartment
switches on automatically whenever a
flaps are unlocked. luggage compartment flap circuit (left or
right) is unlocked.
M72_00-0438-71
Note:
Unlock the left-side luggage compart-
There must be sufficient compressed air
ment flaps using remote control but-
available.
ton 2 and the right-side flaps using
button 3.
Note:
Note:
The luggage compartment flaps are re-
locked either when the pushbutton in the The turn signals flash (approximately
driver’s area is pressed again or if the ig- 1 second) once if only the luggage com-
nition starter switch is switched to OFF. partment flaps have been locked or un-
locked.

Opening/locking
Forward door leaf of door II disabled by jump seat (option)
Luggage compartment flaps can be Forward door leaf of door II Locking door 2
opened (the LED lights up in the cor- disabled by jump seat (option) Close door 2
responding luggage compartment In buses with a jump seat near the
flaps pushbutton in the driver's area forward door leaf of door II, the for-
depending on which side of the bus ward door leaf is disabled automat-
the luggage compartments are un- ically if an attempt is made to open
locked). the door while the seat is down. A
reed contact senses when the seat is
Note: folded back.
There must be sufficient compressed air
available. Danger.
Do not fold the jump seat down unless
the doors are closed. Test the disabling
M72_00-0188-01
of the forward door leaf. If the test is
passed, the jump seat can be authorised To lock door 2, insert the key into
for use. lock (2.1), turn it clockwise and turn
interior handle (2) to the right at the
same time. Then turn the key back
to its initial position and remove it
with the handle in the locked posi-
tion.

Opening/locking
Locking door 2 (double-leaf) (option)
Locking door 2 (double-leaf) (option) with the handle in the locked posi-
Note: Close door 2 tion.
Do not turn handle (2) back again, other-
wise you will unlock the door again. Note:
The key is the only means by which the
door can be locked. It must always be
Note: possible to unlock the door by hand
In the case of buses without central lock- (without the key).
ing and with lockable exterior emergency
valve (option), this can be locked from
the outside using the lock provided. Note:
Do not turn interior twist handles (1) and
(2) back again otherwise the doors will be
M72_00-0274-71 unlocked again.
To lock the left-hand leaf of door 2,
insert the key into lock (1.1), turn
it clockwise and turn interior twist
handle (1) to the left. Then turn the
key back to its initial position and re-
move it with the handle in the locked
position. To lock the right-hand leaf
of door 2, insert the key into lock
(2.1), turn it clockwise and turn in-
terior handle (2) to the right at the
same time. Then turn the key back
to its initial position and remove it

Opening/locking
Locking door 1
Locking door 1 Locking using the radio remote

Close door 1 Note: control (option)
The fuel filler flaps are locked when Close the doors
door 1 is locked.
Note:
Door 2 has to be locked separately.
M72_00-0156-01
To lock the front right door, insert M72_00-0438-71
the key into lock (1), turn it clock- When the radio remote control (but-
wise and turn handle (2) to the left ton 1) is pressed, the bus is locked
(arrow position 4). Turn the key and centrally, i.e. doors and luggage
handle (2) back to their initial posi- compartment flap circuits are locked.
tion and remove the key.

Opening/locking
Locking using the radio remote control (option)
Note: Note:
The side-mounted turn signals flash briefly A buzzer sounds for 10 seconds if an at-
3 times (approximately 1 second) to con- tempt is made to lock the bus and the
firm that the bus is locked. bus doors, luggage compartment flaps,
roof hatches or driver's window have
not been closed and locked. The anti-
Note: theft alarm system is not primed (red LED
(ATA) in the driver's area does not flash).
If the key is used in the lock on the front
left door in order to lock the bus, only
the door circuit will be locked, i.e. any
unlocked luggage compartment flaps will Note: M72_00-0467-71
not be locked by this action. After the ignition has been switched on, it Always carry out a pre-drive visu-
is also possible to lock and unlock the al check to ensure that all luggage
luggage compartment flaps using two compartment flaps and service cov-
Note: pushbuttons in the driver's area.
ers are properly closed.
The driver's window and service covers
are neither closed nor locked automatic- Note:
ally; these have to be closed or locked Note:
manually. If the luggage compartment flaps are If a luggage compartment flap has not
closed but still unlocked 43 minutes after been closed correctly, the bus graphic
the ignition was switched to OFF, forced shows which luggage compartment flap is
locking will be initiated to conserve the open.
battery charge.

Opening/locking
Locking using the radio remote control (option)
tivated. Once the bus is locked, it is pos-

Note: sible to switch the ignition starter switch
A buzzer sounds for 10 seconds if an at- to the OFF position. Interior motion de-
tempt is made to arm the anti-theft alarm tection remains deactivated until the next
system (ATA) and the bus doors, luggage time the bus is unlocked and then locked
compartment flaps and roof hatches have again without the ignition starter switch
not been closed and locked. The anti- being switched to ON.
theft alarm system (ATA) is not primed
(red LED (ATA) in the driver's area does
not flash).
M72_00-0438-71
Note:
Optional automatic arming of the
anti-theft alarm system (ATA) The driver's window and service covers
will not be closed or locked – these must
be closed or locked manually before the
Note: anti-theft alarm system is armed.
When the bus is locked, the optional anti-
theft alarm system (ATA) is primed (red
LED (ATA) in the driver’s area flashes). Note:
It is possible to remain in the bus when
the central locking (ZV) has been activ-
ated. Before the bus is locked using the
radio remote control (button 1), the igni-
tion switch must be switched to position
2 (ignition ON). If the bus is now locked,
the anti-theft alarm system is armed but
the interior motion sensor remains deac-

Opening/locking
Central locking system (option)
Central locking system (option) the ignition starter switch in the OFF
The bus may be equipped with one of position.
two central locking system variants: Unlocking/locking of the luggage
compartment flaps in response to
Central locking (ZV). the radio remote control with the
Central locking with anti-theft alarm ignition starter switch in the ON or
system (ZV/ATA). OFF position.
Range of functions: Unlocking/locking of the luggage
compartment flaps in response to the
Complete locking of the open bus in
rocker switches on the instrument
response to the radio remote control
panel with the ignition starter switch
(FFB) with the ignition starter switch M72_00-0156-01
in the ON or OFF position.
OFF. Locking/unlocking of the doors: It is
Relocking of the bus if unlocked by
Simultaneous priming of the anti- possible to lock or unlock the door cir-
an accidental radio remote control
theft alarm system (ATA) in response cuit (front left door, centre right door,
command.
to the remote control (FFB) with the fuel filler flaps) centrally by means of
ignition starter switch in the OFF po- Forced locking of the luggage com- lock (1) on the front left door or by
sition. partment flaps to conserve battery pressing button (1) on the radio remote
charge. control (FFB). A locking of the door cir-
Unlocking of the door circuit (front
left door, centre right door, fuel filler cuit in response to the FFB is always ac-
flaps) in response to the radio re- companied by a simultaneous locking of
mote control. the vehicle's entire central locking sys-
tem. Unlocking of the doors is indicated
Unlocking/locking of the door circuit
by a long flash (maximum 3 seconds)
in response to the key being turned
from the side-mounted turn signals. As
in the lock on the front left door with
soon as the door circuit is unlocked,
the doorway lighting at the front left

Opening/locking
door comes on for a maximum of 30 is in the OFF or ON position or when

seconds. It switches off if the ignition the engine is running. If the unlock
starter switch is switched to ON or if command was issued by means of the
the doors are locked again in the mean- radio remote control, a flap must be
time. A complete locking is indicated by opened within 20 seconds, otherwise the
the side-mounted turn signals flashing bus will be locked again automatically.
briefly (maximum 1 second) three times. The LEDs light up in the rocker switches
A locked door circuit is unlocked auto- in the driver's station. The LEDs in the
matically when the engine is started. rocker switches go out if the doors are
locked in response to the radio remote
control. The side-mounted turn signals
flash briefly (1 second) each time the M82_00-0128-71
luggage compartment flaps are locked Locking/unlocking of the luggage com-

or unlocked in response to the radio partment flaps (continued): With the ig-
remote control. nition starter switch ON, the left- and
right-side flaps can be electropneumatic-
ally locked or unlocked separately using
rocker switch (5) and rocker switch (6)
respectively. The LED in the pressed
rocker switch lights up when the luggage
M72_00-0438-71
compartment flap circuit is unlocked.
Status acknowledgements for the driver:
Locking/unlocking of the luggage
LED lit - luggage compartment flaps un-
compartment flaps: The left- and
locked. LED not lit - luggage compart-
right-side luggage compartment flaps
ment flaps locked. A symbol appears
can be locked or unlocked separately
on the instrument cluster display screen
using FFB button (2) or (3). This is
if a luggage compartment flap is open.
possible when the ignition starter switch
Opening/locking
The luggage compartment flap circuit doors have been fully locked. If the
can be locked even if a luggage compart- central locking (ZV) is equipped with an
ment flap is open. The luggage compart- anti-theft alarm system (ATA), the ATA
ment flap that was still open will also be will be primed automatically when the
locked once it is closed. bus is fully locked. Change the radio re-
mote control's battery if its operating
Danger. range appears to be deteriorating.
Always carry out a pre-drive visual check
to ensure that all luggage compartment Environmental protection
flaps and service covers are properly Dispose of used batteries in an environ-
closed. mentally responsible manner.
M72_00-0438-71
Luggage compartment lighting function Complete locking of the bus: To have Security functions of the central lock-
description: The luggage compartment all parts of the central locking system ing system: Relocking - relocking is a
lighting switches on whenever a luggage locked simultaneously, it is necessary security feature of the central locking.
compartment flap circuit (left or right) is to use the FFB. To do so, press but- If the unlocking button on the FFB was
unlocked and at least one of the luggage ton (1) on the FFB. If the door circuit pressed accidentally, the bus will be re-
compartment flaps is opened. has already been locked, the entire cent- locked automatically if none of the doors
The luggage compartment lighting is ral locking system cannot be locked in or luggage compartment flaps is opened
switched off again when all luggage com- one step using the FFB. Pressing but- within 20 seconds. Forced locking -
partment flaps are closed or both lug- ton (1) on the FFB for the first time forced locking only affects luggage com-
gage compartment flap circuits (left and simply unlocks the locked door circuit; partment flaps that have been unlocked
right) are locked. In addition, the lug- the complete central locking system is by the central locking system. Forced
gage compartment lighting is automatic- not locked until button (1) is pressed locking is initiated if the luggage com-
ally switched off after 43 minutes (by the a second time. The side-mounted turn partment flaps have still not been locked
forced locking). signals flashing briefly (approximately within 43 minutes of the ignition starter
1 second) three times indicates the switch being switched to OFF (the solen-

Opening/locking
Central locking operating and malfunction displays
oid valves are deactivated to reduce the turn signals in the event of an alarm - Central locking operating and
off-load current in the system). hazard warning function). The alarm is malfunction displays
triggered by forcible opening of a door,
Central locking of the left-side
luggage compartment flap or service cov-
luggage compartment flaps
er, or by the microwave sensor of the
interior motion detection system. If door
1 is unlocked by means of its own lock
and then opened, the ignition starter
switch must be switched to ON within
30 seconds to prevent a triggering of the This symbol is displayed on the screen if
alarm. This function protects against an the left-side luggage compartment flaps
intruder entering the bus with a door key are unlocked using the pushbutton in
that fits the front left door. the driver's area and no feedback is re-
M72_00-0438-71 ceived from the pressure switch within
Anti-theft alarm system (ATA): The ATA Note: 3 seconds. In this case, there is a fault
is primed after the complete bus has in the left-side luggage compartment
The hazard warning and direction indic-
been locked using button (1) on the FFB ation functions have priority over the
flap circuit and it may not be possible to
and the turn signal lamps have flashed ZV/ATA. open the luggage compartment flaps.
3 times. The contacts on the doors
and windows are primed and the ATA Note:
LED in the left-hand section of the in- This symbol also appears if the supply of
strument panel flashes. Interior mon- compressed air in the left-side luggage
itoring is not primed until the ignition compartment flap circuit is too low - start
starter switch is switched to OFF. If the bus and recharge compressed-air supply.
alarm is triggered, the horn sounds for
30 seconds and the turn signals flash
for a period of 5 minutes (flashing of all

Opening/locking
Central locking operating and malfunction displays
Note: Note: Danger.

Only for buses without central locking This symbol also appears if the supply of Before the bus is driven off, carry out a
(ZV) / anti-theft alarm system (ATA) (op- compressed air in the right-side luggage visual inspection to make absolutely sure
tion). compartment flap circuit is too low - start that all luggage compartment flaps and
bus and recharge compressed-air supply. service covers are properly closed.
Central locking of the right-side
luggage compartment flaps
Note: Note:
Only for buses without central locking Only for buses with central locking (ZV)
(ZV) / anti-theft alarm system (ATA) (op- / anti-theft alarm system (ATA) (option)
tion). or luggage compartment flap warning dis-
This symbol is displayed on the screen play.
Luggage compartment flap open
if the right-side luggage compartment (option)
flaps are unlocked using the pushbutton
in the driver's area and no feedback is
received from the pressure switch within
3 seconds. In this case, there is a fault
in the right-side luggage compartment
flap circuit and it may not be possible to This symbol is shown on the screen if
open the luggage compartment flaps. one or more luggage compartment flaps
or service covers have not been locked
correctly.

Opening/locking
Emergency operation (depressurising the doors using the emergency valves)
Emergency operation (depres-

surising the doors using the Note:
emergency valves) 3.2 Exterior emergency valve, centre right
door
Danger.
All doors must remain unlocked while the
Note:
bus is in motion. - refer to “Unlocking
the door circuit at the front left door / 3.3 Interior emergency valve, centre right
Unlocking door 2 / Unlocking the door door
circuit using the radio remote control (op-
tion)”. Turn interior emergency valve
M72_00-0470-71 (3.1/3.3) or exterior emergency valve
Remove the tamper-evident seal from (3/3.2) in the direction of the arrow.
the emergency valve.
Note:
Note: When the emergency valve is operated,
3 Exterior emergency valve, front left door the door valve is vented of air. At the
same time, the emergency valve also re-
leases the air in the door system. The
door system is now depressurised and it
Note:
must now be possible to move the door
3.1 Interior emergency valve, front left manually.
door

Opening/locking
Emergency unlocking of the luggage compartment flaps in the event of a compressed-air supply failure
Provide the emergency valve with a Emergency unlocking of the luggage

new tamper-evident seal. compartment flaps in the event of a
compressed-air supply failure
The warning buzzer sounds in the Note:
driver's area. The red warning lamp A tamper-evident seal is not permitted on Note:
in the relevant door pushbutton must buses delivered to France. In an emergency, i.e. where there has
flash. This symbol appears on the been a complete failure of the central
instrument cluster display screen compressed-air supply and electrical
together with a red alert. power supply, an emergency operating
facility (compressed-air supply for spare
Restoring operation of the door sys- wheel) ensures that it is still possible to
tem: - move the emergency valve unlock the luggage compartment flaps.
into the normal position – the door
compressed-air system is slowly
refilled through a door actuation
throttle valve and returns to the con-
dition it was in before the emergency
valve was operated.
Danger.
Risk of injury. Make sure that nobody is
within the sweep of the door leaf when
operation of the door system is restored.
Doors must not move with a jerky or
jolting action after normal operation has
been restored.

Opening/locking
Note:
Reinflate the spare wheel to the specified
pressure as soon as possible.
M00_00-0231-01 M40_00-0052-01
Open the front flap of the bus using Take the hose with tyre connection
lever (1) in the front left doorway. (1) from the plate behind the heat-
ing front cabinet and connect it to
Remove the spare wheel.
the tyre inflation valve on the spare
wheel.
Note:
The spare wheel has a pressure of ap-
proximately 8 bar. The compressed air in
the spare wheel passes through shuttle
valves to the cylinders of the luggage
compartment locking system and un-
locks the luggage compartment flaps. The
luggage compartment flaps can then be
opened.

Opening/locking
Emergency exit through emergency operation of the roof hatches
Emergency exit through emergency

operation of the roof hatches
Note:
The roof hatches satisfy the legal
guidelines for emergency exit hatches in
accordance with ECE- R 36.
Danger.
Risk of accident, only operate in an emer- M77_00-0013-01 M77_00-0014-01
gency and when the bus is stationary. Remove cover (1) to gain access to Emergency operation is initiated by
the emergency exit roof hatch (Velcro means of a red exterior or interior
fastening) twist handle (1).
Note:
Both emergency exits (front and rear roof
Note:
hatches) are unlocked as soon as the bus
is unlocked by the central locking system, In an emergency, interior or exterior twist
the lock at door 1 is unlocked or whenev- handle (1) must be turned in the direc-
er the ignition starter switch is switched tion of the arrow (clockwise). The emer-
to ON. They are relocked as soon as gency exit cover can now be secured by
the ignition starter switch is switched to a safety rope and placed to one side out-
OFF and the bus is locked by the central side the bus.
locking system or the lock at door 1 is
locked.

Opening/locking
Emergency exit through emergency operation of the roof hatches
Note: Danger.
The driver is able to acknowledge red The covers for the roof emergency exit
alerts using the main menu buttons on hatches must be fitted by skilled person-
the steering wheel but not until the nel at an EvoBus Service Partner following
vehicle has been brought to a halt and the emergency operation.
the parking brake has been applied.
M54_00-1500-71
A red alert (1) is displayed on the

display screen in the event of emer-
gency operation or if an exterior
handle on one of the emergency
exit roof hatches is in locked con-
dition with the ignition starter switch
switched to ON. The red alert dis-
M72_00-0459-71
plays this icon (1.1) and the message
“Dachluke notentriegelt” (Roof hatch As soon as the red alert has been ac-
emergency unlocked). At the same knowledged, the bus view appears
time, red parking brake indicator and the roof hatch concerned is high-
lamp (2) lights up in the instrument lighted red and accompanied by SOS.
cluster. In addition, STOP lamp (4)
and red warning lamp (3) light up.

On-board kitchenette (option)
Table of contents
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

Instructions for operating a microwave oven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Use for the intended purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Approved personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
First use of the galley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Switching on the galley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Filling the fresh water tank inside the bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Filling the fresh water tank outside the bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Checking and cleaning the fresh water filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Drawing water from the water tap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Switching on the boiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Descaling the boiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Switching on the sausage heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Cleaning the sausage heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Descaling the sausage heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Switching on the 40-cup coffee machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

Table of contents
Brewing coffee in winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383

Cleaning the 40-cup coffee machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Switching on the 2-carafe filter system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Brewing 1/2 a carafe of coffee (10 cups of coffee) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Brewing 1 carafe of coffee (20 cups of coffee) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Brewing 2 carafes of coffee (40 cups of coffee) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Manual operation of the 2-carafe filter system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Descaling the coffee machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Winter operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Draining the fresh water tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Draining the water lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Draining the boiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Draining the 40-cup coffee machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Draining the 2-carafe filter system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Draining the siphon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Replacing fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394

Table of contents
Malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Restoring boiler operation following a malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Using the sausage heater again after a malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Using the 40-cup coffee machine again after a malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Using the 2-carafe filter system again after a malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Other malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Switching off the galley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401

General information
General information
Note: Note:
It is advisable to disinfect water-carrying Waste water from the galley flows into
systems at regular intervals or after oper- the lavatory's holding tank.
Caution:
ation has been restored. A sodium hypo-
Never operate the equipment without wa- chloride solution (from camping and cara-
ter. Risk of thermal damage - loss of war- vanning retailers) is particularly suitable; Environmental protection
ranty. observe the manufacturer's instructions.
Dispose of waste in an environmentally
responsible manner. The rules and regu-
Danger. lations of the country in which the vehicle
Caution:
is operated must be observed.
To avoid the risk of fire and damage, it Do not use the coffee machine, water
is prohibited to store anything inside the boiler or sausage heater unless the kit-
sausage heater or microwave oven. chenette is open. Damage caused by
heat and steam when the kitchenette is
closed is not covered by the warranty.
Danger.
Use only clean drinking water.
Danger.
Secure loose objects in the kitchenette
Danger. (cans, cups, lids, etc.) properly during the
journey.
To prevent the growth of microbes in wa-
ter left inside the system, the entire sys-
tem must be drained (refer to “Winter
operation”) if the galley and/or lavatory is
to remain out of service temporarily.

Instructions for operating a microwave oven
Instructions for operating a dangerous microwave energy may

microwave oven Danger. escape.
Microwaves only heat up foods contain- Do not bridge the door safety circuit.
ing water; this means that the container Do not place any objects between
may feel cold but the food inside could the microwave oven door and the
Caution:
be boiling hot. To eliminate the risk of oven interior, keep the door seals
Never use the oven when it is empty. burns, the temperature of the food must
Place at least one glass of water in the
clean.
therefore be checked before the food is
oven if you want to carry out a test. No served. This applies to the preparation of Do not use the oven if it is faulty.
metal objects should be placed in the food for children or babies in particular. Only allow the microwave oven to be
oven interior as this would result in spark- repaired by a specialist workshop.
ing and damage to the oven.
All openings on the microwave oven
Danger. (ventilation in and out) must be free.
Danger. The rules below for handling microwave Never allow children to use the mi-
ovens must be adhered to in order to crowave oven unless they are super-
Living animals or body parts must not be reduce the risk of microwaves causing
exposed to microwaves.
vised.
burning, electric shocks, radiation and
fire: To reduce the risk of fire in the oven
interior: foodstuffs must never be
Danger. overheated, binding wires must be
removed from paper or plastic pack-
To reduce the risk of a fire breaking out Only use suitable containers. A con- aging.
as a consequence of overheated food, the tainer is suitable for use in the mi-
microwave oven must never be operated crowave oven if it remains cold after Do not heat popcorn in the mi-
without supervision. If food catches fire, having been heated in the oven for crowave oven unless you do this
switch the microwave oven off but do not
one minute at maximum power. using a popcorn insert or use special
open the oven doors. popcorn.
Do not operate the microwave oven
with the door open, it is possible that

Instructions for operating a microwave oven
Only use thermometers recommen- Foodstuffs in skins, such as potatoes,

ded for use in microwave ovens to sausages, tomatoes, chicken livers Danger.
measure the temperature of food- and other offal, eggs, etc., should be
When liquids (water) are heated in the mi-
stuffs in the oven. pierced so that steam generated by crowave oven, and especially reheated,
Our instructions must be closely fol- cooking can escape. it can sometimes happen that the boil-
lowed when cooking pork. The meat Microwaveable bags and sealed ing temperature has been reached but
must be heated to at least 70 °C plastic bags should be cut open or the typical steam bubbles do not initially
so that any bacteria that may be pierced to prevent them exploding form. The liquid does not boil uniformly.
present will definitely be destroyed. during cooking and possibly causing When the container is removed (shaken)
this boiling delay, as it is called, can sud-
Frozen drinks contained in narrow- injuries. Plastic containers should
denly cause steam bubbles to form and
necked bottles, especially carbonated be opened at least a small amount. therefore start to boil over suddenly - risk
drinks, must not be defrosted in the After containers have been cooked of scalding. To prevent this, it is neces-
microwave oven. Pressure can form while they were sealed with plastic sary to place a glass rod in the container,
even in open containers with the ef- foil, the cover must be removed in for instance. The glass rod ensures that
fect that the container may explode such a way that escaping steam does fluid in the container boils uniformly and
and cause injuries. not come into contact with the hands therefore the steam bubbles form at the
or face. usual time.
Foodstuffs must not be overcooked.
If, for instance, potatoes are over-
cooked they can dry out and become
The microwave oven must not be
a fire risk.
used to dry paper (newspapers).
Cooking of eggs (in or not in a shell) They can catch fire if overheated.
in the microwave oven cannot be re-
commended. The pressure in the egg
yolk could cause the egg to explode
and cause injuries.

Use for the intended purpose
Use for the intended purpose Approved personnel

Note: The galley and its equipment are inten- The kitchenette may only be used by
Clean microwave ovens after they have ded for normal kitchen use during a bus trained personnel. The personnel must
been used with a commercially available journey. This includes: be professionally qualified and have read
washing detergent, do not use abrasive and understood this section.
cleaner. Switch off the ignition when do-
ing this. If it is necessary to clean dried- The safety of the person using the kit-
Boiler for hot water preparation
on food residue from the oven interior, chenette and the security of all kitchen
Coffee machine for brewing coffee utensils are prerequisites for use of the
it can be softened by placing a glass of
water in the oven and boiling it for ap- Sausage heater for preparing saus- kitchenette while the bus is in motion.
proximately 10 minutes. ages
Any other use cannot be considered use Danger.
for the intended purpose. Objects being thrown out of the kit-
chenette can cause injuries. The person
using the kitchenette must secure loose
objects safely while the bus is in motion.

First use of the galley
First use of the galley Press button (4) on the control panel
Galley switched on and keep it pressed (yellow LED (6)
flashes) until green LED (5) lights up.
Fresh water tank filled and connec-
ted The boiler has been filled and bled
All packaging materials must be re- and can now be switched on using
moved before the galley is used for control button (9) to draw hot water.
the first time. All utensils must be
thoroughly cleaned and rinsed in Note:
fresh water. To avoid scale and steam, do not turn
control knob (9) to maximum temperature
Environmental protection unless you need very hot water.
Dispose of the packaging material in an Before first use, clean the sausage
environmentally responsible manner. heater tank, the lid and the overflow
pipe thoroughly with hot water and
a commercially available washing-up
liquid, and then rinse well with clean
water. Then wipe the sausage heater
tank dry to avoid scaling.
To clean the coffee machine, fill
it with water and brew the water
without coffee powder but with the
M86_00-0375-73 filter holder fitted, then repeat.
The galley is ready for use.

Switching on the galley

Note:
Note: The lower and middle cover can now be
used as a counter.
The coffee machine, boiler, sausage heat-
er and microwave oven cannot be oper-
ated unless the engine is running.
M86_00-0140-01
Release folding cover on lock (2.1)

by unlocking and pressing it. Pull
handle (2.2). Fold the upper part of
the folding cover down by handle
(2.3).
M86_00-0426-71 Danger.
Press galley master switch (1). Since the counter protrudes into the
The LED in master switch (1) lights steps area, the kitchenette should be
up. switched off and closed before passen-
gers embark or disembark. Risk of injury.

Filling the fresh water tank inside the bus
Switch on the galley lighting using Filling the fresh water tank inside
button (2) on the galley control pan- the bus
el.
The LEDs of the galley lighting come
on and indicator lamp (3) lights up.
The galley is open and ready for use.
Note:
If indicator lamp (3) on the control panel
does not light up, there is insufficient on-
board voltage to operate the kitchenette.
Start the engine and charge the batteries.
M86_00-0142-02
Fill fresh water tank (4) via cap (4.1).
M86_00-0375-73

Danger. Note: Note:

The kitchenette must be operated using Use spanner (4.3) if the caps are difficult Waste water from the kitchenette flows
clean and potable water only. Fresh wa- to turn. into the lavatory's holding tank.
ter for kitchenette requirements must be
renewed every day. If the fresh water is
stored in the water tank for a long peri- Note:
od of time, an additive (Micropur, mat.
In new buses, the drinking water
no. 0.971.407.000) in accordance with
may sometimes taste of plastic. An
the manufacturer's instructions must be
additive (Kunststoff-Frisch, mat. no.
mixed with it.
0.971.405.000) can be mixed in accord-
ance with the manufacturer's instructions
to neutralise this aftertaste.
Danger.
The tools used to fill with water (contain-
ers, funnels, hoses, etc.) must be sterile. Note:
The fresh water tank is located in the lug-
gage compartment to the front of the lav-
Note: atory; in older bus versions, it is located
It is recommended that fresh water tank in the right-hand luggage compartment to
(4) be cleaned manually via caps (4.1) the rear of the driven axle.
and (4.2) and/or that it be flushed thor-
oughly with fresh water. The fresh water
lines should then also be flushed with
fresh water by drawing cold/hot water
and switching on the coffee machine.

Filling the fresh water tank outside the bus
Filling the fresh water tank outside Release tensioning straps (4.4). Re- Checking and cleaning the fresh
the bus move fresh water tank (4). water filter
Fill fresh water tank (4) with pure
drinking water via cap (4.2). Close
cap (4.2) firm and tight.
Fit fresh water tank (4) into the bus
and secure using tensioning straps
(4.4).
Connect quick-release coupling (5) to
fresh water tank (4).
M86_00-0376-71
The fresh water filter is located be-

hind cover (2). Unscrew knurled
screws (1) to permit removal of the
cover.
M86_00-0142-02
Disconnect quick-release coupling (5)

from fresh water tank (4).

Drawing water from the water tap

Galley switched on Danger.
Fresh water tank filled and connec- Outflow of hot water - risk of scalding.
ted
Note:
No hot water can be drawn unless the
boiler is in operation. It takes approxim-
ately 20 minutes for the water to heat up
to a set temperature of 80 °C.
M86_00-0143-01
Check fresh water filter (6) for clog- Note:

ging at regular intervals (depending
Opening both rotary knobs (5) and (6)
on the water quality) and clean it if
draws a mixture of hot and cold water.
necessary.
M86_00-0377-71
Open rotary knob (6) to draw cold

Note:
water from tap (7).
The fresh water filter is located between
the fresh water tank and the fresh water Open rotary knob (5) to draw hot
pump. water from tap (7).

Switching on the boiler
Switching on the boiler Before you switch on the boiler,

Galley switched on press and hold button (4) until green
LED (5) lights up in order to make
sure that the boiler contains water.
ted
The boiler has been filled with water
and bled.
Caution:
There is a risk of overheating and thermal To switch on the boiler, turn control
damage if the boiler is operated with no knob (9) clockwise.
water. Never operate the boiler without
Green LED (8) above control knob (9)
water.
lights up and the water is heated.
Note:
The boiler switches off when you turn
control knob (9) back. Green LED (8)
goes out.
Note:
If red LED (7) lights up, the boiler has
overheated and must be switched off
by turning control knob (9) fully anti-
clockwise (position 0) until the boiler has
M86_00-0375-73
cooled down.
The boiler heats up the water and

automatically switches off when the

Descaling the boiler
temperature set at the control knob Descaling the boiler Disconnect the hose at quick-release
has been reached. LED (8) goes out. coupling (5).
Note: Note:
The boiler has a capacity of approximately How frequently the galley should be de-
5 litres and it takes approximately 20 scaled depends on the water quality but
minutes for the water to heat up to a set the boiler should be descaled immediately
temperature of 80 °C. if there is a noticeable increase in the
length of the heating phase. It is advis-
able to descale the boiler twice a year.
Hold the hose in a container of de-

scaler (at least 10 litres).
Note:
Use only descalers that are suitable for
domestic appliances. The descaler must
be non-aggressive to plastics and alumini-
um. Observe the information provided by
M86_00-0142-02 the manufacturer.

Descaling the boiler
Press and hold pushbutton (4) until

Note: green LED (5) lights up.
Drain the boiler fully before descaling. The boiler has been filled with de-
scaler.
To switch on the boiler, turn control
knob (9) fully clockwise (position 3).
LED (8) lights up and the water con-
taining descaler is heated.
Wait until LED (8) goes out.
The contents of the boiler have been
heated.
Note:
The boiler has a capacity of approximately
5 litres and it takes approximately 20
minutes for the water to heat up to a set
temperature of 80 °C.
Drain the water and descaler by

opening tap (5).
M86_00-0375-73

Switching on the sausage heater
Flush the boiler with plenty of fresh Switching on the sausage heater
water. To do this, fill the boiler with Galley switched on
fresh water, heat the water and drain
it.
ted
Note:
Danger.
Repeat the last step until the water no
longer tastes or smells of descaler or vin- There is a risk of scalding when using
egar. the sausage heater. Hot steam can rise,
which may cause serious burns to the
face, arms and hands. Keep at a safe
distance, and remove hot sausages using
only heat-resistant kitchen utensils.
Note:
The length of the heating phase depends
on the amount of water, the number of
M86_00-0142-02 sausages, and the temperature of the wa-
Connect the hose to fresh water tank ter at the time it is added to the appli-
(4). ance.

Fill the sausage heater tank half full

Note: (approximately 2 - 3 litres) with cold
The sausage heater has a capacity of 8.5 or hot water.
litres. Add the sausages to the sausage
heater tank and replace the lid on
the sausage heater tank.
Note:
Waste water from the galley flows into Note:
the lavatory's holding tank.
When adding sausages, there is a risk of
hot water splashing and causing burns
M86_00-0149-01 to the face, arms and hands. Add the
sausages to the water carefully and keep
Insert overflow pipe (12) into the dis-
a safe distance.
charge hole, ensuring leak-tightness.
Danger.
Never operate the sausage heater without
water.
Note:
Excess water may run out via overflow
pipe (12).

TM control panel: Switch on the

sausage heater using control knob
(10).
Green LED (12) lights up.
Note:
The sausage heater switches off when
you turn control knob (10) back. LED
(12) goes out.
M86_00-0165-01
Frenzel control panel: Switch on the

sausage heater using button (13)
on the control panel. Press button
(13.1) repeatedly until the desired
temperature is set.
Note:
It is possible to set a temperature of 40,
60, 80 or 95 °C. LED (13.2) indicates the
set temperature.
M86_00-0375-73

Note:
LED (13.2) flashes while the sausage
heater is heating and lights up when the
set temperature has been reached.
M86_00-0149-01 M86_00-0149-01
At the end of the heating phase, re- The water in the sausage heater tank
move the lid. can be drained as soon as the water
has been allowed to cool down. To
Danger. do this, remove overflow pipe (12)
from the discharge hole.
The sausage heater is hot and generates
steam - risk of scalding. Do not remove
overflow pipe (12) until the water in the
tank has cooled sufficiently that there is
no longer a risk of scalding.
Take out the sausages using tongs

or a suitable heat-resistant kitchen
utensil.

Cleaning the sausage heater
Cleaning the sausage heater Descaling the sausage heater Switching on the 40-cup coffee
After use, clean the sausage heater Fill the sausage heater tank 2 cm machine
tank, the lid and the overflow pipe high with descaler. Galley switched on
with warm water and a commer- Fresh water tank filled and connec-
Leave the descaler to work (observe
cially available washing up liquid. ted
the information issued by the manu-
Use a soft sponge without a scour-
facturer).
er or similar abrasive product. Rinse
Note:
with clean water and wipe the saus-
age heater tank dry to avoid scaling. Note: There is a risk of scalding when serving
Clean the overflow pipe with bottle For heavy scaling, it is possible to operate hot drinks. There is a risk of serious
the sausage heater containing descaler burns. Do not pour the coffee until it is
cleaner at regular intervals.
for approximately 30 minutes at 80 °C. safe to do so.
Note: Drain the boiler after the descaler re-

Clean the sausage heater tank with a action time and rinse well with clean Danger.
commercially available stainless steel water. Wipe the sausage heater tank Do not switch on the coffee machine un-
cleaner at regular intervals. dry. less its tank has been filled with water -
risk of overheating.

Switching on the 40-cup coffee machine
M86_00-0377-71 M86_00-0010-01 M86_00-0008-01
Pulling release handle (3) up makes it Pivot the 40-cup coffee machine out Open the lid. Turn lock ring (17) anti-
possible to pivot the coffee machine of the galley. Close residual drain clockwise and unlock it.
out of the kitchenette valve (24) and tap (23).

M86_00-0010-01 M86_00-0378-71 M86_00-0010-01
Remove lock ring (17) and lid (18) Open tap (1) to fill the 40-cup coffee Insert the filter paper into filter hold-
and take out filter holder (19). machine with water. er (19) and fill filter holder (19) with
the required amount of coffee (1
Pivot the 40-cup coffee machine into
mark ring = 10 cups).
the galley until it engages.
Note:
Note:
The minimum amount of water to fill the
40-cup coffee machine is the equivalent You can also use the machine without
of 10 cups. The maximum amount of paper if the coffee has not been ground
water is the equivalent of 40 cups. The too fine.
number of cups is indicated at water level
Close filter holder (19) and lid (18)
glass (21).
and place it on the riser pipe in the
machine.

Note:
Indicator lamp (22.1) lights up when the
coffee has finished brewing.
Note:
The coffee is kept warm as long as rock-
er switch (22) has not been switched off.
M86_00-0008-01 M86_00-0010-01
Note:
Position lid (18) and lock ring (17) Switch on the 40-cup coffee machine
Do not switch off the coffee machine dur-
on top and engage by turning anti- using rocker switch (22). The brewing the keep-warm phase because a new
clockwise: ing process begins. brewing process would begin when the
machine were switched back on - coffee
Note: Danger. quality would be degraded.
Lug (17.1) must be positioned over water Whilst coffee is being brewed, steam es-
level glass (21). capes from the openings in the lid. Do
not open the lid when the coffee machine
is switched on.

Brewing coffee in winter
Push tap (23) down to pour coffee. Brewing coffee in winter

Lock it in the vertical position for
continuous pouring.
Caution:
Operation of the 40-cup coffee machine
Note: in winter is permitted only once it has
Lock the tap in the vertical position for been established that the interior of the
continuous pouring. kitchenette is not frozen, otherwise there
is a risk of damage. The interior com-
Switch off rocker switch (22) if there partment of the bus should be heated for
is no more coffee in the coffee ma- some time beforehand.
chine or no more coffee is needed.
M86_00-0159-02
Drain off the remaining coffee with

residual drain valve (24).

Cleaning the 40-cup coffee machine
Cleaning the 40-cup coffee machine To clean the tap, unscrew the upper
part with rocker arm and flush with
clean water.
Note:
Regular cleaning after each use ensures Flush the residual drain valve with
optimum coffee quality and full taste. clean water.
Clean the filter holder using a com-

mercially available washing up liquid
and a brush. Do not use a descaler
when cleaning the filter holder.
M86_00-0010-01 Clean the inside of the riser pipe of
Remove lid (18) and filter holder (19). the 40-cup coffee machine with a
Use a suitable vessel to fill water into cloth and stainless steel cleaner.
the coffee machine container and
switch on the machine. Note:
The bottom of the tank, the opening on
the riser pipe and the diaphragm must be
free of coffee residues.
To remove the water level glass, re-

move the catch at the top. Clean the
water level glass using a pipe clean-
er or a bottle brush. After cleaning,
press the catch back into the water
level glass, ensuring leak-tightness.

Switching on the 2-carafe filter system
Switching on the 2-carafe filter Brewing 1/2 a carafe of coffee (10

system Note: cups of coffee)
Galley switched on The coffee filter must equate to size 1
Fresh water tank filled and connec- x 6 (commercially available). Add the
amount of coffee powder according to
ted
taste (e.g. 1 teaspoon per cup).
Caution: The 2-carafe filter system is able to

Running programs cannot be paused. If fill two carafes with a capacity of 2
there is a power failure, it will be neces- litres. This is sufficient to pour 40
sary to restart the program. If the carafes 100 ml cups of coffee. It is possible
contain coffee from a previous program, to brew 1/2 a carafe, 1 carafe or 2
they must be drained first to avoid the carafes of coffee.
risk of overflowing.
M86_00-0151-01
Remove left-hand filter (25). Insert

Caution: filter paper and add as much coffee
To avoid the risk of overflowing, make
powder as required.
sure that the carafes are empty before
the brewing process begins. Note:
Add coffee powder to taste (e.g. 1 tea-
spoon per cup, which corresponds to 10
teaspoons for half a carafe of coffee).

Brewing 1 carafe of coffee (20 cups of coffee)
Slide left-hand filter (25) back into Brewing 1 carafe of coffee (20 cups Slide left-hand filter (25) back into
position. of coffee) position.
Place an empty carafe (26) under Place an empty carafe (26) under
left-hand filter (25). left-hand filter (25).
M86_00-0151-01
Remove left-hand filter (25). Insert

M86_00-0153-01
filter paper and add as much coffee M86_00-0154-01
powder as required.
Press button (30) on the control pan- Press button (31) on the control pan-
el. el.
Note:
The LED in button (30) lights up. The The LED in button (31) lights up. The
brewing process begins. brewing process begins.
spoon per cup, which corresponds to
An electronic signal sounds when 20 teaspoons for one carafe of coffee). An electronic signal sounds when
brewing has finished. brewing has finished.
The LED in button (30) goes out. The LED in button (31) goes out.

Brewing 2 carafes of coffee (40 cups of coffee)
Brewing 2 carafes of coffee (40 Slide left-hand filter (25) and right- An electronic signal sounds when
cups of coffee) hand filter (27) back into position. brewing has finished.
Place two empty carafes (26) and The LED in button (32) goes out.
(28) under left-hand filter (25) and
right-hand filter (27) respectively.
M86_00-0152-01
Remove left-hand filter (25) and right-

hand filter (27). Insert filter paper
and add as much coffee powder as M86_00-0155-01
required.
Press button (32) on the control pan-
el.
Note:
The LED in button (32) lights up. The
brewing process begins.
20 teaspoons for one carafe of coffee).

Manual operation of the 2-carafe filter system
Manual operation of the 2-carafe Descaling the coffee machine

filter system
Note:
How frequently the galley should be de-
scaled depends on the water quality but
the coffee machine should be descaled
immediately if performance deteriorates
or if the openings in the filter begin to
scale up.
M86_00-0156-01
Press button (33).

M86_00-0151-01 The water in the 2-carafe filter sys-
Place an empty carafe on the left- tem is boiled out.
hand side.
The water in the 2-carafe filter sys-
tem is completely drained.
Note:
Button (33) is not required for normal
operation. It can be used to drain off
any residual water in the coffee machine
water tank.

Descaling the coffee machine
Hold hose in a container of descaler Flush with fresh water. To do this,

(at least 10 litres). brew several carafes without coffee.
Note: Note:
Use only descalers that are suitable for Repeat the last step until the water no
domestic appliances. The descaler must longer tastes or smells of descaler or vin-
not attack plastics and aluminium. egar.
Operate the 40-cup coffee machine

without the filter holder and with the
tank full or operate the 2-carafe filter
system with two carafes.
Note:
Clean the filter holder of the 40-cup cof-
fee machine using only a commercially
available washing up liquid and a brush.
M86_00-0142-02
Connect the hose to fresh water tank
Disconnect the hose at quick-release (4).
coupling (5).

Winter operation
Winter operation Draining the fresh water tank Release both tensioning straps (4.4).
Galley switched on Remove fresh water tank (4) from the
Over winter, drain the fresh water bus and open cap (4.1) to completely
tank, water lines, boiler, coffee ma- drain the water.
chines and siphon.
Note:
Note: Use spanner (4.3) if the caps are difficult
To prevent damage to water-carrying in- to turn.
stallations, these must be completely
drained before the first frost. Close cap (4.1) firm and tight. Fit
fresh water tank (4) into the bus and
secure using tensioning straps (4.4).
The fresh water tank is completely
drained.
M86_00-0142-02
Disconnect quick-release coupling (5)

from fresh water tank (4).

Draining the water lines
Draining the water lines Draining the boiler
Caution:
There is a risk of overheating if the boiler
is operated with no water. Switch off the
boiler before draining it.
Note:
The drain plug is located on the bottom
left behind the folding cover of the galley.
M86_00-0305-71
To drain off the majority of the water,

route hose (2) to the outside of the
bus and open tap (1).
Note: M86_00-0144-02
The tap is located in the luggage com- Press and hold button (6) until no
partment next to the fresh water tank or more water flows out of tap (8).
below the water pump.
Press and hold button (7) until no
To drain off the remaining water, more water flows out of tap (8).
force water through the cold/hot The water lines are completely
water lines using the control panel drained.
and run it empty.

Draining the 40-cup coffee machine
Open hose clamp (36.2), remove red Draining the 40-cup coffee machine
or black drain plug (36.1) and drain
all the water from the boiler into the
container underneath.
Seal hose (36) with the red or black
drain plug (36.1). Secure drain
plug (36.1) firmly in place using hose
clamp (36.2). Slide hose (36) back
into the galley.
The boiler is completely drained.
M86_00-0306-71
Pull out hose (36) on the left-hand

side behind the folding cover.
Position a heat-resistant container
(minimum capacity of 5 litres) under
the end of the hose sealed with a red
or black drain plug (36.1).
M86_00-0159-02
Danger.
Position residual drain valve (37) over
Hot water may flow out when the boiler is drainage basin (38).
drained. Do not allow your hands or arms
to come into contact with the water.

Draining the 2-carafe filter system
Turn residual drain valve (24) to the Draining the 2-carafe filter system
open position to drain the residual
water from the 40-cup coffee ma-
Note:
chine.
The 2-carafe filter system is automatically
The residual water drains out. drained after every brewing process.
Turn residual drain valve (24) back to
the closed position. Proceed as follows if you wish to
make sure that there is no more wa-
The 40-cup coffee machine is com- ter in the 2-carafe filter system:
pletely drained and sealed.
M86_00-0156-01
Press button (33).

The water in the coffee machine tank
is boiled out.
The 2-carafe filter system is drained.
M86_00-0151-01
Place an empty carafe (26) on the

left-hand side.

Draining the siphon
Draining the siphon Fill the siphon with windscreen anti- Replacing fuses
freeze mat. no. A 001 986 45 71 11
(down to -30 °C) and then reas-
Note: Danger. Risk of fire.
semble it.
The siphon of the galley waste water Do not use fuses with a higher than spe-
drain is located in the 2nd step in door- cified amperage.
way II. The result would be damage to the elec-
trical system or even a fire in the cables.
Always use fuses of the specified am-
perage and never attempt to bridge or
rewire fuses.
Fuses should be replaced only when
the cause of malfunction has been
rectified.
Danger.
Do not replace fuses unless the power
has been switched off.
M86_00-0160-01
Disassemble and empty the siphon

(39) (odour trap) for the kitchenette
waste water drain at union nuts
(39.1).

Replacing fuses
M86_00-0426-71 M54_00-1058-71 M86_00-0162-01
Switch off the galley at master Switch off the battery isolating switch Replace the defective fuse.
switch (1). (01S01).
Move the control panel into position
The LED goes out. Remove the control panel by loosen- and secure using the four crosshead
ing the four crosshead screws under screws.
the film.
The galley can be switched on.

Malfunctions
Malfunctions Restoring boiler operation following The overheating protection is

This section describes malfunctions a malfunction triggered if the boiler is operated
that you can rectify yourself. with no water.
Note:
Fill the boiler with water to rectify the
malfunction. Reactivate the overheating
protection by pressing button (11) behind
the control panel.
M86_00-0148-02

Using the sausage heater again after a malfunction
Insufficient hot water flow or excess- Using the sausage heater again
ive heating time. after a malfunction
Note:
Symptom of scaling, descale the boiler.
Water flows out of the tap when the

boiler is heating.
Note:
M86_00-0162-01 No malfunction, because water expands
during the heating process.
The boiler does not heat up.
M86_00-0165-01
Note: The overheating protection is
Replace fuse (44) to rectify the malfunc- triggered if the sausage heater is
tion. operated with no water. The red LED
in button (13.4) lights up.
Note:
Fill the sausage heater with water to
rectify the malfunction. Reactivate the
overheating protection by pressing button
(13.4) on the control panel.

Using the 40-cup coffee machine again after a malfunction
Using the 40-cup coffee machine The brewing process for 40 cups still
again after a malfunction has not finished after approximately
Heating is switched off by a temper- 40 minutes.
ature limiter if the coffee machine
overheats. Note:
The riser pipe is not seated in the centre
Note: of the brewing chamber. Riser pipe or
diaphragm blocked.
Pressing in the red pin at the base of the
appliance reactivates the coffee machine Coffee machine boils over.
(after approximately 5 - 10 minutes cool-
ing down period) M86_00-0162-01
Note:
The indicator lamp does not light up.
Too much water added. Coffee powder
too fine. Filter holder clogged or blocked.
Note: Lid not locked.
Check the power supply or replace fuse
Dripping tap.
(43) if necessary.
Note:
Dirt, e.g. coffee residue, clean the tap.
Screw connection leaking, replace the
seal.

Using the 2-carafe filter system again after a malfunction
No water level in the water level Using the 2-carafe filter system
glass even though the coffee ma- again after a malfunction
chine is full. A continuous tone indicates that the
fresh water tank is empty.
Note:
Lower inlet opening blocked. Clean the Note:
inlet opening from the inside, remove the
Fill the fresh water tank. Press any but-
water level glass if necessary.
ton on the control panel of the 2-carafe
Water dripping from residual drain filter system. The 2-carafe filter system
resumes the program from the point at
valve.
which it was interrupted.
M86_00-0157-01
Note: Overheating protection triggered.

Dirt, e.g. coffee residue, unscrew the
angle piece and clean the tap. Screw Note:
connection leaking, replace the seal. To reactivate the 2-carafe filter system,
press the overheat protection switch for
left-hand carafe (34) or right-hand carafe
(35) behind the control panel.

Other malfunctions
Other malfunctions Galley light does not switch on.
Note:
Change bulb (24 V/5 W) or replace fuse
(42).
No water or irregular flow.
Note:
Fill the fresh water tank with water. Or
replace fuse (41). Or have the water
M86_00-0162-01
pump replaced by the after-sales service.
2-carafe filter system fills with water M86_00-0162-01
but does not brew. The control panel is not working.
Note: Note:
Replace fuse (43) to rectify the malfunc- Either the fuse or the control panel is
tion. defective. Replace fuse (42) or have the
control panel repaired by the after-sales
service.

Switching off the galley
Switching off the galley The galley is locked away.
Note:
All appliances must be switched off be-
fore the galley can be switched off.
M86_00-0426-71
Press galley master switch (1).

The LED goes out.
The galley is switched off.
M86_00-0141-01
Switch off the galley lighting using

button (3) on the control panel.
The galley lighting LED goes out.
Fold the upper folding cover upwards
through 90° and press against the
guide rails. Pull the entire folding
cover upwards by the upper folding
cover.

On-board kitchenette (integrated in the lavatory cabin)
Table of contents
Safety precautions/general information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

Use for the intended purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Approved personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
First use of the galley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Switching on the galley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Filling the fresh water tank inside the bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Filling the fresh water tank outside the bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Checking and cleaning the fresh water filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Drawing water from the water tap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Switching on the sausage heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Cleaning the sausage heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Descaling the sausage heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Switching on the coffee machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Brewing 1/2 a carafe of coffee (10 cups of coffee) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Brewing 1 carafe of coffee (20 cups of coffee) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Descaling the coffee machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418

Table of contents
Dispensing cups of hot water (alternative to coffee machine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419

Water heater (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Setting the thermostat of the water heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Descaling the water heater boiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Boiler (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Draining the fresh water tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Draining the water lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Draining the boiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Draining the siphon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Replacing fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Using the sausage heater again after a malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Using the coffee machine again after a malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432

Table of contents
Using the water heater (option) again after a malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433

Other malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Switching off the galley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436

Safety precautions/general information
Safety precautions/general informa-

tion Danger. Danger.
To prevent the growth of microbes in wa- Secure loose objects in the kitchenette
ter left inside the system, the entire sys- (cans, cups, lids, etc.) properly during the
tem must be drained (refer to “Winter journey.
Caution:
operation”) if the galley and/or lavatory is
Never operate the equipment without wa- to remain out of service temporarily.
ter. Risk of thermal damage - loss of war-
Note:
ranty.
Waste water from the galley flows into
Note: the lavatory's holding tank.
It is advisable to disinfect water-carrying
Danger.
systems at regular intervals or after oper-
To avoid the risk of fire and damage, it ation has been restored. A sodium hypo- Environmental protection
is prohibited to store anything inside the chloride solution (from camping and cara-
sausage heater or microwave oven. vanning retailers) is particularly suitable; Dispose of waste in an environmentally
observe the manufacturer's instructions. responsible manner. The rules and regu-
lations of the country in which the vehicle
Danger.
Caution:
Use only clean drinking water.
Do not use the coffee machine or saus-
age heater unless the kitchenette is open.
Damage caused by heat and steam when
the kitchenette is closed is not covered
by the warranty.

Use for the intended purpose
Use for the intended purpose Approved personnel First use of the galley
The galley and its equipment are inten- The galley may only be used by trained Galley switched on
ded for normal kitchen use during a bus personnel. The personnel must be pro- Fresh water tank filled and connec-
journey. This includes: fessionally qualified and have read and ted
understood this section. All packaging materials must be re-
The safety of the person using the kit- moved before the galley is used for
Sausage heater for preparing saus-
chenette and the security of all kitchen the first time.
ages
utensils are prerequisites for use of the
Coffee machine for brewing coffee kitchenette while the bus is in motion.
Water heater (option) for dispensing Environmental protection
cups of hot water Dispose of the packaging material in an
Danger.
environmentally responsible manner.
Any other use cannot be considered use Objects being thrown out of the kit-
for the intended purpose. chenette can cause injuries. The person Before first use, clean the sausage
using the kitchenette must secure loose heater tank, the lid and the overflow
objects safely while the bus is in motion. pipe thoroughly with hot water and
a commercially available washing up
liquid, and then rinse well with clean
water. Then wipe the sausage heater
tank dry to avoid scaling.
To clean the coffee machine, fill
it with water and brew the water
without coffee powder but with the
filter fitted, then repeat.

water. Start the engine to heat the water Switching on the galley
heater (heating time of approximately 5
minutes).
Note:
The coffee machine, sausage heater and
boiler (option) cannot be operated unless
Note:
the engine is running.
Fill cup dispenser (21) from the front with
cups, approximately 100 cups.
The galley is ready for use.
M86_00-0178-71
Before the water heater (option) is

switched on, its boiler must be filled
with water.
Note:
Switch on the water heater using the gal-
ley master switch on the instrument pan- M86_00-0426-71
el. Do not start the engine, otherwise the Press galley master switch (1).
boiler will begin to heat. Press and hold
hot water dispensing button (20) until wa- A buzzer sounds in the galley elec-
ter flows out of the dispenser with no air tronics. The LED in master switch (1)
(it takes approximately 2 minutes for the lights up.
boiler to fill). It is advisable to flush the
water heater with fresh water. To do this,
draw approximately 2 to 3 litres of hot

Note:
If battery (1) does not light up in green
on the control panel, there is insuffi-
cient on-board voltage to operate the kit-
chenette. Start the engine and charge the
batteries.
M86_00-0169-71 M86_00-0170-71
Release cover (2) on lock (2.1) by Switch on the galley lighting using
unlocking and removing it. button (3) on the galley control pan-
el.
Note: The galley lighting on the left above
Stow the galley cover safely. the washbasin comes on. The LED in
button (3) on the control panel lights
up.
The galley is open and ready for use.

Filling the fresh water tank inside

the bus Danger. Note:
The kitchenette must be operated using Use spanner (4.3) if the caps are difficult
clean and potable water only. Fresh wa- to turn.
ter for kitchenette requirements must be
renewed every day. If the fresh water is
stored in the water tank for a long peri- Note:
od of time, an additive (Micropur, mat.
In new buses, the drinking water
no. 0.971.407.000) in accordance with
may sometimes taste of plastic. An
the manufacturer's instructions must be
additive (Kunststoff-Frisch, mat. no.
mixed with it.
0.971.405.000) can be mixed in accord-
ance with the manufacturer's instructions
to neutralise this aftertaste.
Danger.
The tools used to fill with water (contain-
ers, funnels, hoses, etc.) must be sterile. Note:
The fresh water tank is located in the
luggage compartment to the front of the
Note: lavatory.
It is recommended that fresh water tank
M86_00-0142-02 (4) be cleaned manually via caps (4.1)
Fill fresh water tank (4) via cap (4.1). and (4.2) and/or that it be flushed thor- Note:
oughly with fresh water. The fresh water Waste water from the kitchenette flows
lines should then also be flushed with into the lavatory's holding tank.
fresh water by drawing cold/hot water
and switching on the coffee machine.

Filling the fresh water tank outside the bus
Filling the fresh water tank outside Release tensioning straps (4.4). Re- Checking and cleaning the fresh
the bus move fresh water tank (4). water filter
Fill fresh water tank (4) with pure
drinking water via cap (4.2). Close
cap (4.2) firm and tight.
Fit fresh water tank (4) into the bus
and secure using tensioning straps
(4.4).
M86_00-0143-01
Check fresh water filter (6) for clog-

ging at regular intervals (depending
on the water quality) and clean it if
necessary.
M86_00-0142-02
Note:
Disconnect quick-release coupling (5) The fresh water filter is located between
from fresh water tank (4). the fresh water tank and the fresh water
pump.

Drawing water from the water tap Switching on the sausage heater
Galley switched on Note: Galley switched on
Fresh water tank filled and connec- Tap (8) can be pulled out by approxim- Fresh water tank filled and connec-
ted ately 20 cm. ted
Danger.
There is a risk of scalding when using
the sausage heater. Hot steam can rise,
which may cause serious burns to the
face, arms and hands. Keep at a safe
distance, and remove hot sausages using
only heat-resistant kitchen utensils.
Note:
M86_00-0171-71
The heating up time depends on the
Press button (7) to draw cold water amount of water, the number of sausages
from tap (8). and the temperature of the water used to
fill the boiler.
Cold water continues to flow while
button (7) is pressed.

Fill the sausage heater tank with ap-

Note: proximately 4 cm cold or hot water.
The sausage heater has a capacity of Add the sausages to the sausage
5 litres. heater tank and replace the lid on
the sausage heater tank.
Note:
Note:
Waste water from the galley flows into
the lavatory's holding tank. When adding sausages, there is a risk of
hot water splashing and causing burns
to the face, arms and hands. Add the
M86_00-0336-71 sausages to the water carefully and keep
a safe distance.
Insert overflow pipe (1) into the dis-
charge hole, ensuring leak-tightness.
Danger.
Never use the sausage heater without
water.
Note:
Excess water may run out via overflow
pipe (1).

Note:
It is possible to set a temperature of 40,
60, 80 or 95 °C. LED (17.2) indicates the
set temperature.
Note:
LED (17.2) flashes while the sausage
heater is heating and lights up when the
set temperature has been reached.
M86_00-0337-71 M86_00-0336-71
Switch on the sausage heater using Remove the lid when the sausages
button (17) on the control panel. are heated.
One of LEDs (17.2) flashes or lights
up. Danger.
The sausage heater is hot and generates
Note: steam - risk of scalding. Do not remove
overflow pipe (1) until the water in the
Pressing button (17) again switches off
tank has cooled sufficiently that there is
the sausage heater. LED (17.2) goes out.
no longer a risk of scalding.
Press button (17.1) repeatedly until Take out the sausages using tongs
the desired temperature is set. or a suitable, heat-resistant kitchen
utensil.

Cleaning the sausage heater
Cleaning the sausage heater Descaling the sausage heater

After use, clean the sausage heater Fill the sausage heater tank 2 cm
tank, the lid and the overflow pipe high with descaler.
with warm water and a commer-
Leave the descaler to work (observe
cially available washing up liquid.
the information issued by the manu-
Use a soft sponge without a scour-
facturer).
er or similar abrasive product. Rinse
with clean water and wipe the saus-
age heater tank dry to avoid scaling. Note:
Clean the overflow pipe with bottle For heavy scaling, it is possible to operate
cleaner at regular intervals. the sausage heater containing descaler
M86_00-0336-71 for approximately 30 minutes at 80 °C.
The water in the sausage heater tank
Note: Drain the boiler after the descaler re-
can be drained as soon as the water
has been allowed to cool down. To Clean the sausage heater tank with a action time and rinse well with clean
do this, remove overflow pipe (1) commercially available stainless steel water. Wipe the sausage heater tank
from the discharge hole. cleaner at regular intervals. dry.

Switching on the coffee machine
Switching on the coffee machine The coffee machine can be used to Brewing 1/2 a carafe of coffee (10
Galley switched on fill a thermal carafe with a capa- cups of coffee)
city of 2 litres. This is sufficient to
pour 20 100 ml cups of coffee. It is
ted
possible to brew 1/2 a carafe or 1
carafe of coffee.
Caution:
Running programs cannot be paused. If
there is a power failure, it will be neces-
sary to restart the program. If the carafe
contains coffee from a previous program,
it must be drained first to avoid the risk
of overflowing.
M86_00-0173-71
Caution: Remove filter (11) from the filter

To avoid the risk of overflowing, make
holder. Insert filter paper and add
sure that the carafe is empty before the as much coffee powder as required.
brewing process begins.
Note:
Note: spoon per cup, which corresponds to 10
The coffee filter must equate to size 1 teaspoons for half a carafe of coffee).
x 6 (commercially available). Add the
amount of coffee powder according to
taste (e.g. 1 teaspoon per cup).

Brewing 1 carafe of coffee (20 cups of coffee)
Slide filter (11) back into the filter Brewing 1 carafe of coffee (20 cups Slide filter (11) back into the filter
holder. of coffee) holder.
Place an empty carafe (12) under Place an empty carafe (12) under
filter (11). filter (11).
M86_00-0173-71
Remove filter (11) from the filter

M86_00-0174-71
holder. Insert filter paper and add M86_00-0175-71
as much coffee powder as required.
Press button (13) on the control pan- Press button (14) on the control pan-
el. el.
Note:
The LED in button (13) lights up. The The LED in button (14) lights up. The
brewing process begins. brewing process begins.
An electronic signal sounds when 20 teaspoons for one carafe of coffee). An electronic signal sounds when
brewing has finished. brewing has finished.
The LED in button (13) goes out. The LED in button (14) goes out.

Descaling the coffee machine
Descaling the coffee machine Hold the hose in a container of de-

scaler.
Note:
Note:
How frequently the coffee machine should
be descaled depends on the water qual- Use only descalers that are suitable for
ity but the coffee machine should be de- domestic appliances. The descaler must
scaled immediately if performance de- not attack plastics and aluminium.
teriorates or if the openings in the spray
head (above the filter) begin to scale up. Operate the coffee machine with an
amount of water sufficient to fill one
carafe.
Connect the hose to fresh water tank
(4).
Flush with fresh water. To do this,
brew several carafes without coffee.
Note:
M86_00-0142-02
Repeat the last step until the water no
Disconnect the hose at quick-release
longer tastes or smells of descaler or vin-
coupling (5). egar.

Dispensing cups of hot water (alternative to coffee machine)
Dispensing cups of hot water

(alternative to coffee machine)
Note:
The galley is also able to dispense cups
of hot water as an alternative if there is
no filter (11) in the filter holder. The elec-
tronics detect this condition automatically
and dispense cups of hot water when but-
ton (13) or (14) is pressed.
M86_00-0173-71 M86_00-0177-71
Remove filter (11) from the filter To ensure stability of the cups, fit
holder and remove thermal carafe cup holder supplied (15) into the fil-
(12). ter holder. Place cup dispenser sup-
plied (16) with cups underneath.
Remove the cup from cup dispenser
(16) and place it in cup holder (15)
under the opening of the spray head.

Water heater (option)
Water heater (option)

Galley switched on
ted
Water heater boiler filled
Caution:
There is a risk of overheating and thermal
damage if the boiler is operated with no
M86_00-0176-71 water. M86_00-0178-71
To dispense hot water into the cup, To check that the boiler is filled with
press button (13) or (14) on the con- water, press and hold hot water dis-
trol panel. pensing button (20) before starting
the engine until water flows out of
Note: the dispenser.
There is a risk of scalding when dispens- The boiler is filled with water and
ing hot water. Hot steam can rise, which bled.
may cause serious burns to the face,
arms and hands. Do not dispense hot
water unless it is safe to do so.
One press of button (13) or (14) dis-

penses one cup of hot water.

Setting the thermostat of the water heater
The boiler cannot be switched on Setting the thermostat of the water

unless the engine is started first. heater Note:
To set a lower temperature for the boiler,
Note: turn the thermostat anti-clockwise.
The heating time is approximately 5
minutes.
Note:
Remove the cup from cup dispenser To set a higher temperature for the boiler,
(21) and place it under the water turn the thermostat clockwise.
dispenser.
Note:
It is possible to insert approximately 100
cups into the cup dispenser from the M86_00-0179-71
front. To set the thermostat, remove cap

(22) and turn the thermostat.
To dispense hot water into the cup,
press hot water dispensing button
(20). Note:
The boiler thermostat is located on the
back of the water heater.
Danger.
Outflow of hot water - danger of scalding.
Hot water continues to flow while

hot water dispensing button (20) is
pressed.

Descaling the water heater boiler
Descaling the water heater boiler Disconnect the hose at quick-release

coupling (5).
Note:
How frequently the boiler should be de-
scaled depends on the water quality but
the boiler should be descaled immediately
if the heating time is noticeably longer
or if the openings in the water dispenser
begin to scale up.
Hold the hose in a container of de- M86_00-0178-71

scaler (at least 2 litres). Place a cup under the water dis-
penser and press hot water dispens-
Note: ing button (20) until the boiler draws
Use only descalers that are suitable for at least 1.5 litres of water.
domestic appliances. The descaler must
The boiler is filled with descaler. Ob-
not attack plastics and aluminium. Ob-
serve the manufacturer's instructions
serve the information provided by the
manufacturer. on how long to leave the descaler to
M86_00-0142-02
work.

Winter operation
Winter operation
Galley switched on
Over winter, drain the fresh water
tank, water lines, water heater boiler
(option) and siphon.
Note:
To prevent damage to water-carrying in-
stallations, these must be completely
drained before the first frost.
M86_00-0178-71
Flush the boiler with plenty of fresh

water. To do this, fill the boiler with
fresh water using hot water dispens-
ing button (20) and drain it.
M86_00-0142-02
Note:
Connect the hose to fresh water tank Repeat the last step until the water no
(4). longer tastes or smells of descaler or vin-
egar.

Boiler (option)
Boiler (option)
Galley switched on
ted
Boiler filled
Caution:
There is a risk of overheating and thermal
damage if the boiler is operated with no
water. M86_00-0427-71 M86_00-0413-71
To make sure that the boiler contains The boiler cannot be switched on
water, press and hold hot water dis- unless the engine is started first.
pensing button (1) before the engine
is started until water flows out of tap Note:
(2).
The length of the heating phase is ap-
The boiler has been filled with water proximately 5 minutes.
and bled.
The boiler heats the water to the
temperature set at thermostat (1).

Draining the fresh water tank
Draining the fresh water tank

Note:
If the boiler cuts out due to overheat-
ing, you can reactivate it by pressing in
safety switch (2) (boiler reactivated after
a cooling period of approximately 5 - 10
minutes).
Note:
To drain the boiler, open drain valve (3).
M86_00-0427-71
To dispense hot water into a cup,

press hot water dispensing button
(1).
Danger.
Outflow of hot water - risk of scalding.
M86_00-0142-02
Hot water flows for as long as
hot water dispensing button (1) is Disconnect quick-release coupling (5)
pressed. from fresh water tank (4).

Draining the water lines
Release both tensioning straps (4.4). Draining the water lines

Remove fresh water tank (4) from the
bus and open cap (4.1) to completely
drain the water.
Note:
Use spanner (4.3) if the caps are difficult
to turn.
Close cap (4.1) firm and tight. Fit

fresh water tank (4) into the bus and M86_00-0171-71
secure using tensioning straps (4.4).
M86_00-0305-71 Press and hold button (7) until no
To drain off the majority of the water, more water flows out of tap (8).
route hose (2) to the outside of the The water lines are completely
The fresh water tank is completely
bus and open tap (1). drained.
drained.
Note:
The tap is located in the luggage com-
partment next to the fresh water tank or
below the water pump.
To drain off the remaining water,

force water through the cold water
line using the control panel and run it
empty.

Draining the boiler
Draining the boiler Position a heat-resistant container

(minimum capacity of 2 litres) under
the end of the hose sealed with a red
Caution:
drain plug (23.1).
There is a risk of overheating if the boil-
er is operated with no water. Do not
start the engine while the boiler is being Danger.
drained. Hot water may flow out when the boiler is
drained. Do not allow your hands or arms
to come into contact with the water.
Remove red drain plug (23.1) and

M86_00-0179-71 completely drain the water from the
Pull out winter drain hose (23). boiler into the container underneath.
Seal hose (23) with the red or black
Note: drain plug (23.1) and slide it back in.
Winter drain hose (23) is located on the
The boiler is completely drained.
back of the water heater.

Draining the siphon
Draining the siphon Fill the siphon with windscreen anti- Replacing fuses
freeze mat. no. A 001 986 45 71 11
(down to -30 °C) and then reas-
Note: Danger. Risk of fire.
semble it.
The siphon of the galley waste water Do not use fuses with a higher than spe-
drain is located under the washbasin in cified amperage.
the lavatory. The result would be damage to the elec-
trical system or even a fire in the cables.
Always use fuses of the specified am-
perage and never attempt to bridge or
rewire fuses.
Fuses should be replaced only when
the cause of malfunction has been
rectified.
Danger.
Do not replace fuses unless the power
has been switched off.
M86_00-0039-01
Disassemble and empty the siphon

(14) (odour trap) for the kitchenette
waste water drain at union nuts
(14.1).

Replacing fuses
Note:
This description is based on the standard
assignment of fuses in the bus. Bus-spe-
cific assignment may differ from bus to
bus. Not all fuse slots necessarily have
to be assigned on every bus. Further-
more, fuses may occupy unassigned slots
because they are protecting special cus-
tomer options or retrofitted equipment,
for example.
M86_00-0426-71 M54_00-1058-71
Switch off the galley at master Switch off the battery isolating switch
switch (1). (01S01).
The LED goes out.

Replacing fuses
Note:
30 Water pump (10 A)
Note:
31 Sausage heater (25 A)
Note:
M86_00-0180-71 32 Electronics (5 A) M86_00-0181-71
Replace the defective galley fuse. Replace the defective boiler fuse.
Note:
Note: Note:
33 Coffee machine (40 A)
The fuses for the galley are located on The fuses for the boiler are located under
the back of the galley behind the mir- the plastic cover. To remove the plastic
ror in the lavatory. The mirror can be cover, undo the two screws in the cup
removed (screws, mirror bracket or Velcro recesses and the screw in the carafe re-
fasteners). cess. Lift the back of the plastic cover
approximately 5 cm and slide it forwards
to free the plastic cover from the pipe of
the cup dispenser.

Malfunctions
Malfunctions Using the sausage heater again

Note: This section describes malfunctions after a malfunction
34 Terminal 15 (5 A) that you can rectify yourself.
Note:
35 D+ (engine) (5 A)
Note:
36 Water pump (10 A)
M86_00-0337-71
Note:
The overheating protection is
37 Boiler (50 A)
triggered if the sausage heater is
operated with no water. The red LED
in button (17.3) lights up.
Note:
Fill the sausage heater with water to
rectify the malfunction. Reactivate the
overheating protection by pressing button
(17.3) on the control panel.

Using the coffee machine again after a malfunction
Using the coffee machine again Coffee machine fills with water but
after a malfunction does not brew.
A continuous tone indicates that the
fresh water tank is empty. Note:
To rectify the malfunction, press overheat-
Note: ing protection (38). Overheating protec-
tion (38) is accessible through an opening
Fill the fresh water tank. Press any but- (arrowed) in the housing.
ton on the control panel of the coffee
machine. The coffee machine resumes
the program from the point at which it
was interrupted.
M86_00-0182-71
Overheating protection triggered.

Note:
If the kitchenette was switched off at the Note:
master switch on the instrument panel, To reactivate the coffee machine, press
the current program is cleared and it is overheating protection (38). Overheating
necessary to restart the coffee machine. protection (38) is accessible through an
Empty the carafe and refill the filter. opening (arrowed) in the housing.

Using the water heater (option) again after a malfunction
Using the water heater (option)

again after a malfunction
M86_00-0180-71 M86_00-0179-71
The overheating protection is

Note: M86_00-0181-71 triggered if the boiler is operated
Or replace fuse (33). The appliance does not dispense wa- with no water.
ter.
Note:
Note: Fill the boiler with water to rectify the
malfunction. Press pushbutton (24) to
Fill the fresh water tank with water. Or
reactivate the overheating protection.
replace fuse (36). Or have the water
pump replaced by the after-sales service.

Using the water heater (option) again after a malfunction
Temperature of the water too low. Water flows out of the dispenser
when the boiler is heating.
Note:
The heating time has not elapsed, it takes Note:
approximately 5 minutes. No malfunction, because water expands
during the heating process.
Inadequate flow of hot water.
Note:
M86_00-0179-71
Heating time too long.
Note:
Or the overheating protection has been
triggered. Reactivate by pressing in push-
button (24).

Other malfunctions
Other malfunctions No water or irregular flow.

The kitchenette does not appear to
be working, the battery display re- Note:
mains dark. Fill the fresh water tank with water.
Check the water supply connection.
Note: Check the filter for clogging. Or replace
fuse (30). Or have the water pump
The kitchenette undervoltage protection replaced by the after-sales service.
has been triggered. Start the engine and
charge the battery to rectify the fault.
M86_00-0180-71
Galley light does not switch on.
Note:
Either change the bulb (24 V/5 W) (prise
the left or right-hand lamp out of the kit-
chenette) or replace fuse (32).

Note:
All appliances must be switched off be-
fore the galley can be switched off.
M86_00-0169-71 M86_00-0426-71
Fit cover (2) and use lock (2.1) to Press galley master switch (1).
secure.
The LED in master switch (1) goes
The galley is locked away. out.
The galley is switched off.
M86_00-0170-71
Switch off the galley lighting using

button (3) on the control panel.
The galley lighting LED goes out.

Lavatory
Table of contents
Enabling the lavatory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438

Switchover between water (WC) and chemical (CC) operation (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Flushing the WC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Drawing water at the hand washbasin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Filling the soap dispenser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Adding paper hand towels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Adding toilet paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Opening the basin undercabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Changing waste bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Filling the fresh water storage tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Emptying the fresh water storage tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Emptying the holding tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Checking the residual current device for the 230 V socket (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Greasing the impeller of the CC pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448

Lavatory
Enabling the lavatory
Enabling the lavatory

Note:
The extractor fan in the lavatory cabin
operates continuously while the engine is
running.
M86_00-0028-01
M68_00-0352-71 Opening a mechanically locked door

To enable the lavatory cabin, press
switch (1) on the instrument panel Note:
with the ignition switched on. If lock (2) on the lavatory cabin door has
M00_00-0153-01 been locked mechanically, it can be un-
Note: locked by means of a suitable coin or a
When the lavatory is locked from
screwdriver.
The LED in the switch lights up and the inside, the extractor fans of the hold-
lavatory cabin lighting switches on. Op- ing tank and the lavatory cabin are
tion: the lavatory cabin door is unlocked switched on and “WC occupied”
when switch (1) is pressed and locked symbol (1) appears in the passen-
when it is switched off. ger compartment display.

Lavatory
Switchover between water (WC) and chemical (CC) operation (option)
Switchover between water (WC) and

chemical (CC) operation (option) Caution:
Dry running would cause damage to the
Note: chemical fluid pump (impeller pump). For
this reason, always ensure that there is a
With this equipment version, the lavatory sufficient level of sanitary chemical fluid
can be operated either as a water-flushed in the system.
toilet or as a chemical toilet.
Turn switch (1) back to the right to
switch back to water-flushing opera-
Note: tion.
If the lavatory is to be used as a chem- M86_00-0273-71 The lavatory will then be flushed with
ical toilet, the holding tank must be filled
Turn switch (1) to the left to switch water from the fresh water tank.
with a certain amount of sanitary chem-
ical after each time it has been emptied. over to chemical operation.
To do this, pour approximately 20 litres
of water into the toilet bowl. Then add Note:
the sanitary chemical in the mixing ratio
The switch is located behind the service
specified.
cover to the front of the centre right door
(door 2).
The lavatory will now be flushed with

the sanitary chemical from the hold-
ing tank.

Lavatory
Flushing the WC
Flushing the WC Drawing water at the hand wash-

basin Danger.
The water from the tap is not of drinking
water quality.
Note:
The waste water reaches the holding tank
via a system of hoses.
M86_00-0029-01
The flushing process is triggered by M86_00-0029-01
pressing WC flush pushbutton (4). As soon as hand washbasin water

dispensing pushbutton (3) is pressed,
Note: the water pump operates for approx-
imately 5 seconds and water flows
The water pump is operated for approx-
out of the tap.
imately 5 seconds; at the same time,
the shut-off valve to the holding tank is
opened.

Lavatory
Filling the soap dispenser
Filling the soap dispenser Adding paper hand towels Adding toilet paper
M86_00-0061-01 M86_00-0061-01 M86_00-0032-01
Using square spanner (8.1) supplied Using square spanner (8.1), release Press each end of toilet paper holder
with the soap dispenser, release the the catch by turning lock (8) anti- (7) towards each other to remove
soap dispenser catch by turning lock clockwise and fold the lid towards and refit it.
(8) anti-clockwise and fold the lid you.
towards you.
Note:
Note: Insert the towels as shown on the inside
Remove the red cap from a new bottle. of the dispenser.
Place the new bottle in position with the
writing facing forwards and push it gently
into place. Pull the lever firmly to the
right (closed position). Close the soap
dispenser.

Lavatory
Opening the basin undercabinet
Opening the basin undercabinet Changing waste bags Filling the fresh water storage tank
M86_00-0033-01 M86_00-0034-01 M86_00-0417-71
Remove toilet paper holder (7), open Folding open the basin undercabinet Open the right service cover to the
lock (8) using the supplied square makes it possible to secure a waste front of the centre right door. To fill
spanner (8.1) and fold open the basin bag to the bottom of the waste chute the fresh water storage tank, connect
undercabinet. by means of an elastic strap. a supply line between coupling (1)
and an external water supply and
Note: open the shut-off valve.
Waste chute (9) on the top of the wash-
basin is for disposing of used paper tow-
els.

Lavatory
Emptying the fresh water storage tank
Emptying the fresh water storage

Danger. Note: tank
Do not allow the filling process to contin- Water escapes from overflow (11) under
ue unsupervised. If the water fill pressure the floor of the bus when the container is
is too high or if the overflow is blocked completely filled. Close the tap immedi-
by a foreign object, there is a risk of the ately, remove the filler hose.
tank expanding and damaging the overly-
ing floor.
Danger.
Do not add antifreeze to the fresh water
storage tank - risk of poisoning.
M86_00-0417-71
To empty the fresh water storage

tank, take the filler hose from the
holder and open the shut-off valve on
coupling (1). Let the water run out.
M86_00-0037-01 Note:
Ending the filling operation The fresh water storage tank must be
emptied if the bus or lavatory is to re-
main out of service for any considerable
time.

Lavatory
Emptying the holding tank
Emptying the holding tank

Danger.
Observe the notes on winter operation to
prevent damage to water-carrying installa-
tions during freezing weather conditions.
M86_00-0366-71
M86_00-0038-01 In the direction of the arrow, turn

To empty the holding tank, it is ne- compressed-air tap (1) in the ser-
cessary to park the bus such that vice cover located to the front of the
the sewage discharge opening (12) centre right door.
is positioned over a suitable sewage
collection point. Note:
The drainage valve on the holding tank is
opened.

Lavatory
Winter operation
Winter operation
Environmental protection
Dispose of sewage in an environmentally Note:
responsible manner. The rules and regu- Empty the whole system if there is a risk
lations of the country in which the vehicle of frost.
Empty the fresh water storage tank.
M86_00-0418-71
Disconnect lines (15.1) from pump

(15) and let them run empty.
Note:
Operate the pumps using the pushbuttons
(3 or 4) until all of the water has run out.
Reconnect the lines.

Lavatory
Checking the residual current device for the 230 V socket (option)
Checking the residual current

device for the 230 V socket (option)
Danger.
The residual current device must be
tested for correct operation monthly
to rule out the risk of endangering
passengers as a consequence of a faulty
electrical system.
Open the basin undercabinet using a

M86_00-0417-71 M86_00-0039-01
square key.
Empty the holding tank. Unscrew the siphon (odour
trap) (14) from the hand wash-
Note: basin at the union nuts (14.1),
empty and fill with antifreeze
You can rinse out the holding tank using
mat. no. A 001 986 45 71 11.
hose connection (2).
Reassemble the siphon (14).

Lavatory
Checking the residual current device for the 230 V socket (option)
M86_00-0290-71 M68_00-0350-71 M86_00-0290-71
Press trip button (1). The RCD must trip. Switch the RCD back on by pressing
make lever (2) back up.
Note: Close the basin undercabinet again.
If the RCD does not trip, take the 230 V
system out of operation by operating
electrical circuits > 100 V switch (1) and
have the system checked by an EvoBus
Service Partner.

Lavatory
Greasing the impeller of the CC pump
Greasing the impeller of the CC

pump Danger.
Observe the instructions issued by the
Note: manufacturer when handling sanitary flu-
ids.
If the CC has been out of operation for
a lengthy period, the impeller could seize
and the CC pump would fail. To make the seized impeller easier
to move, coat the outer sides of im-
peller (2) with approximately 5 - 10 g
Note: Vaseline or multipurpose grease.
If the CC has been out of operation for To distribute the grease evenly, turn
M86_00-0355-71
a lengthy period, e.g. after the summer impeller (2) several times in the dir-
Undo the securing screws (arrowed) ection of rotation.
season during which only WC operation
was active, we recommend that the im- and remove cover (1) downwards.
Seal (3) should also be coated with
peller of the CC pump be greased before grease.
switching from WC to CC operation. Danger.
Resecure cover (1).
Residues may be expelled from the
CC pump as the cover is opened. The
residues are caustic and must not be
allowed to come into contact with
skin, eyes or clothing. Rinse affected
areas immediately and thoroughly with
clean water. Seek medical attention if
necessary. Wear protective equipment
(gloves, goggles, etc.).

Practical advice
Table of contents
Overview of the operating, function and malfunction display screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455

Engine oil level display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Oil level alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Oil level information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Checking the engine oil level with the dipstick (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Checking the engine oil level with the dipstick (OM 501/502 LA) (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Safety instructions for working in the engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Removing the drive belts (OM 457 LA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Fitting the drive belts (OM 457 LA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Removing the drive belts (OM 502 LA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Fitting the drive belts (OM 502 LA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Engine cooling system fan drive emergency operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Checking the coolant level of the engine and heating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Tyres - operating safety and roadworthiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Tyre tread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483

Practical advice
Table of contents
Tyre condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484

Tyre age . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Invisible tyre damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Tyre load capacity, top speed of tyres and types of tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Retreaded tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Tyre pressures table 295/80 R 22.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Safety measures to be taken in the event of a flat tyre or a wheel change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Fitting anti-skid chains (snow chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Removing the spare wheel from the spare wheel flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Positioning the jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Removing the wheel trims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Removing the wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Fitting the spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
Fitting the wheel trims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Pneumatic system test ports under the driver's area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Pneumatic test ports behind door 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504

Practical advice
Table of contents
Other pneumatic test ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506

Inflating tyres using the tyre inflator connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Charging the compressed-air system of another bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Operating the bus stop brake emergency release switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Operating/malfunction displays: steering system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Checking the oil level in the power-steering expansion tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Draining the fuel prefilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Replacing the filter element for the fuel prefilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Changing the main fuel filter (OM 457 LA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Changing the main fuel filter (OM 502 LA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
Changing the water heater fuel filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Bleeding the fuel system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Electrical system safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
General safety precautions for batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Safety precautions for handling batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523

Practical advice
Table of contents
Measures required for the prevention of damage to buses or components during electric welding
work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
Changeover of Litronic headlamps (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
Electrical system - overview (illustration shows S 416 GT-HD as an example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
Driver's area interior switch panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Main switch panel (under the driver’s area) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
Auxiliary switch panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
Power distribution board (PDB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
Electrical connection for the roof-mounted system (heating, ventilation, air-conditioning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
S 415 GT-HD, S 416 GT-HD battery compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
Notes on fuse assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
Fuse assignment for driver's area interior switch panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
Fuse assignment for main switch panel (under the driver's area) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
Auxiliary switch panel fuse assignment (S 415/416 GT-HD right-hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
Power distribution board (PDB) fuse assignment (S 415/416 GT-HD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
Fuse assignment for ceiling switch panel, ComfortClass 400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554

Practical advice
Table of contents
Fuse assignment for roof-mounted heating, ventilation and air-conditioning system (Webasto) . . . . . . . . . 556
Fuse assignment for roof-mounted heating, ventilation and air-conditioning system (Konvekta) . . . . . . . . 558
Handling fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
Disconnecting vehicle batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
Recharging vehicle batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
Switching to the auxiliary batteries (jump starting batteries) (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
Notes on jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
Jump-start procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
Activating the on-board diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
Interpreting the on-board diagnostics screen display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
Clearing the fault memory of the selected system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
Ending on-board diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Emergency operation (depressurising the doors using the emergency valves) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
Emergency unlocking of the luggage compartment flaps in the event of a compressed-air supply fail-
ure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578

Practical advice
Table of contents
Removing the exterior mirror, fitting the emergency mirror (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
Emergency operation for heating in driver's area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
Emergency operation of the passenger compartment heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
Maintenance tasks on the bus air-conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
Servicing scopes for the air-conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
Cleaning the heating system water filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
Bleeding the coolant circuit for the heating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590

Practical advice
Overview of the operating, function and malfunction display screen
Overview of the operating, function Symbol Description

and malfunction display screen Note:
The following icons can be displayed on FPS 2 malfunction
the display screen:
Symbol Description FPS 3 malfunction
Alternator malfunction
FPS 4 malfunction
Alternator 1 malfunction
FPS 5 malfunction
M68_00-0283-71 Alternator 2 malfunction

FPS 6 malfunction
Display screen (1) is a status indicator
that displays operating, function and mal-
function information (icons). Additionally, Alternator 3 malfunction
FPS 7 malfunction
it can be used to display on-board dia-
gnostics information.
Battery undervoltage
FPS 8 malfunction
Battery overvoltage
Power supply FPS 1
FPS 1 malfunction

Practical advice
Symbol Description Symbol Description Symbol Description
Power supply FPS 2 Immobiliser malfunction Distance cruise control

braking request
Power supply FPS 3 Air cleaner service due Automatic speed limiter
warning message
Power supply FPS 4 Engine power reduction Initialising distance cruise

control
Power supply FPS 5 Drive control (FR) mal- Check

function or failure
Power supply FPS 6 Flame-start system active Transmission in neutral
Power supply FPS 7 Distance cruise control Reverse gear selected

malfunction
Power supply FPS 8 Cruise control active Automatic mode
Engine control (MR) mal- Variable speed limiter Transmission 1st gear
function or failure active

Practical advice
Transmission 2nd gear Transmission 10th gear Gearshift interruption,

engage gear
Transmission 3rd gear Transmission 11th gear Depress the brake pedal
Transmission 4th gear Transmission 12th gear Retarder malfunction
Transmission 5th gear Transmission malfunction Retarder preselected
Transmission 6th gear Transmission failsafe Retarder active

mode
Transmission 7th gear Clutch overloaded, foot Retarder temperature too

off the accelerator pedal high
Transmission 8th gear Transmission Engine oil level too low

compressed-air supply too
low
Transmission 9th gear Shift transmission to Engine oil pressure too
neutral low or sensor failure

Practical advice
Engine oil temperature Brake pad wear Auxiliary consumers

too high compressed-air supply
pressure too low or
Coolant level too low or Bus stop brake active sensor failure
sensor failure Circuit 1 supply pressure
display
Coolant temperature too Bus stop brake malfunc-
high or sensor failure tion or emergency release Circuit 2 supply pressure
switch operated display
Brake circuit 1 and/or 2
ABS/ASR system failure
supply pressure sensor Circuit 3 supply pressure
or malfunction
malfunction display
Brake circuit 1 supply Brake system wheel
pressure too low speed sensor malfunction Compressed-air supply air
intake filter dirty
Brake circuit 2 supply ABS trailer malfunction
pressure too low Bus not at normal level
Parking brake applied Electronic Stability Pro-

gram (ESP) deactivated Bus above normal level
Pedal-activated continu- Electronic Stability Pro-

ous braking disabled gram (ESP) malfunction Bus below normal level

Practical advice
Upper target level Lubrication system Brake lamps faulty

reached
Lower target level Trailer turn signals Reversing lamp

reached
Level control air pressure Main-beam headlamps Reversing lamp faulty

too low faulty
RAS system pressure too Dipped-beam headlamps Automatic headlamps

low faulty malfunction
Steering hydraulics oil Side lamps faulty Window defrost set to

level too low MAX
Axle load transfer active Trailer turn signals faulty Driver's window open
Trailing axle steering mal- Front foglamps faulty Washer fluid level
function
Trailing axle steering in- Rear foglamp faulty Rain sensor malfunction
active

Practical advice
Rain/light sensor mal- Door 1 open Door II hinged step mal-

function function
Emergency valve for door Door 1 malfunction Door 2 emergency valve

1 or door 2 operated operated
Emergency hammer re- Door 1 emergency valve Disabled passengers'

moved operated lift/ramp extended
Door malfunction Door strip 2 malfunction Stop request
Ready to depart Door 2 open Ramp request
Emergency valve disabled Door 2 malfunction Pushchair request
Driver's door open Door 2 locked Service call
Door strip 1 malfunction Outwards opening door Disabled passengers'

teach-in mode space stop request

Practical advice
AC compressor in opera- Special software !Caution! Fuel tank level sensor

tion
Antifog mode active Ignition switch malfunc- AdBlue fluid level too low
tion
Interior temperat- Belt warning WC, lavatory

ure/HVAC malfunction
alert
Fire alarm engine com- Water tank level too low
“Smog” air-recirculation
mode for driver’s area partment/luggage com-
and passenger compart- partment
WC holding tank near to
ment Emergency exit opened
overflow
Roof hatch emergency
unlocked (emergency exit) Water tank 1 empty
Smoke alarm
Roof hatches
Water tank 2 empty
Fuel reserve
Auxiliary heating unit
combustion indicator Unauthorised door lock
Fuel-oil supply
Auxiliary heating unit not
available

Practical advice
Engine oil level display
Symbol Description Symbol Description Engine oil level display
SOS luggage compart- Luggage compartment

ment flaps open
Engine compartment flap Lane assistant warning

open system malfunction
Luggage compartment Lane assistant warning

flaps and engine compart- system not available
ment flap open
Telephone malfunction
Service covers open
M68_00-0283-71
Steering wheel keypad Information about the engine oil level is

Luggage compartment displayed on display screen (1). Oil level
malfunction
flaps and roof hatches alerts are displayed when the oil level
open FMS (fleet management exceeds or falls below certain thresholds
Luggage compartment system) message for the first time, and information about
flaps, engine compart- the oil level can be called up manually in
ment flaps and roof a specific display screen menu.
hatches open
Engine compartment flap
and roof hatches open

Practical advice
Oil level alerts
Oil level alerts Engine oil level requires

Note: Oil level alerts are displayed to the driver maintenance
Oil level information cannot be called up directly by means of event notifications
unless the bus is stationary. (red/yellow alert or service notification).
Note:
Caution:
Oil level alerts of the yellow warning level
There is a risk of engine damage if the can be acknowledged by the driver using
oil level is too low or too high. Therefore, the main menu buttons on the steering
correct the oil level as soon as possible. wheel.
Note: Note:
The oil level alerts that may be displayed To be able to acknowledge oil level alerts
M54_00-1487-71
and the oil level information to which of the red warning level, the driver has to “Service reminder” symbol (1) is dis-
these relate are described in the sections press one of the main menu buttons on played if the engine oil level has reached
that follow. the steering wheel with the parking brake the point where maintenance is required.
applied. To view the oil level information, go to
main menu 4 and submenu 2 using the
main menu buttons and arrow buttons
on the steering wheel (refer to “Oil level
information”).

Practical advice
Oil level alerts
Engine oil level too low/too high

Note: Caution:
Correct the oil level within the next There is a risk of engine damage if the
600 miles (1,000 km). oil level is too low or too high. Therefore,
correct the oil level as soon as possible.
Note: Engine oil level critical

“Service reminder” symbol (1) may also
be displayed as a maintenance indicat-
or for other systems or assemblies and
is displayed until the necessary mainten-
ance work is carried out on the system or
assembly concerned.
M54_00-1466-71
Yellow alert (1) appears if the engine oil

level is too low or too high. A symbol (2)
and the message “Ölstand prüfen!”
(Check oil level!) (3) are displayed.
Yellow status indicator (4) also lights
M54_00-1465-71
up. The yellow alert can be closed using
main menu buttons (5) on the steering This red alert (1) appears if the engine
wheel. To view the oil level information, oil level has dropped to critical level. A
go to main menu 4 and submenu 2 symbol (2) and the message “Ölstand
using the main menu buttons and arrow prüfen!” (Check oil level!) (3) are dis-
buttons on the steering wheel (refer to played. In addition, red STOP lamp (4)
“Oil level information”). and red status indicator (5) light up. A
warning buzzer sounds. To be able to
close this alert, the driver has to press

Practical advice
Oil level information
one of main menu buttons (6) on the Oil level information

steering wheel with the parking brake To view the oil level information, select Caution:
applied. The oil level must be correc- the fourth main menu using the main The bus must be level when the oil level
ted immediately. To view the oil level menu buttons on the steering wheel, and is measured. If the oil level is measured
information, go to main menu 4 and sub- then call up the second submenu using with the bus on an incline, an incorrect
menu 2 using the main menu buttons the steering wheel's arrow buttons. The oil level will be displayed on the display
and arrow buttons on the steering wheel screen and a yellow or red alert may ap-
oil level information informs you whether
(refer to “Oil level information”). pear on the instrument panel.
the oil level is correct or not.
Danger. Note: Danger.

Risk of accident. In the event of a red The oil level cannot be measured unless Risk of accident. Calling up information
alert, the operating safety or roadwor- the engine is switched off and the igni- manually while the vehicle is in motion
thiness of the bus is at risk. The driving tion starter switch is in the ON position. will distract you from the road and traffic
and braking characteristics of the bus When the engine is switched on, the most conditions. This could result in an acci-
may change. Stop immediately (traffic recently recorded oil level value shown on dent with serious or fatal injuries. There-
conditions permitting) and switch off the the display screen remains frozen. The fore: do not call up information manually
engine. actual oil level is not displayed again un- unless the bus is stationary and the park-
til the ignition starter switch has been ing brake is applied.
switched to OFF and back to ON.

Practical advice
Engine oil level OK Engine oil level too low

Caution:
If the top-up amount required is displayed
by means of a service notification, this
amount should be added within the next
600 miles (1,000 km), or within the next
120 miles (200 km) in the event of a yel-
low alert.
Danger.
If a critical engine oil level is displayed in
M54_00-1461-71 M54_00-1462-71
conjunction with a red alert, the bus must
be stopped immediately (traffic conditions
If the engine oil level is within the nor- If the engine oil level is too low, this is permitting) and the engine switched off,
mal range, this is indicated by “Engine indicated by “Engine oil level” symbol (1) otherwise there is a risk of severe engine
oil level” symbol (1) and “OK” (2). and the top-up amount in litres (2) damage.
(4.5 litres in this screen display).
Note:
Note: Caution:
If the oil level is OK, it is not possible to
call up any further oil level information. If the top-up amount required is not suf- The bus must be level when the oil level
ficient for a yellow alert to be shown, is measured. If the oil level is measured
the oil level must be corrected within the with the bus on an incline, an incorrect
next 1,200 miles (2,000 km). oil level will be displayed on the display
screen and a yellow or red alert may ap-
pear on the instrument panel.

Practical advice
Engine oil level too high oil level is called up while the vehicle is
Caution: in motion.
The bus must be level when the oil level
is measured. If the oil level is measured Caution:
with the bus on an incline, an incorrect
Check the oil pressure with the engine
oil level will be displayed on the display
running and visit the nearest Service Part-
screen and a yellow or red alert may ap-
ner. Drive carefully.
pear on the instrument panel.
Engine oil level cannot be

measured
M54_00-1463-71
If the engine oil level is too high, this is

indicated by “Engine oil level” symbol (1)
and “> MAX” (2).
Caution:
There is a risk of engine damage if the oil
level is too high. Therefore, correct the
oil level as soon as possible.
M54_00-1464-71
If the oil level cannot be measured, e.g.

due to a sensor fault, this is indicated by
“Engine oil level” symbol (1) and “- - - - -
L” (2). This display will also appear if the

Practical advice
Checking the engine oil level with the dipstick (option)
Checking the engine oil level with

the dipstick (option) Note: Note:
After you have switched off the engine, The engines have an electronic oil level
Danger. wait approximately 10 minutes to allow sensor that provides a definitive reading.
the oil to collect in the oil sump.
Prevent the engine from being switched
on. Remove the key from the ignition
Note:
starter switch.
Note: Top up by the amount required as shown
The oil level must be visible between the on the display screen. Then run the en-
minimum and maximum markings. gine for approximately 20 minutes (idling
speed or vehicle in motion). The screen
display is updated only after this time has
Note: elapsed.
Illustration shows OM 457LA as an ex-

ample
At filler opening (2), add the top-

up volume required in accordance
with the Specifications for Service
M01_00-0125-71 Products.
Pull out dipstick (1) with the engine
switched off and at normal operating
temperature.

Practical advice
Checking the engine oil level with the dipstick (OM 501/502 LA) (option)
Checking the engine oil level with

the dipstick (OM 501/502 LA) Note: Note:
(option) After you have switched off the engine, Top up by the amount required as shown
wait approximately 10 minutes to allow on the display screen. Then run the en-
Danger. the oil to collect in the oil sump. gine for approximately 20 minutes (idling
speed or vehicle in motion). The screen
Prevent the engine from being switched display is updated only after this time has
on. Remove the key from the ignition elapsed.
Note:
starter switch.
The oil level must be visible between the
minimum and maximum markings.
At filler opening (2), add the top-

up volume required in accordance
with the Specifications for Service
Products.
Note:
The engines have an electronic oil level
sensor that provides a definitive reading.
M01_00-0126-71
Pull out dipstick (1) with the engine

switched off and at normal operating
temperature.

Practical advice
Safety instructions for working in the engine compartment
Safety instructions for working in soon as possible to check that the belt Removing the drive belts
the engine compartment tension and the tightening torques are (OM 457 LA)
correct.
Danger.
Danger. Do not carry out work in the engine com-
Never leave the engine running when partment unless the engine has stopped
work is being carried out in the engine running and the ignition key has been
compartment. removed. If the engine is at normal oper-
ating temperature, give it sufficient time
to cool down: risk of burns.
Danger.
Safeguard the engine against being Caution:
switched on without authorisation.
Replacement V-belts and some of the
Remove the key from the ignition switch.
tools listed below are not supplied with
the bus as standard. Only the use of
Omniplus original replacement V-belts is
Danger. permitted.
If the engine is at normal operating tem-
perature, allow it to cool down for some
time - risk of burning.
Should it be necessary to change a drive

belt as the result of a breakdown and no
suitable gauge is available to check the
belt tension then the bus must be taken
to the nearest EvoBus Service Partner as

Practical advice
Removing the drive belts (OM 457 LA)
Removing the fan drive belts Loosen and fully unscrew lock nut
(OM 457 LA) (1.2) on the tensioning screw using
the WAF 19 ring spanner.
Note: Fully unscrew tensioning screw (1.1)
using the WAF 19 ring spanner.
Required tools: 1/2” tommy bar
or ratchet, WAF 18 socket spanner Press down on V-belt (1) with your
(optionally WAF 18 offset ring spanner), hands so that the belt pulley is
WAF 19 straight ring spanner. pushed back.
Remove drive belt (1) from the belt
pulleys.
M01_00-0123-71
Removing the refrigerant
compressor drive belt (OM 457 LA) Unscrew screw (1) and tilt the
damper out of the way. Using the
tommy bar and 1/2-inch extension
Note:
(3), tilt tensioning pulley (2) upwards
Required tools: 6 mm Allen key, 1/2-inch (in the direction of the arrow) and
extension with tommy bar, drift punch or hold it in this position.
a small screwdriver.
M01_00-0073-01
Loosen securing screws (1.3) approx-

imately 1 turn using the 1/2” tommy
bar and WAF 18 socket spanner.

Practical advice
Securing the tensioning pulley Removing the water pump and Release tensioning pulley (3.1) and
alternator 1 drive belt (OM 457 LA) remove drive belt (3) from the belt
pulleys.
Note: Removing the alternator 2 drive
Required tools: 1/2” tommy bar or belt (OM 457 LA)
ratchet, WAF 15 socket spanner.
Note:
Required tools: WAF 19 offset ring
spanner, WAF 19 open-ended spanner,
WAF 17 open-ended spanner.
M01_00-0124-71
Secure the tensioning pulley by peg-

ging it with drift punch (1) or a small
screwdriver.
Remove the drive belt from the ten-
sioning pulley.
M01_00-0074-01
Fit the 1/2” tommy bar and WAF 15

socket spanner into tensioning pulley
(3.1), pull the tensioning pulley anti-
clockwise using the tommy bar and M01_00-0075-01
hold in place. Loosen screws (4.1) (front and rear)
Remove drive belt (3) from idler pul- securing the alternator using the
ley (3.2). WAF 19 ring spanner.

Practical advice
Fitting the drive belts (OM 457 LA)
Loosen screws (4.2) (2 screws) se- Fitting the drive belts (OM 457 LA) Fitting the alternator 2 drive belt
curing the tensioning spindle using (OM 457 LA)
Note:
Loosen lock nut (4.3) of the tension-
During assembly, do not use force (e.g.
ing spindle using the WAF 19 open- with the use of an assembly lever) when
ended spanner and unscrew tension- pulling drive belts over the belt pulley
ing screw (4.4) using the WAF 17 edges. Doing so could result in hidden
open-ended spanner until drive belt damage to the cord, which would consid-
(4) can be removed manually. erably reduce the belts' service life.
M01_00-0075-01
Manually lay the new drive belt on

the belt pulleys for the refrigerant
compressor and the alternator.
Tighten tensioning screw (4.4) using
the WAF 17 open-ended spanner un-
til the required belt tension has been
achieved.

Practical advice
Fitting the water pump and

Note: alternator 1 drive belt (OM 457 LA) Note:
The drive belt tension must not be too Tensioning pulley (3.1) is spring-loaded;
high under any circumstances. It must the drive belt is therefore adjusted to the
still be possible to twist the drive belt correct tension automatically.
through at least 90° at measuring point
(4.5) using two fingers. Fitting the refrigerant compressor
drive belt (OM 457 LA)
Caution:
Visit your nearest EvoBus Service Partner
to have the drive belt tension adjusted
correctly using a tension meter.
M01_00-0074-01
Tighten lock nut (4.3) on the tension-
ing spindle using the WAF 19 ring Manually lay new drive belt (3) on
spanner. the belt pulleys for the crankshaft,
Tighten securing screws (4.2) (2 water pump and alternator.
screws) for the tensioning spindle Fit the 1/2” tommy bar and WAF 15
using the WAF 19 ring spanner. socket spanner into tensioning pulley
M01_00-0123-71
Tighten securing screws (4.1) (front (3.1), pull the tensioning pulley anti-
Manually lay the new drive belt on
and rear) for the alternator using the clockwise using the tommy bar and
the belt pulleys for the crankshaft
WAF 19 ring spanner. hold in place.
and the refrigerant compressor.
Lay drive belt (3) firstly under ten-
Hold 1/2” socket spanner (3) against
sioning pulley (3.1), then onto idler
belt tensioner (2). Pull belt tensioner
pulley (3.2).
Release tensioning pulley (3.1).

Practical advice
(2) upwards in the direction of the Fitting the fan drive belt
arrow and hold it in this position. (OM 457 LA) Note:
Position the drive belt under tension- The drive belt tension must not be too
ing pulley (2). high under any circumstances. It must
Release belt tensioner (2). still be possible to twist the drive belt
(1.4) using two fingers.
Note:
Belt tensioner (2) is spring-loaded; the
drive belt is therefore adjusted to the cor- Caution:
rect tension automatically.
Screw the damper back on using correctly using a tension meter.
screw (1).
M01_00-0073-01
Tighten securing screws (1.3) using
Manually lay new drive belt (1) on the 1/2” ratchet and WAF 18 socket
the belt pulleys for the crankshaft spanner.
and fan drive. Tighten lock nut (1.2) on the tension-
Screw in tensioning spindle (1.1) using spindle using the WAF 19 ring
ing the WAF 19 ring spanner until spanner.
the required belt tension has been
achieved.

Practical advice
Removing the drive belts (OM 502 Removing the fan drive belts (OM Loosen and fully unscrew lock nut
LA) 502 LA) (1.2) on the tensioning screw using
Danger. Note: Fully unscrew tensioning screw (1.1)
using the WAF 19 ring spanner.
Do not carry out work in the engine com- Required tools: 1/2” tommy bar, WAF
partment unless the engine has stopped 18 socket spanner (optionally WAF 18 Press down on V-belt (1) with your
running and the ignition key has been offset ring spanner), WAF 19 straight ring hands so that the belt pulley is
removed. If the engine is at normal oper- spanner. pushed back.
ating temperature, give it sufficient time Remove drive belt (1) from the belt
to cool down: risk of burns. pulleys.
Removing the refrigerant
Caution: compressor drive belt (OM 502 LA)
Replacement V-belts and some of the
tools listed below are not supplied with Note:
the bus as standard. Only the use of
Required tools: 1/2” tommy bar, exten-
Omniplus original replacement V-belts is
sion tube, WAF 24 socket spanner, WAF
permitted.
24 open-ended spanner.
M01_00-0070-01
Loosen securing screws (1.3) approx-

imately 1 turn using the 1/2” tommy
bar and WAF 18 socket spanner.

Practical advice
(2) can be removed manually from Remove drive belt (3) from idler pul-
idler pulley (2.1). ley (3.2).
Removing the drive belt for the Release tensioning pulley (3.1) and
water pump and alternators (OM remove drive belt (3) from the belt
502 LA) pulleys.
Note:
Required tools: 1/2” tommy bar.
M01_00-0130-71
Undo securing screws (2.3) (front

and rear) for the compressor bracket
approximately 1 turn using the 1/2”
tommy bar, WAF 24 socket spanner
and extension tube, whilst countering
the retaining nuts using the WAF 24
open-ended spanner.
Undo lock nuts (2.2) (2 nuts: top,
left-hand thread; bottom, right-hand
thread) on the tensioning spindle us- M01_00-0069-01
ing the WAF 24 open-ended spanner Fit the 1/2” tommy bar into tension-
and fully unscrew. ing pulley (3.1), pull the tensioning
Shorten the tensioning spindle using pulley anti-clockwise in the direction
hexagon head (2.4) and the WAF 24 of the arrow using the tommy bar
open-ended spanner until drive belt and hold in place.

Practical advice
Fitting the drive belts (OM 502 LA) Fitting the drive belt for the water
pump and alternators (OM 502 LA) Note:
Note: Tensioning pulley (3.1) is spring-loaded;
the drive belt is therefore adjusted to the
Do not use force (e.g. with the use of
correct tension automatically.
an assembly lever) when pulling drive
belts over the belt pulley edges. Doing
Fitting the refrigerant compressor
so could result in hidden damage to the
cord, which would considerably reduce drive belt (OM 502 LA)
the belts' service life.
M01_00-0069-01
Manually lay the new drive belt (3)

on the belt pulleys for the crankshaft,
water pump and alternators.
Fit the 1/2” tommy bar into tension-
ing pulley (3.1), pull the tensioning
M01_00-0130-71
pulley anti-clockwise in the direction
Manually lay the new drive belt (2)
of the arrow using the tommy bar
on the belt pulleys for the crankshaft
and hold in place.
and refrigerant compressor as well as
Lay drive belt (3) on idler pulley (3.2) idler pulley (2.1).
first and then on tensioning pulley
Tighten the tensioning spindle at
(3.1).
hexagon head (2.4) using the WAF 24
Release tensioning pulley (3.1).

Practical advice
open-ended spanner until the cor- using the WAF 24 open-ended span-
rect belt tension for drive belt (2) has ner. Note:
been achieved. The drive belt tension must not be too
Fitting the fan drive belt (OM 502
LA) high under any circumstances. It must
Note: still be possible to twist the drive belt
The drive belt tension must not be too
(1.5) using two fingers.
high under any circumstances. It must
still be possible to twist the drive belt
(2.5) using two fingers. Caution:
Caution: correctly using a tension meter.
Tighten securing screws (1.3) for the
correctly using a tension meter. fan drive using the 1/2” tommy bar
M01_00-0070-01 and WAF 18 socket spanner.
Tighten lock nuts (2.2) (top, left-hand Manually lay new drive belt (1) on Tighten lock nut (1.2) on the ten-
thread; bottom, right-hand thread) the belt pulleys for the crankshaft sioning screw using the WAF 19 ring
on the tensioning spindle using the and fan drive. spanner.
WAF 24 open-ended spanner. Screw in tensioning screw (1.1) us-
Tighten securing screws (2.3) (front ing the WAF 19 ring spanner until
and rear) for the tensioning spindle the correct belt tension has been
using the 1/2” tommy bar, WAF 24 achieved.
socket spanner and extension tube,
whilst countering the retaining nuts

Practical advice
Engine cooling system fan drive emergency operation
Engine cooling system fan drive

emergency operation
Note:
Required in the event of faulty electrical
control or defective electromagnetic coup-
ling.
Danger.
Secure the engine against being switched M20_00-0036-01 M20_00-0036-01
on without authorisation. Unscrew the 4 emergency screws (1) Start the engine briefly to gain ac-
on fan spider (2). cess to the second angle profile (3).
Switch off the ignition and take out
the key. Turn the fan blades so that one of Switch off the ignition and take out
the 2 angle profiles (3) is positioned the key.
Open the engine compartment flap. with 2 holes over the 2 threaded
Disconnect the electrical connections holes (4).
to the electromagnetic coupling. Screw in the emergency screws and
tighten them.
Close the engine compartment flap.

Practical advice
Checking the coolant level of the engine and heating system
Checking the coolant level of the

Caution: engine and heating system
Have the electrical control and regulation
of the electromagnetic coupling checked
and repaired as soon as possible.
M20_00-0036-01
Open the engine compartment flap

again to screw in and tighten the M20_00-0037-01
remaining two emergency screws (1). Read off the coolant level
Note: Danger.
The fan is now rigidly connected to the
Risk of scalding to skin and eyes from
drive, runs continuously with it and is no
hot coolant spraying out. Wear protect-
longer able to regulate coolant temperat-
ive clothing (gloves/eye protection). Do
ure.
not open the screw cap on the coolant
expansion tank unless the coolant tem-
perature is below 90 °C. Slowly open the
screw cap to the first detent to relieve
the excess pressure. Turn the valve cap
to the second detent and remove it. Risk
of poisoning if coolant is swallowed.

Practical advice
Tyres - operating safety and roadworthiness
Tyres - operating safety and

Note: Note: roadworthiness
The coolant level must be between the For notes on bleeding the heating sys- Tyres are particularly important for the
upper and lower marks (minimum (1.1) tem coolant circuit, refer to the “Practical operating safety and roadworthiness of
and maximum (1.2)) at expansion tank advice” section. the bus.
inspection glass (1) when the engine is
cold (below 50 °C).
Note:
Fill up with coolant The pressure, tread and condition of the
tyres should therefore be checked on a
regular basis.
Caution:
Only ever top up when the engine is cold.
Caution:
The use of wheel balancing agents, such
Note:
as balancing powder, beads or gel, is not
Use clean and well filtered water with as permitted as these may lead to undesir-
low a lime content as possible (drinking able pulsations and/or vibrations.
water quality) mixed with corrosion inhib-
itor/antifreeze (comply with the Specifica-
tions for Service Products).

Practical advice
Tyre pressure
Tyre pressure Tyre tread

Check the specified tyre pressure regu- Note: A minimum tyre tread depth is specified
larly – at least once a week and before If the tyre pressure is too low, this leads by law. Comply with the legal specifica-
longer journeys – when the tyres are to intensive heating of the tyres, in- tions for the relevant country.
cold. creased tyre wear, changes in directional
As the remaining tread depth reduces,
stability and increased fuel consumption.
the less effective the road grip and hand-
Danger. ling characteristics of the bus become,
particularly on wet or snowy roads.
Always observe the specified tyre pres- Note:
sures for your bus. The temperature and In the interest of safety, have the tyres
If the tyre pressure is too high, this res-
pressure of the tyres increase when the ults in a longer braking distance, poorer replaced before the legally-specified min-
bus is in motion. For this reason, you tyre grip and increased tyre wear. imum tread depth is reached.
should never reduce the pressure of warm
tyres. The tyre pressures would then be
too low once the tyres had cooled. If the Danger.
tyre air pressure is too low, the tyre is li- Caution:
Always ensure that there is sufficient tyre
able to burst, particularly with increasing Caps on the tyre inflation valves pro- tread. Insufficient tyre tread depth in-
numbers of passengers/load and speed. tect the valve inserts from moisture and creases the risk of aquaplaning if the bus
This could result in you losing control of dirt. The caps on the tyre inflation valves is driven at high speed during heavy rain
your bus and causing an accident, thereby should therefore always be screwed on or in slush. The tyre tread can no longer
injuring yourself and other people. tightly. deflect the water away. This could res-
ult in you losing control of your bus and
causing an accident, thereby injuring your-
self and other people.

Practical advice
Tyre condition
Tyre condition Tyre age Invisible tyre damage

Before setting off, check the tyres on the Have the tyres changed at least every Avoid crushing tyres against the kerb or
bus for: six years, irrespective of wear. This also switching off the bus when a part of the
applies for the spare wheel. tyre tread is up on the kerb.
external signs of damage
foreign objects in the tyre tread
Danger. Danger.
foreign objects between twin tyres
The sun's rays and environmental factors Driving over the edge of the kerb or
cracks, bulges
cause tyres to age. The rubber from sharp edged objects can cause damage
which the tyre is made loses elasticity. to the tyre substructure which is not
Note: Tyres harden and become brittle, cracks visible externally. Damage to the tyre
appear due to ageing. Tyres which are substructure only becomes noticeable
Please note that cracks, bulges or extern- more than six years old are no longer reli- much later and could cause the tyre to
al damage can cause a tyre to burst. This able. burst. This could result in you losing
could result in you losing control of the control of your bus and causing an
bus and causing an accident, thereby in- accident, thereby injuring yourself and
juring yourself and other people. Have other people.
damaged tyres replaced immediately.

Practical advice
Tyre load capacity, top speed of tyres and types of tyres
Tyre load capacity, top speed of largest diameter will be overloaded. Tip: Retreaded tyres
tyres and types of tyres the simplest and most reliable measure- EvoBus recommends the use of tyres
ment method is to check circumferences and wheels that have been tested and
using a circumference tape. approved specifically for your vehicle.
Danger.
Note:
Exceeding the specified tyre load capa-
The maximum tolerance for twin tyres
city or the approved maximum tyre speed
is 0.5% of the tyre diameter. The larger
could lead to tyre damage or tyre failure.
tyre must always be fitted in the outboard
This could result in you losing control of
position.
your bus and causing an accident, thereby
injuring yourself and other people. For
this reason, only use the approved tyre
types and sizes for your bus model and
note the required tyre load capacity and
speed index for your bus. Pay particular
attention to country-specific tyre approval
regulations. These regulations may spe-
cify a particular type of tyre for your bus
or prohibit the use of particular tyre types
that may be approved in other countries.
In addition, it may be advisable to use a
specific type of tyre in certain regions or
areas of use. You can obtain information
on tyres from any EvoBus Service Partner.
Where twin tyres are fitted, the twin

tyres must have the same external dia-
meter, otherwise the tyre that has the

Practical advice
Tyre pressures table 295/80 R 22.5
Tyre pressures table 295/80 R 22.5

Practical advice
Safety measures to be taken in the event of a flat tyre or a wheel change
The numbers in the table Safety measures to be taken in

show the respective axle load the event of a flat tyre or a wheel Danger.
in kg. The table's first line change Never lie under the bus if it is raised up
gives the tyre pressure that is and is not supported by axle stands. Do
to be set in bar. not start the engine as there is a risk of
Danger.
* For Michelin tyres, also note: fatal injury. Safeguard the engine against
the tyre pressures at the front Park the bus as far away as possible from being switched on without authorisation.
axle must be adjusted in ac- the traffic and on firm ground. Switch on Remove the key from the ignition switch.
cordance with the table value the hazard warning lamps. Let all passen-
gers disembark and move them out of the
plus 1 bar, but to no more
danger zone (e.g. behind the crash barri-
than a maximum of 8.5 bar. er). Position a warning triangle or hazard
warning light at a suitable distance. Ob-
serve the legal requirements of the coun-
Note: try concerned.
The tyre pressures table
shown here cannot be con-
sidered complete and is Danger.
primarily provided for guid- Only change the wheel on a level, firm
ance only. The tyre catalogue and non-slip surface. The bus or jack
of the manufacturer con- may slip out to the side on a soft or slip-
cerned is the decisive point pery surface (snow, ice, smooth surface,
of reference for the precise etc.).
tyre pressures to be set in
accordance with the current
axle load.

Practical advice
Fitting anti-skid chains (snow chains)
Fitting anti-skid chains (snow Removing the spare wheel from the
chains) Note: spare wheel flap
Snow chains Check the snow chains for firm seating
after you have driven a certain distance
(dependent on prevailing conditions) and
Note: retighten them if necessary.
Comply with the manufacturer's fitting
instructions and legal requirements.
Note:
Only RUD-MATIC MAXI chains are permit-
ted.
M00_00-0231-01
To open the front flap, pull handle (1)

Note:
in the front right doorway
Snow chains may be fitted more easily,
especially on the rear axle, by raising the
bus using the raising/lowering system. Note:
The spare wheel is located behind the
front flap in the front end under the
Danger. driver's station.
Make sure that the snow chains are fit-

ted tightly. Do not exceed the permitted
maximum speed of 25 mph (40 km/h).

Practical advice
Positioning the jack

Note: Observe the safety precautions.
The openings below the spare wheel
in the front compartment must not be
Danger.
sealed or covered by objects as trouble-
free operation of the heating, ventilation Observe the operating instructions issued
and air-conditioning system would no by the jack manufacturer.
longer be guaranteed.
The front flap opens to the front and

Danger.
is damped.
Depending on the bus model, either a
M40_00-0028-01
10 t jack or a 5 t and a 10 t jack are
Note: Pull spare wheel (1) towards you over available on-board. Use in accordance
If the flap opens only a little, reach into roller bar (3) with intended use.
the gap and pull the flap open.
Undo and remove the spare wheel Danger.

retaining strap
Secure the bus against rolling away (apply
the parking brake). Also chock at least
one front wheel if there is a defective
wheel on the rear axle.

Practical advice
Removing the wheel trims
Removing the wheel trims

Danger.
To avoid damage to the skeleton, jacks Danger.
should be positioned at the designated
Risk of accident. Secure the bus against
jacking points only. If support stands are
rolling away. Switch off the ignition and
not available, the good spare wheel or
remove the key. Risk of injury. Take par-
the defective wheel must be placed un-
ticular care around hot, rotating and mov-
der the body at a suitable position for the
ing parts.
duration of the wheel fitting/removal pro-
cedure to provide protection in case the
jack should fail.
M00_00-0259-01
Danger.
The jacking points on the skeleton are
marked on the outside of the bus by a
jack symbol. Make sure that you follow
the instructions in the relevant section of
this manual for positioning the jack when
changing a wheel. M40_00-0025-01
Open cover (2) of wheel trim (1), pull

securing ring (3) outwards and hold
it in this position. Pull off the wheel
trim.

Practical advice
Removing the wheels
Removing the wheels

Removing a front wheel
M40_00-0028-01 M40_00-0011-01
Loosen the wheel nuts using the Place the telescopic jack (10t) on a
wheel nut wrench from the vehicle laminated wood base and jack up the
M40_00-0027-01 tool kit. bus at the control arm jacking point
Position ramp (1) against the defect- (arrowed)
ive wheel and drive the bus onto the Note: Organisational resource
ramp.
Roller bar (3), over which the spare wheel Telescopic jack (10 t)
is pulled from the spare wheel cover,
Note: can be used as an extension. It can be Tools to be self-made
If the ground is very slippery and hard, pulled out of the retaining bracket after Laminated wood base
the ramp may slide out from under the the spring clip has been removed.
wheel when the bus is driven onto it. Ob-
serve the information and instructions on
the ramp instruction plate.

Practical advice
Removing the wheels
Note: Caution: Note:

Extend the telescopic jack the maximum When you remove the wheel, take great If the ground is very slippery and hard,
distance so that there is a gap between care not to scrape it over the threads the ramp may slide out from under the
the wheel and the ramp of the wheel bolts. This would damage wheel when the bus is driven onto it. Ob-
the bolt threads and make it difficult to serve the information and instructions on
screw on the wheel nuts. In the worst the ramp instruction plate.
Danger. case scenario, the wheel nut could seize
on the damaged wheel bolt.
If axle stands are not available, the spare
wheel or the defective wheel must be Removing a wheel from the driven
positioned at a suitable position under the axle
body for the duration of the tyre change
to provide protection in case the jack
should fail.
Remove the ramp

Unscrew and remove all wheel nuts
apart from three offset to one anoth-
er
M40_00-0028-01
Do not unscrew the last three wheel
Loosen the wheel nuts using the
nuts until you have checked that the
wheel nut wrench from the vehicle
wheel is seated on the wheel bolts
tool kit.
without tension.
M40_00-0027-01
Take off the defective wheel
Position ramp (1) at the good wheel
of the twin tyres and drive the bus
onto the ramp.

Practical advice
Removing the wheels
Organisational resource wheel is seated on the wheel bolts

Note: Telescopic jack (10 t) without tension.
Roller bar (3), over which the spare wheel Remove the defective wheel (firstly
is pulled from the spare wheel cover, Tools to be self-made remove the outer wheel if the inner
can be used as an extension. It can be Laminated wood base tyre is defective)
pulled out of the retaining bracket after
the spring clip has been removed.
Danger. Caution:
When you remove the wheel, take great
care not to scrape it over the threads
wheel or the defective wheel must be
of the wheel bolts. This would damage
positioned at a suitable position under the
the bolt threads and make it difficult to
screw on the wheel nuts. In the worst
case scenario, the wheel nut could seize
should fail.
Note:
Extend the telescopic jack the maximum
distance so that there is a gap between
M40_00-0013-01 the wheel and the ramp
Place the telescopic jack (10t) on a
laminated wood base and jack up the Remove the ramp
bus at the jacking point (arrowed) Unscrew and remove all wheel nuts
er
nuts until you have checked that the

Practical advice
Removing the wheels
Removing a wheel on the trailing

axle (not S 419 GT-HD)
M40_00-0028-01 M40_00-0021-01
Loosen the wheel nuts using the First, fully raise the bus at the jack-
wheel nut wrench from the vehicle ing point to the rear of the trailing
M40_00-0012-01
tool kit. axle using telescopic jack (10 t) (3)
Drive the defective wheel onto ramp in order not to overload the trailing
(1) axle.
Note:
Roller bar (3), over which the spare wheel Organisational resource
Note:
is pulled from the spare wheel cover, Telescopic jack (10 t)
If the ground is very slippery and hard, can be used as an extension. It can be
the ramp may slide out from under the pulled out of the retaining bracket after
wheel when the bus is driven onto it. Ob- the spring clip has been removed.
serve the information and instructions on
the ramp instruction plate.

Practical advice
Removing the wheels
Organisational resource Removing a wheel on the trailing

Danger. Telescopic jack (5 t) axle (S 419 GT-HD)
positioned at a suitable position under the Danger.
body for the duration of the tyre change The trailing axle must not be laden with
to provide protection in case the jack the weight of the bus.
should fail.
Remove the ramp
er
nuts until you have checked that the M40_00-0012-01
wheel is seated on the wheel bolts Drive the defective wheel onto ramp
without tension. (1).
Take off the defective wheel
Note:
Caution:
M40_00-0015-01
If the ground is very slippery and hard,
When you remove the wheel, take great the ramp may slide out from under the
Then position the screw-pillar jack care not to scrape it over the threads wheel when the bus is driven onto it. Ob-
(5 t) on shock absorber mounting of the wheel bolts. This would damage serve the information and instructions on
plate (2) and jack up the trailing axle the bolt threads and make it difficult to the ramp instruction plate.
until the defective wheel is relieved screw on the wheel nuts. In the worst
of load. case scenario, the wheel nut could seize

Practical advice
Removing the wheels
Danger.
positioned at a suitable position under the
should fail.
M40_00-0028-01 M40_00-0086-71
Loosen the wheel nuts with the First, fully raise the bus at the jack-
wheel nut wrench from the vehicle ing point to the rear of the trailing
tool kit through no more than half a axle using telescopic jack (10 t) (3)
turn. in order not to overload the trailing
axle.
Note: Organisational resource
Roller bar (3), over which the spare wheel Telescopic jack (10 t)
is pulled from the spare wheel cover, M40_00-0087-71
can be used as an extension. It can be Then raise the trailing axle at the
pulled out of the retaining bracket after
transverse link jacking point (ar-
the spring clip has been removed.
rowed) using screw-type jack (5 t)
until the defective wheel is relieved
of load.

Practical advice
Fitting the spare wheel
Organisational resource Fitting the spare wheel

Telescopic jack (5 t) Danger.
The thread of the wheel bolts and wheel
nuts must be free of oil and grease. De-
Danger. grease the thread if necessary.
The trailing axle must not be laden with
the weight of the bus. Fit the spare wheel
Remove the ramp

Danger.
apart from three offset to one anoth- If the bus is equipped with pressed-steel
er wheels, the spare wheel to be fitted must
also be a pressed-steel wheel. Similarly,
Do not unscrew the last three wheel M40_00-0016-01 an aluminium disc wheel must be fitted
nuts until you have checked that the during a wheel change if the bus is
wheel is seated on the wheel bolts equipped with aluminium disc wheels.
without tension Light-alloy wheels and pressed-steel
Caution:
Take off the defective wheel wheels require a different type of wheel
Where necessary, remove rust and dirt nut.
from the contact surfaces on the wheel,
Caution: wheel hub, centring lugs and wheel nuts.
When you remove the wheel, take great Note:
care not to scrape it over the threads Disc wheels (1) are centred by the cent-
of the wheel bolts. This would damage ring lugs on hub (2).
the bolt threads and make it difficult to
screw on the wheel nuts. In the worst
case scenario, the wheel nut could seize

Practical advice
Fitting the spare wheel
Danger. Note:
Always select the correct nuts for the If you do not push the ramp under the
type of wheel concerned. wheel, it will not be possible to remove
the jack.
Tighten the wheel nuts in a crosswise

pattern
Tightening torque
Wheel nuts: 600 Nm
M40_00-0053-01
Fit the wheel nuts and screw them Danger.

on into contact with the wheel.
Tighten the wheel nuts using the available
tool and drive cautiously to the nearest
Danger. EvoBus Service Partner. Have the wheel
M40_00-0061-01
nuts tightened to the specified torque.
Note the different flat collar nuts. A: For vehicles with light-alloy wheels
Wheel nuts for pressed-steel wheels (steel
(aluminium rims), slide the assembly
rims) do not have any marking, B: Wheel
nuts for aluminium wheels (aluminium sleeves (vehicle tool kit) over 2 op- Danger.
rims) bear the inscription “VA FA” for posing wheel bolts to avoid damage
If you use an impact wrench, tighten the
single tyres, “HA RA” for twin tyres and during removal and refitting.
wheel nuts only slightly in a crosswise
a marking with 3 rings on the integral flat pattern first and then tighten the nuts
Place the ramp back under the
washer (see illustration). to the specified torque using a torque
wheel, lower the bus and take the
jack away. wrench.
Drive the bus off the ramp

Practical advice
Fitting the wheel trims
Fitting the wheel trims ring (5). Attach the lower retaining
Danger. clips and press on. Then press the
wheel trim into the other retaining
The wheel nuts be retightened after a Danger.
distance of 30 to 90 miles (50 - 150 km). clips.
Risk of accident. Secure the bus against
rolling away. Switch the ignition starter
switch to OFF and remove the key. Risk
of injury. Take particular care around hot,
rotating and moving parts.
M40_00-0025-01
Push in the last top retaining clips

with the clamp ring (3) pulled
outwards. This greatly reduces
the amount of effort required and
M40_00-0026-01 you also avoid the risk of causing
Place the wheel trim on clamp ring damage to the wheel trim. Push the
(5) in such a way that the tyre pres- clamp ring (3) back in after the wheel
sure service cover is located over the trim is fitted. Close service cover (2)
tyre valve. At the same time, insert again.
the tabs of retaining clips (4) on the
wheel trim into the cut-out in clamp

Practical advice
Fitting the wheel trims
Danger.
Make sure that the wheel trim is seated
correctly. All retaining clips (4) must be
fixed behind clamp ring (5). The retaining
clips must not rest on a balance weight.

Practical advice

Practical advice
Pneumatic system test ports under the driver's area
Pneumatic system test ports under

the driver's area

Practical advice
Pneumatic system test ports under the driver's area
Pneumatic test ports (behind TP 11 Parking brake emergency re-

the service cover under the lease supply pressure (Setra S
driver's area). 431 DT only)
TP 1 Auxiliary consumers supply TP 12 Air suspension supply pres-
pressure sure
TP 2 Spring-actuated parking brake
supply pressure
TP 3 Front axle brake supply pres-
sure
TP 4 Driven axle brake supply pres-
sure
TP 5 Brake pressure regulated on
the left-hand side of the front
axle
the right-hand side of the front
axle
control pressure
emergency release control
pressure
TP 9 Relay valve/redundancy valve
control pressure, driven axle
TP 10 Outwards opening door I

Practical advice
Pneumatic test ports behind door 2

Practical advice
Pneumatic test ports (behind

the right-hand luggage com-
partment flap to the front of
the driven axle).
the right-hand side of the driv-
en axle
the right-hand side of the trail-
ing axle (only on buses with
third axle)

Practical advice
Other pneumatic test ports
Other pneumatic test ports

Practical advice
Inflating tyres using the tyre inflator connection
TP 15 Brake pressure regulated on Inflating tyres using the tyre pedal-operated brake valve until the pres-
the left-hand side of the driv- inflator connection sure regulator switches on again.
en axle (at the axle modulator
of the driven axle, port 21)
TP 16 Brake pressure regulated on Caution:
the left-hand side of the trail- Since the pressure in the system may
ing axle (in the axle modulat- be too high for inflating a tyre, the infla-
or, trailing axle, port 21) tion procedure should be monitored by
Door 2 Pneumatic test port observing the compressed-air supply pres-
sure operating display on the instrument
Note:
This test port is located on Drain the compressed-air system by
the door valve in the step of pumping (using the pedal), until the
the doorway of door 2. M40_00-0018-01
supply pressure in circuits 1 and 2 in
Remove protective cap (1) from tyre the supply pressure operating display
inflator connection (2) drops below 6.5–7 bar.
Note:
When the engine is running, a pressure
up to 12 bar (pressure regulator cutoff
pressure) can be drawn off. Compressed
air cannot be drawn off unless the pres-
sure regulator is in the fill position. If
the pressure regulator has switched off
(idle position - blows into the open air),
the pressure must be reduced using the

Practical advice
Inflating tyres using the tyre inflator connection
imately 8.5 bar), then switch off the

engine.
Note:
Observe the operating display for the sup-
ply pressure in circuits 1 and 2.
M40_00-0020-01 M40_00-0019-01
Screw on valve connector (4), if not Screw tyre inflation hose (3) onto the
already fitted, to the other end of tyre inflator connection to the stop
the tyre inflation hose using the wing using the wing nut (3.1).
nut.
Note:
Position the hose so that the engine com-
M40_00-0019-01
partment flap can be closed.
After you have finished inflating the
Unscrew the protective cap from the tyres, unscrew tyre inflation hose (3)
tyre valve and connect valve connect- and seal the tyre inflator connection
or (4). with the rubber cap.
Close the engine compartment flap
Start the engine and fill the tyres up
to the specified pressure (approx-

Practical advice
Charging the compressed-air system of another bus
Charging the compressed-air

Danger. system of another bus
Never drive the bus with the tyre inflation
hose still connected. Note:
Compressed air cannot be drawn off un-
less the pressure regulator is in the fill
Danger. position.
Inflate the tyres to the specified pressure
at the earliest opportunity. If the pressure regulator has been
deactivated, reduce the pressure in
the compressed-air system by oper-
M40_00-0019-01
ating the pedal-operated brake valve
until the pressure regulator switches Using charging hose (3), it is pos-
on again (charge position). sible to charge the compressed-air
system of another bus by connect-
ing it to tyre inflator connection (3.1),
which is located in the engine com-
partment.
Danger.
The bus must not be driven under any
circumstances if the charging hose is still
connected.

Practical advice
Charging the compressed-air system of another bus
Note:
Using an adapter hose suitable for
whichever type of connection is fitted
to the bus, it is possible to charge the
compressed-air system of the bus or of
another vehicle.
Caution:
Do not charge the other vehicle's
M42_00-0105-01 M42_00-0326-01 compressed-air system beyond the
Charging by nipple connector Charging by coupling head cutoff pressure of that vehicle's pressure
regulator.
Note: Note:
Option 1: compressed-air connection by Option 2: compressed-air connection by
means of nipple connector (1/2”) (34) means of coupling head (1) behind the
behind the front cover and in the engine front cover and in the engine compart-
compartment. ment.

Practical advice
Operating the bus stop brake emergency release switch
Operating the bus stop brake

emergency release switch
Danger.
This switch has a tamper-evident seal and
is intended to be operated only in the
event of a malfunction in the bus stop
brake or drive-off lock.
Danger.
M42_00-0800-71 M42_00-0801-71
Make absolutely sure that the parking Raise red cover (1) on the emergency Pull out switch (1).
brake is applied before you operate the release switch.
The bus could otherwise roll away.
Remove the tamper-evident seal from

The bus stop brake/drive-off lock
the emergency release switch.
function is no longer active.
Note:

Practical advice
Operating/malfunction displays: steering system
Operating/malfunction displays: Trailing axle inoperational

Danger. steering system
Have the malfunction rectified as soon as Steering hydraulics oil level too
possible by an EvoBus Service Partner. low (option)
If the oil level in the steering hydraulics

expansion tank is too low, this symbol
and the message “Lenkung Ölstand zu
gering” (Steering oil level too low) are M54_00-1497-71
displayed on the instrument cluster dis-
Displayed if the steered trailing axle is
play screen in conjunction with a yellow
faulty and therefore inoperational. A yel-
alert.
low or red alert is displayed, depending
on the severity of the malfunction.
Danger.
Have the bus checked immediately by an
EvoBus Service Partner.

Practical advice
Checking the oil level in the power-steering expansion tank
Trailing axle steering inactive Checking the oil level in the power-
steering expansion tank Danger.
Power-steering oil must be topped up only
by an authorised specialist and in accord-
ance with the Specifications for Service
Products.
Note:
If the upper level in the steering hydraul-
ic system expansion tank is too low,
a yellow alert is displayed on the dis-
M54_00-1496-71
play screen (option) while the ignition
M46_00-0032-01
is switched on. There is no transparent
Displayed if the steering angle at the reservoir fitted in buses equipped with
trailing axle does is not consistent with Read off the oil level electronic oil level detection (option). The
the steering angle calculated by the con- integrated dipstick is the only means by
trol unit. Note: which a manual oil level check can be
carried out.
The oil level must be seen to be between
the minimum and maximum mark (2) on
expansion tank (1) when the engine is
running.

Practical advice
Draining the fuel prefilter
Draining the fuel prefilter Replacing the filter element for the
Caution: fuel prefilter
Danger. The drain plug has a left-hand thread.
Risk of explosion from ignition of fuel, Danger.

Pump out the water/fuel mixture
risk of poisoning from inhalation and Risk of explosion from ignition of fuel,
swallowing of fuel as well as risk of in-
with fuel feed pump (1).
risk of poisoning from inhalation and
jury if fuel comes into contact with skin swallowing of fuel as well as risk of in-
and eyes. Environmental protection jury if fuel comes into contact with skin
and eyes.
Dispose of the water/fuel mixture in an
Gently turn drain plug (4) back as far

as the stop by hand.
Caution:
The drain plug must not be overtightened
under any circumstances. This can dam-
age the seal.
M47_00-0011-01
Place a container underneath. M47_00-0011-01
Screw drain plug (4) on the bottom Place a container underneath

of the filter in towards the filter.

Practical advice
Replacing the filter element for the fuel prefilter
Danger. Note: Note:

Prevent the engine from being switched Separator container (5) can be reused: Do not use any tools when tightening.
on. Switch off the ignition and take out take care not to damage it.
the key. Grease the new sealing ring with
clean diesel oil or engine oil and lay
Close the fuel supply using shut-off Environmental protection it in the filter element groove (6).
valve (2) (Fuel Off position). Screw filter element (6) onto a new
Dispose of old filter element (6) in an
Loosen drain plug (4) and bleed environmentally responsible manner. filter head finger-tight.
screw (3) and let the filter element Tighten drain plug (4).
run empty. Clean separator container (5) and
sealing ring groove.
Caution:
Caution: Smear a new square ring with clean
The drain plug has a left-hand thread.
The drain plug has a left-hand thread. diesel oil or engine oil and fit it into
the groove in the separator contain-
Reconnect electrical connection (7)
Disconnect electrical connection (7) er.
for the heating.
for the heating. Screw separator container (5) firmly
Open the fuel supply using shut-off
Remove the filter element (6) from onto new filter element (6) finger-
valve (2) (Fuel ON position).
the filter head and disconnect the tight.
Fill the filter using fuel feed pump (1)
separator container (5) from the filter
until fuel runs out of opened bleed
element.
screw (3).
Retighten bleed screw (3).
Start the engine and check the sys-
tem for leaks.

Practical advice
Changing the main fuel filter (OM 457 LA)
Changing the main fuel filter

Danger. (OM 457 LA)
Make sure the engine is switched off
whenever any corrective work is carried Danger.
out.
Risk of explosion from ignition of fuel,
Caution: jury if fuel comes into contact with skin
Only a fine filter is permitted to be used and eyes.
for fuel prefilters and water separators.
Prevent the engine from being
M47_00-0011-01
switched on. Switch off the driving
switch and take out the key. Close the fuel supply using shut-off
valve (2) on the fuel prefilter (Fuel
Open the cap on the fuel tank.
Off position).
Note:
This is necessary to release the excess
pressure.

Practical advice
Note:
The fuel return line runs empty (approxim-
ately 0.5 l fuel).
Caution:
Dirty fuel will enter the engine circuit if
you do not do this.
M47_20-0008-01 M47_00-0010-01
Place a container underneath Unscrew filter cover (1)
Dispose of the drained fuel in an environ-
mentally responsible manner. Remove filter element (3) and fit a
Caution: new filter element.
Fuel must not come into contact with
drive belts or other parts that are not Environmental protection
fuel-resistant.
Dispose of the old filter element in an
Unscrew cap (1) from the filter hous-
ing and remove with the sealing
Replace O-ring (2) with a new one
cone.
and screw filter cover (1) back on.

Practical advice
Tightening torque Changing the main fuel filter

Cap: 25 Nm (OM 502 LA)
Danger.
Risk of explosion from ignition of fuel,
jury if fuel comes into contact with skin
and eyes
Prevent the engine from being

M47_00-0011-01
switched on. Switch off the driving
Open the fuel supply using shut-off switch and take out the key.
valve (2) on the fuel prefilter (Fuel On
M47_20-0008-01 Open the cap on the fuel tank.
position).
Fit cap (1) with sealing cone. Start the engine and check the sys-
Note:
tem for leaks.
This is necessary in order to relieve the
excess pressure.
Note:
The engine fuel system is self-bleeding.
The hand primer at the fuel prefilter can
be used to support bleeding in order to
spare the battery and starter.

Practical advice
Note:
The fuel return line runs empty (approxim-
ately 0.5 l fuel).
Caution:
If you do not do this, dirty fuel will enter
the engine circuit.
M47_00-0011-01 M47_00-0014-01
Close the fuel supply using shut-off Place a container underneath
valve (2) (Fuel Off position). Dispose of the drained fuel in an environ-
mentally responsible manner.
Caution:
Fuel must not come into contact with
drive belts or other parts that are not
fuel-resistant.
Empty the fuel filter housing: undo

the banjo bolt at the fuel filter socket
(T connection).

Practical advice
Start the engine and check the sys-

Environmental protection tem for leaks.
Dispose of the old filter element in an
environmentally responsible manner. Note:
The engine fuel system is self-bleeding.
Replace O-ring (2) with a new one To spare the battery and starter, however,
and screw filter cover (1) back on. it is possible to support the bleeding pro-
Tightening torque cess by operating the hand primer on the
fuel prefilter.
Cap: 25 Nm
M47_00-0014-01
Unscrew filter cover (1)
Danger.
Before you loosen filter cover (1), open
the fuel tank to release any built-up over-
pressure.
Remove the filter element and insert

a new filter element.
M47_00-0011-01
Open the fuel supply using shut-off

valve (2) on the fuel prefilter (Fuel On
position).

Practical advice
Changing the water heater fuel filter
Changing the water heater fuel Bleeding the fuel system

filter Note:
Make sure that the water heater cannot
Danger. be started.
Risk of explosion from ignition of fuel, Loosen and remove the filter cart-
ridge (1)
jury if fuel comes into contact with skin
and eyes Environmental protection
Dispose of the filter cartridge in an envir-
onmentally responsible manner.
M47_00-0011-01
Lightly oil the sealing ring on the new
filter cartridge (1). Open bleed screw (3)
Fill the filter cartridge (1) with diesel Operate fuel feed pump (1) until fuel
fuel and screw it back into place. flows out of the bleed opening
Screw it on hard by hand. Tighten bleed screw (3)
Start the engine and check the fuel
Note: system for any leaks that may still be
present
Do not use any form of tool.
M47_00-0052-01
Close the fuel feed shut-off valve Switch on the water heater and
(above the filter), if fitted. check for leaks and correct
Place a container underneath operation.

Practical advice
Electrical system safety precautions
Electrical system safety precautions Use only fuses of the specified amper- General safety precautions for
age. Never replace fuses with those of a batteries
higher ampere rating as this could lead
to damage to the electrical system.
Danger.
Risk of short circuit. Do not place any
metal objects on batteries.
Caution:
Do not loosen or disconnect the terminal
M54_00-1058-71 clamps while the engine is running and
electrical consumers are switched on.
For safety reasons, always switch off the
battery isolating switch (01S01) before
work is carried out on the electrical sys-
tem or the batteries are disconnected/
reconnected. Dispose of defective batteries in an envir-
onmentally responsible manner. Observe
Do not connect or disconnect wiring
legal requirements.
harness connectors to/from electronic
control units unless the ignition starter
switch is OFF.
During engine washes, always protect
the starter, alternator and electrical plug
connections from moisture.
Never attempt to bridge or repair fuses.

Practical advice
Safety precautions for handling batteries
Safety precautions for handling amounts of clean water. Seek medical Measures required for the pre-
batteries attention if necessary. vention of damage to buses or
5 - Wear safety goggles. components during electric welding
6 - Keep children away. work
To prevent damage to various
Danger. components of the bus, the following
measures must be taken before welding
Naked flames and smoking are strictly work is carried out:
prohibited whenever work is being carried
out on the vehicle batteries. Avoid the Have a fire extinguisher on standby.
creation of sparks. Wear safety goggles. The clip on the negative terminal of
Keep children away. There is a risk of the battery must be disconnected
acid burns. The Operating Instructions
and the negative terminal covered.
must be observed. There may be a risk
M54_10-0004-01 of explosion. (Observe the notes on disconnecting
1 - Fire, sparks, naked flames and the vehicle batteries.)
smoking are prohibited. Prevent The pieces of foam fitted in some of
sparking. Danger. the cavities in the body as sound-
2 - Risk of explosion. proofing must be removed before the
Only lead-acid batteries are permitted to
commencement of panel work, weld-
3 - Observe the operating instructions. be fitted, never gel batteries. All cells of
the batteries must be fitted with special ing and tin-plating.
4 - Risk of acid burns. Battery acid is caps that are interlinked by vent hoses, Connect the earth connection of the
corrosive. Always observe the safety in- thereby allowing any gases produced to electric welder directly to the part
structions and safety precautions when be directed into the open air. to be welded. When doing so, make
handling batteries or battery acid. Bat- sure that there are no electrically
tery acid must never come into contact insulating parts between the earth
with skin, eyes or clothing. Rinse off all connection and the weld point.
acid splashes immediately with copious

Practical advice
Changeover of Litronic headlamps (option)
Heat-sensitive parts, such as plastic rosion, oil, grease and dirt should Changeover of Litronic headlamps
tubes, are to be protected or re- therefore be thoroughly removed. (option)
moved. The earth terminal of the welder
Lines routed in cavities, and contain- must not be connected to the trans-
ers or electronic components that mission. The welding current may
Caution:
have been fitted concealed, must be cause sparking at the bearing points
removed from the danger area before inside the transmission. The result- Litronic headlamps (option) can be adjus-
ted for driving on the left or driving on
the start of welding. ant changes in crystalline structure
the right. Please observe the rules and
The passenger compartment and would lead to premature failure of regulations of the country in which the
glazing must be covered with pro- the assembly. vehicle is operated (refer to “Adjusting
tective mats to protect them from the headlamps for driving on the left or
weld splatter and flying sparks. right” in the “Operation” section).
Danger.
Shield off areas at risk of damage
The heating effects may cause dense
caused by flying sparks and radiant smoke or fires.
heat.
Do not allow electronics housings or
electrical lines to come into contact
with the welding electrode or the
earth connection of the welder.
If two parts are to be welded togeth-
er, both parts must be connected to
the negative clip of the welder.
The seam points of the part on the
bus to be welded and of the earth
terminal on the electric welder must
be as bare as possible – paint, cor-

Practical advice

Practical advice
Electrical system - overview (illustration shows S 416 GT-HD as an example)
Electrical system - overview (illus-

tration shows S 416 GT-HD as an
example)

Practical advice
Electrical system - overview (illustration shows S 416 GT-HD as an example)
01/C/D Driver's area interior switch

panel, diagnostics connec- Note:
tion, socket for download and On the S 415 GT-HD, the
self-healing, electrical system auxiliary switch panel is loc-
vehicle data CD ated on the right-hand side
above the driven axle.
Note: 06 Power distribution board
A detailed layout of electrical (PDB)
components (control units, 09 Ceiling switch panel
fuses, relays and connectors, 10 Battery compartment
etc.) can be found on the
electrical system vehicle data
CD. Note:
01S01 Battery isolating switch At the front on the left above
the front axle.
02 Main switch panel (under the
driver’s area)
Note:
Accessible via the 1st service
cover, front right.
03 Auxiliary switch panel (S 416
GT-HD)

Practical advice
Driver's area interior switch panel

Practical advice
C Socket for FPS downloads

and self-healing
D Diagnostics connection
Note:
This switch panel also houses
fuses and relays for con-
sumers in the front section
of the bus.
Note:
The cover of the driver's area
switch panel also houses the
bus CD. This CD must remain
in the bus since it contains
important bus-specific data
necessary for maintenance
and service work.

Practical advice
Main switch panel (under the driver’s area)
Main switch panel (under the

driver’s area)

Practical advice
Main switch panel (under the driver’s area)
Note:
Various electronic control
units such as the EBS, re-
tarder, etc., are located here.
Various fuses (1) are also
found here.

Practical advice
Auxiliary switch panel

Practical advice
1 Auxiliary switch panel
Note:
The auxiliary switch panel
contains electrical compon-
ents such as fuses and relays
for consumers located to-
wards the rear of the bus.
Note:
On 3-axle buses, the auxiliary
switch panel is located on
the right-hand side above the
trailing axle. On 2-axle buses,
it can be found on the right-
hand side above the driven
axle.

Practical advice
Power distribution board (PDB)

Practical advice
Note:
Power distribution board
(PDB) (1) accommodates main
fuses and various other fuses
including those for the flexibly
programmed controller sys-
tem. Power distribution board
(1) is located behind a cover
in the luggage compartment
to the rear of the front axle
on the left-hand side when
viewed in the direction of
travel.

Practical advice
Electrical connection for the roof-mounted system (heating, ventilation, air-conditioning)
Electrical connection for the

roof-mounted system (heating,
ventilation, air-conditioning)

Practical advice
Electrical connection for the roof-mounted system (heating, ventilation, air-conditioning)
Note:
The electrical connection for
the roof-mounted system is
located on the right-hand
side in the area above door
II or above the on-board kit-
chenette. This area is only
accessible from the vehicle
interior.
Note:
Various consumers of the
roof-mounted system, such as
the condenser blowers, pas-
senger compartment blowers,
etc., are protected by the
fuses here (2).

Practical advice
S 415 GT-HD, S 416 GT-HD battery compartment
S 415 GT-HD, S 416 GT-HD battery

compartment

Practical advice
Notes on fuse assignments
Notes on fuse assignments

The following information in respect of
Note: fuse assignments should be observed:
Batteries (1) are located on
the left-hand side above the Note:
front axle.
This description is based on the standard
assignment of fuses in the bus. Bus-spe-
cific assignment may differ from bus to
bus. Not all fuse slots necessarily have
to be assigned on every bus. Further-
more, fuses may occupy unassigned slots
because they are protecting special cus-
tomer options or retrofitted equipment,
for example.
Note:
The bus-specific fuse assignment and fuse
ratings can be found on the vehicle data
CD located in the driver's area interior
switch panel.

Practical advice
Fuse assignment for driver's area interior switch panel
Fuse assignment for driver's area

interior switch panel

Practical advice
F1 7.5 A - Intercom (72F18) F14 7.5 A - Co-driver's reading F27 5 A - Ticket-cancelling ma-
F2 15 A - Front coldbox (80F06) lamp (31F01) chine/ticket-printing machine
F3 7.5 A - Fuel level sensor F15 7.5 A - Door 1 door control (74F02)
(65F08) power supply (41F05) F28 25 A - Wiper (33F02)
F16 15 A - Door 1 window heating F29 5 A - Trailing axle NLA RAS-
(32F14) EC (22F05)
Note:
F17 7.5 A - Distance sensor F30 7.5 A - Driver's seat (81F02)
(2-axle buses only) (10F28) F31 Not assigned
F4 15 A - Video monitor 1-4 F18 7.5 A - Accident data record-
(70F03) F32 7.5 A - Accident data record-
er (60F06)
F5 7.5 A - Instrument cluster er terminal 30 (60F05)
F19 15 A - Driver's power window
(60F01) F33 15 A - HVAC heating/ventil-
(32F09)
F6 7.5 A - 24 V cigarette lighter ation/air-conditioning control
F20 3 A - Attendant call system
(02F28) panel (50F01)
(83F01)
F7 7.5 A - Download/diagnostics F34 15 A - 24 V/12 V transformer
F21 7.5 A - Doorway lighting
(05F01) (01F18)
(41F04)
F8 15 A - Front box (50F02) F35 15 A - Sockets for electric-
F22 7.5 A - Destination display
al equipment compartment,
F9 15 A - Driver's seat (81F01) system (71F01)
instrument panel (02F02)
F10 7.5 A - Power supply switch F23 7.5 A - Vibration motor supply
F36 7.5 A - Immobiliser control
(61F01) (81F06)
unit (10F39)
F11 7.5 A - Electrical circuit shut- F24 15 A - Driver's window heat-
F37 5 A - Ticket-cancelling ma-
down > 100 V (03F03) ing (32F07)
chine/ticket-printing machine
F12 15 A - Radio (audio) system F25 5 A - Trailing axle NLA RAS-
(74F01)
(70F01) EC (22F06)
F38 7.5 A - Destination illumina-
F13 7.5 A - Mirror adjustment F26 7.5 A - Co-driver's roller sun-
tion (31F22)
(32F05) blind (32F11)

Practical advice
F39 7.5 A - Lavatory inverter

(80F34)
F40 7.5 A - Door 1 (41F06)
F41 Not assigned
F42 7.5 A - Download/diagnostics
socket (05F02)

Practical advice

Practical advice
Fuse assignment for main switch panel (under the driver's area)
Fuse assignment for main switch

panel (under the driver's area)

Practical advice
Fuse assignment for main switch panel (under the driver's area)
Fuse block A
F1 15 A - 12-volt sockets (02F08)
F2 7.5 A - Video monitoring sys-
tem (70F06)
F3 7.5 A - Parking aid (70F07)
F4 Not assigned
F5 7.5 A - Illuminated SETRA logo
(31F29)
F6 Not assigned
F7 15 A - 12 V cigarette lighter
(02F15)
F8 7.5 A - 12 V video system
(70F10)
terminal 15 (70F32)
terminal 30 (70F33)
F11 Not assigned
F12 Not assigned
F13 Not assigned
F14 7.5 A - 12 V Travel Pilot
(76F02)

Practical advice
Auxiliary switch panel fuse assignment (S 415/416 GT-HD right-hand drive)
Auxiliary switch panel fuse assign-

ment (S 415/416 GT-HD right-hand
drive)

Practical advice
F1 7.5 A - Automated manual F16 10 A - Engine oil replenish- F29 15 A - Socket for auxiliary
transmission (12F03) ment (15F02) switch panel/engine compart-
F2 15 A - Coldbox (80F04) F17 15 A - Heating for fuel filter ment lighting (02F01)
F3 7.5 A - Lavatory (80F24) (15F07) F30 7.5 A - Engine compartment
F4 15 A - Lavatory inverter F18 7.5 A - SCR exhaust gas and lighting socket (02F04)
(80F26) aftertreatment supply line F31 20 A - SCR exhaust gas after-
F5 7.5 A - Driver's rest area (17F01) treatment supply line (17F02)
(81F04) F19 7.5 A - Trailer anti-lock brak- F32 15 A - AdBlue line heating
F6 7.5 A - Lavatory (80F05) ing system (ABS) (20F07) resistor (17F03)
F20 7.5 A - Compressed-air supply F33 25 A - Trailer anti-lock brak-
F7 15 A - Lavatory terminal 15
(24F01) ing system (ABS) fuse (20F08)
(80F11)
F21 7.5 A - Blower motor, entry 2 F34 7.5 A - Door 2 door-controller
F8 Not assigned
(53F10) supply (42F05)
F9 Not assigned F22 7.5 A - D+ (01F04) F35 15 A - Heater for fuel-oil filter
F10 7.5 A - On-board kitchenette F23 5 A - Trailing axle steering (54F05)
water pump (80F23) RAS-EC terminal 15 (22F06) F36 7.5 A - Substation 1 (51F30)
F11 7.5 A - Retarder terminal 15 F24 7.5 A - Smoke detection sys- F37 7.5 A - Substation 0 (51F35)
(14F02) tem (64F12) F38 Not assigned
F12 7.5 A - Driver's day-bed in F25 Not assigned
multi-purpose room (81F05) F39 Not assigned
F26 Not assigned F40 Not assigned
F13 Not assigned
F27 7.5 A - Door 2 doorway light- F41 Not assigned
F14 7.5 A - Fire detection sys-
ing (42F02)
tem/fire extinguishing system F42 15 A - Roof mixing circuit
F28 7.5 A - Door 2 door-controller
(64F13) pump (53F16)
supply (42F04)
F15 7.5 A - Flexibly programmed F43 15 A - Automated manual
controller (FPS) terminal 15 transmission (12F04)
(04F17)

Practical advice
F44 15 A - Automated manual

transmission (12F05)
F45 7.5 A - Fuel level sensor
(65F08)
Note:
(3-axle buses only)
F46 15 A - Lavatory (winter-proof)
(80F10)
F47 7.5 A - Starter control relay
(10F38)
F48 1 A - Tank data recorder
(65F04)
F49 5 A - Trailing axle steering
RAS-EC terminal 30 (22F05)
F50 7.5 A - Retarder terminal 30
(14F03)
F51 7.5 A - 24 V socket on auxili-
ary switch panel (02F29)
F52 Not assigned
F53 Not assigned
F54 Not assigned
F55 Not assigned
F56 Not assigned

Practical advice

Practical advice
Power distribution board (PDB) fuse assignment (S 415/416 GT-HD)
Power distribution board (PDB) fuse

assignment (S 415/416 GT-HD)

Practical advice
F1 15 A - Lighting strip (31F05) F18 Not assigned F36 50 A - Integrated electron-

F2 15 A - Lighting strip (31F06) F19 7.5 A - Starter battery main ics systems IES terminal 30
F3 Not assigned fuse (01F12) (01F05)
F20 Not assigned F37 50 A - Flexibly programmed
F4 Not assigned
F21 Not assigned controller (FPS 4) (04F04)
F5 25 A - Auxiliary heating F38 50 A - Flexibly programmed
(54F01) F22 Not assigned
controller (FPS 3) (04F03)
F6 25 A - Auxiliary heating F23 15 A - Master safety switch F39 50 A - Flexibly programmed
(54F02) (03F01) controller (FPS 2) (04F02)
F7 15 A - Central locking F24 7.5 A - Tachograph/instru- F40 50 A - Flexibly programmed
(82F01) ment node (60F03) controller (FPS 1) (04F01)
F8 7.5 A - Horn (33F01) F25 50 A - Flexibly programmed F41 80 A - Disabled passengers'
F9 7.5 A - Flexibly programmed controller (FPS 5) (04F05) lift power supply (46F02)
controller (FPS 1) (04F09) F26 Not assigned F42 50 A - Galley (80F02)
F10 7.5 A - Flexibly programmed F27 Not assigned F43 Not assigned
controller (FPS 2) (04F10) F28 50 A - Main fuse terminal 15 F44 150 A - Air-conditioning sys-
F11 7.5 A - Flexibly programmed (01F02) tem (51F01)
controller (FPS 3) (04F11) F29 50 A - Terminal 15 (01F17) F45 Not assigned
F12 7.5 A - Flexibly programmed F30 70 A - Galley (80F01)
controller (FPS 4) (04F12) F46 Not assigned
F31 70 A - Microwave or boiler F47 Not assigned
F13 7.5 A - Flexibly programmed
(80F03)
controller (FPS 5) (04F13) F48 30 A - Engine control main
F32 Not assigned
F14 Not assigned fuse (01F10)
F33 Not assigned F49 70 A - Main fuse terminal 30
F15 Not assigned
F34 Not assigned (01F07)
F16 Not assigned
F35 50 A - Socket on tour guide's F50 70 A - Main fuse terminal 30
F17 Not assigned
cabinet (80F31) (01F13)

Practical advice
F51 Not assigned

F52 500 A - Starter terminal 30
(01F01)

Practical advice

Practical advice
Fuse assignment for ceiling switch panel, ComfortClass 400
Fuse assignment for ceiling switch

panel, ComfortClass 400

Practical advice
Fuse assignment for ceiling switch panel, ComfortClass 400
Fuse block A
F1 5 A - Rain sensor for roof
hatch (52F04)
F2 Not assigned
F3 30 A - Destination display, left
(71F06)
F4 Not assigned
F5 7.5 A - Destination display
system (71F01)
F6 15 A - Reading lamps (31F04)
F7 7.5 A - DVD changer terminal
30 (70F15)
F8 7.5 A - Clock, terminal 15
(65F02)
F9 7.5 A - Video system (70F11)
F10 7.5 A - 12 V power supply
(01F16)
F11 15 A - Electrically folding ex-
terior mirrors (32F12)
F12 5 A - Roof hatch (52F01)
F13 15 A - Wipers, upper (33F07)
F14 15 A - Reading lamps (31F03)
Fuse box B
32F03 40 A - Fuse for heated wind-
screen

Practical advice
Fuse assignment for roof-mounted heating, ventilation and air-conditioning system (Webasto)
Fuse assignment for roof-moun-

ted heating, ventilation and air-
conditioning system (Webasto)

Practical advice
Fuse assignment for roof-mounted heating, ventilation and air-conditioning system (Webasto)
51F03 15 A - Fuse for evaporator

blower, left Note:
51F04 15 A - Fuse for evaporator All fuses in the roof-moun-
blower, left ted heating, ventilation and
51F05 15 A - Fuse for evaporator air-conditioning system are
blower, left accessible from the vehicle
51F06 15 A - Fuse for evaporator interior.
blower, right
blower, right
blower, right
51F09 15 A - Fuse for condenser
blower
blower
blower
blower
blower
blower, left
blower, right

Practical advice
Fuse assignment for roof-mounted heating, ventilation and air-conditioning system (Konvekta)
Fuse assignment for roof-moun-

ted heating, ventilation and air-
conditioning system (Konvekta)

Practical advice
Handling fuses
F1 15 A - Roof-mounted system F10 25 A - Condenser blower Handling fuses

blower speed-module fuse speed-module fuse (51F10) Always carry some spare fuses in the
(51F03) F11 15 A - Condenser blower bus for emergencies.
F2 15 A - Roof-mounted system speed-module fuse (51F11)
blower speed-module fuse F12 Not assigned
(51F04) Caution:
F13 Not assigned
F3 15 A - Roof-mounted system Fuses provide protection against excess-
F14 Not assigned
blower speed-module fuse ive current loads (impermissible heating of
F15 7.5 A - Refrigerant line shut- the wires) in the electrical system.
(51F05)
off valve fuse
F4 15 A - Roof-mounted system
F16 Not assigned
blower speed-module fuse
(51F14) Note:
F5 15 A - Roof-mounted system Note: There are fuses located on the driver’s
blower speed-module fuse All fuses in the roof-moun- area interior switch panel (01), on the
(51F06) ted heating, ventilation and switch panel under the driver’s area (02),
F6 15 A - Roof-mounted system air-conditioning system are on the auxiliary switch panel (03) and on
accessible from the vehicle the ceiling switch panel (09) as well as
interior. on the roof-mounted heating, ventilation
(51F07) and air-conditioning system in the ceiling
F7 15 A - Roof-mounted system duct above door II. Additionally, on power
blower speed-module fuse distribution board (PDB) (06).
(51F08)
F8 15 A - Roof-mounted system
(51F15)
F9 25 A - Condenser blower
speed-module fuse (51F09)

Practical advice
Disconnecting vehicle batteries
Disconnecting vehicle batteries

Danger. Switch off the engine.
Never attempt to bridge or repair fuses.
Danger.
Use only fuses of the specified amper-
age. Never replace fuses with those of a
higher ampere rating as this could lead to
damage to the electrical system.
M54_00-1058-71
These notes must be observed

Danger.
without fail.
Always switch off the battery isolating M54_00-1058-71
switch (01S01) before work is carried out Switch off the battery isolating switch
Danger. on the electrical system. (01S01).
Make sure that you correct the cause
of the short circuit before you change a
blown fuse. Make sure that connections Danger.
have good contact. There is a risk of explosion from the ig-
nition of oxyhydrogen gas by separation
sparks at the time of battery disconnec-
tion. Battery isolating switch (01S01),
which bears a warning label to this effect,
is designed to rule out this risk of injury.

Practical advice
Recharging vehicle batteries
Recharging vehicle batteries

Danger.
Switch the battery isolating switch to the Note:
OFF position (key can be removed) before Recharge out-of-service batteries once a
working on parts of the vehicle electric- month.
al system, especially the batteries. The
battery isolating switch interrupts the
main line from the positive terminal of
the battery to the entire vehicle electric-
al system; for this reason, it must not
be switched off until the ignition starter
switch has been switched to OFF and the M54_00-0904-01
water heater's run-on period has ended
(risk of overheating). Remove the negative terminal clamp
from the battery.
Remove the positive terminal clamp
from the battery.
Reconnect batteries (1) in reverse
M54_00-1129-71
order.
If possible, use starting assistance
socket (1) (option) to carry out the
recharging. It will be necessary to
unscrew cover (1.1).

Practical advice
Switching to the auxiliary batteries (jump starting batteries) (option)
Switching to the auxiliary batteries

Note: (jump starting batteries) (option)
Check that the charging voltage (24
or 12 V) and charging current (approx- Note:
imately 1/10 of the rated capacity,
e.g. 200 Ah battery with 20 A charging To ensure reliable starting of the en-
current) are correct. gine after the bus has been parked for
long periods with electrical consumers
Switch off the charger after charging switched on, the supply of power can be
has finished. switched to the auxiliary batteries for a
limited time.
M54_00-0904-01 Danger. Press and hold the pushbutton with

Connect the charger. Do not disconnect the connection termin- the ignition switched on.
als until the gases have stopped escaping
Danger. from the battery (wait a few minutes).
Risk of explosion from oxyhydrogen gas

formation. Make sure that the area is
well-ventilated when you are recharging The LED in the pushbutton lights up.
the vehicle batteries.
Note:
Power is supplied from the auxiliary bat-
teries for as long as the pushbutton is
kept pressed.

Practical advice
Notes on jump-starting
Start the bus in the normal way. Notes on jump-starting

Release the pushbutton. Follow the instructions for the jump- Note:
start procedure. A discharged battery can freeze at tem-
The LED in the pushbutton goes out. peratures below –10 °C. A frozen battery
must be thawed out before the jump-start
Caution: operation.
Note:
Before you connect the jump leads, check
The auxiliary batteries are disconnected that the operating voltage (24 V) and po-
from the on-board power supply again to larity are the same.
prevent them from being discharged. Danger.
Risk of acid burns. Do not lean over the
battery during the jump-start procedure.
Caution:
Only jump leads (cable cross-section ap-
proximately 70 mm²) are permitted to be
used as a starting aid – never use a rapid
charger. Comply with the safety regula-
tions.
Caution:
Use only jump leads that have insulated
terminal clips.

Practical advice
Jump-start procedure
Jump-start procedure
Caution:
Make sure that the protective cover for
the battery terminals is replaced once the
jump-starting process is complete - risk of
short circuit.
Connect the negative cable to the (-

) terminal of the donor battery, and
then connect the other end of the
negative cable to an earthed metal
M54_00-0904-01 part that is bolted onto the bus skel-
Connect one end of the positive eton.
M54_00-0083-01
Turn the key in the ignition starter cable to the (+) terminal of the dis-
switch back to the stop (position 0). charged battery first, then connect Note:
the other end of the positive cable to As far away from the discharged battery
the (+) terminal of the donor battery. as possible.
Run the engine of the donor vehicle

Note:
at an elevated speed.
In S 415/416/417 GT-HD buses, batter-
ies (1) are located on the left-hand side Start the engine of the bus to be
at the front above the front axle. jump-started in the normal way and
let it run at idling speed.

Practical advice
Activating the on-board diagnostics
Switch off the engine of the donor Activating the on-board diagnostics
vehicle.
Fully disconnect the earth connection Danger.
of the jump leads then disconnect All work carried out on the bus in order
the positive cable. to rectify displayed faults must be per-
formed by authorised personnel only.
Note:
To prevent voltage peaks, switch on the
more powerful consumers of the jump- Note:
started bus, such as the lighting, heated On-board diagnostics cannot be activated
windows or ventilation, before you discon- unless the bus is stationary, the park- M54_00-1385-71
nect the jump leads. ing brake is applied and ignition starter
Press DIAG button (1) on the instru-
switch is switched on.
ment cluster.
“On Board Diagnose” (On-board dia-
Note: gnostics) pop-up window (2) opens.
On-board diagnostics cannot be regarded
as a substitute for off-board diagnostics Note:
(STAR Diagnosis) because off-board
diagnostics is the only means by which
at any time using main menu button (3)
some functions can be monitored and
tested (e.g. the channel assignment for
the sensor system and actuators of the
EBS or ABS/ASR system).

Practical advice
Activating the on-board diagnostics
ART Distance cruise control

Note: TCO Tachograph Note:
The pop-up window does not close auto- The driver can close the pop-up window
matically. NR1 Level control at any time using main menu button (2)
MTS Modular door control system on the steering wheel.
Using arrow button (4) on the steer-
ing wheel, select the desired system. ZL Auxiliary steering
FPS Flexibly programmed controller To call up more information, press Note:
plus button (5) on the steering wheel. It is possible to move on to the next sys-
DM Driver's station display multiplex-
tem using arrow button (3) on the steer-
er ing wheel.
HLK Heating, ventilation, air-condi-
tioning (ATC-CAN)
Note:
SPA Lane assistant warning system
The following information categories can
ABA Active Brake Assist be called up using plus button (4) on the
steering wheel:
BS Brake control system (EBS)
GS Automated manual transmission Part numbers (control unit)
(ASG) Fault codes (current/stored faults)
CPC (common powertrain controller) M54.00-1627-71 Measured values (actual values)
or FR drive control Data (1) for the selected system are
Binary values
PLD Engine control (PLN MR) displayed.
LWS Steering wheel angle sensor
RS Retarder control

Practical advice
Interpreting the on-board diagnostics screen display
Interpreting the on-board dia- Clearing the fault memory of the

gnostics screen display Note: selected system
Status (1.3) (a = current fault; blank =
stored fault)
Note:
Fault severity (1.4) (0 = minor, 1 = mod-
erate, 2 = serious)
Note:
Fault code (1.5)
M54_00-1387-71 M54_00-1388-71
Example display (1): Press RESET button (1) and menu

Note: button (2) simultaneously.
Note: Channel no. (1.6)
System (1.1)
Note:
Fault number (1.2)

Practical advice
Ending on-board diagnostics
Ending on-board diagnostics Changing bulbs

Danger.
Note: Do not use a bulb that has been dropped
Bulbs and lamps are an integral part of or has scratches on the glass. The bulb
bus safety. Make sure that all bulbs are is pressurised and may explode. You
always in working order. could be injured by glass splinters from
broken bulbs.
Danger.
Note:
Bulbs can become extremely hot. There
Protect bulbs from moisture during opera-
is a risk of burns. Before changing bulbs,
tion and do not allow them to come into
allow them to cool off completely.
M54_00-1389-71 contact with fluids.
To quit on-board diagnostics, press
main menu button (1) on the steering Danger.
wheel. Note:
Always wear safety goggles and non-slip Marks on the glass diminish the service
gloves to prevent injury when changing life of the bulb. Do not touch the glass
bulbs. bulb with your bare hands. If you do,
clean the glass bulb while cold using al-
cohol or spirit and rub dry with a lint-free
Caution: cloth.
To prevent a short circuit, always switch
off the lighting before you change a bulb.

Practical advice
Changing bulbs
Note: Environmental protection Danger.

Bulbs must be operated only in the Comply with legal requirements when you It is essential that work relevant to safety
closed lamp units for which they are dispose of bulbs or fluorescent tubes. or work on safety-related systems be car-
intended. Always use replacement bulbs ried out at a qualified specialist work-
of the same type and the correct voltage shop.
rating.
Danger.
Changing a bulb in the
Gas discharge bulbs operate at high
dipped-beam and main-beam
Note: voltage, high pressure and high temperat-
ure. There is a risk of fatal injury if live headlamps
Check the contacts for corrosion; clean if parts of the lamp and ballast unit are
necessary.
Remove cover (4 quick-release locks
touched. Do not touch the gas discharge on right).
bulb if the headlamp is damaged.
Note: Note:
Check the seals for correct seating; re- Danger. The headlamp is accessible from the
place damaged seals with new ones. vehicle interior (left) or via the service
Do not change gas discharge bulbs your-
cover under the driver's area (right). This
self. Always have defective gas discharge
cover can be opened using the handle on
bulbs changed at a qualified specialist
Note: the left next to the driver's seat.
workshop which has the necessary spe-
Keep children away from bulbs. cialist knowledge and tools for the work
required. EvoBus recommends an EvoBus
Service Partner for this purpose.

Practical advice
Changing bulbs
Note:
Replacing the front foglamp bulbs

Remove the plastic cover for the
front foglamp.
Note:
The covers are accessible from the
M54_00-0836-01 M54_00-0102-01 vehicle interior (left) or via the service
To change the bulb in the dipped- Disconnect bulb cable (5). cover under the driver's area (right). This
beam and main-beam headlamps, cover can be opened using the handle on
Detach retaining spring (6) and take
push wire loop (3) upwards and re- the right next to the driver's seat.
out the bulb.
move plastic cover (4).
Release the cable connection.
Note: Detach the retaining spring and take
Insert the new bulb so that the guides on out the bulb.
the socket plate engage in the recesses
on the headlamp mirror neck.
Note:
Insert the new bulb so that the guides on
the socket plate engage in the recesses
on the headlamp mirror neck.

Practical advice
Changing bulbs
Pull glass-base bulb (7) out of the

Note: Note: socket.
Refit in reverse order. The lamps are accessible from the vehicle
interior (left) or via the service cover un- Note:
Changing the bulb in the lower der the driver's area (right). This cover
clearance lamp can be opened using the handle on the
right next to the driver's seat.
Changing the bulb in the side-
mounted turn signal
To change the bulb for the lower
clearance lamp, push wire loop (3)
upwards and remove plastic cover
(4).
M54_00-0836-01
Remove the cover (4 quick-release

locks on right). M54_00-0105-01
Unscrew securing screws (3) and

remove the housing.
M54_00-0419-01 Press bulb (4) in, turn it anti-clock-
Pull bulb socket (6) to the rear. wise and remove.

Practical advice
Changing bulbs
Changing a bulb in the upper rear

Note: Note: lamp cluster
Refit in reverse order. 1 Turn signal lamp 2 Tail lamp 3 Brake
lamp 4 Reversing lamp 5 Rear foglamp
Changing a bulb in the rear lamp
cluster Press the bulb in, turn it anti-clock-
wise and remove.
Note:
M54_00-0882-01
Remove cover caps (1), unscrew the

screws and open the plastic covers
on the left or right.
M54_00-0898-01
Open the left or right service cover.

Turn the base of the relevant bulb
45° clockwise

Practical advice
Changing bulbs
Note: Note:
Refit in reverse order. Refit in reverse order.
Changing the bulb in the doorway Changing the halogen lamp in the
lamp exterior mirror
M54_00-0412-01
Turn the base of the relevant lamp

45° anti-clockwise.
Note:
1 Brake/tail lamp 2 Turn signal lamp
M54_00-0110-01 M88_00-0011-01
Press the bulb in, turn it anti-clock- Unscrew and remove two securing Turn quick-release locks (1) through
wise and remove. screws (1) and remove the lamp. 90° and remove cover (2).
Take out the bulb.

Practical advice
Changing bulbs
Changing the bulb in a reading

lamp
M54_00-0423-01 M54_00-0901-01
Remove two crosshead screws (3). Turn socket (1) anti-clockwise.

Remove cover (5) and push the re- M68_00-0127-01 Press bulb (3) in, turn it anti-clock-
taining spring back. Open the left or right service cover. wise and replace it with a new one.
Disconnect the connector and
change the halogen lamp. Note:
Note:
To do this, press the retaining clip up-
Note: wards using the plastic spatula (supplied
Refit in reverse order. in the vehicle tool kit) so that it is pos-
sible to release the service covers.

Practical advice
Changing bulbs
Replacing the interior strip lighting Changing a bulb for the luggage
rack lighting
M54_00-0900-01
Turn socket (2) anti-clockwise.

M68_00-0127-01
Open the left or right service cover. Press bulb (3) in, turn it anti-clock- M54_00-0911-01
wise and replace it with a new one. Press lens (1) of the luggage rack
Note: lighting upwards using a screwdriver,
Note: then remove it by pulling it towards
To do this, press the retaining clip up-
Refit in reverse order. the centre of the bus.
wards using the plastic spatula (supplied
in the vehicle tool kit) so that it is pos-
sible to release the service covers.

Practical advice
Changing the fluorescent tube of Emergency operation (depres-

the lavatory lighting surising the doors using the
emergency valves)
Danger.
All doors must remain unlocked while the
bus is in motion. - refer to “Unlocking
the door circuit at the front left door /
Unlocking door 2 / Unlocking the door
circuit using the radio remote control (op-
tion)”.
M54_00-0912-01
Remove glass-base bulb (2) from the

socket and replace it with a new one.
M54_00-0114-01
Remove cover (3) using a screw-

Note: driver.
Refit in reverse order. Turn the fluorescent tube through
90° and remove it.
Note:

Practical advice
Note:
3.2 Exterior emergency valve, centre right
door The warning buzzer sounds in the
driver's area. The red warning lamp
in the relevant door pushbutton must
Note: flash. This symbol appears on the
3.3 Interior emergency valve, centre right instrument cluster display screen
door together with a red alert.
Turn interior emergency valve Restoring operation of the door sys-
M72_00-0470-71 (3.1/3.3) or exterior emergency valve tem: - move the emergency valve
Remove the tamper-evident seal from (3/3.2) in the direction of the arrow. into the normal position – the door
the emergency valve. compressed-air system is slowly
Note: refilled through a door actuation
Note: throttle valve and returns to the con-
When the emergency valve is operated,
dition it was in before the emergency
3 Exterior emergency valve, front left door the door valve is vented of air. At the
same time, the emergency valve also re- valve was operated.
leases the air in the door system. The
door system is now depressurised and it Danger.
Note:
must now be possible to move the door
3.1 Interior emergency valve, front left manually. Risk of injury. Make sure that nobody is
door within the sweep of the door leaf when
operation of the door system is restored.
Doors must not move with a jerky or
jolting action after normal operation has
been restored.

Practical advice
Provide the emergency valve with a Emergency unlocking of the luggage

new tamper-evident seal. compartment flaps in the event of a
compressed-air supply failure
Note:
A tamper-evident seal is not permitted on Note:
buses delivered to France. In an emergency, i.e. where there has
been a complete failure of the central
compressed-air supply and electrical
power supply, an emergency operating
facility (compressed-air supply for spare
wheel) ensures that it is still possible to
unlock the luggage compartment flaps. M00_00-0231-01
Open the front flap of the bus using

lever (1) in the front left doorway.
Remove the spare wheel.

Practical advice
Removing the exterior mirror, fitting the emergency mirror (option)
Removing the exterior mirror, fitting

Note: the emergency mirror (option)
Reinflate the spare wheel to the specified
pressure as soon as possible. Note:
The emergency mirror (option) is located
in the luggage compartment and can be
fitted to both sides. Tools needed for
assembly: WAF 6 Allen key, screwdriver,
WAF 15 open-ended spanner
M40_00-0052-01
Danger.
Take the hose with tyre connection
Only carry out work using a suitable lad-
(1) from the plate behind the heat-
der. Secure the ladder against sliding
ing front cabinet and connect it to away.
the tyre inflation valve on the spare
wheel.
Note:
The spare wheel has a pressure of ap-
proximately 8 bar. The compressed air in
the spare wheel passes through shuttle
valves to the cylinders of the luggage
compartment locking system and un-
locks the luggage compartment flaps. The
luggage compartment flaps can then be
opened.

Practical advice
Removing the exterior mirror, fitting the emergency mirror (option)
M88_70-0002-01 M88_70-0004-01 M88_70-0003-01
Remove the upper protective cap Disconnect electrical plug connec- Unscrew securing screws (1.1) for
from the mirror arm. To do this, tion (2) from the plug. Pull retaining emergency mirror (1) and remove the
push in the two quick-release locks clip (7) outwards, twist through 30°. emergency mirror.
(1) and rotate through 90° (position Loosen clamp bolts (3) a few turns.
Fit the emergency mirror to the at-
transverse to the direction of travel). If lock (8) is installed (option) it must
tachment points on the mirror arm
be unlocked. Pull mirror head (4) for-
and tighten securing screws (10).
wards out of mirror arm (5).
Unscrew securing screws (10) from Danger.
mirror arm (5). Remove mirror arm
(5). Check the emergency mirror is securely
attached, adjust the emergency mirror.

Practical advice
Emergency operation for heating in driver's area
Emergency operation for heating in

Danger. driver's area
The exterior mirrors reduce the size of
images. Objects may actually be closer
than they seem.
M83_00-0098-01
Disconnect electrical connector (7.6)

M83_00-0176-01 with water control valve (7.1) discon-
Remove front service cover (1). To nected from the power
do this, unscrew securing screws (2). Pull emergency lever (7.7) in the dir-
ection of the arrow
Move emergency lever (7.7) towards
“A” = close valve, towards “B” =
open valve

Practical advice
Emergency operation of the passenger compartment heating
Emergency operation of the

Note: passenger compartment heating Caution:
An end stop can be felt which indicates Do not switch on the heating and water
that the respective limit position has been heater.
reached. During emergency operation,
it is not possible to regulate the outlet
temperature of the heating in the driver's
area electronically.
M83_00-0402-01
Operate feed manual shut-off valve

(3) M20_00-0052-01
Operate return manual shut-off valve

Note: (6.2)
If the heating, ventilation and air-condi-
tioning cannot be controlled (heating con-
Note:
trol valve leaking/heating in summer) and
if the heating system is leaking, the heat- Manual shut-off valve (6.2) is located in
ing system coolant circuit can be discon- the engine compartment under the engine
nected from the engine cooling coolant cooler fan drive.
circuit using the two manual shut-off
valves in heater supply line (3) and the
heater return.

Practical advice
Maintenance tasks on the bus air-conditioning system
Maintenance tasks on the bus air-

conditioning system Note: Note:
Cleaning/replacing the Recirculated-air filter cassettes (3) are To close, press plastic screws (1) (quick-
recirculated-air filters each secured by 4 plastic screws (quick- release locks) upwards slightly and turn
release locks). To open, press the screws them through 90° clockwise.
upwards slightly and turn them through
90° anti-clockwise.
Note:
Installation position: colouring (labelling)
facing up.
M83_00-0505-71
Switch the ignition starter switch to

OFF.
M83_00-0423-01
Cover seats and floor linings for pro- Clean or replace filter material (2)
tection. and fit recirculated-air filter cassettes
Remove left- and right-side (3).
recirculated-air filter cassettes (3).

Practical advice
Maintenance tasks on the bus air-conditioning system
Cleaning and replacing the fresh- Clean or replace the filters with new
air/recirculated-air filters ones.
Assembly in reverse order
Cleaning the fresh-air filter in the
driver's area
M83_00-0796-71
Lift the fresh-air filter mat up with

both hands (approximately 6 mm)
M83_00-0422-01
and then pull it out downwards and
Switch the ignition starter switch to towards you.
ON
Clean the fresh-air filter mat by beat-
Press button (7) on the HVAC control M83_00-0424-01 ing out the dust, vacuuming or blast-
panel and wait 10 seconds. ing with compressed air against the
Open the spare wheel flap at the
Switch the ignition starter switch to front of the bus (lever in the front intake direction and then refit it. Re-
OFF left doorway) place the filter mat if necessary.
Fold down the recirculated-air filter
cassettes on the left- and right-hand
side.
Remove all fresh-air/recirculated-air
filters (1) on the left- and right-hand
side.

Practical advice
Servicing scopes for the air-conditioning system
Servicing scopes for the air- Then check condenser fans (4.1) for
conditioning system Danger. correct operation: air drawn in the
opposite direction to the arrow (4.2)
Cleaning the condenser The condenser is accessible for cleaning
only from the roof. Secure the bus in
stationary position so that it cannot be Note:
Note: set in motion by an unauthorised person. A dirty condenser causes an increase in
Check and clean condenser (4) only with Secure against a fall from the roof (safety pressure in the refrigerant system and a
the engine and air-conditioning system belt, scaffold, ladder, etc.). safety switch response (high pressure).
switched off The cleaning interval depends on the
For normal levels of dirt, blow out length of operation and the load to which
the dust that has deposited in the the system is subjected.
fins with compressed air in the direc-
tion of arrow (4.2)
For stubborn dirt, spray into the fins
with a grease-dissolving substance
(cold cleaner), allow it to work and
then spray it off with water. Blow it
dry with compressed air in the direc-
tion of arrow (4.2)
Note:
M83_00-0105-01
Fully unscrew condenser fans (4.1) To prevent deformation of the fins, the
jet of air or water must always be direc-
ted perpendicular (90°) to the condenser
surface.

Practical advice
Carrying out the compressor ing compressor in operation” symbol Checking the oil level in the
maintenance program appears on the screen. The mainten- refrigerant compressor
ance program is ended automatically
after approximately 5 minutes and
the LED in Smog button (7) stops
flashing. The only way to interrupt
the program prematurely is to switch
off the engine (ignition starter switch
OFF).
Note:
The air-conditioning system must be op-
erated at least once a month (even in
M83_00-0117-01 the cold season) in order to maintain the M83_00-0832-71
leak-tightness of the slide ring seal on the
Press and hold A/C standby button Check the inspection glass on the re-
compressor crankshaft.
(6) and rocker switch (12) on the frigerant compressor when the com-
control panel simultaneously with the pressor is running (after approxim-
ignition starter switch OFF. Switch ately 10–15 minutes). The oil level
Note:
the ignition starter switch to ON and should be between the marks (min.
start the engine. Press and hold but- The maintenance program for the com- and max.).
pressor cannot be operated unless the
tons (6) and (12) until the LED in
outside temperature is above 0 °C and
Smog button (7) begins to flash and the coolant temperature (engine circuit) is
the LED in button (6) lights up. The above 50 °C.
air-conditioning system is switched
on after a delay of approximately
60 seconds, and the “Air-condition-

Practical advice
Checking the coolant level

Note: Note:
Refrigerator oil is circulated together with Note: Engine speed approximately 1,500 rpm.
the refrigerant in the entire refrigerant
system. For this reason, the oil level may The illustration shows the WEBASTO roof-
Check the refrigerant level in inspec-
differ with each check but must still be mounted system. In the KONVEKTA sys-
tem, the inspection glass is also located
tion glass (6) once the system has
between the min. and max. marks on been running for 15–20 minutes:
the inspection glass. Have the under- under the rear right service cover.
filled refrigerator oil topped up only by
the authorised specialists of an authorised Note:
EvoBus Service Partner. The refrigerant must be flowing in inspec-
tion glass (8) without any bubbles.
Note:
In order to guarantee the tightness of the Note:
piston ring seal on the compressor crank- Have the underfilled refrigerant topped up
shaft, the air-conditioning system must only by the authorised specialists of an
be operated once a month for approxim- EvoBus Service Partner.
ately 10 - 15 minutes by pressing Reheat
button (8) on the HVAC control panel. At
outside temperatures of below +5 °C, the M83_00-0409-01
procedure should be carried out indoors,
Open the rear right-hand service cov-
otherwise the system will be switched off
by the low-pressure switch or ice sensor.
er on the roof
Heat up the vehicle interior to
> 26 °C
Run the air-conditioning system

Practical advice
Cleaning the heating system water filter
Cleaning the heating system water Unscrew cover (1) from the coolant
filter Danger. filter (WAF 32) and remove filter ele-
ment (3) from filter housing (4).
Risk of scalding to skin and eyes from
hot coolant spraying out. Wear protective Clean filter element (3) in running
clothing (gloves/safety goggles). Risk of water.
poisoning if coolant is swallowed.
Close shut-off valve (4) upstream of Note:

the water filter and shut-off valve (6) If the filter element is heavily contamin-
in the heater supply line ated, it can be cleaned with compressed
air (maximum 5 bar).
Check the cleaned filter element for

damage.
Damaged filter elements must always be
replaced with new ones.
Insert filter element (3) into filter

M83_00-0719-72 housing (4) and screw on cover (1)
Switch off water heater (1) using the M20_00-0002-01 with a new O-ring (2).
battery isolating switch before remov- To isolate the water supply at the
ing water filter (3) water filter or drain the filter hous-
ing (approximately 1.5 litres), close
shut-off valve (5) on the coolant filter
(WAF 32).

Practical advice
Cleaning the heating system water filter
M20_00-0003-01 M20_00-0037-01
Reopen shut-off valve (5) on the Check the coolant level in the expan-
coolant filter (WAF 32). sion tank and top it up if necessary.
Note:
Position: A = open; B = closed
M83_00-0719-72
Reopen shut-off valve (4) upstream of

the water filter and shut-off valve (6)
in the heater supply line.

Practical advice
Bleeding the coolant circuit for the heating system
Bleeding the coolant circuit for the

heating system
Danger.
There is a risk of scalding to skin and
eyes from hot coolant spraying out. Wear
protective clothing (gloves/eye protec-
tion). Only open the filler cap for the
coolant expansion tank if the coolant tem-
perature is under 50 °C. Risk of poison-
ing if coolant is swallowed.
M20--00-0021-01 M83_00-0117-01
Slowly open radiator cap (1) to the Start the filling program. The filling
Note: first detent to relieve the excess program is started with the ignition
There is a filling program integrated in the
pressure. Turn to the second detent switch in the Off position. Press
heating, ventilation and air-conditioning and remove the cap. and hold smog button (7) and rocker
control panel. This program contains all switch (12) on the control panel sim-
the necessary functions (controlling the ultaneously. Turn the ignition switch
recirculation pumps and coolant valves) to the On position (level 2). Keep
for filling and bleeding the heating system smog button (7) and rocker switch
coolant circuit completely. (12) pressed until the LEDs in but-
tons 6, 7, 8, 11) light up. The LED in
the rocker switch (12) flashes.

Practical advice
Note: Danger.
The filling program is divided into If antifreeze with corrosion inhibitor is not
3 stages. You can switch to the next available, clean water may also be used
program stage using the rocker switch (drinking quality). The bus must be driv-
(12). An LED on the right-hand section en to the nearest EvoBus Service Partner
of the control panel goes out as each to have the corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze
program stage is completed. There is a concentration mixed to the specified ratio.
brief forced pause of 10 seconds between A/C standby for the heating/ventilation/
each stage. The pause lasts 6 minutes in air-conditioning must be disabled at the
stage 2. It is only possible to continue HVAC control panel (LED in the A/C but-
once the forced pauses have elapsed ton not lit) to prevent the air-conditioning
M20--00-0021-01
(LED in rocker switch (12) starts to flash). system from being switched on.
The engine must be running from program Program stage 1 (LEDs in buttons
stage 2, otherwise the program is 6, 7, 8, 11 light up, engine off): add
blocked and will not operate. In program coolant via filler cap (1) until the ex-
stages 2 and 3, set an elevated idling pansion tank is completely filled with
speed (approximately 750 rpm) using the coolant. Press rocker switch (12) on
retarder lever (refer to the retarder lever the control panel - the LED in button
operating instructions).
(6) goes out.
Note: Note:
The coolant level on the engine coolant Use clean and well filtered water with as
expansion tank must be checked and low a lime content as possible (drinking
coolant added if necessary during and water quality) mixed with corrosion inhib-
itor/antifreeze (comply with the Specifica- M83_00-0403-01
after each program stage.
tions for Service Products). Program stage 2 (bus engine running
at an elevated idling speed of approx-

Practical advice
imately 750 rpm, duration approxim-

ately 6 minutes): recirculation pumps Danger.
(2, 5) and auxiliary heating unit (1)
Risk of poisoning and suffocation. The
are switched on. Bleed the coolant auxiliary heating must not be used in en-
circuit and fill up the coolant expan- closed spaces such as garages or work-
sion tank completely with coolant. shops due to the risk of poisoning and
suffocation. It must also not be used in
Danger. timer or preselection mode.
Risk of injury. Take particular care around

hot, rotating and moving parts.
Danger.
M83_00-0117-01
Risk of fire. The auxiliary heating must
remain switched off in places where ignit- Press rocker switch (12) on the con-
Note:
able vapours or dust can accumulate (e.g. trol panel - the LED in button (8)
Risk of fire and burns. There is a risk of in the vicinity of filling stations, fuel, coal, goes out. Program stage 3 (engine
fires and burns due to the high exhaust sawdust and grain stores or similar). running at elevated idling speed of
approximately 750 rpm): the re-
do not stop or park the bus over ignitable circulation pumps and the auxiliary
materials (e.g. grass) when the auxiliary heating unit are switched on. Bleed
heating is in operation, has recently been the coolant circuit and fill up the
in operation or has been operated by the coolant expansion tank completely
immediate heating button/preset clock. with coolant.
Press rocker switch (12) on the con-
trol panel - the LEDs in buttons 7
and 11 go out and the filling program
is ended.

Practical advice
M20_00-0037-01
Read off the coolant level and fill up

to maximum mark (1.2).

Technical data
Table of contents
Vehicle data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596

Overview of bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597

Technical data
Vehicle data
Vehicle data Designation Value Designation Value

Designation Value
Turning circle (k to S 415 GT-HD: Angle of departure S 415 GT-HD:
Vehicle length S 415 GT-HD: k) 16,900 mm 8°
12,200 mm S 416 GT-HD: S 416 GT-HD:
S 416 GT-HD: 16,480 mm 8°
13,020 mm Turning circle (w to S 415 GT-HD: Total fuel tank S 415 GT-HD:
w) 21,070 mm volume approx. 445 l
Vehicle width 2,550 mm
S 416 GT-HD: S 416 GT-HD:
Vehicle height S 415 GT-HD: 20,680 mm approx. 460 l
Roof hatches 3,620 mm AdBlue additive S 415 GT-HD:
Front overhang S 415 GT-HD:
closed S 416 GT-HD: 2,820 mm tank volume approx. 59 l
3,620 mm S 416 GT-HD:
S 416 GT-HD:
Permissible gross S 415 GT-HD: 2,820 mm approx. 41 l
vehicle weight 18,000 kg
Rear overhang S 415 GT-HD:
S 416 GT-HD: 3,300 mm
24,000 kg S 416 GT-HD:
Wheelbase 1st-2nd S 415 GT-HD: 2,770 mm
axle 6,080 mm Angle of approach S 415 GT-HD:
S 416 GT-HD: 7°
6,080 mm S 416 GT-HD:
Wheelbase 2nd-3rd S 416 GT-HD: 7°
axle 1,350 mm

Technical data
Overview of bulbs
Overview of bulbs Designation Value Designation Value

Designation Value
Turn signals, rear Doorway lamps 24V 10W fes-
24V 21W BA15 yel-
Main-beam 24V 70W H1 lower toon
low
headlamps, front Driver's area light- 24V 10W halo-
Turn signals rear 24V 21W BA15
foglamps ing gen
upper, reversing
lamps, brake lamps,
Dipped-beam head- 24V 70W H7 Doorway lamp in 24V 20W halo-
rear foglamps
lamps the mirror gen with re-
flector
Brake lamps/tail
Litronic dipped- Gas discharge 24V 21/5W BA15 Lavatory lighting 24V 8W fluor-
lamps, upper
beam headlamps lamp D2S escent tube
(option) Lower tail lamps 24V 5W BA15 End outline marker 24V 4W
Clearance lamps, 24V 5W glass lamp (white/black
Licence plate lamps LED and white/red) (op-
front lower base
tion)
Side marker lamps LED
Clearance lamps, LED
front upper
Interior strip light- 24V 10W BA15
ing
Turn signals, front LED
lower
Reading lamps 24V 10W BA15
Turn signals, side 24V 21W BA15
mounted Luggage rack light- 24V 5W glass
ing base

Index
2 Attendant call system Batteries

230/400 V systems (option) Enable switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Recharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
Automatic headlamp feature . . . 122 Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . 523
A
Auxiliary batteries Battery compartment . . . . . . . . . 538
Acceleration skid control (ASR) . . 51
switching to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562 BlueTec exhaust gas cleaning
Accident data recorder (ADR)
Auxiliary heating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-36
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . 10-11 Bluetooth link . . . . . . . . . . . 175-176
Active Brake Assist . . . . . . 291-294
Auxiliary heating unit Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Activating (manually) . . . . . . . . . 287
Activating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321-322 Brake lamps
Activation/deactivation (automat-
ic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Activating a programmed Adaptive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
switch-on time . . . . . . . . . . 325-326 Brakes with anti-locking protec-
Deactivating (manually) . . . . 287-288
Deactivating an activated tion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
OFF pushbutton . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
switch-on time . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Braking and stopping . . . . . . . . . . 47
Special driving situations . . . 299-302
Programming switch-on Bulb table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597
Active Brake Assist (ABA)
times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323-324 Bus
System description . . . . . . . . . . 285
Programming the switch-on raising/lowering . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
AdBlue duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327-328 Bus stop brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Service product . . . . . . . . . . . 37-38 Auxiliary switch panel . . . . 532-533
Air suspension Activating/deactivating . . . . . . . 186
Axle load transfer Emergency release switch . . . . . . 87
Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . 182 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Air-conditioning system Operating the emergency
B release switch . . . . . . . . . 188, 511
Operating instructions . . . . . . . . 310
Ball hitch trailer coupling Pushbutton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Fixed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Index
C Coolant level of the engine and Night brightness . . . . . . . . . 163-164

Care and cleaning heating system Display screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Cleaning the underbody . . . . . 67-70 checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Covers and upholstery . . . . . . . . 74 Cornering lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Display screen menu control
Fabric covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Courtesy lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144-145
Leather covers . . . . . . . . . . . . 77-78 Setting the switch-on Distance cruise control
Light-alloy wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158-159 Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278-279
Micro-fibre covers . . . . . . . . . . 75-76 Cruise control Distance sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . 71-72 Activating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273-275 How to respond to a distance
CC pump warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
D
Greasing the impeller . . . . . . . . 448 Setting the specified
Daytime driving lights . . . . . . . . 123
Central locking distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280-281
switching on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Left-side luggage compart- Special driving situations . . . 299-302
Departure check
ment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88, 203 Vehicle ahead detected . . . . . . . 282
Daily tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Right-side luggage compart- Door pushbutton
Monthly tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
ment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88, 204 Door I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Weekly tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
System description . . . . . . . 348-350 Door II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Destination display
Centre aisle lighting Door 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96-97
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Door 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
DIAG
Changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . 568-575 Door pushbuttons in the driver's
Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Cinema-style seating area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Dimmer
Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Doors
Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162-164
Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . 222 Anti-entrapment protection
Display brightness
Compressed-air system (reversing) as the doors are
Daytime brightness . . . . . . . . . . 162 closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Charging, another bus . . . . . 509-510
Index
Emergency operation . 353, 576-577 Driver's power window . . . . . . . . 199 E

Protection against entrapment in Pushbutton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 EBS brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
the door opening direction . . . . 335 Driver's rest area . . . . . . . . 102-103 Electrical system
Drive belts (OM 457 LA) Switches/ Measures required for the
Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473-475 controllers . . . . . . 104-105, 330-331 prevention of damage . . . . . . . . 523
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470-472 Driver's rest area/kitchenette Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526-527
Drive belts (OM 502 LA) intercom Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . 522
Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478-479 outgoing calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476-477 Driver's seat Deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Driver's area Grammer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214-215 Function description . . . . . . . . 53-54
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 ISRI 6860/875 (option) . . . 216-217 OFF pushbutton . . . . . . . . . 87, 194
Switches on the left section of Driver's seat microphone System description . . . . . . . . . . . 52
the instrument panel . . . . . . . . 83-85 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Emergency mirror
Switches on the right section of Driver's window heating/mirror fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579-580
the instrument panel . . . . . . . . 86-88 heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Emergency valve reset . . . . . . . . 208
Driver's area heating Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Pushbutton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Emergency operation . . . . . . . . 581 Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Engine
Driver's area intercom Driving systems Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-23
Incoming calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Automatic speed limiter . . . . . . 268 Stopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
outgoing calls . . . . . . . . . . . 172-173 Distance cruise control (ART) Engine cooling system fan drive
Driver's area interior switch (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Emergency operation . . . . . . . . 480
panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528-529 Drive/brake cruise control . . . . 272 Engine oil level
Driver's area lighting . . . . . . . . . 195 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Checking with dipstick, OM
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Variable speed limiter (Temposet) 269 501/502 LA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Checking with the dipstick . . . . 468

Index
Engine oil level display . . . . . . . . 462 Ceiling switch panel . . . . . . 554-555 Control panel . . . . . 83, 85, 312-314
Event notifications . . . . . . . 146-148 Driver's area interior switch Electrical connection for the
Exterior flaps panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540-542 roof-mounted system . . . . . 536-537
Three-axle bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Konvekta roof-mounted system . 558 Filter maintenance . . . . . . . 583-584
Two-axle bus . . . . . . . . . . . 110-111 Main switch panel (under the Manually adjusting the blower
driver’s area) . . . . . . . . . . . 544-545 speed in the driver's area . . . . . 315
F Power distribution board Preselecting the passenger-
Fire extinguishers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 (PDB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550-552 compartment temperature . . 316-317
Fire extinguishing system Webasto roof-mounted Servicing scopes . . . . . . . . 585-587
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556-557 Setting the blower speed in the
First-aid kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Fuses passenger compartment . . . . . . 318
Fresh water tank Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559 Horn changeover . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Draining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
H
Filling inside the bus . . 368-369, 410
Hazard warning lamps . . . . . 87, 207 I
Filling outside the bus . . . . 370, 411
Headlamp cleaning system . . . . . 199 Identification plate . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Front foglamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Headlamp cleaning system OFF Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . 83, 121
Fuel prefilter
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
draining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Replacing the filter element . 514-515
Heating system coolant circuit Instrument cluster display screen
Fuel system
bleeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590-593 Operating, function and
bleeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Cleaning the water filter . . . 588-589 malfunction displays . . . . . . 455-461
Fuse assignment
Heating/ventilation/air-conditioning J
Auxiliary switch pan-
el (S 415/416 GT-HD Activating the air-conditioning . . 319 Jump seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
right-hand drive) . . . . . . . . . 546-548 Activating the reheat function . . 320

Index
Jump-starting Using the radio remote O

Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563 control (option) . . . . . . . . . 345-347 On-board diagnostics (OBD)
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564 Luggage compartment flaps Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565-566
Emergency unlocking . 354-355, 578 Clearing the fault memory . . . . . 567
L
M Ending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Lane assistant warning system
Main fuel filter Interpreting the screen display . . 567
Deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Changing (OM 457 LA) . . . . 516-517 On-board kitchenette
Pushbutton . . . . . . . . . . . . 87, 205
changing (OM 502 LA) . . . . 518-520 Boons kitchen . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Safety precautions . . . . . . . 303-304
Main menus . . . . . . . . . . . . 137-143 Checking and cleaning the
Lavatory
fresh water filter . . . . . . . . 370, 411
Checking the residual current Display screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Menu Enable switch . . . . . . . . . . . 85, 209
device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446-447
Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 First use . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366, 407
Enable switch . . . . . . . . . . . 85, 209
Mirror adjuster . . . . . . . . 88, 200-201 General information . . . . . 362, 406
Operation, maintenance . . . . . . 440
Mobile phone . . . . . . . . . . . 175-176 Malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . 396, 431
Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Incoming calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371, 412
Switchover between water (WC)
and chemical (CC) operation outgoing calls . . . . . . . . . . . 177-178 Replacing fuses . . 394-395, 428-430
(option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 Switching off . . . . . . . . . . 401, 436
N Switching on . . . . . . . 367, 408-409
Winter operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Night lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Winter operation . . . . . . . . 390, 423
Litronic headlamps
Normal level . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87, 200 Open-jaw trailer coupling and ball
Adjusting the headlamps for
Pushbutton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 hitch trailer coupling
driving on the left or right . . . . 45-46
Note symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... 4 Detachable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Locking
Door 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 Operating/malfunction displays
Door 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-61

Index
Central locking . . . . . . . . . . 351-352 Passenger stop request system Diesel fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-34
Distance cruise control . . . . . . . 284 Enable switch . . . . . . . . . . . 85, 198 Reset
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336-338 Passenger-compartment lighting 197 Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151-152
Fire extinguishing system . . 115-116 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Reverse warning buzzer . . . . . . . 205
Fuel system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-43 Permanent displays . . . . . . . . . . 134 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Lane assistant warning Pneumatic test ports Reversing aid in the exterior
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306-307 Axle modulator/door 2 . . . . . . . 506 mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100-101
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512 Behind door 2 . . . . . . . . . . 504-505 Reversing camera
Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Under the driver’s area . . . . 502-503 Washer system . . . . . . . . . . 88, 195
ZF-AS TRONIC transmission Positioning the jack . . . . . . . . . . 489 Roller sunblind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
shift system . . . . . . . . . . . . 244-247 Power distribution board Roof hatches
(PDB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534-535 Emergency operation . . . . . 356-357
P
Pushbutton . . . . . . . . . . . . 87, 197
PA system R Rotary light switch . . . . . . . . 88, 122
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Rain sensor Running-in guideline . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Panorama camera . . . . . . . 189-190 Setting the sensitivity . . . . . . . . 157
Parking brake Raising/lowering system S
Applying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Pushbutton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 School bus operation . . . . . . . . . 198
General information . . . . . . 83, 181 Raising/lowering the bus . . . . . . . 87 Seat belt
Releasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Reading lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Driver's seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Passenger compartment heating Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Jump seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Emergency operation . . . . . . . . 582 Rear foglamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Passenger-compartment seating 221
Passenger seat Refrigerator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Seat belt reminder display . . . . . 109
Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Refuelling Seat squab
AdBlue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-40 Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Index
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Steering wheel buttons . . . . . . . 132 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Service cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Transmission shift system
Service set above passenger right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83, 166 General safety precautions . . . . 228
seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224-225 Steering-oil reservoir Transmission shift system (GO 240-8
SET Checking the oil level . . . . . . . . 513 PowerShift)
Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Storage space for hand luggage . . . 9 Activating failsafe mode . . . . . . 161
Setting the language . . . . . 154-155 Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137-143 Failsafe mode operation . . . 262-264
Skibox Display screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251-261
fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63-64 Switch panel under the Selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Further operating instructions . . . 66 driver's area (main switch System description . . . . . . . . . . 248
swivelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530-531 Transmission shift system (PSH)
Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488 PSH (pneumatic shift aid) . . . . . 228
T
Spare mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Transmission shift system (ZF-
Tachograph AS TRONIC)
Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232-243
Speed limiter
DTCO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92-93 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Function description . . . . . . . . . 268
Tools and emergency equipment . 99
Steering Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . 229
Tow bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Important note . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 System description . . . . . . . . . . 231
Towing and tow-starting . . . . . 26-28 Trip meter
Steering column
Trailer coupling resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83, 121
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Turn signal buzzer
Steering column switch
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Adjusting the volume . . . . . . . . 156
Light and wiper functions . . 83, 125
Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Tyre pressures table
Retarder and cruise
Trailing axle axle load transfer 295/80 R 22.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83, 126-131
Activating/deactivating . . . . . . . 185

Index
Tyres Luggage compartment flaps using Windscreen heating . . . . . . . . . . 202

Flat tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487 the remote control (option) . . . . 342 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Inflating using the tyre Upper windscreen wiper . . . . . . . 194 Windscreen washer reservoir 106-107
inflator connection . . . . . . . 507-508 Windscreen wiper system
V
Invisible tyre damage . . . . . . . . 484 Safety precautions . . . . . . . ..... 9
Variable speed limiter (Temposet)
Operating safety and roadworthi- Wipe interval
ness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482 Activating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269-271
setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Vehicle data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
Retreaded tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Volume adjustment . . . . . . . . . . 167
Tyre age . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Driver's area on-board PA system 169
Tyre condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Driver's rest area/on-board
Tyre load capacity, top speed of
kitchenette intercom . . . . . . . . . 170
tyres and types of tyres . . . . . . 485
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Tyre tread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
W
U
Water heater fuel filter
Unlocking
changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Door circuit at the front left door 339
Wheel trims
Door circuit using the radio
remote control (option) . . . . . . . 341 Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499-500
Door 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Wheels
Luggage compartment flaps using
the pushbuttons in the driver's Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497-498
area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491-496

Setra 400 Class - 415 416 Euro 5 Manual

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Setra 400 Class - 415 416 Euro 5 Manual

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

04.

2012 EvoBus GmbH

Not to be reprinted, reproduced or translated in any form without prior permission.

Address for orders:

Order no.: A 632 584 50 83

Windscreen wiper system safety Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

S 415/416 GT-HD right-hand drive (model revision)/04.2012 GB I

II S 415/416 GT-HD right-hand drive (model revision)/04.2012 GB

DIAG button (on-board dia- Adjusting the volume of the in-

S 415/416 GT-HD right-hand drive (model revision)/04.2012 GB III

IV S 415/416 GT-HD right-hand drive (model revision)/04.2012 GB

S 415/416 GT-HD right-hand drive (model revision)/04.2012 GB V

VI S 415/416 GT-HD right-hand drive (model revision)/04.2012 GB

S 415/416 GT-HD right-hand drive (model revision)/04.2012 GB VII

VIII S 415/416 GT-HD right-hand drive (model revision)/04.2012 GB

X S 415/416 GT-HD right-hand drive (model revision)/04.2012 GB

Emergency unlocking of the luggage

Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595

S 415/416 GT-HD right-hand drive (model revision)/04.2012 GB XI

XII S 415/416 GT-HD right-hand drive (model revision)/04.2012 GB

No. Designation Value

Identification plate (1) is located in the S 415 GT-HD

S 415/416 GT-HD right-hand drive (model revision)/04.2012 GB 1

Vehicle identification number (1) is also

2 S 415/416 GT-HD right-hand drive (model revision)/04.2012 GB

The use of symbols and their meanings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

S 415/416 GT-HD right-hand drive (model revision)/04.2012 GB 3

The use of symbols and their Notes on vehicle safety

4 S 415/416 GT-HD right-hand drive (model revision)/04.2012 GB

Operating safety Materials and components in EU Directive 2001/85

S 415/416 GT-HD right-hand drive (model revision)/04.2012 GB 5

6 S 415/416 GT-HD right-hand drive (model revision)/04.2012 GB

Operation of the radio and mobile Operation of mobile phones and

S 415/416 GT-HD right-hand drive (model revision)/04.2012 GB 7

8 S 415/416 GT-HD right-hand drive (model revision)/04.2012 GB

The storage spaces above the passenger M54_00-1058-71

seats are suitable for light hand luggage

S 415/416 GT-HD right-hand drive (model revision)/04.2012 GB 9

10 S 415/416 GT-HD right-hand drive (model revision)/04.2012 GB

S 415/416 GT-HD right-hand drive (model revision)/04.2012 GB 11

Preparation for the journey - daily tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

S 415/416 GT-HD right-hand drive (model revision)/04.2012 GB 13

14 S 415/416 GT-HD right-hand drive (model revision)/04.2012 GB

S 415/416 GT-HD right-hand drive (model revision)/04.2012 GB 15

16 S 415/416 GT-HD right-hand drive (model revision)/04.2012 GB

Care and cleaning

S 415/416 GT-HD right-hand drive (model revision)/04.2012 GB 17

S 415/416 GT-HD right-hand drive (model revision)/04.2012 GB 19

Operating/malfunction displays: fuel system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

20 S 415/416 GT-HD right-hand drive (model revision)/04.2012 GB

Operating/malfunction displays: brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

S 415/416 GT-HD right-hand drive (model revision)/04.2012 GB 21

22 S 415/416 GT-HD right-hand drive (model revision)/04.2012 GB

Release the key when the engine

If this icon appears on the screen in Caution:

S 415/416 GT-HD right-hand drive (model revision)/04.2012 GB 23

24 S 415/416 GT-HD right-hand drive (model revision)/04.2012 GB

Stopping the engine

Observe the rev counter while driv-

S 415/416 GT-HD right-hand drive (model revision)/04.2012 GB 25

Towing and tow-starting

26 S 415/416 GT-HD right-hand drive (model revision)/04.2012 GB

Removing the front panel Front/rear towing hitch:

S 415/416 GT-HD right-hand drive (model revision)/04.2012 GB 27